Last Stand

Empire Rising Book 12

D. J. Holmes

https://www.facebook.com/Author.D.J.Holmes

d.j.holmess@hotmail.com

Comments welcome!

This is a work of fiction. Names, characters, places, and incidents either are the product of the author’s imagination or are used fictitiously and any resemblance to any persons living or dead, business establishments, events or locales are entirely coincidental.

Copyright © D. J. Holmes 2021

Prologue

Imperial Palace, Earth, 1st June 2484 AD (2 weeks before the battle of New Shanghai).

Empress Christine paced back and forth in her private office. Orbital Command had contacted her half an hour ago to say a packet ship had entered the Sol system. It was one of the ships assigned to her husband’s fleet. She knew it would have a message for her. She was desperate for news from the front. All she could think about was the massive Karacknid battlefleet bearing down on New Shanghai and James and his fleet. Finally, a beep from her datapad told her the files transmitted by the packet ship had reached the Imperial Palace and been transferred to her office. Slowly, almost against her will, she tapped on the datapad and brought it up. Taking a deep breath, she began to read.

Christine, I believe the Karacknids are making final preparations to attack New Shanghai’s defenses. We cannot delay them any longer. No significant reinforcements will arrive in time to relieve us. We must fight this out with what forces we have. There is no other choice. This is the best chance we have. Yet, you know the odds we face as well as I. Please, if things go against us, heed the advice Ya’sia gave me. I know you have had time to read the evacuation plans she shared with me. If we lose this battle, Alliance High Command will put their plans into motion. You must do so as well. Flee Earth. Get as far away from the Karacknids as you can. Join the Alliance in starting again somewhere else. I know you will want to stay. You will see it as your duty. But that is a mistake. If the Karacknids win here, then none of our colonies will be able to stand. Nothing will stop the Karacknids conquering the Alliance and this sector of space. The only hope for our species is for some of us to run with what technologies and ships we have. With enough space and time our species can start again, we can better prepare to face the Karacknids. If such an endeavor is to have any chance of success, it needs good leadership. Our species has just been united for the first time in our history. It’s the duty of our Empress to keep this unity and lead our people. You must think of Jonathan. He is so young, so helpless. He deserves a chance to have a life. To grow up. If I cannot be there for him. You must. Please do this for our Empire and for our son. Know that I will do all that I can for you both here. You are always in my thoughts.

I love you, now and always, James.

Tears streamed down Christine’s cheeks. The message from her husband was three weeks old. If it hadn’t already, she knew what was soon to happen. The Karacknid battlefleet would move in, besiege the planet and destroy all of New Shanghai’s defenses. Her tears were for her husband and her people. She knew James wouldn’t retreat, not when he was Earth’s last line of defense. If New Shanghai had already fallen, he was probably dead, along with tens of thousands of the colony’s civilians. Worse than either loss, though it hurt Christine to admit it, her tears were also for what she knew would come next. It would likely only be weeks before the enemy battlefleet reached the Sol system. Then everything she and James had sought to build for their people and their son would be destroyed.

Guiltily she glanced at the section of James’ letter that mentioned the Varanni Alliance sending evacuation ships far away from Karacknid space if it looked like the war was going to be lost. Since hearing about the plan her Chief of Staff had insisted they make similar preparations. As much as she hated the idea, she knew the time had come. Wiping her cheeks, she glanced at Jonathan, he was napping in his crib in her office. Everything within her wanted to take him and run from the Karacknids. Even if he grew up never remembering his homeworld, if she ran, he would be safe. It would be up to his offspring to rebuild somewhere else and prepare to fight the Karacknids on more equal terms. Yet how could she just abandon Earth? How could she run with her son when billions of others could not? Billions who had put their trust in her. A fresh sense of guilt washed over her. She was caught. Two powerful forces were pulling at her. She had a duty to lead her Empire and its defense of Humanity’s homeworld to the last. But she also had a son. A son who meant the world to her.

A fresh tear ran down her cheek when she considered the only compromise that came to her. She could send Jonathan away with the evacuation ship. His maids could look after him. The thought of doing anything like that broke Christine’s heart. She couldn’t even bring herself to look at Jonathan again. She would be abandoning him, making him an orphan. But how could she live with herself if she ran? What would he think when he grew up and found out she abandoned her duty for him?

Angrily, she shook her head as she clenched her hands into fists. If Jonathan hadn’t been asleep, she would have smashed her office desk. She was in an impossible position! A beep from her office’s COM unit drew her hands up to her face. She wiped away her tears and tapped the unit to stop its beeping. She didn’t want Jonathan woken up. Thankfully, the officer who was on the other end of the channel knew to speak quietly.

“I’m sorry to disturb you Empress, but Commodore Mandow asked me to contact you immediately. A new group of ships has just jumped into the system. They are not friendlies.”

Christine’s heart leapt into her mouth. Surely the Karacknid battlefleet hadn’t made it to the Sol system so quickly! “How many?” she asked tentatively, afraid of the answer.

“One hundred and forty,” the officer replied. “Mandow is asking that you join him in the C&C room as soon as you can. He is liaising with Rear Admiral Sanders.”

Christine let out a breath she hadn’t realized she had been holding. It wasn’t the Karacknid battlefleet, at least, it was nothing more than its lead elements. Now that she had a few more moments to think about it, her initial fear was illogical. There was no way the Karacknid battlefleet could have reached Earth so quickly. But a raiding force! Christine thought. That made sense. With all but a handful of Earth’s warships at New Shanghai, it would have been easy for the Karacknid commander to dispatch raiding squadrons to operate behind the frontlines. James would have sent a warning, was Christine’s next thought. Which means they never made it back to us.

As another thought entered her mind, she turned to Jonathan again. Her tears threatened to return. As long as the Karacknid squadron was operating in the system, there was no way she could launch the evacuation ships. She wouldn’t have to make the impossible decision yet. If it even matters now, she feared. One hundred ships was a small force. But with the vast majority of Earth’s defenses towed off to the New Shanghai system, Humanity’s homeworld was vulnerable. Which is why Mandow and Sanders need me right away. With a tap on her COM unit, she called for Jonathan’s maids. Then she stood and prepared to head to the C&C room. Even without implementing the evacuation plans Fairfax had drawn up, she was going to have to make a handful of impossible decisions. There weren’t enough forces in the Sol system to protect everything. She was about to be asked to decide who lived and who died.

Chapter 1

In the span of the Empire’s existence, many Human colonies have been devastated by the ravages of war. Thankfully in the War of Doom only a handful suffered such a fate. Yet those that did still bear the scars today.

-Excerpt from Empire Rising, 3002 AD.

Bozhou, New Shanghai, 13th June 2484 AD

Several thousand warships from the Karacknid battlefleet settled into orbit around New Shanghai. They joined the troop ships already there and spread out to surround the planet. Together they activated their sensor jammers. In his command bunker, Acting General Johnston’s view of the retreating Allied fleet winked out. Now we are truly on our own, he thought. The Allied fleet had been beaten and driven away from the orbitals, but now he had no way of communicating with them or even seeing when they jumped out of the system. The battle for the New Shanghai system was over. The battle for the planet itself was about to begin.

Turning from the secondary holo display, Johnston gazed at the 3D map that dominated his command bunker. It showed Bozhou and the surrounding towns and villages. The first wave of Karacknid ground troops had already secured all but two of the towns. Intense fighting was still going on in the other two, but they would fall within minutes. The bulk of his marines and colonial militia were holding positions within Bozhou itself to prevent the Karacknids from landing on the outskirts of the city and taking it in the opening stage of their invasion. Now, Johnston had his mobile elements moving towards the captured towns. He was certain that once the Karacknids had Bozhou surrounded, they would move on New Shanghai’s capital and attempt to seize it. With the city hugging one of New Shanghai’s oceans, only two thirds of its outer edges faced the captured towns. There was only a single cone of countryside the Karacknids could push in from. Johnston intended to make them pay a heavy price for every inch of ground they took.

“Our scouts are reporting Karacknid forces moving out from the towns they have secured,” an intelligence officer informed Johnston. “The formation sizes don’t look to be any larger than platoons.”

“Show me their projected directions,” Johnston requested. Moments later small arrows appeared, moving away from four of the nearby towns on the large 3D map. Each was headed roughly in the direction of one of the adaptive dampeners his forces had set up. “They’re going for the dampeners,” he informed his staff. “Now that the battlefleet is in orbit, they want a clear view of the surface.” The Marines’ adaptive dampeners prevented ships in orbit from detecting what was happening on a planet’s surface. With them in place, Johnston’s forces could move around in the open without fearing orbital bombardment. At least, an accurate one in any case. As soon as the Karacknids located the dampeners and took them out, the area the dampener had covered would be a no-go zone for Johnston’s forces. Each of the dampeners on the far side of the towns that faced away from Bozhou were only defended by a squad or two of marines. He had been unable to spare any more forces. Without any way to warn the marines, Johnston took a second to consider their fate and then moved on. Their commanders would already be able to guess what was coming their way.

Johnston focused on another group of arrows that appeared on the 3D map less than a minute later. These were headed towards Bozhou. This time they were coming from all six of the nearby towns. The final two towns had fallen to the Karacknids. “This is it,” Johnston said to his command staff. “Move fourteenth platoon forward to Hill forty-three,” he ordered after watching the Karacknids for a few moments. He had six dampeners covering the countryside between the towns the Karacknids controlled and Bozhou. The Karacknids had small forces moving in the general direction of each one. Certain that they would have been the Karacknids’ first targets, Johnston already had significant forces in place to defend them. Yet the Karacknids would be determined to capture the positions.

Johnston watched the audio and visual reports that came in as fighting broke out. The platoon protecting the nearest dampeners to his command bunker was able to send back their progress in real time. As the skirmish unfolded, Johnston felt his fingers twitch as he imagined himself in the marines’ position. Thirty Karacknids appeared as they passed through a thin grove of alien trees. As they approached a single farmhouse at the bottom of a valley, a squad of marines opened up on them. Two Karacknids fell before the rest ran for cover. Return fire then began to rip the farmhouse apart. It had never been built to withstand laser rifle beams. The fire from the marines quickly withered and disappeared altogether. That was the Karacknids’ cue, rising to their feet, they charged the building. Just at that moment the platoon of marines that Johnston had moved up to Hill forty-three pounced. Two hypervelocity missiles streaked in from the hill that overlooked the farmhouse. Two concussive blasts and then a wave of fire and soil struck the Karacknids. Even before the missiles had hit home, the forty marines of the platoon charged. Hundreds of plasma bolts peppered the Karacknids as those that hadn’t already been blown off their feet dove for cover. At that moment, the marines in the farmhouse opened up. Caught in a crossfire, the Karacknids were forced to keep their heads down. It allowed the marines of fourteenth platoon to get close enough to lob plasma and concussion grenades towards the Karacknids. As the grenades exploded, the marines closed in for the kill. Methodically they worked through the Karacknids’ positions, taking out every enemy they came across. Counter fire from the Karacknids cut down six marines but then the brief skirmish was over. Johnston watched for another few seconds as the injured marines were helped up by their comrades and then the whole platoon fell back up Hill forty-three and down the other side.

Turning his attention to the wider battlefield, Johnston saw that each of the Karacknid probing forces had been turned back. Some of the platoons had suffered heavier losses, but they had all held their ground. Now they know we’ve moved forces out from the city, Johnston thought. The enemy commander couldn’t know just how many mobile forces Johnston had, but he’d have to assume Johnston was prepared to put up a fight. It wasn’t hard to predict what would come next. The Karacknids would take some time and prepare their ground troops. Then they’d move out in much larger formations. “Send word to all our ground commanders, they can engage at will as the enemy enters their zone of operation,” Johnston ordered. After the Karacknids had made their initial landing, he had moved all of his tanks and heavy weaponry into the countryside surrounding Bozhou. They would be no use to him within the city and he could bleed the Karacknids as they approached. Instinctively, Johnston glanced at the ceiling of his command bunker. Sooner or later the Karacknids would bombard the area around Bozhou for a second time. Even if they couldn’t detect exactly where his forces were, they’d likely have no reservations about carrying out a blanket bombardment. He had his forces spread out as thinly as he could, but there was no way to fully protect them.

Quicker than he expected, Johnston saw new formation markers pop up on the holo map. Karacknid division sized formations were moving out of the towns they had secured. Reports came in of a third wave of ground troops being landed behind the towns as well. The real fighting was about to begin.

*

Lieutenant General Pershing jumped out of his command APC with his command staff. They moved a couple of hundred meters away from it and took up positions just below the brow of a hill. The APC was too big a target to stay near. He knew he should be back in Bozhou commanding his division from the relative safety of the city. Yet he needed to get a feel for the battleground. Falling to his knees, he slowly moved up to the top of the hill. His combat armor had already adapted to blend in with the tall grass that reached up over his shoulders. As he peeked over the hill, he looked down across several valleys towards the town of Hongshu. It was one of two within his sector that the Karacknids had taken. Approximately forty thousand Karacknid troops had been landed in and around both. Facing off against them he had one division of marines. Yet half of his force of eight thousand were still in Bozhou or defending the line of retreat back to the city. That left him with a force outnumbered ten to one to oppose the Karacknids’ advance.

A steady stream of shuttles took off and landed. The Karacknids were receiving continuous reinforcements. With only a small number of SAMs left to his division, he needed them to protect his forces. To his rear, hidden within several thick forests or behind deep ridges, Pershing had a number of artillery pieces and Centurion tanks. He was sorely tempted to order them to bombard the Karacknid positions. No doubt their counter fire would take out his units in less than a minute, but in that time his forces could get off a lot of shells and missiles. He couldn’t, however. Even though both towns looked like they had been battered beyond recognition, there would still be a great many civilians left within them. The Karacknids were using them as shields for their landing operations. Letting his eyes pass over the two towns, Pershing studied the terrain. He had already memorized all of the features on the 3D map within his APC, but he needed to see it in person. At several points small plumes of smoke were rising into the air where his forward squads had ambushed the Karacknids’ probing forces. Taking in each valley, river, hill and forest, Pershing tried to imagine how the Karacknid forces would advance. He had two key positions to defend. About two miles in front of him, in the middle of one of the largest forests in his area of operation, was one of the adaptive dampeners that was blocking any ships in orbit from detecting what was going on. Over his right shoulder, six miles closer to Bozhou, was the second one. The Karacknids wouldn’t know exactly where each dampener was, but they’d be able to guess within a radius of several miles. That meant the forest he was staring at would soon become the focus of their attention.

“We’ve got movement from the towns,” one of Pershing’s Lieutenants pointed out, unable to hide the nervousness in his voice.

Pershing used his combat armor’s enhanced vision to zoom in and saw that the Karacknids were indeed beginning to move. It looked like four groups of armored vehicles, two from each town, were beginning to advance. Each vehicle was flanked by a couple of squads of soldiers. Behind the lead elements he could see a battalion of heavy tanks and a far denser formation of soldiers forming up in each town. A swarm of shuttles took off and hovered above the towns, waiting for targets to be identified so they could swoop in and strike.

“Should we head back to the APC general?” his COMs Lieutenant asked.

Pershing glanced back at the vehicle. He shook his head. “No. We will only be a bigger target. We’ll fight the first stages of the battle from here. Set up an FOB at the base of the hill. I’m staying here to see how things play out.”

“Yes Sir,” the Lieutenant replied. Pershing caught the glance she shared with his other officers. He let it slide. He knew none of them had seen combat before. They had probably thought they’d be able to ride out the first phases of the battle in the relative safety of a command bunker. Turning back to the open countryside between him and the Karacknid formations, he sat down so that just the top of his combat armor’s helmet poked over the hill. He’d have to trust its active and passive stealth capabilities. With so much fighting about to begin, it was unlikely Karacknid sensors would identify him or his command staff if they weren’t actively engaging the aliens. At least for a short period.

As many of the Karacknid probing forces disappeared as they moved behind hills or entered forests, Pershing focused on those he could still see. It was only a matter of time. The tell-tale plumes of five hypervelocity missiles streaked towards two of the Karacknid combat vehicles. A marine analyst somewhere had dubbed them armored turrets. Though it wasn’t especially imaginative, it was accurate. The small armored vehicles didn’t carry too many offensive weapons, but they bristled with defenses. They usually accompanied Karacknid soldiers who were operating out in the open. The armored turrets would defend the Karacknids while the soldiers did most of the heavy fighting. The two currently under attack managed to take out four hypervelocity missiles. The fifth struck one of them, blowing it to pieces. An intense firefight broke out as three squads of marines engaged the sixty Karacknid soldiers accompanying the armored turrets. The fight lasted no more than two minutes before the Marines fell back. Their fire slackened and disappeared as they disengaged. Pershing could see two other groups of Karacknids moving to flank the marines, they had pulled back just in time.

From the plumes of smoke and energy readings his combat armor was detecting all across the frontline, Pershing knew that his other forward elements had engaged the Karacknids. In every instance his forces would strike the Karacknids and then fall back. The idea was to bloody them, not stop their advance. At least not yet, Pershing thought as he lifted his eyes to the heavier formations that were moving out of the two towns. Retreating down his hill, he joined the officers of his command staff. They had set up two small camouflage tents. Pushing his way into one, he assessed the 3D holo map of the battlefield. It was receiving and analyzing all the contact intel being sent in from his marines on the frontline.

It didn’t take long to figure out what the Karacknids were doing. They had over twenty groups of armored turrets and foot soldiers fanning out from the two towns. They were securing key high points and river crossings. Clearing the way for their larger formations, Pershing mused. And probing my defenses. He was certain that as soon as the Karacknid commanders located his main defensive positions, they would hurl their battle tanks and armored shuttles at him.

As the Karacknids advanced, more intense firefights broke out as the forward squads of marines fell back and regrouped with their comrades. Pershing had deployed his forces in the expectation that the Karacknids would push towards the adaptive dampeners. Specifically, the one nearest the easternmost of the two towns the Karacknids were attacking from seemed to have drawn their attention. It was the one closest to the front lines. Pershing had fifteen hundred marines arrayed around it. All of the forward platoons in that sector were already engaged.

“It’s time to show them a little of our strength,” Pershing decided. “Inform Major Wittman he can engage with one of his tank platoons.”

“Yes General,” one of his Lieutenants replied.

Seconds later the view from the tank platoon’s command tank appeared on a secondary holo display. The platoon’s five tanks had been hidden in the middle of a dense forest. A path had been carefully cleared for them to advance and retreat. Without any difficulty the tank trundled forward. It stopped sixty meters from the edge of the forest. Due to the sloping terrain, it was looking down a long valley towards the eastern town. Two miles directly below it a pair of Karacknid armored turrets and foot soldiers were moving up the valley. Behind them Karacknid battle tanks and several platoons of soldiers were entering the valley. The tank paused for several seconds. Pershing guessed its commander was picking targets for his gunner and the other tanks in the platoon. Then the tanks opened fire. Firing a twenty pound stealth shell at Mach ten, the Centurion battle tanks packed a real punch. From its vertical launcher the tank also rippled off six hypervelocity missiles that rose into the sky and then curved towards their targets.

The Karacknids’ armored turrets detected the incoming shells and fired sixty laser beams. Three of the shells were taken out. By chance, the two that remained each struck one of the armored turrets. Their destruction left the platoon of Karacknid foot soldiers unprotected. Hypervelocity missiles rained down on them, killing most of them. The tank commander had already switched targets. In rapid succession the Centurion battle tanks fired six more shells. Each one raced towards the Karacknid battle tanks further down the valley. Explosions erupted amongst the Karacknid formation. Another spread of hypervelocity missiles added to the carnage. Before the tank’s sensors could determine how much damage had been done, the trees closed in around the tank again. Its driver had put the tank into full reverse.

Pulling up another feed of the battle, Pershing could see the forest his tanks were pulling back from. A tidal wave of enemy fire came crashing into it. The Karacknid forces in the valley were lobing every weapon they had towards the forest. One and then two of the sensor blips representing tanks disappeared; damaged or destroyed. Then the three remaining tanks burst out of the forest. Spinning in place, they turned towards Bozhou and raced away as quickly as they could. Behind them, the Karacknid battle tanks and armored turrets broke away from the foot soldiers as they gave chase. Armored shuttles swooped towards the battle tanks. Now out in the open, they were sitting ducks.

That was, except for their own anti-air weapons. Even as the shuttles fired missiles at the Centurions, the Centurions responded in kind. Point defense weapons from both groups of combatants took out a number of the missiles. Still, one battle tank blew up as a Karacknid weapon blasted through its armor. Seconds later a shuttle crashed in a giant fireball. As the shuttles raced over the top of the last two battle tanks, more SAMs lifted off from deeper within the marines’ defenses. Another shuttle fell before the rest wheeled and retreated.

Either out of overconfidence or because they didn’t sense the danger, the Karacknid tanks and armored turrets charged headlong after the two remaining Centurions. Cresting the hill of the valley the attack had begun in, they charged down the other side. Minutes before they reached the valley floor, a volley of over twenty hypervelocity missiles exploded in their midst. Three platoons of marines had been hiding in the valley waiting for just such an opportunity. The two Centurions stopped, swung their main guns around and hurled shell after shell at the Karacknids.

Suddenly finding themselves surrounded by targets, the Karacknid forces opened fire. Heavy laser beams tore through the valley. The marines, with their hypervelocity missiles spent, charged out of cover to close with the enemy tanks. Hurling chaff and ECM grenades, they clouded the enemy tank sensors as much as they could. Then they peppered the tanks with plasma rifle fire. On their own, the small plasma bolts were nowhere near powerful enough to burn through the enemy’s armor. But as hundreds struck the tanks, they caused some damage. This was just a distraction. The real danger came from the handful of marines who were carrying plasma mines. Charging through the fire, they only stopped when they got close enough to hurl their mines at the tanks. As soon as the mines detected the large metallic objects, they detonated. More than half of the remaining enemy tanks disappeared as they were engulfed by giant balls of plasma.

Just as it looked like the final few Karacknid tanks and armored turrets would be finished off, a new wave of fire crashed into the marines. The Karacknid foot soldiers had crested the hill and begun to rain down weapons fire. Pershing opened his mouth to order the marines to retreat, but he cut himself off. The platoon commanders didn’t need him micromanaging the engagement. At the sight of the Karacknid reinforcements, the marines pulled back. Half their number remained in position to lay down covering fire whilst the rest fell back to predetermined firing lines. Once in position, they provided covering fire for the rest of their force to retreat. In their midst, the single remaining Centurion battle tank reversed out of the valley at full speed. Its main cannon and point defense laser turrets were firing continuously. As the marines moved out of the valley the fighting eased off and disappeared. The Karacknids were content to lick their wounds and reorganize before pushing forward again.

All right, Pershing thought, as he assessed the rest of the battlefield. A handful of other more serious engagements had broken out or were ongoing as the advancing Karacknids encountered stiff defenses. All along the line, the forward marine platoons were falling back. On the holo map they were all streaming towards a long line marked out in red. It was the first proper defensive line Pershing had prepared. In just minutes the Karacknids would come up against it. For the first time they were about to encounter marines that didn’t have orders to retreat so easily.

Chapter 2

Many tens of thousands of marines died fighting against the Karacknids throughout the War of Doom. It was hoped that after the war their losses would be over. However, what was to come would dwarf even the largest battles in the war of the Empire’s founding.

-Excerpt from Empire Rising, 3002 AD.

“The lead Karacknid forces will come into contact with fourteenth battalion in less than a minute General,” one of Pershing’s staff officers reported.

“Make sure Colonel Malhorn has his weapons ready. Four seconds and then I want his guns out of there,” Pershing replied without turning away from the 3D map. Across a front line of approximately fourteen kilometers the main force of Karacknids was pushing towards the adaptive dampener. Sixty tanks and more than a hundred other armored vehicles were accompanied by at least six thousand Karacknid soldiers as they carefully advanced. Opposing them he had one tank company and a thousand marines.

The next stage of the battle began as Karacknid scouts came up against Pershing’s defensive line and were engaged. Though they fell back, other squads pushed forward along different lines of attack as they sought to outflank the defenders. When they too came up against fortified positions more Karacknid squads were sent forward. The enemy commander was probing the length and strength of the force he had discovered. For several minutes a handful of firefights continued up and down the defensive line. Then they all ceased. Pershing didn’t need to warn his troops to be ready, they knew what to expect.

The first sign of the Karacknids’ heavier offensive was the speeding shapes of their attack shuttles. Twenty of them raced low across the countryside towards the marines’ defensive line. At the last moment they pulled up and released volleys of missiles. SAMs were launched in reply. Both sides suffered losses. Before the dust settled, Karacknid battle tanks came charging into the open. Foot soldiers swarmed all around them. Pershing was impressed by their bravery. As his marines opened fire, giving away their positions, all hell broke loose. The combined fire from the marines and Karacknids turned the snaking fourteen-kilometer frontline into one long trail of flames. Within seconds the data being relayed to Pershing’s staff officers became garbled and confused. There was no way to tell for sure how the battle was going.

With the 3D map in his command tent useless to him, Pershing turned to one of the secondary holo displays. It showed a live feed from one of his platoon commanders. Though missiles and laser beams were exploding all around her, the marine still had her head above cover as she swept her plasma rifle back and forth across the advancing Karacknids. The view momentarily turned to one of the ground as the Major ducked to avoid a nearby explosion. Then, as she stood, her arm appeared as she hurled a grenade towards the enemy. They were getting close. Pershing watched as a hypervelocity missile whizzed over the Major’s head and blew up a nearby battle tank. Seemingly oblivious to the tank’s demise, the Major took out two more Karacknids that were almost on top of her. Then the image went dark. Pershing swung round to one of his Lieutenants. Before he could ask the question, the Lieutenant was already shaking his head. “We lost contact with Major Gonzalez.”

Pershing swore. It looked like the Major’s platoon was about to be overrun. “Give me another feed from that platoon,” he ordered. As a new feed appeared, he was amazed by what he saw. The Karacknids were falling back! Several battle tanks were billowing smoke. The Karacknid foot soldiers hurled grenades over their backs as they ran. They exploded and released a thick smoke that hid the Karacknids from the marines’ fire. Turning his attention to the 3D map, Pershing could see that intense fighting was still going on in several sectors. Over the next several minutes it too died down as the Karacknids retreated. As more detailed reports came in it became clear that the attack had breached his defensive line in several places. Yet reserve platoons had moved in and plugged the gaps. The line had held. Which means you need to bring up more forces, Pershing thought towards his opponent. In the several set piece engagements that had been fought against the Karacknid ground forces that had invaded Holstein, not once had the marines come across enemy artillery. The Karacknids seem to prefer to rely on armored shuttles and orbital bombardment to soften up the opponents. That would work fine except for the adaptive dampeners the Marines utilized. With their warships unable to join in the fight, at least not accurately, the Karacknids were lacking what Human ground forces considered to be a necessary weapon of war. Pershing was not so limited.

“It looks like they’re forming up again,” a Lieutenant reported three minutes later.

When Pershing glanced at several sensor feeds, Karacknid forces could be seen gathering in the distance. Pershing turned to his COM officer. “Inform Colonel Malhorn he may open fire.” Pershing didn’t need to wait for a confirmation, the booms that echoed through the valley to his command tent was confirmation enough. Colonel Malhorn’s artillery battalion consisted of thirty Rhineland howitzers. Each could fire an eighty pound shell every 0.3 seconds. In the space of four seconds they fired thirteen shells each. They arced several miles up into the planet’s atmosphere before descending. The first round of shells exploded two kilometers from New Shanghai’s surface, just as the Karacknid defensive weapons detected them. Each shell released an intense electromagnetic wave towards the Karacknid forces. Half a kilometer lower, the second round of shells detonated. They filled the sky with chaff particles that hurtled towards the surface, further disrupting Karacknid targeting computers. The remaining shells raced towards the ground. Each exploded just two hundred meters above the heads of the Karacknids, releasing hundreds of small bomblets.

In the sensor feed it looked like some ancient god was raining fire upon the Karacknid positions. The entire horizon was awash with explosions. Particularly large ones showed where battle tanks or other Karacknid mobile weapon platforms had been hit. As the explosions ceased and the fires went out, it was impossible to tell just how much damage had been done. As the minutes ticked by and the expected Karacknid attack didn’t materialize, Pershing got some idea. They had hurt the Karacknids enough to delay their attack. He wasn’t surprised when the Karacknid armored shuttles reappeared. Instead of racing towards his defensive line though they moved around its flanks. They soared high into the air as they sought out Colonel Malhorn’s tanks. SAMs reached up to strike them, knocking some out of the sky. The rest released volleys of missiles towards the planet’s surface. Malhorn’s artillery pieces had been split into six batteries of five tanks and spread out around the approaches to Bozhou. All of them were racing towards the secondary positions prepared for them. There was no way for Pershing to know how many, if any, had been lost, but he suspected Malhorn’s command would be hit hard. If they had hurt the Karacknids, then they’d be determined to stop the tanks from firing again. As much as Pershing didn’t want to lose a single tank, he deemed whatever losses Malhorn suffered worthwhile. Once the fighting entered New Shanghai’s capital, the tanks would be useless. To a certain extent, that was the entire purpose of his defensive line. He wanted to pin the main body of the Karacknid forces in one place long enough to strike at them with his artillery. Now they knew how deadly the Rhineland howitzers were, it was unlikely the Karacknids would group up their forces so tightly again. If they gave him the opportunity, he intended to get off another volley with his howitzers. He needed to keep using them while he could.

Such thoughts were driven from Pershing’s mind by what the Karacknids did next. Instead of reforming and attacking his beleaguered defenders, they pulled back. As soon as the first reports came in Pershing felt a sinking feeling. It didn’t take long for his concern to turn into dread. Without warning the ground underneath his feet shook. It shook a second time and then a third shockwave in quick succession. “Orbital bombardments!” he called out. He saw fear and panic in the eyes of his command staff. He felt it himself. They were out in the open. There was nowhere they could take shelter. Before he could think of anything, the ground began to vibrate and his ears were assaulted by repeated booms. The Karacknids were blindly bombarding the battlefield from orbit. Though the data coming into the 3D map was completely scrambled, it was enough to tell Pershing that the orbital strikes were falling within a massive area. More than three hundred square kilometers were being blasted by the Karacknid warships. Firing blindly, it was down to pure luck whether or not the Karacknids hit any of his forces. With so many marines deployed within the area, they were going to suffer losses. Standing still in his command tent, Pershing’s whole body tensed up. He could be struck at any moment.

For five minutes strike after strike landed all around him. Several came so close that Pershing was sure he was about to die. Then a concussive blast struck his command tent, ripping it off its fastenings. He and his command staff were thrown to the ground. Their combat armor protected them from the blast wave, but Pershing was still shaken up. For several seconds he lay on the ground as it pulsated under him. Then he pushed himself to his knees and then his feet. Looking over his left shoulder he saw a crater just four hundred meters away. All the vegetation around the crater was burning brightly. Distracted by the fire, it took Pershing a moment to realize the ground had stopped shaking. The Karacknids had ceased firing. Turning, he checked on his staff and helped several to their feet. Then he surveyed what was left of his command tent. The holo map and secondary displays were all destroyed. Turning back towards the hill he had first surveyed the Karacknids from, he quickly moved up it. When he got the top, he slowly turned around to take in a three-hundred-and-sixty-degree view. The scene was like something out of Dante’s Inferno. Hundreds of craters blanketed the countryside all around him. Hills had been beaten down to half their height, forests were ablaze. Nothing looked untouched. Pershing almost lost hope. It was hard to imagine any of his marines surviving such an attack. Yet the fact that he was standing proved that it was possible. His forces, though no doubt badly hurt, were still in the fight. Except they would have lost all cohesion and their command structure would be shot to pieces. They needed him more than ever. Turning, Pershing ran back down the hill. His command staff were already trying to sort through their damaged equipment. “Never mind all that,” he called. “Just grab whatever COM equipment is still working. We need to get to one of the secondary command outposts. Looking around for his APC, Pershing saw that it was toppled over on its side and twisted into a wreck. Only then did he realize that the APC must have taken the brunt of the force from the nearest orbital strike. It had been parked in a direct line between the crater and where his command tent had been. “We are going to have to run,” he informed his staff. “Let’s get moving. The Karacknids won’t hang around for long.” Now that his defensive line had been hit so hard, he was sure their ground forces would renew their offensive.

Checking his map on his combat armor’s HUD, Pershing turned towards the nearest command outposts. With his COM unit he sent a query towards it. When no reply came in, he checked two more before he got a reply. “We’ll make for outpost foxtrot three,” he informed his staff. Without needing orders, two of his marines moved ahead to take point. The rest fell into formation around Pershing. Together they broke into a fast jog. Foxtrot three was five kilometers away. With the aid of their combat armor, they covered the distance in eleven minutes. Under better conditions they might have been expected to get there a couple of minutes sooner, but they had to circle large craters or avoid forest fires. By the time they got there, Pershing’s combat armor’s augmented hearing could hear the sounds of fighting on the frontline.

Pushing his way into the command tent, Pershing sought out the battalion commander. “I need to commandeer some of your equipment,” he informed the Lieutenant Colonel after a quick salute. Within a minute he and his staff were set up. Just as he expected, the Karacknids were already probing his main line of defense. They hadn’t launched a full-scale attack yet, but they would soon. Pershing made contact with his other battalion commanders and assessed what forces he had available. He then began to move pieces around the battlefield as he tried to get as many reinforcements to the frontline as possible.

“Enemy shuttles spotted,” one of his Lieutenants reported, alarm in his voice.

“Where?” Pershing requested. He couldn’t see them on the holo map showing the frontline.

“They’re not moving to attack our main forces. They’re advancing on sector seven.”

Pershing found them on a secondary display. Sixteen of them were racing low over the countryside. Here and there a SAM raced into the sky after them. Only one was shot down. The rest bombarded the area where the SAM had been launched from. Pershing immediately recognized what the Karacknids were up to. The armored shuttles were drawing out the limited anti-air weapons he had placed in this sector. He swore again. The Karacknids’ attack on his main defensive line was a bluff! Before he could give new orders, eighty shuttles appeared as they took off from the westernmost of the two towns the Karacknids were using as a base of operations. Flying low and fast they raced towards the area where the second adaptive dampener was. It was much closer to Bozhou and, in theory, the Karacknids would have had to cover a lot more ground to reach it. Yet they weren’t going to fight their way there, they were going to fly! “Alert seventh platoon,” Pershing snapped. “Tell them to expect company immediately. And get fifth and sixth platoons moving towards the second adaptive dampener.” He feared it was already too late, but he had to try.

A handful of SAMs tried to take out the low-flying shuttles. By his count at least four were blown apart, yet far too many raced over the heads of his defenders. Then the shuttles disappeared from the sensor feeds that were getting back to him. They had landed. Their troops would be swarming over the countryside as they raced towards the general location of the second adaptive dampener. Contact reports started coming in from seventh platoon. It took only a couple of minutes for Pershing to conclude that the platoon would not be able to hold. Not on its own. Several squads from fifth and sixth platoons were already entering the fight, but it wasn’t enough. The position was being overrun!

Pershing clenched his hands into fists. On the 3D map he surveyed the area the adaptive dampener was covering. If it was taken out more than five hundred square kilometers would be open to the sensors of any Karacknid warships in orbit. All his forces there would be laid bare for their guns to see. He had a total of three battalions defending the area, most of one was already racing towards the fighting around the adaptive dampener. The other two were defending the frontline and his forces’ line of retreat towards Bozhou. He had to make a snap decision. As much as he wanted to hope seventh platoon could hold out, their numbers were dwindling significantly. “The dampener is going to fall,” he said to his command staff. “We need to evacuate the entire area immediately. Seventh platoon will never get out of there but order the rest to retreat at once. Inform seventh they must hold at all costs. Get our people out of there!” he bellowed as his staff hesitated.

Even as they jumped into action, more reports came in from the front line where the bulk of Pershing’s forces were fighting. The Karacknid attacks there might have started as a bluff, but now they were increasing in ferocity. Pershing swallowed hard. The tactical situation had changed dramatically. As soon as the second adaptive dampener was found and destroyed his entire right flank would disintegrate. Any forces left in the area would be bombarded from space and the rest were already in full retreat. His main frontline could be turned and the Karacknids could roll up his entire force. Or worse, they could drive in behind his frontline and cut off their retreat. Then they’ll reach the first adaptive dampener and the entire sector will be bombarded. I need to get them out of there! Pershing told himself.

Chapter 3

A Marine officer can command his forces from the safety of a command bunker as well as a naval Captain can from her bridge. Yet to truly win the respect of his forces, a marine must lead from the front. That is one terror we naval commanders are spared from. Yet as cadets and future officers, you all must find your own way to win the respect of your crews, for without it, your forces may falter in the heat of battle.

-Excerpt from Empire Rising, 3002 AD.

Marine command bunker, Bozhou.

Johnston saw how dire the strategic situation had become. He ordered the last two battalions he had in reserve towards Lieutenant General Pershing’s sector to shore up Pershing’s western flank. Then he got in touch with Pershing. “General, your position is on the brink of being overrun. You need to fall back immediately.”

“I understand General,” Pershing replied. “I’ve already begun sending out orders to that effect.”

“Use your artillery to cover your retreat,” Johnston advised, “it will be useless to you before long otherwise. If you can, organize a force to defend your primary adaptive dampener for as long as possible. You need to buy time for the bulk of your command to get out of the sector before the Karacknids can start to bombard it. I’ll get you as much help as I can.”

“Thank you General, we’ll do our best here,” Pershing responded. Johnston nodded to him and ended the COM channel. Pershing didn’t have any more time to be wasting with him. Turning his mind back to the wider battle, Johnston tried to assess the implications the developments in Pershing’s sector would have for his overall battle. The Karacknids were advancing along all four sectors that led to Bozhou. None of the other adaptive dampers were in immediate danger, but that wouldn’t last for long. The majority of the Karacknids’ orbital bombardment had focused on Pershing’s sector, but other units had been hit as well. Of more immediate concern was Pershing’s western flank. Even as Johnston watched, the adaptive dampener in that area stopped transmitting. It took just two seconds for a wave of orbital strikes to crash down on the retreating marines. Most had got to safety, but those that hadn’t stood little chance now. If they keep pushing through that area, they’ll surround Pershing, Johnston feared. The two battalions he had moving up to secure Pershing’s flank should be able to hold, but if the Karacknids committed most of their strength there, that wouldn’t last for long. If I was in command, that’s what I’d do. Knowing that was likely the Karacknids’ strategy and doing something about it were two different things however. He had already committed all of his reserves, unless he was going to pull more Marines out of Bozhou, he had nothing left to respond with. For a brief second he considered doing just that, but then dismissed it. The goal of his strategy to engage the Karacknids before they reached Bozhou had been to draw their forces into the open. Pershing’s artillery hadn’t been the only ones to rain shells down onto the Karacknid divisions. Now that his forces were being overrun, it was time to fall back to the city. That’s where they’d be able to fight the Karacknids the best. Unless the Karacknids were going to level the entire capital from orbit, they’d have to clear the city street by street. His marines would excel in such an environment.

“Send orders to our other sector commanders,” Johnston said to his staff officers. “Update them on Pershing’s situation. Order them to begin a fighting retreat back to Bozhou.”

As his officers relayed his orders, Johnston studied the holographic map. Each sector commander had plans in place to fall back towards New Shanghai’s capital. They wouldn’t just turn tail and run, but they were not to let themselves get overrun either. The last thing Johnston wanted was for some of his marines to get cut off and surrounded. He needed everyone to defend the city itself. He began to manipulate the map. Drawing lines of retreat for several battalions from Pershing’s and the adjacent sector Commander’s forces, he planned out an ambush. He was certain the Karacknids would try and envelop Pershing’s division. There was a very real chance they would, but it made them predictable. If several battalions fell back along the lines he had drawn, they could lead the Karacknids into an envelopment. Minutes later the holographic representations of the battalions began to move as they retreated. It didn’t take long for contact reports to come in showing that the Karacknids were pursuing them.

Though he continued to organize the general retreat across all four sectors, Johnston kept an eye on his ambush. The Karacknids were taking the bait. At least one full division was charging Pershing’s western flank. When reports came in that a new wave of shuttles had been spotted, Johnston’s eyes narrowed. He scanned the battlefield. There, he said to himself. If the Karacknids were going to try their trick of landing a couple thousand foot soldiers behind his frontlines again, he’d put them right between two of the battalions on Pershing’s flank. They would be able to stop any attempt to secure Pershing’s line of retreat. “I want all remaining artillery pieces re-tasked to my command,” Johnston shouted to his staff. “They’re to target this sector here. Get some marines into that area immediately. I want eyes on what the Karacknids are doing. They can relay specific targeting coordinates to us. We have no time to spare.”

As more reports came in of shuttle sightings, Johnston wasn’t surprised when his forces tried and failed to engage them. A handful of shuttles were taken out, but with more than forty in one group and the limited number of SAMs available to his forces, they punched through his front line. They were heading directly to where Johnston had guessed. Less than five minutes passed from when they had been spotted to when they touched down. By then, two squads of marines had reached the area. Both sent back visual feeds and targeting coordinates. As soon as they were confirmed with the various artillery commanders Johnston nodded to one of his staff officers. “Fire,” he ordered.

Though not quite as impressive as the Karacknid orbital strikes, as hundreds of artillery shells rained down on the Karacknid shuttles and the hundreds of troops that had already disembarked, the carnage was substantial. The point defenses from the shuttles tried to take out the shells, but there were far too many to get them all. As shuttles were blown apart, the defensive fire withered. Then the entire area was engulfed by explosion after explosion. For a full thirty seconds the bombardment continued. It took a further two minutes for the smoke and fire to clear enough to see what damage had been done. When the visual started coming in again, more than one officer around Johnston grunted in satisfaction. Not a single Karacknid shuttle was intact. There were still a handful of soldiers moving around, but the vast majority were strewn across the small plateau they had landed on. Not many of the bodies were intact. “Have those two squads keep an eye on them,” Johnston ordered. “If enough of them begin to form up so that they look like they’ll be a threat, we need to know about it.”

Turning his attention back to the wider battlefield, Johnson saw that the Karacknid shuttles and atmospheric fighters were trying to hunt down the artillery pieces that had opened fire. All of them were in the process of being relocated. To his surprise, four marine atmospheric fighters swooped in from where they had been hiding below the horizon out at sea. They tangled with three Karacknid fighters, taking out two and losing one before they wheeled away towards safety. That’s a couple more artillery pieces saved, Johnston thought. He also saw that his ambush was about to be sprung. The Karacknid division had continued its advance up the western flank of Pershing’s forces. Three battalions of marines, including nearly half of the battle tanks Johnson had left, were in position to strike at them.

When the ambush was launched, it happened fast. Tank rounds, hyper velocity missiles and shells from a handful of artillery pieces stopped the Karacknid division’s advance in its tracks. Then, as the Karacknid forces sought cover from which to return fire, flanking fire came in from the two other battalions. Not content with just stopping the Karacknids, the three battalions advanced. They moved up to almost point-blank range as they cut the Karacknids into pieces. At least they almost did. Karacknid reinforcements arrived just in time to drive back one of the flanking battalions. As soon as its position became untenable, Pershing ordered all three battalions to fall back, expertly maneuvering them out of the engagement.

For a handful of minutes it looked like the Karacknids were reorganizing themselves before continuing to advance. When they delayed longer than Johnston thought necessary, he frowned. Then reports came in of battle tanks and foot soldiers falling back from the ambush site. Immediately Johnston grasped what was about to happen. “Order all of Pershing’s divisions into a full retreat!” he demanded. “Make that an army wide order!” he added. “I want every squad high tailing it back into the city at once.” The Karacknids were going to launch another blind orbital bombardment.

Seconds later, Johnston felt the ground shake. Sensors from all across the battlefield reported orbital strikes. At first they swept across the area where the three battalions had ambushed the Karacknid division. But then they spread out as they covered the entire front line. Then, in a coordinated pattern, the orbital strikes walked their way right up to the outskirts of Bozhou. Several louder crashes and bangs told Johnston that nearby buildings had collapsed. They hadn’t been built to withstand so many continuous shock waves running through their foundations.

With his forces in full retreat and so many strikes landing all around them, the representations of his forces on the battle map in front of Johnston began to blink and disappear. By the time a minute had passed, he had no fresh updates on his forces. Johnston closed his eyes. He’d seen the results of the first bombardment. Now that devastation would be multiplied ten times over as the entire battlefield was swept up and down with Karacknid strikes. He shook his head. He hadn’t expected the Karacknids to fire blindly. He was certain they were striking some of their own forward units. Yet they were taking out far more of his forces. And those who make it back to the city will be in no condition to fight, Johnston knew. He had suffered orbital strikes himself in the past.

As the strikes came close enough to Bozhou that the sensors within the city could show Johnston what was happening, he swallowed hard. If the Karacknids decided they wanted to do that to Bozhou the city would be levelled in a matter of minutes. The vast majority of his army would be wiped out. They won’t, he said to himself as he tried to assuage his nerves. If they do that, they’ll destroy most of the colony’s industrial infrastructure. They’ve come to conquer the colony, not wipe it out. That’s why they have so many ground troops. At least, he hoped that was the case.

For a full ten minutes the orbital strikes continued. The sensors looking out from Bozhou towards what had once been pristine countryside could only see craters and fires started by the strikes. The entire landscape was pocketed by the impact from the weapons flung down towards the planet by the Karacknid warships in orbit. “Signal our city forces to prepare to receive the remnants of our field army,” Johnston ordered when the orbital bombardment finally ended. “They are to help them and send them back towards the city center as soon as possible. They are to prepare to defend their locations. The Karacknids will not waste any time in assaulting the city.”

Survivors streamed into the outskirts of New Shanghai’s capital. Despite being hardened marines, they all looked battered and shaken. Several of his commanders didn’t report in once the bombardment ended. A handful eventually showed up with damaged COM units, including Lieutenant General Pershing. The marine Sergeant who had encountered him reported that the General’s arm was broken. His command staff had apparently had another orbital strike just miss them. Twenty minutes after the orbital strikes ended, Johnston figured all the marines that were going to make it back to the city had done so. Of the sixteen thousand that had been deployed against the Karacknids, less than ten thousand had returned. All of them would need medical attention or at least a day or two of rest before they’d be able to re-join the fight. As he stared at one of the sensor feeds of the open countryside the Karacknids would soon be advancing across, Johnston asked himself whether it had been worth it. His tactic of pinning the Karacknid army formations in place and then bombarding them with artillery had hurt the Karacknids, but there was no way to know how many they had killed. I guess we’ll find out when they come against us, he thought. Upwards of two hundred thousand troops had been landed in and around the six towns that formed a ring around Bozhou. No doubt more had been flown down since the fighting had begun.

He saw the first signs of Karacknid movements at the same time as his staff officers. “Here they come,” he said to them. “Alert all our divisional commanders.” While his officers sent out the message, Johnston turned his attention to the holo map of Bozhou. The city had been home to thirty million citizens. Nearly eight had been evacuated. As many of the rest as possible had been moved into the city center and towards the shoreline. The outskirts of the city and about half of its inner blocks were packed with marines. If the Karacknids wanted to take Bozhou, they’d have to take it block by block and building by building.

For five minutes Johnston allowed the Karacknid divisions to approach the city. It looked like several heavy tank battalions were taking up positions on the five hills that looked down towards Bozhou. Through the valleys streamed tens of thousands of foot soldiers, armored turrets, and other ground vehicles. In the air, hovering behind the hills, a number of armored shuttles were visible. It looked like the Karacknids’ plan was to make one push along the entire outskirts of the city. Johnston glanced at the chronometer. It had been just four hours since the first Karacknid shuttles had touched down. He wasn’t sure his defenses would last another four. “Signal our tanks and remaining artillery pieces, they may open fire,” Johnston said, giving the order that he knew would end in their destruction.

Right across the outskirts of Bozhou, the Centurion tanks and Rhineland artillery pieces that had survived the fighting in the open countryside opened up on the Karacknids. Each piece of equipment was carefully camouflaged, but as soon as they opened fire they would be detected. At once Karacknid counter fire ripped into their locations. Within twenty seconds every piece of heavy equipment the marines had left was silenced. Explosions had ripped into the Karacknid formations, but many of the shells had been taken out by Karacknid defensive fire. Despite knowing that they were coming, Johnston winced at the losses. The tanks and artillery would be no use in the street-to-street fighting, he had had no choice but to use them now. Still, millions of credits worth of hardware and some of his best people had just died. At best, it looked like they had taken a handful of enemy tanks and killed another one or two thousand Karacknids.

Just moments after the last Centurion tank was destroyed, the Karacknid battle tanks switched their fire. Instead of firing explosive rounds, they filled the open countryside between the Karacknid divisions and the city with smoke shells. At least that’s what Johnston thought of them as. They filled the area with a thick gas. Neither his infrared nor optical sensors could pierce the smokescreen. Johnston still had several low orbit drones he could launch to peer down onto the Karacknid forces. He didn’t bother using any though, he knew what was coming. There was nothing he could do to stop the Karacknids getting to the city.

As the Karacknid soldiers appeared through the smoke, the marines held their fire. Slowly and cautiously, the leading Karacknid squads and platoons entered the outskirts of the city. They made it a couple of blocks before the fighting resumed. Catching the leading Karacknids in a series of crossfires, marines shot down at them from buildings and the makeshift barriers they had prepared. Expecting trouble, the Karacknids dove for cover as they returned fire. Johnston watched several of the firefights play out on different holo displays. Initially the Karacknids fell back. Then the buildings all around where the fighting had broken out exploded. The Karacknid battle tanks had opened fire. Johnston hoped the marines had taken cover. The order was for them to do just that, but the permacrete buildings would provide little protection from Karacknid explosive shells. After a very brief bombardment, the Karacknid ground troops pushed forward again. This time they came in even greater numbers. Now from the rubble of the buildings they had been in, the Marines engaged them. Hyper velocity missiles, grenades and plasma bolts were hurled at the Karacknids. The Karacknids took everything and returned it with twice as much destruction. In the 3D map of the city, icons quickly changed as squads and then platoons had to fall back or were wiped out.

For twenty minutes Johnston organized a slow retreat. He constantly had to send in reserve platoons to allow battered ones to fall back and regroup. Twice the Karacknids nearly broke through his lines but last-minute reinforcements just managed to hold. The furthest the Karacknids had advanced was approximately a kilometer into the city. Though they were making slow progress, their attacks were relentless. Their ground troops pushed as far forward as they could, then, when they encountered resistance too stiff to simply charge, they’d fall back and tank rounds would pepper the area. Then, as Johnston’s marines were still recovering their wits, hundreds of Karacknids would charge.

“That was the last marine battalion,” one of Johnston’s staff officers informed him after Johnston ordered more reinforcements to the front. “We have several platoons still in reserve and we’re reorganizing the survivors from the fight in the countryside. But apart from them, we only have our Colonial Militia and marine cadet formations.”

Johnston bit back a curse. The militia were decent soldiers, essentially they were equivalent to the field armies of the now dissolved national governments. Yet they weren’t marines. Crucially, they didn’t have combat armor. And the cadets were almost worse, though they did have armor, most of their training was far from complete. But you have no choice, Johnston said to himself as his mind went to the cadre of cadets he had been training before the Karacknid battlefleet had been discovered. “Prepare the Colonial Militia battalions to move forward,” Johnston decided. He still had ten thousand militia within the city. Most of them were manning defensive positions near the city center. Those that weren’t were about to be fed into the meat grinder that was the Karacknids’ advance.

As the battle raged on, Johnston did his best to keep track of everything. There were so many engagements, large explosions, and disjointed communications that his command staff were unable to keep an accurate analysis of events. The 3D map of Bozhou was full of unconfirmed sightings, engagements and reports rather than concrete data. In part that was why Johnson didn’t see the shift in the Karacknids’ tactics until it was too late. Rather than push in along every front, the fighting suddenly intensified in three sectors. Almost as if they had thrown caution to the wind, Karacknid soldiers had charged the marines. In a number of cases they actually charged past the first marines they encountered and pushed deeper into the city. Follow-up squads of Karacknids were quickly there to engage the front-line marines and keep them bogged down. “They are trying to encircle sixteenth and nineteenth battalions!” Johnston shouted in alarm. “Move up seventh and eighth Colonial Militia battalions. They need to get here right away.” Johnston added as he pointed to two points on the holo map. At three locations the Karacknids were trying to break through his lines. If they did, each attack would no doubt swing around to meet the others. They’d create two large pockets filled with hundreds if not thousands of marines that would be encircled. We need to blunt at least two of the attacks to stave off disaster.

As the militia battalions rushed to the scenes of the fiercest fighting, Johnston’s concern grew. They weren’t moving as fast as Marine battalions. Nor could they hit as hard. In contrast, rather than slowing down, the Karacknids were putting on more and more pressure. Two of their breakthrough attempts had already passed through the front line. Secondary defensive positions and marine platoons that had been held in reserve were being engaged. If their positions were breached, the militia would be too late. Despite shouting several orders to be relayed to the militia for them to hurry up, Johnston had to watch as one of the battalions failed to get there in time. His marines were overrun and Karacknids poured through the frontline. Johnson knew that if he didn’t act fast, all of his marines currently engaged would be surrounded. Yet he still hesitated. He was about to abandon more than a thousand marines. “Send orders to our sector commanders. All battalions that can, are to fall back to defensive line Zeta-three.”

In less than a minute, on the holo map of the city icons representing different battalions began to move as the marines not heavily engaged fell back. The one Colonial Militia battalion that did get in front of one of the Karacknid breakthrough attacks handled itself admirably. Johnston nodded in approval. Its commander knew what he or she was doing. Rather than engage the Karacknids before they came close, the commander let the Karacknids rush almost into point-blank range. Then the militia cut hundreds of them down in a large square. Their advance had been stalled, at least for a few minutes. The other militia battalion came up against a Karacknid battalion that had stopped advancing. It had already dug in and was prepared to hold its position whilst other Karacknid battalions no doubt moved in behind it to encircle the marines they had punched through. Valiantly, but vainly, the militia battalion hurled itself at the Karacknid defenses. They failed to push forward even a few hundred meters. Admitting defeat, Johnson sent orders for them to fall back.

As his forces reorganized themselves and prepared to defend the next line of makeshift fortifications, the Karacknids moved in and completed their encirclement of two battalions. Nearly a thousand marines had been cut off from their comrades. Johnson couldn’t help but shake his head. There was no way he could get to them. He didn’t have the strength of arms left to attempt to punch through the Karacknid lines.

Though the loss was demoralizing, the Karacknids took their time to move in and destroy the surrounded marines before renewing their offensive. It gave Johnston a precious few minutes to reorganize his forces and their command structure. Though he appreciated the time, it didn’t lift his spirits. Nearly a third of the new frontline was defended by militia units. He had no idea how long or even if they could hold back a full scale Karacknid frontal attack. And he knew one was only minutes away.

Chapter 4

A cursory overview of the War of Doom period in our Empire’s history could easily overlook the importance of the role the Marines played. Interstellar wars are too easily thought of as being primarily the endeavor of naval fleets. A cadet who makes this mistake will not only fail my final exam, they will also do the Imperial Fleet a great disservice in the future. To protect the Empire, both Fleet and Marines must work flawlessly together. For if either falter, there are many adversaries waiting to devour everything our forefathers have built.

-Excerpt from Empire Rising, 3002 AD.

Just ten minutes after energy spikes from the area the surrounded marines were fighting in were detected, the Karacknids resumed their main offensive. Instead of trying to punch through one or two key areas, the Karacknids attacked along the entire front line. They know we are near our breaking point, Johnston realized. “Pull half of the battalions defending our rearmost defensive lines and begin to move them forward,” Johnston ordered his staff officers. “If we have to retreat like that again we may not be able to reform in time to hold them. We have to hold here. Get the cadets moving forward and all the marines that fell back from the fight in the countryside. We cannot allow them any more time to rest.”

The next half an hour felt like an eternity. Johnston and his staff kept feeding in more and more marines and colonial militia. At several points, the front looked like it was going to buckle, but the defenders held. Little by little the Karacknids pushed them back. Building by building marines and militia gave their lives. In many places the fighting got so close that hand-to-hand combat broke out. Marines with combat armor stood a chance of going toe to toe with the Karacknids, but militia units that allowed Karacknids to get close enough were ripped apart by Karacknid claws. Still, the line did not buckle.

“General, we’re running out of reserve units to send forward. We only have the last few militia battalions that are defending our rearmost fallback lines,” an officer informed Johnston. “Shall we order them forward as well?”

Johnson took a breath as he considered his next actions. The frontline had essentially lost all cohesion. So many commanding officers had died that individual platoons and squads were fighting by themselves. They were holding where they could and falling back when the Karacknid attacks became too fierce. The defensive line had turned into a series of individual engagements. “We can’t send more units in now; we have no idea where they’re needed or what they’re going to come up against.” Johnston replied. He hesitated before giving his next order. It was extremely risky. Yet the battle was all but lost anyway. “Order every battalion that is not currently engaged to retreat to defensive line Zeta four. Pull everything off our defensive lines behind it. Move them all forward to Zeta four. As soon as we have our units in place, we’ll order everyone still fighting around Zeta three to fall back. They can’t fall back past Zeta four however, they’ll need to join the units we have there.”

As his officers sent out the orders, Johnston looked around his command bunker. Several marines in combat armor were standing guard at the entrance to the room and there were other squads stationed throughout the building. “There’s nothing more I can do here,” he said, though he was mainly speaking to himself. His forces were about to fight their last battle. He had no more reserves to organize. There were no more orders he could give. Turning, he sought out his second-in-command. “General Wu, I’m handing over command to you. Try and get as many of our injured marines back into action as you can.”

“Where are you going?” Wu demanded. For the last several days the animosity Wu had shown to Johnston since he had arrived at New Shanghai had all but disappeared. It was now back with a vengeance, written all across Wu’s face.

Johnston smiled at the marine General. “I’m not retreating if that’s what you’re worried about.” He waved at the marines guarding the command room. “We have a platoon of marines stationed here. And half the staff officers are no longer needed. I’m taking them with me. We are going to defensive line Zeta four. I can do more there than here.”

Wu clenched his teeth. He glanced around at the other staff officers. Most of them had stopped what they were doing and were staring. Johnston almost felt sorry for Wu. He was in an impossible situation. A senior commander was about to rush off to die in battle and leave him holding the reins. Yet Johnston was a special forces marine, he could do more fighting the Karacknids than sitting and waiting for them to surround the command bunker. And I’m not dying sitting here on my backside, Johnston thought. “You have your orders,” he said to Wu. Ignoring the Chinese General, he barked out names as he called several of his Staff Officers to join him. Without looking back, he marched out of the command bunker. Moving through the headquarters he sought out Lieutenant Guildford. “Lieutenant, call your platoon together. You’re coming with me; we are moving to the front.”

“Yes Sir,” Guildford snapped. He immediately turned away and spoke into his COM unit.

Now waiting for the Lieutenant, Johnston moved through the command bunker. His Staff Officers right at his heel. By the time he got outside, most of Guildford’s platoon was forming up. Johnston sought out one of the platoon sergeants. “Take point Sergeant, we’re heading straight to the frontline. Double time, we have no time to waste.”

“At once General,” the sergeant replied as he turned and bellowed orders to the marines. Within seconds they were sprinting in the direction of the fighting. Now outside, Johnston could see the carnage with his own eyes. In the distance, the outskirts of Bozhou were ablaze. The shells from the Karacknid battle tanks had started a number of fires which were spreading. Instead of putting them out, it seemed the Karacknids were content to let them burn. As night was beginning to fall, the fires illuminated the rest of the city. Against the orange haze, the much brighter flashes from explosions and weapons fire lit up the sky. Johnston and his marines were running towards where the fighting looked to be fiercest. As they moved, Johnston made contact with the Colonel commanding the section of the Zeta four defensive line they were approaching. Unfamiliar with the territory, Johnston refused to take command, instead he requested a position for his platoon of marines to slot into.

Four minutes later the platoon took up positions within three large apartment complexes. A couple of squads were sent back to guard another group of apartments across the street to protect their line of retreat. Just seconds after taking a position on the third floor, Johnston’s COM unit beeped to tell him Wu was trying to contact him. “Go ahead General,” Johnston said.

“Zeta three defensive line is being overrun; I’m ordering a full retreat now. The Karacknids will be on your position within minutes,” Wu informed him. “I’m diverting what marine reserves we have towards you.”

“Negative,” Johnston replied. “Send the marines where they’re most needed. We must hold here for as long as possible. This is the last chance we have to bleed them. If I fall, send the order to disperse only when our resistance has lost all cohesion.”

“Understood General,” Wu said without trying to hide his reluctance.

Johnston ignored it. Part of his plans for defending New Shanghai had included scattering resistance cells throughout the planet. More than six thousand marines and colonial militia were hiding in caves, forests and underground bunkers. None of them had been involved in the fighting so far. They had orders to stay hidden for several weeks after the landing. It was Johnston’s hope that if his forces fighting now could hurt the Karacknids enough, then a prolonged guerrilla campaign would have a chance of succeeding. If Zeta four fell, there would be no point trying to resist the Karacknid ground forces any further. At least not openly. Ordering the survivors to go to ground was the best choice. It would mean that they too could get involved in the fighting. No doubt Wu was thinking that if Johnston fell in the fighting at Zeta four, he’d have to command the gorilla campaign. From the get-go, Wu had been against planning such a tactic. He wanted to throw everything they had at the Karacknids in one large battle. Given his experience on Haven and Holstein, Johnston knew better. Wu would just have to learn the hard way. Fighting a guerrilla campaign was not an enjoyable experience. But, if done right, it could be effective, even against the Karacknids.

Turning his mind away from Wu, Johnson looked down at his plasma rifle. He gave it one final check. It was in perfect working condition. Setting it down he pulled out his plasma pistol, then his grenades and nano carbon knife and checked them. Attaching them all to his utility belt, he looked out the window. Taking a deep breath, he settled his nerves. He was ready. It wasn’t long before he spotted movement ahead of him. He raised his rifle in readiness. It dropped again when distinctly Human forms appeared running towards his position. “Militia,” a marine said over the platoon COM channel.

“Take charge of them Lieutenant Guildford,” Johnston ordered. “They can join your platoon. Send them back with our rearguard for now.”

“Yes sir,” Guildford replied over the COM channel. As the militia ran past the apartment complex, Johnston counted them. There were only nineteen. Hopefully, he looked back up the street where they had come from, but there were no signs of any marines or other militia coming. Whatever other forces had been fighting the Karacknids further ahead of him had fallen or been surrounded.

After the sudden flurry of activity with the arrival of the militia, things turned quiet. There was still the occasional flash of weapons ahead of Johnston’s position to the left and right, but it quickly died down. For several minutes, an eerie silence descended on the apartment complex and the streets around it.

“We’ve got company,” the Sergeant Johnson had spoken to earlier reported over the COM channel.

Johnston saw them a second later. Two blocks away, Karacknid soldiers appeared. They moved cautiously down the open street. As soon as they reached a building, most ducked inside. They took a minute to clear it before reappearing, then they moved forward. Johnston watched as they cleared building after building. The Karacknids were clearly expecting to encounter more resistance sooner or later. “Hold fire until we get orders otherwise,” Johnston ordered the platoon.

When the Karacknids were just half a block away a new voice appeared over everyone’s COM unit. “This is Colonel Hitachi; all platoons engage at will.”

Before the Colonel had even begun speaking, Johnston had his plasma rifle to his shoulder. With his augmented reflexes and speed, he tore into the Karacknids. Firing just three shots at each target, he moved across the squad that was just about to enter a building less than one hundred and fifty meters from him. All four of the Karacknids hit the ground before they could react. As Johnson pivoted to find more targets all hell broke loose. Enemy laser beams exploded all around him. The glass window he had opened to fire through was blown into bits. Several beams punched through the apartment’s exterior wall. The energy from their blasts set fire to the curtains and a sofa. Throwing himself to the ground, Johnston rolled back from the window. From above and below him he heard weapons fire from the marines in his platoon and explosions from Karacknid counter fire.

Springing to his feet, Johnston sprinted out of the apartment. Running down the corridor he passed three doors before barging into the fourth. Slowing down, he carefully crept up to one of the two windows facing the Karacknids’ line of advance. Carefully he poked his head up enough to look out. An intense firefight was still going on. Most of the Karacknids were taking cover behind overturned air cars, trees, and other makeshift fortifications. Plasma bolts were raining down on them, but the Karacknids were doing a good job of returning fire. Rather than join the fight, Johnston waited. He kept his eye on the small three-story building directly across the street from his position. If his guess was right, Karacknid soldiers would be moving to take up positions in it. He saw movement behind one window. Suddenly a Karacknid form appeared there, it was holding some kind of shoulder mounted weapon. In a flash, Johnston aimed his plasma rifle and released a stream of bolts. The first one blew out the apartment’s glass window. The rest crossed the street and struck the Karacknid. There was a brief flash and then some kind of explosion within the building. Johnson didn’t bother sending a warning to the rest of the platoon, they would know what was happening from the detonation. Instead, he sought out more targets. He didn’t have to wait long, a number of Karacknids appeared at other windows and fired across the street. Johnston took out one but then his position was overwhelmed by enemy fire. Forced to his belly, he crawled out of the apartment. The report coming over the COM channel made him freeze. “Enemy battle tank approaching!” Another voice joined it. “It’s targeting the western apartment.” Johnston had just enough time to realize that was the one he was in before his world came crashing in around him. A concussion wave blew him into the air. As he fell the floor gave way underneath him. Surrounded by rubble, he fell all the way to the ground floor and was half buried as chunks of permacrete and other construction material covered him.

Momentarily disorientated, Johnston lost track of where he was. A sharp pain in his chest made him groan. On his HUD alerts flashed. Several sections of his combat armor had been damaged. Taking several deep breaths, Johnston waited for his armor to pump pain medication into his bloodstream. As his chest eased, he tried to move his body. Both his legs were free, but there was a weight on his back. Vibrations assaulted him as the rubble he was buried in began to move. For a second Johnston thought some of Lieutenant Guildford’s marines had come to get him. Then he remembered the Karacknid battle tank! It was causing the vibrations. It will crush me! Johnston realized. Pulling his arms in under his chest, he groaned as he pushed up with all of his strength. Alarms went off on his HUD but he ignored them. When the weight on his back didn’t move, he almost gave up. For a second despair almost overwhelmed him. Then he gave one last heave. There was a crash and some of the weight disappeared. Taking a few more deep breaths, he tried again. This time the weight felt less. With a cry he pushed himself onto his knees. More rubble rolled off him. Suddenly he was free. Standing, he spun towards where the sound of the battle tank was coming from. It was less than a block away. Its muzzle wasn’t pointed directly at him, but the tank itself was approaching the ruins of the apartment complex. Ducking down, he slowly raised his head over the rubble that surrounded him. Here and there marines were still firing at the advancing line of Karacknids, but it looked like most of Guildford’s platoon had been killed or had fallen back.

There’s nothing else for it, Johnston said to himself. Pulling all the grenades he had left from his utility belt, he armed them and flung them towards the Karacknid positions. As soon as the first one detonated, he bounded out of the pile of rubble and sprinted away from the Karacknids. As soon as he reached the open street, he began to zigzag. It wasn’t a second too soon as laser beams zipped past him. Johnston imagined the large muzzle of the Karacknid battle tank turning towards him. Suddenly something whooshed over his head, leaving a faint smoke trail. He heard and felt a large explosion erupt behind him. Someone had fired a hyper velocity missile. The Karacknid tank was no more! Marines appeared in the windows of the next apartment complex and fired down on the Karacknids. “Over here General,” Guildford shouted over the COM channel. Johnston saw an arm waving from behind one of the side doors into the apartment. Turning slightly, he charged into the complex. Guildford immediately grabbed him and helped him arrest his momentum.

“Thank the Lord,” Guildford said as he looked Johnston’s combat armor up and down. “We thought we had lost you.”

“Not just yet you haven’t,” Johnston said with a smile he knew Guildford couldn’t see behind his helmet.

“Let’s get to the back of this complex and check you out,” Guildford responded. “My platoon is holding for now, but it’s not safe right here.” With several warning lights still flashing on his HUD, Johnston didn’t argue. “What happened?” Guildford asked.

“The battle tank,” Johnston said as he followed the Lieutenant, “It hit the building I was in before I could get out. The building fell in around me.”

“That explains your combat armor,” Guildford replied.

“How is the wider battle going?” Johnston asked.

“Every battalion is being pushed back, but I think we are holding at the moment. That battle tank isn’t the only one that the Karacknids have pushed forward,” Guildford explained.

“Which means they are keen to bring the fighting to an end,” Johnston mused. Which also means we are hurting them.

“This should be safe for now,” Guildford said as the entered a ground floor apartment at the opposite end of the complex from where the fighting was taking place. “I’ve already sent the militia across the street to the shopping mall. They’re preparing our next line of retreat.”

“All right, I’ll run a full diagnostic and then re-join you,” Johnston said as he gestured back towards where the Karacknids were. “You get back to your marines.”

“Yes General,” Guildford said as he snapped a salute.

As soon as the Lieutenant disappeared, Johnston started his combat armor’s diagnostics. Then he attempted to connect to the command intelligence datanet. The information he received was extremely garbled, but he could see a rough line around the city showing where the fighting was taking place. More than two thirds of Bozhou had fallen to the Karacknids, all his forces were being steadily pushed back towards the city’s shore front. No doubt the Karacknids intended to drive the defenders into the sea. Johnston knew that they could. That wasn’t his first thought, however. Most of the civilians had been evacuated to the part of the city that hadn’t been taken yet. Once the fighting reached there, civilian casualties would skyrocket. Twice he tried to get in contact with General Wu, but either his COM unit’s identification protocols had been damaged, preventing him from accessing the command COM channel, or Wu’s communications were down.

“General, it looks like the Karacknids are readying for another push,” Guildford’s voice said over the platoon COM channel moments later. “If you’re ready to fight we could use you up here. If not, I suggest you fall back to the shopping mall.”

Johnston cursed. His diagnostics had found damage to two critical motors. His combat armor was working to overcome the problem, but the feedback on his HUD was telling him it would be a couple more minutes at least. “I’m going to have to fall back Lieutenant,” he reluctantly replied. Turning, he walked to the window that faced across the street towards the shopping mall. “It looks like the mall should be easier to defend. Hold as long as you can, but fallback before they overrun you.”

“Understood General,” Guildford replied. “Stay safe.”

Johnston shook his head. Despite everything, it was clear Guildford didn’t want to be the Lieutenant who allowed his General to be killed. In an hour or two it’s not going to matter, Johnston thought. Probably a lot less than that. But we’re not dead yet. There was a chance to kill more Karacknids.

Chapter 5

The economies of a modern war are very hard to predict and thus plan for. In the War of Doom the frontlines were at least set. By 2484 AD, the numbers and abilities of the enemy were known. Matching Karacknid ship designs and outproducing them was a tangible goal, at least in theory. Today we have no such luxury. Yes there are known enemies we must prepare for; the Antarians are an ever-present threat. Yet it is the unknown that keeps the Imperial logisticians and central planners up at night. The Fleet and Marines must be ready for every threat, but how can we prepare for the unknown?

-Excerpt from Empire Rising, 3002 AD.

Moving slowly so as to allow his armor to repair itself, Johnston smashed the apartment’s window, stepped out onto the street, and moved towards the shopping mall. Two militia were guarding the large glass doors that led into the mall. They greeted Johnston when he entered. “Who is commanding your position?” he asked them.

“Sergeant Rutherford,” one of the militia answered. “He’s in the second-floor food court, it overlooks the ground floor mall.”

“Right,” Johnston said as he walked past them. “You’ll need to find some better cover. The Karacknids will be here any minute.” Both militia flashed him salutes and quickly moved away from the glass doors as they kept a wary eye on the street. Moving to an escalator, Johnston let it take him to the second floor. When he saw four marines in combat armor, he made his way to them. “Sergeant,” he said with a nod when he approached.

“General,” the Sergeant replied. “Sergeant Rutherford, at your command.”

Johnston recognized him as the Sergeant who had taken point when the platoon had moved from his command bunker to the frontline. “What is the plan?” he asked.

“We’re going to let them enter the mall, General,” Rutherford answered. “There are plenty of shops we can hide in, and we have a good vantage point from here looking down to the ground and first floors. We should be able to hold for a while.”

Johnston glanced around dubiously. Along with the Sergeant’s four other marines he could only see six militia. “How many soldiers do you have?”

“Twelve,” the Sergeant replied. “But once Lieutenant Guildford falls back, we should have enough. We’re also expecting Striker Platoon from Eighteenth Battalion to fall back here. They have been fighting to our east.”

Johnston didn’t want to say what he thought of that. Even as they spoke the sounds of fighting from across the street intensified. Before he could reply his HUD beeped to let him know his armor’s repairs were done. He would be restricted to eighty percent of his top speed and other functions were slightly compromised, otherwise he was good to go. “Where do you want me?” he asked the Sergeant.

“You should stay with us,” Rutherford said. “We could use a special forces marines covering our backs.”

And its where you can watch me. “Sounds good to me,” he said.

“All squads fall back to the mall,” Guildford shouted over the platoon COM channel moments later.

“That’s our cue,” Rutherford said. “Positions everyone.”

Johnston followed the Sergeant as his squad moved to a balcony that overlooked the large glass doors into the mall and the wide boulevard that most of the ground floor shops faced. From the shops that faced out towards the street Johnston heard the militia lay down covering fire for the retreating marines. Without warning six marines burst through the large glass doors. Laser beams followed them into the mall. One was cut down before he made it to cover.

“That’s all of them,” a militia informed the mall’s defenders.

Johnston wanted to query the information. More marines must have escaped. Yet the militia wouldn’t have said so unless there were no more marines falling back across the street. Instead he hoped others had fallen back into the streets adjacent to the shops.

“What about Striker Platoon?” Rutherford asked.

“No sign of them,” another voice answered. “The Karacknids are coming though.”

“Cease fire and fall back,” Rutherford ordered, “let them enter the mall.”

Ducking down with the other marines, Johnston hid behind the balcony. In no time at all the sound of footsteps on broken glass rose to meet them. Johnston raised a hand to signal the marines to wait. He took a deep breath and counted to ten as more and more Karacknids crunched their way into the mall. Then he gave the signal to attack. Jumping to his feet, Johnston pointed his rifle at the Karacknids and held its trigger down. Sweeping left and right, he mowed down every alien he could see. The marines around him and the nearby militia added their fire to the carnage. Karacknids dove for cover behind signs and plant displays whilst others charged into the shops. A desperate firefight ensued. “Keep moving,” he ordered. Following his own orders, he ducked down and began to move around the balcony and out onto an overhanging walkway. He kept popping his head up, firing off a few plasma bolts and then ducking to continue his movement. If he stayed still for too long, he knew he would be in trouble. An explosion to his left took out the balcony the fight had started from. Johnston couldn’t tell if it had been a grenade or a missile.

“They’re coming up the stairwell,” someone shouted over the COM.

“Head them off,” Johnston snapped. “Don’t let them get onto the first floor.” The height advantage his people had was the only thing keeping them from being immediately overrun. Leaving the rest of Rutherford’s squad to keep hurling plasma bolts down onto the Karacknids, Johnston rushed over to the nearest stairwell. He could already hear intense fighting coming from it. Carefully, he peeked down the stairwell. Two militia were holding their guns over the stair’s railings, firing blindly. Beyond them, a host of Karacknids were returning fire. In the brief second his head was visible, their fire turned to him. He also got a glimpse of grenades being flung up the stairs. “Grenades!” He shouted over the COM channel. The explosions came so quickly that he knew the two militia hadn’t been able to get out of the way. “They’re going to take the first floor,” he warned the rest of his forces. “Fall back to the third. Rutherford, get someone on the roof, see if there is a way out of here for us.” Johnston reached for a grenade of his own. He swore when he realized he had used them all. Taking a leaf out of the militia’s handbook, he reached his plasma rifle over the stair railing and fired blindly towards where the Karacknids had been. A hail of laser beams scorched the stairs and railings all around him. “They’ll be pushing to the third floor soon,” he updated the platoon.

Movement to his left made Johnston spin around. He relaxed when he saw two more marines appear. “We’ll help you hold them here,” one said as she moved towards the railing. “Rutherford is pulling everyone back to the west side of the mall. We are to join them when we can’t hold any longer.”

Johnson nodded and lifted his rifle to fire blindly once again. “Watch out for grenades,” he warned. Sure enough, three spherical devices came flying up past them. Johnston’s augmented reflexes allowed him to batter two of them back down the stairwell before they hit the ground. The third landed near one of the marines. She kicked it back towards the overhanging walkway. It broke through the glass panel and fell to the ground floor before exploding.

“That’s some kick you’ve there Private,” Johnston said as he couldn’t help but chuckle. He was still firing down the stairwell.

“Your reflexes aren’t bad either General,” the private responded, apparently not in awe of his rank.

The second marine lifted his head for a split second to look down the stairwell. “I think they’re getting ready to charge us,” he said.

“Then it’s time we got out of their way,” Johnston responded. “Either of you have any grenades left?” Both marines shook their heads. “Then let’s just go,” Johnston ordered. He jumped to his feet and sprinted away from the stairwell. He moved towards the western side of the mall. From the other stairwell he saw Karacknids burst out onto the walkway. Twisting his body, he unleashed a hail of bolts towards one group of them. The others opened fire on him and the marines with him. Johnston increased his pace. With his augments he easily outdistanced the other two marines. Though he kept firing as he went. As he rounded a corner in the walkway, he was greeted by Rutherford and several marines and militia. They all had their weapons aimed in his direction. “They’re right behind us!” Johnston shouted. Throwing himself into a slide, Johnston twisted onto his belly and turned so that he was facing the walkway. Just one marine came barreling around the corner seconds later. It was the one who had kicked the grenade. Four Karacknids were right on her heel. Everyone opened fire on them, cutting them down instantly.

“There’s a ladder onto the roof in the back of this shop,” Rutherford said as he gestured towards the shop most of his people were taking cover in.

“There’s no time to waste,” Johnston replied, “keep moving.”

Rutherford nodded and ordered half the marines to wait and lay down covering fire. Everyone else followed Rutherford to the back of the shop. Johnston was the third person up the steps and onto the roof. Though night had completely fallen, it seemed like it was only early in the evening. There were so many fires burning throughout the city that everywhere was lit up. Smoke filled the air. It was so thick his combat armor couldn’t filter all of it out and Johnson could taste it on his lips. Looking around, he saw a militia was standing at the south end of the building, he was waving them over. “I think we can jump to the next building over here,” he said as he pointed down.

Johnston glanced over the edge of the shopping mall’s roof. The next building was across a narrow alleyway. It was just two floors down. He could easily jump it, so could the marines in combat armor. The militia would have a harder time. Yet it was jump or come face-to-face with the Karacknids’ slashing claws. “Over you all go,” he ordered. As he turned back to the ladder, he saw the rearguard marines start to appear. Only four made it onto the roof. They all sprinted towards Johnston. “Jump!” he shouted at them. Then, before they got to him, he turned and did the same. Deftly, he landed on his feet then tucked in and rolled to absorb the force of the impact. Regaining his feet, he surveyed what was left of his platoon. He had seven marines and eight militia. Barely two squads worth of combat soldiers. And none of them have any grenades or other heavy munitions left, Johnston thought as he examined them. “We can’t hold this building,” he said, coming to a snap decision. “We need to fall back at least a block and regroup. Rutherford, you and your best two marines guard our backs. The rest of you with me. We’ll make a sprint for it to get some space between us and the Karacknids.” Johnston knew he should really try and coordinate with whatever forces were holding the line on either side of his platoon. Yet there was no point. He needed to fall back at least one block to take up new defensive positions. It was every platoon for themselves at this point.

The next twenty minutes were a blur for Johnston. With his beleaguered platoon he engaged the Karacknids in so many brief skirmishes that he lost count. Each time they fell back, found a defensive position, engaged the first Karacknid scouts they saw, and then fell back to repeat the process all over again. They didn’t have the strength to confront a full Karacknid push. All they could do was keep engaging their lead squads and pick off a handful of Karacknids each time. For all the enemies they killed, Johnston’s platoon continued to shrink. Looking around him, he was shocked to see he only had five soldiers with him now. He had had seven a moment ago, he hadn’t seen either of the latest two fall. “All right, we’ll hold here,” he said as he stopped sprinting and ducked into a large skyscraper. He vaguely remembered that it reached at least forty floors up. He was tempted to head up to one of the higher floors. If he engaged the Karacknids from the building they’d have to meticulously clear every floor. It would delay them for a good five to ten minutes. Yet if he did so, he’d be surrounded for sure. “Find good vantage points,” he ordered. “Don’t go upstairs though. We’ll hit the first Karacknids we see and fall back.”

Though the sounds of fighting were still coming in from all around him, a few minutes of peace descended on Johnston and his soldiers. The Karacknids pursuing them had learnt to be cautious. When another minute went by and there was still no sign of the enemy, Johnston grew suspicious. “Something is not right,” he said over the platoon COM channel. “Keep your eyes open.”

“General, to our east,” one of the militia hissed.

Johnston snapped his head around. There were Karacknids stealthily moving past the skyscraper they were in. Swinging around to look as far west as he could, Johnston saw what he thought were more. “They’re trying to surround us!” he realized. “We need to fight our way out.” Two of his marines jumped up and made to lead the way out of the skyscraper down the stone staircase to the street that seemed open to them. A hail of laser beams cut them both down. “Back!” Johnston ordered. They were already surrounded! “Find us a stairwell,” he ordered. “We need to head up.” It was their only choice now. This is it, Johnston thought as he sprinted through the skyscraper’s ground floor. This was the building he was going to die in. Out of nowhere his mind went to one of his favorite twentieth century films. In it one man had faced off against a whole group of terrorists who had taken over a skyscraper. This is no movie, Johnston to thought to himself. He wasn’t going to get out of this alive. But he was going to take as many Karacknids with him as he could.

He didn’t stop his people from running up the stairs until they got to the sixth floor. Then he ordered them to cover the three stairwells that allowed access up the skyscraper. He also checked both sets of turbo lifts to confirm that they had been powered down. “We continue what we’ve been doing,” he instructed what was left of the platoon. “We’ll engage their lead squads, then immediately pull back to the next floor. There is no other way out of here. We’ll keep drawing them up higher and higher until we make our last stand. Agreed?” Johnston let each of the marines and militia respond. He owed them that much. “It’s been an honor to fight alongside you,” he said to them when they were done. Silence descended on the group as each marine and militia turned to their own thoughts. Johnston’s mind went to Clare. He wished he knew what would happen to her. With the New Shanghai system conquered and the planet about to fall, the Karacknids would push on towards Earth. By now she should be there. A part of him wished he was there too. He’d far rather die fighting to protect her than on New Shanghai. You have bought her a few more days, Johnston said to himself. Perhaps a week or even two. He had no idea how long it would take the Karacknids to lick their wounds and move on Earth, but when they did, their ground forces would be seriously depleted. That might make them pause. It meant he wasn’t dying for nothing. Even if it was just one more day of life he bought his wife, it was worth it.

“Contact!” one of the militia called over the COM channel. It was immediately followed by the sounds of plasma rifles firing.

Glancing down the stairwell he was protecting, Johnston saw movement a second later. He fired a stream of plasma bolts towards the Karacknids he knew where just out of sight. “Fall back,” he ordered as he sprinted up the stairwell to the next floor. The same pattern repeated itself up four more floors. Then Johnston’s force suffered its next casualty. One of the last militia took a laser beam to the chest and fell at Johnston’s feet. He was dead instantly. It didn’t stop him being left with a permanent expression of pain and shock on his face. Johnston barely had time to glance at him before he had to fall back. Now it was just him and one marine private guarding their stairwell.

Another three minutes passed as they steadily retreated upwards. Two more of his group were killed by Karacknid fire. Then the marine with Johnston let out a groan and fell to his knees. Johnston fired another round of plasma bolts down the stairs and turned to the marine. A laser beam had struck his knee. It hadn’t fully penetrated his combat armor, but the knee segment looked badly charred. Johnson could only imagine how bad the marine’s leg was. Bending down, he put an arm around the marine’s shoulder and hoisted him onto his feet. “Keep moving marine!” he ordered as he half dragged the marine up the next set of stairs. He paused only long enough to fire a few more bolts down below him before heading up to the next floor. “We are going to have to make our last stand here,” he informed the others. “We can’t go any further.”

“Understood General,” the only marine left out of the other two groups replied. “We will make our stand on this floor too.”

“So be it,” Johnston replied. “Let’s make them pay a heavy price for our lives.”

“Agreed,” the marine replied with determination.

“Prop me up so I can see,” the injured marine asked. Johnston helped the marine into a position where he could aim his rifle down the stairwell.

Johnston wished he had just one grenade to hurl down amongst the Karacknids. When the first Karacknid came into view, he blew the Karacknid away with six plasma bolts. He took out another before he had to duck back as multiple laser rifles appeared and started to fire. Reaching his own rifle back over the stairwell he fired blindly. He heard weapons fire and explosions as the other marine and militia held their ground and fought to the death. Letting out a battle cry, Johnston poked his head up. Depressing his trigger, he let his rifle fire on full auto for several seconds as he swept back and forth across the Karacknids trying to race up the stairwell. Either because they had been expecting Johnston not to hold his ground, or out of frustration at fighting an enemy that kept running away, four Karacknids had been charging headlong towards him. All four took plasma bolts to the head and chest. They fell back to block the way for whatever Karacknids were following behind them.

Resting his rifle on one of the stairwell’s railings. Johnston knew the next Karacknid charge would be his last. Taking a deep breath, he prepared himself to take as many Karacknids with him as he could. Below he could hear movement. The Karacknid bodies were being dragged out of the way. The next charge would come any second. For the briefest of moments Johnston pictured Clare. Then he focused on where his rifle was aimed.

Suddenly, the sound of fighting died down. In its place louder explosions and the thump of more plasma rifles firing. He frowned, then he realized the signs were coming from below him, not from the same floor. Someone was attacking the Karacknids from behind! “Charge them,” Johnston ordered, not even sure if there was anyone left to obey his command.

Hurtling over the stairwell’s railing, Johnston jumped down four steps at a time as he attempted to take the Karacknids by surprise. He had to step on several dead bodies that hadn’t been moved yet, but then he was round the turn in the stairs. Only one Karacknid was facing him. A plasma bolt to the face took him out. Five others had their backs to Johnston, they had weapons raised and were pointing them further down the stairs. With a scream, Johnston swept his plasma rifle back and forth across their backs. They crumpled before being able to turn. Below them, Johnson saw more Karacknids, they too had their backs to him. Before he could bring his rifle to blast them, a grenade blew up in their midst. All of them were cut to shreds. Just seconds later, three marines in combat armor came sprinting up the stairs. The speed at which they moved immediately told Johnston they were special forces marines.

When they saw him, they froze. Then they stared at him for a couple of seconds. The Sergeant at their head began to move his arm back and forth as if to get his attention. Then he tapped his helmet. “General, general is that you?” a voice eventually said over Johnston’s platoon COM channel.

“It is Sergeant. And let me say, you’re a sight for sore eyes,” Johnston replied.

“Are your long-range COM units down?” the sergeant asked.

Johnston did a quick diagnostics check. He hadn’t realized, but they were. That was why the sergeant had looked at him so funny. He’d been trying to talk to him and Johnston hadn’t responded. “Yes they are, they must have been damaged.”

“General Wu sent us to find you General,” the sergeant said quickly. “The Karacknid ground commander has made contact with us. He has offered us the chance to surrender. If all our forces lay down their arms, they’ve promised to treat us humanely.”

Johnston frowned as he was filled with suspicion. From everything he knew about the Karacknids, there was no way they would offer terms for surrender. Not when they controlled the orbitals and were winning. Why on Earth would they do such a thing? he asked himself. “Do you have a long-range COM unit I can use? I need to talk to Wu,” Johnston said to the sergeant. He had a sudden fear that Wu might accept the terms.

“Here you go General,” the sergeant said as he handed Johnston a replacement COM unit. Johnston quickly removed the malfunctioning one from his combat armor and attached the new one. On his HUD he accessed the command COM channel. “General Wu, this is General Johnston, what is the condition of our forces?”

“General,” Wu said, relief evident in his voice. “We thought you were dead.”

“Not yet,” Johnston replied. “It was touch and go. How is the battle going?”

“Defensive line Zeta four has been broken in several sectors,” Wu said quickly. “All along the line our forces are falling back in disarray. We’ve lost contact with more than two thirds of our remaining battalions. The battle is lost.”

“And this offer of surrender? Do you think it’s genuine?” Johnston followed up.

“I don’t trust them any more than you do General,” Wu replied. “But the fighting is about to reach the districts we’ve moved most of the civilians to. There will be extremely high casualties among them if we fight on.”

“Then we send the order to our forces to scatter and go to ground,” Johnston decided. “We can’t trust the Karacknids, not for one second. If we lay down our weapons, they’ll round us up and throw us all into mass graves. If the battle is lost, then we run and hide. It is a guerrilla war now.”

“I will send the ord...” Wu began to say. His voice was cut off though as static filled the COM channel. Then a new voice cut over Wu’s. “This is Lieutenant Martinez. I’m seeking to speak with any surviving senior military commanders. Repeat, this is Lieutenant Martinez. Is anyone still using this COM channel?”

Johnston’s mind froze. He couldn’t quite grasp what he was hearing. The Lieutenant didn’t sound like a marine, he sounded like a navy officer. He couldn’t understand why a naval officer was using his command COM channel. Every warship that had fled the orbital battle would have jumped out of the system hours ago. What on Earth is a naval officer doing in this system? Johnston asked himself as his mind struggled to grasp the sudden change of circumstances. Moments ago he had been ready to die. Now the Karacknids were offering terms to surrender and a naval officer was trying to speak to him. Was it some kind of Karacknid trick? Or something else? He had no idea.

Chapter 6

The political system of the Empire was complex to begin with. As long as their laws aligned with the Imperial constitution, each colony had a wide scope within which to decide how it wanted to run its affairs. Even when there were less than a hundred Human colonies within the Empire, the system quickly gave rise to a diversity of political viewpoints. Now that there are thousands, many of which are populated with large conclaves of aliens; things are considerably more elaborate. Thankfully the three Houses of government on Earth provide a degree of stability. But their remit strictly prohibits them from interfering too much in the everyday running of the Empire’s colonies. Often it can fall to Naval Captains stationed within a system to deal with problems on the ground. Cadets must prepare for this eventuality as much as they do to face the Antarians.

-Excerpt from Empire Rising, 3002 AD.

Imperial Palace, Fleet C&C room, 1st June 2484 AD (two weeks earlier).

“What are our options?” Empress Christine half whispered as she stared at the massive holo display of the Sol system. One hundred and forty Karacknid warships were racing into Humanity’s home system. “Can we… ah, can we intercept them?” she asked, failing to stop her voice from breaking. The Sol system was home to more than twenty billion Humans spread across a number of colonies and orbital habitats. All were at risk of being destroyed if the Karacknids chose to commit genocide.

Her eyes flashed towards the small squadron of ninety Alliance worships that was moving into the system. They had arrived four hours ago and were heading towards Earth to refuel before continuing on to New Shanghai. In orbit around Earth itself there were another thirty-five Vestarian warships and fifty Imperial ones. All were taking on fuel and supplies as they prepared to head for New Shanghai. If her commanders could combine their forces, then they would be able to achieve parity with the Karacknids. In hope she turned towards Commodore Mandow.

Mandow was shaking his head, though he was still looking at the holo display. “We don’t have enough time,” he answered solemnly. “Worse, if we ordered Rear Admiral Sanders to break orbit with the few ships we have here and rendezvous with the Alliance squadron, the Karacknids could split up and avoid our forces. They could attack five or six different targets at once. We’d never be able to protect them all. There are simply too many targets in the system for us to stop the Karacknids getting to them all.”

Christine swallowed hard. “What is your advice then?” she asked, knowing that she was about to approve orders that would leave tens of millions of her citizens completely unprotected.

“Earth and Mars are our two biggest population centers,” Mandow answered. “They are also where the vast majority of our military industrial facilities are located. They must be defended. If we lose them, we could lose this war even if Emperor Sommerville is victorious at New Shanghai. I would suggest we divert the Alliance squadron to Mars; we can then keep our forces here. That way we can protect both planets.”

“But both of our squadrons will be outnumbered,” Christine protested. “Either could be defeated by the Karacknids.”

“I have already sent orders to mobilize all the freighters we have been converting. We should have almost forty ready to go. They’ll not be as effective as we’d like, but they will bolster our numbers here at Earth. But you are right,” he said as he turned to face Christine. “This Karacknid squadron is here to raid our space. If they want, they could attack the Alliance squadron or our ships here, but they’d lose most of their fleet in the battle. That would mean they couldn’t raid any other systems. They might not even have enough ships left to overcome the defenses of our orbital facilities.”

“So you are saying we offer them easy targets?” Christine said as she closed her eyes. She knew the Sol system well enough to visualize many of its colonies. Titan, Europa, Enceladus, Ceres and the outer system asteroid habitations could all be wiped out.

“I’m saying we can only defend Earth and Mars with the forces we have, and even then, there are no guarantees,” Mandow replied. “I’m sorry Empress, but we cannot alter the strategic situation. We have to make a decision quickly.”

Still with her eyes closed, Christine nodded. “Very well,” she said as her voice broke again. “Send the orders.” A tear ran down her cheek. No doubt the Karacknid Commander would much rather take out all the shipyards and mining facilities in orbit around Earth and Mars, but if he couldn’t, he’d probably not think twice about blowing up everything else he could get his hands on.

*

IS Viper, shift space.

Rear Admiral Beckett felt like she was fighting every muscle in her body as she tried to sit still. The tension running through her was driving her crazy. It felt like her whole body could start to shake at any point. Viper was just minutes away from the Sol system. She had no idea what she was going to find. The entire system could be up in flames. For weeks she had driven her combined fleet at a breakneck pace. From the moment they had left Scalatar and raced through Conclave space, then to the Gift, through the wormhole and Imperial territory, her fleet had not slowed down once. More than sixty ships had been forced to fall behind with reactor or engine failures. In their place they had picked up twenty-six Imperial warships that had been heading towards the Sol system, fresh out of their construction yards. Though out of date, the news that they had carried had been deeply disturbing. She now knew Emperor Somerville’s counterstrike fleet had encountered the Karacknid war fleet the Kalassai had warned her about. She knew the Karacknid warfleet had begun to advance towards Earth. Everything the Human Empire could muster had been sent to face them, but Becket knew the numbers that were involved. If all ten thousand Karacknid warships the Kalassai had discovered moving towards the frontline of the war were engaged against Emperor Somerville’s forces, victory would have been all but impossible.

“Sixty seconds,” Becket’s navigation officer called. It only served to heighten Becket’s tension. She was about to find out whether her homeworld still existed or not. A timer appeared on the holo display in front of her and she unconsciously held her breath when it reached five seconds. Her head bobbed forward as the exit from shift space sent a small tremor through her flagship. Then the heavy cruiser’s sensors began to sift through every joule of electromagnetic energy that struck them. In the blink of an eye the major planetary bodies of the Sol system appeared on the holo plot. Then the display was populated with smaller moons and, finally, man-made contacts appeared as orbital structures and ships were detected.

“Karacknid warships!” a sensor officer shouted before Becket spotted any such contacts. Her heart jumped into her mouth. She had just seen Earth. It looked intact. But the report made her look again. Now she wasn’t so sure.

“They’re on the outer edge of the system,” Becket’s tactical officer added as a group of more than one hundred contacts began to flash on the holo plot. “It looks like they’re accelerating into the system. No other Karacknid ships detected further in yet.”

“A raiding squadron,” Rogers, Viper’s Captain suggested. “Or at least a powerful scouting squadron. Their battlefleet hasn’t made it this far yet.”

Becket shared a glance with Rogers, seeing the same expression on her Flag Captain’s face that she had on her own. They had arrived just in time! At least, they’d arrived before Earth had fallen. The Karacknid battlefleet could be right behind the raiding squadron, for all she knew it could just be hours away, but they were in time to defend their homeworld. When Rogers gave her a nod, Becket returned the gesture. Then she leveled her gaze on the holo display. Rolling her shoulders, she felt much of the tension leave them. There was a Karacknid fleet in front of her, one she intended to deal with. After all the rushing and worrying, she was finally able to do something.

They are trying to keep the defenders penned in position, she surmised as she studied the Karacknids’ line of advance. Instead of heading towards either Earth or Mars, the Karacknids were heading to a point roughly between the two planets. It meant the Alliance and Imperial warships defending each planet couldn’t break orbit and try and rendezvous with each other. If they tried, the Karacknid squadron could alter course and strike whatever planet was left undefended. Becket’s eyes narrowed when she saw thirty Karacknid ships breakaway from their main squadron. It took just seconds for their new course to be projected on the holo plot. They are going for Titan! Titan had almost no orbital industries of any military value. They’re going to bombard the moon! That, or they’re trying to draw out the defenders. Not on my watch! “Send orders to Captain Kansas, I want Intrepid and our forty fastest warships to hunt down the Karacknid ships headed for Titan at once. The rest of the fleet will set course for the main Karacknid squadron. Maximum military power,” Becket said.

*

IS Intrepid

“Lay in an intercept course,” Emilie said as soon as the orders came through from Viper. “Send it to the other ships assigned to us.”

“Course prepared Captain,” Second Lieutenant Maguire responded seconds later.

Emilie glanced at the predicted course on the holo display and turned to Maguire. “Engage engines,” she said with a nod. On the display, Intrepid and thirty-nine other warships turned away from the fleet. Emilie gritted her teeth as she returned her gaze to the small group of Karacknid warships. Though the Alpha colony was her homeworld, she had come to love the Sol system. It had all the beauty and elegance the Alpha system lacked. It had been where she had first learned about her father and uncle. Earth was as much home to her now as anywhere else. The last time the Karacknids had attacked Humanity’s homeworld she had been a COM officer on her uncle’s flagship. Then she had been forced to watch helplessly as nuclear missiles rained down on the planet. That will not happen again, she thought as her hands tightened into fists. She had never visited the colony on Titan, but she knew it was home to more than five million colonists. The Karacknids were not going to harm a single one of them.

On the holo display the projected courses of her squadron and the Karacknids began to change. “Karacknid ships are accelerating,” Intrepid’s sensor officer said. Emilie waited until the estimate of when the Karacknid ships would get into missile range of Titan appeared and nodded to herself. She would still have twenty minutes with the Karacknids before they could open fire. That would be more than enough for the battle-hardened crews of her ships.

“We will target their cruisers with our first salvo,” Emilie informed her officers. “Then their destroyers with the second. We’ll hit the largest ships they have left with our third. If there’s anything left after that, we’ll blow them away with our plasma cannons.” The course Maguire had put Intrepid and Emilie’s squadron onto would put the Imperial ships right between the Karacknids and Titan. If the Karacknids were still intent on trying to get to the colony after the missile exchange, Emilie had no problem pitting her ships against the Karacknids in an energy weapon duel.

For fifty minutes her ships raced towards Titan. The Karacknids made no more efforts to get ahead of Intrepid, nor did they try to get away. Emilie kept her attention on the Karacknid warships. She expected to see some kind of trick. All it would take to devastate Titan would be for one Karacknid ship to get past her squadron. But nothing materialized. It seemed the Karacknid commander expected to be able to fight past her ships and reach the colony despite being outnumbered.

“Why aren’t they trying anything?” Jones, Intrepid’s First Lieutenant asked. “They can’t be expecting to win, can they?”

“I was wondering the same thing,” Emilie mused. “But think about it. This Karacknid battlefleet has been fighting an entirely different alien civilization. So far, at least as far as we know, they’ve been driving Emperor Somerville’s fleet back through their territory. Perhaps they think they have the strength.” And maybe they do, Emilie thought but didn’t add. It was possible the Karacknid ships didn’t need any kind of trick or surprise, they could have weapons or some other upgrades that would win them the fight all on their own. Her ships were committed now though, and there was no way she was pulling out. “Fire!” she ordered as soon as her ships came into range. Seconds after four hundred and thirty missiles separated from her squadron, the Karacknids fired three hundred of their own.

Before either group of missiles reached their targets, another salvo erupted from their missile tubes. Then the Imperial and Karacknid warships opened up with their point defenses. Hundreds of missiles exploded. Then the missiles reached their targets and their own warheads detonated. Emilie was thrown around in her command chair as Intrepid carried out an evasive maneuver. Whether the missile targeting her cruiser missed or simply lost track, she didn’t find out. One way or another, her ship was unhurt. That was enough for Emilie to focus on the Karacknid squadron. Intrepid’s sensors had detected multiple hits from her own missiles. As she watched, four of the Karacknid ships lost acceleration. One more contact had disappeared entirely. Emilie glanced at Jones and give him a nod. All five of the Karacknid cruisers were out of the fight. Turning to a secondary holo display, she saw her squadron had only lost the destroyer, Hulk. Another ship had suffered a proximity hit but its gaseous shields had absorbed most of the enemy’s antimatter. They don’t have any advanced weaponry, she thought with a smile.

“Fire our third salvo as soon as all of our ships are back in formation,” she ordered. Less than three minutes later four hundred and twenty missiles raced away towards the Karacknids. It wasn’t long before Intrepid’s point defenses opened up on the Karacknids’ second salvo. First the cruiser’s flak cannons, then her defensive plasma and laser cannons and finally AM missiles all tried to take out as many enemy missiles as possible. With no way to see whether the hits being scored by her squadron’s fire were from Intrepid or another ship, Emilie simply kept her attention on the total number of enemy missiles. She clenched her fists when eight missiles got into attack range. Three were taken out by last-ditch defense fire. Five dove in towards their targets. Evasive maneuvers and ECM saved three ships from destruction. The final two were not so lucky. Emilie watched as one missile struck the cruiser Vanquish amidships. In the blink of an eye the heart of the cruiser was turned into an expanding blue ball of antimatter. When it dispersed, nothing but a battered shell of a warship was left. Turning away from the crippled ship, Emilie sought out the second ship that had been targeted. She breathed a sigh of relief when she saw the destroyer Agamemnon was still there. From the look of her scorched nose section Emilie guessed the destroyer had suffered a proximity hit. And her gaseous shields didn’t manage to absorb all the antimatter.

Though she felt the loss of life both ships had suffered, she knew the Karacknids would have suffered far worse. She grunted in satisfaction when Intrepid’s sensors failed to detect five of the Karacknid destroyers. Two more and a frigate also looked to have suffered serious damage. The engines of all three were no longer giving off any power readings. The mark IVs are cutting them apart, Emilie thought with a smile. “Slow our acceleration to two thirds maximum,” she ordered. “Our last salvo will devastate what’s left of their squadron. There’s no point letting their damaged stragglers get into energy weapon range. We’ll take them out with a fourth missile salvo. They can’t reach Titan in time to threaten the colony now.”

As the third and final enemy salvo closed with her ships, Emilie didn’t even watch it. With all five Karacknid cruisers out of the battle before they could fire their third salvo, the weight of Karacknid fire had nearly been halved. Her ships would easily deal with them. In contrast, her third salvo was only ten missiles less than her first two. The remaining Karacknid destroyers and frigates were helpless to fend off the missiles seeking their destruction. Every one of the eight enemy warships was blown apart by multiple strikes. As soon as the last missile from the Karacknids’ third salvo was taken out by point defense fire, Emilie sought out the damaged Karacknid ships. In two groups, they were trying to decelerate as best they could and turn from Intrepid. There was no hope for them, however. “I want one more spread of missiles,” Emilie ordered her officers. “I don’t want one of those damaged ships getting away.”

The battle ended as two mark IVs crashed into the final Karacknid cruiser. Already damaged, it was unable to carry out evasive maneuvers. Both missiles detonated, sending six grazer beams into the cruiser’s innards. Secondary explosions blew the warship into thousands of debris particles.

“Captain,” Sub Lieutenant Ramírez said, a smile on his face. “Our COM channels are being overloaded. I think everyone on Titan with access to a COM unit is trying to hail us.”

“Acknowledge them all, but don’t send any replies,” Emilie responded. “Let’s see to our damaged ships and then set a course for Earth.” A cursory glance at the holo display of the system told Emilie that Rear Admiral Becket had things under control. There was no need for her to rush her ships to help engage the larger Karacknid forces.

*

IS Viper

You should have fallen back when you had the chance, Becket thought towards her opponent. Taking a leaf out of the Karacknids’ playbook, Becket had split her fleet up into its constituent parts. Each of the senior Admirals from the five Conclave species was commanding their own fleet. With Becket’s Imperial ships forming a sixth fleet, and Maleck’s Alliance’s warships a seventh; her forces were moving out to surround the Karacknids. Having given up trying to hit Earth or Mars, the Karacknids were still trying to find something they could damage within the Sol system. It wasn’t working. Slowly but surely, Becket was using her fleets to shepherd the Karacknid fleet into a bottleneck. “Now is the time,” she said to her Chief of Staff. In response to the orders they had already worked out, Commander Wilson sent the go order to the Alliance fleet protecting Mars. Breaking orbit they moved to head off the Karacknids. Predictably, the Karacknid fleet turned to try and engage the Alliance ships. If they could break past them, they could at least still hit Mars’ orbital shipyards. As soon as the Karacknids were committed to the move, the Alliance ships reversed course. The Karacknids tried to catch them, they had no other choice now. For twenty minutes the Karacknids accelerated hard towards Mars. It made no difference, long before they came into range of the red planet, Admiral Shraw’s fleet of two hundred Gramrian warships got into missile range. Just minutes after they opened fire, two more Conclave fleets did the same. Then Becket’s Imperial warships came into missile range as well. By then the Alliance fleet had reversed course for a second time. It too added a missile salvo to the mix. Set upon from five different angles, the Karacknids faced a devastating hail of fire. Hardly any of their ships escaped undamaged from the first group of missile salvos. When the second came in, what was left was blown apart. In return, the Karacknids fired two salvos at Shraw’s ships. By the time they got into the range of Shraw’s point defenses however, the Poideal fleet had moved to reinforce Shraw. Only a handful of Gramrian ships were lost.

“The fleet will set course for Earth,” Becket ordered once the Karacknid threat was dealt with. “Signal them and make sure they know of our fuel and supply needs. Request a situation update as well. We need to plan our next movements quickly. If Karacknid raiding squadrons have penetrated this far then there is no time to spare.”

“At once,” Wilson, Becket’s Chief of Staff, responded.

Becket nodded to her and turned back to the holo image of Earth. You haven’t been conquered yet, she thought towards her homeworld. But how long can we keep it so?

*

Earth, Imperial Palace shuttle landing pads

“Becket,” Christine said as she rushed over to Becket and embraced the Rear Admiral. “I’ve never been so happy to see an Imperial warship in my life. You arrived just in time!” Releasing Becket, Christine held her at arm’s length. “How on Earth did you get here so soon? Your fleet brings hope when we thought all hope had faded. News of the Karacknid battlefleet can’t have reached Conclave space more than a few weeks ago.”

Becket flashed Christine a smile. “We had help from an unexpected source,” she explained. Stepping slightly to the side, Becket turned and gestured up the access ramp of the shuttle. “And we have your niece to thank for it.”

Letting Becket go, Christine rushed to meet Emilie. She eagerly pulled her niece into an even firmer hug. “Welcome home,” she whispered into Emilie’s ear. “It’s been too long.”

“It’s a pleasure to be back,” Emilie said as she stepped back from Christine and looked up at the Palace’s spires. “I’d say you have been busy, but that would be the understatement of the century.” Her eyes widened for a moment as she brought them back to Christine. “I’m sorry, should I have bowed? How am I meant to address you, Empress?”

Christine chuckled and flashed Emilie a grin. “Seeing as you are second in line to the throne after Jonathan, I think we can keep the bowing and other formalities out of it.” Christine’s grin widened even further as Emilie’s eyes bulged.

“You can’t be serious,” Emilie eventually managed to blurt out. “I’m a naval Captain, nothing more.”

“So was your uncle, at one time at least. Things change,” Christine simply replied. “Now,” she continued as she raised her voice, “let me take you both inside. I have refreshments prepared. We can talk as we walk though; I suspect you won’t be staying long. Tell me, how did your fleet get here so quickly?”

“It was the Kalassai,” Emilie answered. “When we returned from Admiral Becket’s raid into Karacknid space, they were waiting for us at Scalatar. Some of their ships spotted the Karacknid battlefleet heading towards the frontline with the Alliance. They brought a warning to us as soon as they could.”

“The Conclave species received the warning before my fleet got back,” Becket said. “When we returned from our Valley campaign, they already had the fleet you see in orbit prepared and ready to go. We’ve been rushing here ever since. We’re dying for news, how far has the Karacknid battlefleet advanced?”

Christine’s face lost the joy she had been feeling from seeing Becket and Emilie again. “The last news we received was from New Shanghai. James and his Admirals chose to make their stand there. We have moved all of our orbital defenses from the entire Empire to the colony. All of our warships, fighters and as many freighters as we could convert are there as well. Hours ago we received news that the Karacknid battlefleet had arrived and laid siege to the system. That news was two weeks old. By now you may have a better idea of what the situation may be. Though given that the Karacknids felt confident enough to send fleets forward to raid our colonies, I fear the worst.” When Emilie reached out and placed her arm through Christine’s, Christine placed her other hand on Emilie’s wrist and give it a squeeze as she nodded to her niece.

“James is the best naval commander we have,” Emilie reassured her. “He will be able to handle the Karacknids.”

“All the same, it means we have even less time than I feared,” Becket said, her tone was far more serious. “The Conclave Admirals will want to meet you, but our fleet should have taken on the fuel it needs to continue on towards New Shanghai within the next twelve hours. We should break orbit as soon as we can. James will need us. The Karacknids simply have too many warships. Skill alone will not be enough.”

“Do you think you will be able to get there in time?” Christine asked, unable to hide the strain in her voice. When she looked at Becket, she didn’t see the same confidence that was on Emilie’s face.

“We will do our best,” Becket answered. “That is all I can say, we will do our best.”

Christine took a deep breath. She had to blink several times in quick succession. A fresh bout of fear and concern was welling up within her. With a great deal of effort, she composed herself. Forcing her fear for her husband down deep within her, she took another breath and smiled at Becket. She was Humanity’s Empress; she had a duty to fulfil. “That is all I could ever ask of you,” she said. “Now come along, pick up the pace. I already have attendants preparing a more formal reception for the Conclave Admirals. I’ve sent invitations for them to join us in half an hour. We can enjoy some refreshments together and catch up with one another. Then I’ll meet these Admirals and then it will be time for you to be on your way. I don’t intend to delay you for even one second longer than your ships require. It is not I nor Earth that needs you.”

From the look on Becket’s face as she nodded, Christine knew she was thinking of James as well. Though she tried to keep her thoughts away from him as they walked, she failed. Somewhere out there she knew he was facing the Karacknid battlefleet. Perhaps even at that very moment he was fighting for his life as he tried to defend New Shanghai and the Empire.

Chapter 7

In its five hundred year history the Empire has fought in more than six thousand naval battles. Only a small fraction of them were in the War of Doom. Yet they provide the context from which to understand the many battles that followed. For a student of history then, it is essential to be familiar with most if not all of the major battles from the Empire’s founding. For a naval cadet it is even more important.

-Excerpt from Empire Rising, 3002 AD.

IS Drake, New Shanghai system, 13th June 2484 AD (two weeks later).

“Panther reports she should have her shift drive functioning within the next five minutes,” Lieutenant Anderson reported. “Metropolis and Altenburg still have no ETA for us.”

James ground his teeth together. He had no choice. “Order both cruisers to be abandoned and scuttled. Tell their crews we will be jumping out as soon as Panther is ready. That’s how long they have to get to one of our other ships.” Turning slightly in his command chair, James sought out his Chief of Staff’s eyes. “What about our allies’ fleets?”

“Ya’sia and Jil’lal have already reported they are ready to jump out. They’re just waiting on our ships to be ready,” Miyagi answered.

“Then we will jump out once Panther has her shift drive repaired,” James ordered. As Miyagi began to pass out more orders to James’ command staff, he looked back at the holo display. What he saw filled him with shame and emptiness. A trail of dead and dying ships littered the course his fleet had taken as it fled from New Shanghai. Either too damaged to keep up with his ships or to make the jump into shift space, many had been abandoned. Though their losses were nothing compared to the thousands of ships that had been left in orbit around New Shanghai. Not that they were ships any longer. They were nothing but debris. In their place the Karacknid battlefleet was settling into orbit. Several hours ago the fleet had turned back from chasing his ships out of the system and returned to the colony. Already the planet was shrouded in a wave of jammers that prevented Drake’s sensors from detecting what was happening on the surface. James could easily imagine though. The Karacknid warships would be raining down orbital strikes on General Johnston’s defenders.

James shook his head. His fleet had been utterly defeated. He barely had a thousand ships left whereas the Karacknids had more than three thousand. Worse, pretty much every battlestation in the Empire had been in orbit around New Shanghai. Now they too were nothing but debris. As brave as James knew Johnston’s marines were, there was no way they could hold out for long against the tens of thousands of troops that had already been landed. Not when Karacknid warships held the orbitals. It is only a matter of time, James said to himself as he imagined the image in front of him being repeated in the Sol system. His fleet had already laid in a course to Earth. Yet when they got there, they would be all alone. The Karacknids would be able to finish them off as and when they chose. Full of despair and pain at the loss of so many friends and ships, James shook his head again. He knew his staff officers would interpret the gesture for what was, a sign of hopelessness. But he didn’t care.

The sudden blare of alarms stopped James’ head mid shake. Like everyone else on Drake’s bridge, he swung around towards the gravimetric plot. Anderson was the first to interpret what it was showing. “New contacts! New contacts, unknown ships exiting shift space!”

James swore. Weeks ago the Karacknids had dispatched several raiding squadrons to attack the colonies he couldn’t protect. If one of them had returned, his battered fleet was about to suffer even more losses. “Prepare to engage!” he ordered. Before anyone could respond, identification markers started popping up on many of the new contacts. They were Imperial identification codes! One jumped out at James. IS Viper was Rear Admiral Becket’s flagship. “Impossible,” he said, shaking his head again but for a very different reason. “They should be thousands of light years away. It has to be some kind of trick.”

“It’s no trick Admiral,” Miyagi responded. “At least, the codes are real!”

“Hail Viper immediately,” James demanded. He doubted the Karacknids could fake Imperial identification codes. So far they had shown no sign of being able to decrypt Imperial communications. And the number of new contacts was still rising, it had already reached seven hundred. The Karacknids hadn’t sent that many raiding ships beyond New Shanghai. Over half of them were of designs Drake’s computer didn’t recognize. He needed answers, and fast!

“Viper is responding Admiral,” Lieutenant Martinez replied. “Admiral Becket has opened a visual COM channel.”

“Send it through to my command chair,” James snapped. His suspicions wouldn’t let him believe that what he was seeing on Drake’s sensors was real. When Beckett’s face appeared in front of him, he couldn’t deny it any longer. “Is it really you?” he couldn’t help but ask.

Becket responded with a brief smile; it barely reached her cheeks however. That in itself answered James’ question. By now she would have seen the state his fleet was in. This was no happy reunion. “It is me James,” she answered, forgetting to address him formally. “What has happened here?”

The fleeting spark of joy James felt at confirming it was indeed Becket evaporated. “We have been defeated,” he answered, his voice flat. “We set up defenses on two of New Shanghai’s moons, but the Karacknids drove us away from each moon. Then they moved in and took the colony itself. They took out all of our battle stations, we couldn’t hold them any longer. This is all the ships we managed to save.”  As he spoke, James gestured towards where his fleet was arrayed around Drake.

Becket’s head sunk as she listened to James. Seconds later it rose. “I’m sorry we were too late,” she said. There was a determination in her voice James didn’t share. “But we are here now. I have a thousand warships with me. Perhaps the battle has not yet been lost entirely.”

James met Becket’s gaze as her eyes locked on to his. He almost told her the situation was helpless. Yet he saw something in her face. She had not been defeated yet. There was still plenty of fight left in her. James grabbed onto it with both hands. If there was still fight left in Becket’s fleet, then there was hope. Though his ships had all been damaged and their crews had suffered greatly seeing so many of their friends lost, if Becket’s ships could fight on, then his could follow. Suddenly, James’ mind filled with tactical ideas. Turning slightly from the holo display of Becket, he looked at New Shanghai. The Karacknids still had three thousand warships but many of them would have taken damage, certainly more than his ships had. Karacknid anti-matter missiles tended to completely destroy Allied ships when they scored hits. Allied weapons on the other hand caused a lot of damage but didn’t destroy Karacknid ships outright quite as often. “Their fleet will be heavily damaged,” James said as he turned back to Becket. “Your ships are fresh. Perhaps we can drive them away from the colony. The Karacknids have landed almost all their ground troops already, if we could retake the colony, we’d be able to trap them.”

This time when Beckett smiled it reached her eyes. “And if we can trap them, then they’ll not have any troops to try and take Earth with. It could buy us several weeks at least. The latest news from Earth is that an Alliance fleet of twelve hundred warships is no more than three weeks away. If we can drive the Karacknids away or hurt them badly enough to stop them moving on Earth immediately, we could still save our homeworld.”

James nodded, it felt like a long shot. Certainly, his ships were going to suffer more losses. But at best the Karacknids had him and Beckett outnumbered two to one. They were better odds than he had faced for the last four months as he had fled from the Karacknid battlefleet through system after system. If we give them enough time, they’ll repair their ships and strike at Earth with a renewed strength, James said to himself. This is the best chance we are going to get. “We will try it,” he said to Becket, then he turned to Miyagi. “Signal Lightfoot, Ya’sia and Jil’lal. Tell them we’re not jumping out just yet. They will know what I have in mind.”

“At once Admiral,” Miyagi replied.

“Now,” James said as he turned back to Becket. “You’d better tell me just who all these strange ships you’ve brought with you belong to and what they are capable of.”

*

Slayer, New Shanghai orbit

Tanaka-lan was content to allow his Generals to manage the battle for control of the planet’s surface. That was why he was on Slayer’s bridge, slowly working his way through battle damage reports when the alarms sounded. He sat up straighter in his command chair. The point where the new ships were appearing was right beside the remnants of the Allied fleet he had just crushed. At first, he thought it was one of his raiding fleets returning, but the number of contacts quickly rose beyond one hundred. Enemy reinforcements, he concluded. Too late to do any good, he thought with a snarl. Then the analytical part of his mind took over. He had thought the Allies had concentrated all their forces against him already. Why did they have a sizeable fleet arriving just hours late? Was this the only additional fleet they had? No answer that he could come up with for his first question made sense. There was no reason for the Allies to hold back some of their strength, not when the defeat he had just handed their fleet all but guaranteed all of the Humans systems would fall to him. Which meant they tried to get here in time and failed, Tanaka-lan concluded. That left open the worrying possibility that there were other fleets that were rushing to the system.

“Signal the scouts we have shadowing the Allied fleet, I want an update on these new contacts immediately,” Tanaka-lan requested as he caught the eye of one of Slayer’s bridge officers. His flagship’s sensors had detected the emergence of ships from shift space, but they couldn’t tell him anything else. For five minutes Tanaka-lan’s frustration steadily grew as no reports came back. Before they did, the Allied ships started to move. Instead of jumping out of the system as the retreating fleet had clearly been intent on doing, they moved to join up with the newcomers. Together they set course for Slayer and the planet Tanaka-lan’s ground forces were in the midst of capturing.

“They actually mean to engage us,” one of Slayer’s officers said. Though the comment was meant to convey shock, there was an element of respect.

Whilst Tanaka-lan didn’t enjoy hearing it, he begrudgingly admitted he felt the same. Though his battlefleet had just crushed the Humans, any Karacknid officer with half a brain would have to recognize the Humans had fought well. He had lost more ships taking this one system from them than he had done in the last five years of campaigning against the Halash.

“The report is coming in now from one of our scouts,” an officer finally informed Tanaka-lan.

Seconds later and a series of images appeared on Slayer’s main holo display. They showed several different groups of ships. One Tanaka-lan immediately recognized as Human warships. A second consisted of Varanni Alliance ships. The rest however were unknown to him. “Analyze those new designs!” he demanded. The lone Kulrean worldship that had fought with the Humans had demonstrated an extremely impressive array of defensive weapons. If the Humans had recruited more powerful alien species to their cause, his fleet could actually be in trouble.

“The power ratings and drive signatures don’t match any known ships in our database,” an officer reported seconds later. “Though the designs are remarkably similar, if not identical to designs from a small group of species from the far side of our Empire. Collectively they call themselves the Conclave. They are scheduled for invasion and assimilation into the Empire in the next fifty years.”

Tanaka-lan kept his body very still. The officers around him would detect his surprise from the pheromones he gave off. But he didn’t want to add to it by digging his claws into his command chair, no matter how much he desired to. More than half of the fighter reinforcements and hundreds of warships he had been promised from the Imperial homeworld had been denied him. In part he knew that was why he had suffered so many losses defeating the Allied fleet. He had been unable to counter the large number of fighters they had used against him. The reason for the diversion of the reinforcements he had kept from his subordinates on the Imperator’s orders. But he knew. Which is why what he saw in front of him galled him all the more. Somehow, the Humans had launched a powerful raid deep into the Empire’s territory. Except they hadn’t attacked along the frontline of the war, they had pushed deep into a sector of the Empire that was thousands of light years away. Right on the border with Conclave space. And now the Conclave species are here with their warships. It’s impossible, and yet here they are!

Tanaka-lan’s mind went to the gravity well ships the Humans had used against him so effectively. Such technology had supposedly been impossible, and yet the Humans had it. Admiral Hur’lang, before his execution by the Imperator, had identified the artificial shift passages the Varanni Alliance species had created. That too had supposedly been impossible. Somehow, they have a way to transport ships from their territory all the way to the other side of the Empire, Tanaka-lan concluded. There was no other explanation. Which means they could have more ships coming. “How powerful are these Conclave species? How many ships do they have?”

“The fleet numbers were counted in the hundreds for each of those five species according to our most recent scouting intelligence,” the same officer replied. “It is five years old, however. Together, they didn’t have over a thousand warships.”

“Then we are seeing most of their ships now,” Tanaka-lan decided. Those that they didn’t lose during their raid into our territory, he thought. And it means they probably don’t have any more coming. However they did it, the Humans likely sent word to their forces raiding the other side of the Empire calling them back. It almost worked! Tanaka-lan wasn’t sure, but if the Humans had had another thousand ships defending their colony, the losses he might have suffered would have been too high to consider trying to take it.

“Shall we break orbit and prepare to engage them?” a tactical officer requested.

That is the question, Tanaka-lan thought. His ships were battle damaged. Nearly half had suffered at least one hit in the fighting for the colony though most were still operational. Perhaps not fully battle worthy, but they would be able to put up a good fight. But they would take more losses than they might otherwise. In contrast, the new enemy fleet would be fresh and eager for battle. His ships had vigorously fought to take the enemy colony. Ideally, they needed time to carry out repairs and run systems’ checks. Their crews also needed time to rest and recover. And if they do have more ships coming, then we might take enough losses that we’d end up being trapped. Especially if they have more fighters. That was the unknown that worried Tanaka-lan the most. With one hand he began to tap in his command chair. A schedule of the expected reinforcements appeared. Five hundred ships should be no more than two weeks away from joining him and he had a thousand more not far behind them.

“We will break orbit,” he replied. “We have won this battle. There is no need to take any unnecessary risks. The Humans can have their colony back, their fleet has already been decimated. We will lick our wounds and strike them again when we are ready. Signal Under Admiral Far’can, tell him he is to take his ships back to Takilla for repairs. The rest of the fleet is to prepare to head to the edge of the system and the shift passage back to Takilla. We will not jump out, however. Let’s wait and see what the Humans wish to do.”

“What about our ground forces?” Slayer’s Captain asked.

“Inform them that they will lose their orbital support soon,” Tanaka-lan answered. “We’ll stay in orbit until the last minute, but once the Humans approach, we’ll pull out. They need to press their attacks and secure the colony’s major cities by then. The Humans will not dare launch orbital strikes against our forces if their civilians are threatened.” Leaving his ground forces unsupported was not ideal, but Tanaka-lan knew interstellar wars were won and lost by fleets, not ground troops. He would lick his wounds, wait for his reinforcements, and then drive through the Human reinforcements straight to their homeworld.

Chapter 8

The Flex-aor were the first alien race to pose a real threat to our way of life. The Karacknids came to threaten our very existence. The Antarians were an enemy unlike anything we had yet faced. Yet all three of them were just the beginning of the Empire’s journey towards discovering new enemies. Thankfully we have been able to discover as many friends.

-Excerpt from Empire Rising, 3002 AD.

IS Drake, New Shanghai system (three hours later).

“They still haven’t moved,” Miyagi commented, “it looks like they are going to fight.” Turning in his command chair, he shared a glance with James.

James wasn’t so sure, but he understood the sentiment written across Miyagi’s face. If the Karacknids did fight, then he was leading his ships towards certain death. James was confident his fleet along with Becket’s reinforcements would take as many Karacknid ships with them as they lost. If they could achieve that, then the Karacknid invasion would be stopped in its tracks. At least temporarily. And if we have to give our lives to do that, then so be it, James thought. For weeks he and every one of his officers and crew among the Allied fleet had been preparing to do just that. In the last twenty hours more than two thirds of his fleet had already made that sacrifice. Miyagi’s look contained a hint of doubt, however. Not about the remnants of the Allied fleet, nor about the Imperial ships and Becket’s fleet, but the Conclave species were an unknown factor. For the past three hours James and his command staff had been working with the Conclave Admirals to form their various fleets into one formation. They then ran a number of simulated battles to familiarize the Conclave officers with the strategies and tactics James’ ships had been practicing for the last several months. In ideal circumstances James wouldn’t dream of leading such a varied fleet into combat without at least a couple of weeks of preparation. Nevertheless, the Conclave officers had shown a good ability to adapt. He suspected that was in large part due to the training Becket had been giving them. Even so, he shared Miyagi’s concern. “Get me a COM channel to Rear Admiral Becket, send it to my command chair,” James requested.

“Yes Admiral?” Becket said a few seconds later as an image of her head appeared in front of James.

“It looks very much like the Karacknids are preparing to engage us,” James said quietly. “Which means we’re about to fight a battle that we will not be walking away from. Our new allies, will they give a good account of themselves?”

Becket quickly opened her mouth to reply. Then she closed it again and paused for a couple of seconds. When she did speak, she matched James’ low tone. “I can certainly vouch for the Gramrians and the Poideal. They fought as valiantly as any Imperial ships during our Valley campaign. The others I cannot be so certain about. But they have followed us this far. Once the fighting starts, there will be no escape for them. To pull back and break our defensive formation would be to guarantee their destruction.”

James brought a hand up to rub his cheek as he thought through Becket’s answer. “That’s not quite what I was asking. I don’t fear that they will retreat. But when the fighting gets intense and it becomes clear we cannot win, crews that are overcome with fear and paralyzed will be useless to us. We need every ship to go down fighting as hard as it can.”

Becket pursed her lips together. “Again, I have no fears on that account from the two species I have fought alongside. I can give no guarantees about the others. Emilie knows them best. But I doubt she could give you a clearer answer.”

“Very well,” James said as he nodded to Becket, signaling that she could return to commanding her squadron. When the COM channel ended, James shared another glance with Miyagi. He knew his Chief of Staff would have been listening in. Becket’s answers hadn’t calmed either of their fears, but there was not much else they could do about it. For a few seconds James entertained the idea of contacting each of the Conclave admirals to speak to them, but it was just as likely that they would perceive the reason for his call and be insulted rather than encouraged by anything he might say. His mind turned to Emilie. He had read all the reports she had sent back from Conclave space; Becket was probably right. She wouldn’t have much more experience of the Conclave species’ battle prowess. It didn’t mean he didn’t want to speak to her. If his fleet was about to fight the Karacknids again, then it could be the last time they would see each other. Before he had given the final order for his fleet to head back towards New Shanghai he had almost ordered Intrepid back to the Sol system with news of the defeat his fleet had suffered. The only thing that had stopped him was the certainty that Emilie would have disobeyed. She would have been shamed in front of the entire fleet if he had sent her back. Everyone would have known it was only because she was his niece. The threat of that shame and the even greater shame of leaving the fleet on the cusp of facing such a deadly enemy, James was sure, would force Emilie to defy him. The last thing he wanted to do was to have to bring her up on charges of insubordination. Tapping a few buttons on his command chair, he attempted to open a private COM channel with her. The line came back as busy. James frowned for a second, Emilie was on a personal COM call with the Captain of the destroyer Magnificent. He understood when he pulled up Magnificat’s personnel files. Magnificent was one of the newly constructed warships that had joined Becket’s fleet in the Sol system. It was commanded by his former tactical officer, now Captain, Alvarez. James had known the two of them had had a crush on one another back when they had both served on his command staff. Alvarez had then led the tactical team that had been assigned to Intrepid during Emilie’s search for the Kalassai. It seems their friendship has grown into something more, James thought as a small smile played across his face. Despite everything, it was a small heart-warming moment. Then he thought of the Karacknid battlefleet. It wasn’t hard to imagine what Emilie and Alvarez were saying to one another. They would both recognize it could be the last time they spoke. Content to leave his niece alone, James ended the attempted COM channel and turned his attention back to Drake’s main holo display.

If we are going to have a fight, we are going to take as many of them with us as we can, James thought as he eyed the Karacknid fleet. It was finally moving. The warships that had surrounded the planet were gathering together in a single formation. The troop ships and other support vessels that had been in orbit were already accelerating away from the planet. They wouldn’t want to be around once the fighting broke out. For twenty more minutes, James ran through scenarios in his head. He had no intention of just charging straight in, not when the Karacknids outnumbered him two to one. But if they did intend on trying to defend the planet, then there were a number of things he could try to isolate a part of the Karacknid fleet and blow it apart.

“Karacknid ships are powering up their main engines,” one of Drake’s sensor officers reported.

James mentally nodded to himself. It was what he would do. The Karacknids were going to come out of orbit to fight him. The more room they had to maneuver, the more they could use their numerical advantage to its full potential.

“They’re turning,” Fisher said as she sat forward in her Captain’s chair.

James frowned. He saw it too. The Karacknid warships were breaking orbit, but they were using the planet’s gravity to pull the noses of their ships away from his fleet. “They’re not going to fight,” James said, amazement filling his voice. “They’re pulling back!” Suddenly all the tension he had been feeling drained from his body. He was no longer leading his ships to certain death. Barely seconds later his suspicions skyrocketed. If the Karacknids were pulling back, that meant they were up to something else. Why else would they abandon the colony? Especially when they had hundreds of thousands of troops on the planet’s surface. “Launch a spread of stealth recon drones after the Karacknid fleet,” James ordered. “Organize a squadron of scouts to trail them as well, I want to know exactly where they are going. Make sure you get as detailed scans on them as we can. I want to know if we hurt them worse than we thought, or if they are pulling back for another reason. And get in contact with our ground forces on New Shanghai, I want to know the situation down there as soon as the Karacknids’ jamming dissipates enough for us to get a signal through.”

Several of his staff officers acknowledged James’ commands and got to work. James waited until Miyagi turned back to him. “Organize a conference call with the senior Admirals, I want to speak to them at once. I’ll go to my office to receive the call.”

Less than a minute later holo projections of all of the senior Admirals in James’ fleet were arrayed around the conference table in his office. “The Karacknids are pulling back from New Shanghai,” James said by way of introduction. “I doubt they intend to retreat for long. Probably they’ll carry out some repairs and return to crush us as soon as they can. But it gives us a window of opportunity. They have tens if not hundreds of thousands of ground troops on New Shanghai. Ground troops that are probably earmarked for the invasion of Earth. If we can strike at them and take most of them out, then we may delay the Karacknids’ invasion plans even longer than we have done by driving them away from New Shanghai. Once we get into orbit, we’ll begin bombarding any Karacknid forces that are out in the open. I suspect most of them will have sought cover amongst New Shanghai’s population centers. That’s probably why the Karacknids delayed breaking orbit for as long as they did. They were giving their ground forces time to find cover. My officers are still trying to make contact with whatever defending forces are still left. Given that it’s been more than sixteen hours since New Shanghai fell, whatever forces we have on the surface will likely be spread out and in disarray. That means we need to land fresh troops. I need all of you to organize whatever marines and personnel with combat experience that you have. We need to land as many forces as we can to quickly drive the Karacknids out of New Shanghai’s population centers. We may not have long before the Karacknid fleet returns.”

“All of my warships have a sizeable contingent of our ground warriors assigned to them,” Admiral Shraw said, his forked tongue flicking back and forth. James had no idea what the expression meant, but he sounded eager. “And I’m sure my warship crews would be eager to hunt our enemy down in the flesh as well. We could land four thousand warriors to assist your ground forces.”

“Thank you,” James said as he gave the reptilian Admiral a nod and a smile. He had only met a couple of Gramrians in person, but they had impressed him greatly. He had no doubt they would make deadly ground combatants.

“All my warships still have their full complement of marines,” Becket said next. She glanced down for a couple of seconds, presumably at a datapad. “We can land three thousand.” The other Admirals quickly joined in, sharing what ground forces they could contribute. After a brief discussion it was decided that Admiral Shraw’s senior ground commander would organize the landing in coordination with the senior surviving officer on New Shanghai.

“Very well” James said to bring the discussion to a close. “We don’t have any time to waste, let’s get to it.” Nodding at each of the Admirals, he cut the COM channel. He stood and quickly made his way back onto Drake’s bridge. As he moved to his command chair, he checked on the status of the Karacknid battlefleet. As far as he could see, nothing had changed. They were still accelerating away from New Shanghai towards the shift passage they had invaded the system from.

“I think our COMs are penetrating the Karacknid jamming,” Lieutenant Martinez said excitedly. “It’s broken, but I’m getting a reply.”

James held his breath as Martinez hunched over his COM console, clearly trying to make out whatever indications were coming from New Shanghai’s surface. It had hurt James deeply when he had given the order to retreat from New Shanghai less than a day ago. At the time he had feared he had been leaving his ground forces to die fighting the Karacknids. Though it had only been sixteen hours since the first Karacknid ground troops had landed, James knew sixteen hours was a long time when it came to a ground battle. Especially when the Karacknid warships in orbit had been bombarding the planet’s surface for most of that time.

*

Bozhou, New Shanghai

“Repeat, this… Lieutenant Martinez, I…” Johnston reached up and tapped his new long-range COM unit a couple of times. The scratchy voice coming over the COM channel didn’t improve. He ordered his combat armor to run a diagnostic on the unit. He held his breath as he waited. His armor had taken more than a few knocks. There was no guarantee the diagnostic would do anything. All of a sudden, the voice came through much clearer. “This is Lieutenant Martinez from IS Drake, I need to speak to the senior surviving ground commander.”

Johnston shook his head even as he replied. He had no idea how he was speaking to someone from Drake. “This is acting General Johnston. What is the purpose of your communication?”

“General Johnston sir, hold on I have Admiral Somerville wishing to speak to you,” the Lieutenant’s voice replied.

“Somerville?” Johnston asked, even more surprised. He knew Drake was Somerville’s flagship, but it made no sense that either the battleship or his friend were anywhere nearby. He got nothing but a few seconds of static in response to his question.

“Johnston, is that really you?” An awfully familiar voice asked. “How are things down there?”

“It is me Admiral,” Johnston replied. “Things are not good. My forces are at breaking point. What on Earth are you doing here? How am I speaking to you?”

“That’s a long story,” Somerville answered. “In short, Rear Admiral Becket arrived with a fresh fleet of one thousand warships just as we were about to jump out. We are just ten minutes away from entering orbit. It seems the Karacknid battlefleet doesn’t want to fight us again. At least, not yet.”

“That’s why they’ve been pushing so hard,” Johnston realized. “The Karacknids have been throwing everything at us without pause. They are trying to get their forces into our cities to protect them from orbital bombardment.”

“Have they made much progress?” James followed up.

Johnston wanted to laugh and cry at the same time. “You could say that. I doubt we could hold out another hour. I can’t speak for the rest of the major towns and cities, but Bozhou doesn’t have any longer than that.”

“Becket’s ships have nearly ten thousand ground troops they can land,” Somerville informed him. “They are already prepped and ready to go. Tell your forces they just have to hold on a little longer. Then we can give you some relief. We’ll also take out every Karacknid formation still out in the open. Can you hold on that long?”

Johnson honestly didn’t know the answer to that question, the battle for Bozhou had turned into hundreds of small squad or platoon sized engagements. “We can try,” was all he was able to promise. “Thank you,” he added. “I thought we were done for.”

“We may be done for yet,” Somerville replied, “but at least we’ve given you a little respite. I’ll let you get back to fighting your battle. Just make sure one of your staff officers coordinates with my people. We need to know where is best to land these troops.”

“I will see to it Admiral. Hopefully, we may yet see each other face-to-face again after all,” Johnston replied as he grinned and shook his head. He really had thought it had all been over.

“Let’s hope so General,” Somerville responded. “Drake out.”

As soon as the COM channel ended Johnston tried to access the command COM channel for his forces fighting in Bozhou. General Wu had been trying to get in contact with him about the Karacknids’ demand for surrender. Now he understood exactly why the offer had been made. If his marines had laid down their weapons ten minutes ago, the Karacknids would have taken the city before Somerville’s fleet could have entered orbit. “Wu, can you hear me?” he asked when his HUD told him his new long range COM unit had connected.

“General Johnston, it’s good to hear your voice, I thought we had lost you. Did the special forces marines I sent find you?” Wu replied immediately.

“They did,” Johnston replied. “Have you heard the COM message coming from space? Somerville’s fleet has returned! Please, tell me you haven’t responded to the Karacknids demand for surrender.”

“We haven’t yet,” Wu answered, “we were hoping we might still be able to find you.”

“Thank goodness,” Johnston said, his voice full of relief. “What is the condition of our forces?”

“Defensive line Zeta four has been breached in several locations. Several pockets of marines and militia have been surrounded, though they are fighting on. Most of the battalions we have left are fighting their own individual engagements,” Wu answered. “At a best guess, we have less than six thousand combat ready soldiers left.”

Johnston took a few moments to think. It was easy for him to pull up a mental picture of the city and the defensive lines he had prepared. “Send a general order to fall back to defensive line Theta-two. Everyone that can fall back safely should, the rest should find defensible positions and try and hold out for as long as they can. You must liaise with Drake. They plan to land ten thousand fresh troops. Land them behind Theta-three and move them up to the line. If our forces can get back to that defensive line, they will hopefully be able to hold long enough to be reinforced. Make sure they know we must hold the line, if they’re pushed back the shuttles may not have anywhere to land safely.”

“I understand General, we will get it done. What are you going to do?” Wu asked.

“A good question,” Johnston answered. Along with his COM link with Wu, connecting to the command network allowed him to pull up a map of the area. Beyond the special forces marines and what was left of the platoon he had been fighting alongside, there were no friendly forces within several blocks. Those that he could see were all retreating. No doubt there were hundreds of Karacknids between him and them. “I don’t think we’re making it back to Theta-two. At least not anytime soon.” Glancing around him, Johnston took in the six special forces Marines that were now standing guard. “But I think we can still make a nuisance of ourselves. Hold defensive line Theta-two and we’ll rejoin you eventually. Once Admiral Somerville’s reinforcements have arrived, they’ll likely want to try and counterattack. We’ll get into position to assist. You focus on getting what’s left of our forces to Theta-two in one piece and getting those reinforcements landed.”

“Understood General, good luck!” Wu replied.

After the COM channel ended, Johnston felt a moment of guilt. He should have stayed with his command staff. With reinforcements coming and a counterattack to plan, he would be more use there. But he hadn’t known any of that. And you wanted to die with a rifle in your hands, he said to himself. As he glanced at the special forces marines, he figured he might just get that wish anyway. “All right, listen up,” he said over the local COM channel. “What’s left of eighth platoon. You guys are staying here. We’ve got reinforcements coming from space. We’ll eventually counter-attack and clear the Karacknids out of this area. It’s too dangerous to try and push out just yet, however. Stay here, stay safe and wait for backup. Special forces marines, what may not be safe for others, we can easily handle. You probably think your skills have been wasted looking for me. I agree. But you’ve found me now, so there’s nothing to stop us having some fun. It looks like most of the Karacknid battalions have pushed past this skyscraper. They are trying to take the city center before Imperial ships return to orbit and start to bombard them. Let’s get out there and make a nuisance of ourselves, shall we?”

“Oorah,” came the reply from the marines. It brought a feral grin to Johnston’s face. There was nothing like hunting an enemy alongside a company of special forces marines.

Chapter 9

It took time for the technologies shared by the Mindus civilization to filter down into the everyday life of the Empire’s citizens. The War of Doom meant most of the research and the technological innovations were focused on improving our weapons and ships. When they did finally reach the civilian population, they quickly revolutionized many things.

-Excerpt from Empire Rising, 3002 AD.

As they moved down the skyscraper, Johnston quickly learned the names of the squad of marines. He then enquired about what they had been doing so far in the battle. Hours ago he had assigned both battalions of special forces marines to the reserve formations. He had been holding them back in case of an emergency. It seemed Wu had decided that the time to use them had come. They had been involved in a number of short sharp counterattacks as they helped the ordinary marines and militia hold the line.

“We stay quiet and do not engage,” Johnston informed the squad when they reached the ground floor of the skyscraper. “Miller, take us north-east towards Theta-three. We’ll move right in behind the Karacknid frontline. As soon as they make an attack on Theta-three we will hit them on the flank.”

“Yes General,” the squad’s sergeant replied. “Hernandez, take point. The rest of you fall in. Keep your eyes open. We are in enemy territory now.”

The squad crept from building to building, covering just over a block. Twice they almost ran into Karacknid patrols. A hand signal from Hernandez made everyone halt. They were in a small alley between a line of shops and some kind of administrative building. Further hand signals informed Johnston that there were two Karacknids just beyond the edge of the alley. Johnston added them to the map of the local area on his HUD. He had already marked the other two patrols they had encountered. He shook his head. Despite the Karacknids’ desire to take the city, they were going to great lengths to lockdown the sectors they had already secured. “There’s no way around them,” he whispered to Miller. “Not unless we’re going to double back to the skyscraper.”

Miller nodded and sent a simple hand signal to Hernandez and Smith. Both marines set down their plasma rifles and pulled out their long nano carbon knives. They inched towards the edge of the alleyway. Just before they reached it, Smith bent down and picked something up. He hurled it forward a moment later. The piece of debris landed in the middle of the wide street. Without pausing to see if the Karacknids turned towards the noise, Hernandez and Smith rushed out of the alleyway. Both of them took a sharp left and disappeared from view. As the seconds ticked by, Johnston glanced at Miller. Just as he was about to order that they fall back into a nearby building, Hernandez and Smith reappeared. Each was dragging a dead Karacknid soldier. At once Miller led the rest of the marines towards them. “Good work,” he whispered. He helped Hernandez lift his Karacknid. Together they stashed the body in one of the shops they had just come through.

Johnston stepped past the marines and moved towards the edge of the alleyway. Carefully he leant out and looked left and right. The street in front of them led straight towards defensive line theta-three. Just as he was about to step back and let Hernandez take point again, he felt a rumbling under his feet. A moment later a similar sound reached his ears. Glancing back, he signaled for Miller to join him. “Do you hear that?” he asked the Sergeant.

“Tanks,” Miller replied at once. “At least two of them.”

Johnston nodded. “If the Imperial Navy is about to retake the orbitals, they’ll be pushing all of their heavy equipment into the city where it can’t be hit from orbit.” From the direction of the sound, it seemed like the tanks were getting closer. “They are going to use them to hit Theta-two. There is no point trying to save them for later. We can’t let them get past us. What explosives does your squad have left?” Even though tanks were far more vulnerable fighting in an urban environment, Johnston knew the marines and militia defending Theta-two would have used up almost all of their anti-tank weapons. The sudden appearance of tanks along the frontline would probably be enough to break the defenders’ resolve. As Miller turned to check with his squad, Johnston sent a flash alert to Wu, the defenders needed to be warned.

“Two plasma grenades and a concussion mine,” Miller answered as he turned back to Johnston.

“The tanks won’t be on their own, there will be foot soldiers with them,” Johnston said. “But the street is pretty narrow. Their numbers won’t help them much. The concussion mine could take out one tank. Maybe we can improvise something for the others.” As he explained what he was thinking, Johnston could easily imagine Miller’s eyes widening behind his helmet. There was no way to know if his idea would work for sure, nor even if they’d actually get the chance to try it. But without any other weapons, their options were limited. “All right,” Johnston said when he finished explaining. “Get the concussion mine set up and get three of your guys across the street.”

Nodding, Miller turned and whispered to the rest of the squad. Johnston led Miller and two of the marines into the ground floor of the shop that faced onto the street. They quickly moved up to the second story of the building and found hiding places. Moments later the other three marines appeared at windows of an apartment complex across the street. One signaled to show that the concussion mine had been placed. Miller signaled back and then they all hunkered down and waited. As the noise of the tanks grew louder and louder and the vibrations from their tracks began to rattle through the building’s foundation, there was no need to peek out to watch their progress. Only when the first tank passed right beside them, and the sound of more approaching didn’t diminish did Johnston risk a quick look. Ducking down again he signaled to Miller to inform him there were two more tanks following the first.

For several more seconds he waited as he tried to judge when the tank would reach the concussion mine. The sudden explosion and shockwave that shook the building they were in told him the tank had reached it. He sprang to his feet, smashed the window with a plasma round, and then leaned over and rained plasma bolts down onto the Karacknid foot soldiers that were in formation between the first and second tanks. Out of the corner of his eye he saw the first tank had been blown onto its side. The concussion mine had done its job. Rather than place it on the street where the tank would have likely detected the mine, the marines had placed it on the inside wall of one of the buildings that faced the street. The explosive force had still been enough to lift the tank and turn it onto its side. In quick succession, Johnston shot four Karacknids. Then the remainder scattered. Just as they did, two more explosions erupted in their midst as the squad’s final plasma grenades went off.

“The tanks are tracking us!” one of the marines shouted over the squad COM channel. Johnson didn’t even wait long enough to glance at the barrel of the nearest tank. He moved away from the shop’s window. Joining up with Miller and the other two marines they charged towards the stairwell to the shop’s ground floor. They barreled into a handful of Karacknids who had charged the shop seeking to get up to the second floor. A swift firefight broke out. Without thinking Johnston blasted one Karacknid and then another. A groan from beside him told him one of the marines had been hit. There was no time to look. Instead he dove behind a display to get a better firing angle on one more Karacknid. As soon as the Karacknid was down he glanced left and right, scanning for more targets. None showed themselves. Only then did he turn back to see who had been hit. Miller was already helping Smith to his feet. There was a long scorch mark on Smith’s thigh.

“It’s only a flesh wound,” Smith said. He groaned nonetheless when he put weight on his leg. “As soon as the meds kick in, I’ll be all right.”

“Get into the next building over and give us covering fire,” Johnston ordered.

“The first tank is trying to right itself,” a marine reported. Just then one of the other tanks fired a shell into the shop. The second and third floors blew apart in the explosion. The sound of rubble falling made Johnston sprint out of the shop. As soon as he stepped onto the street he felt completely exposed, but it was better than being buried alive. To his left he spotted the upended tank. Two arms had appeared out of its turret, and one was trying to push the tank back upright. Sprinting towards it, Johnston yelled as he fired plasma bolt after bolt into the arm. At first it didn’t appear to be doing anything, but by the tenth and eleventh shots he could see the plasma burning through the arm. He kept firing and yelling as he covered the last few meters to the tank. Lowering his shoulder, he charged what was left of the arm. He let out a cry of satisfaction as his armor crashed into it and he felt it snap. As soon as he hit the ground, he rolled away just in time to miss being crushed by the falling tank.

Using the tank as cover, he raised himself into a crouch and surveyed the battlefield. The other two tanks were stuck behind their toppled comrade. Both of their turrets were pointing towards the upper stories of the nearby buildings. Secondary laser cannons were hurling beams in all directions. The Karacknid ground troops were nowhere to be seen. There were many bodies strewn around but Johnston guessed there were still more hiding in nearby buildings. “We need to flip them,” Johnston said over the COM channel. “Hernandez, Smith, Miller lay down covering fire. The rest of you with me. We’ll take out the second tank!” Waiting just long enough for Hernandez, Smith and Miller to start to fire and draw the attention of the tanks, Johnston sprang out from behind the one he was hiding behind. In a zigzag pattern he sprinted towards the second tank, drawing on every ounce of speed his augmented muscles and combat armor would give him. He didn’t bother firing any rounds at the tank, he didn’t need to draw its attention any more than he already had. Miraculously, he reached the tank in less than six seconds. In the blink of an eye three marines were at his side. A sudden scorch mark on the tank caused Johnston to spin. A Karacknid had made it to a second-floor window of one of the buildings that overlooked the street. Two plasma bolts from Johnston’s rifle cut him down before he could correct his aim.

“Together,” Johnston said as he slung his plasma rifle over his back. He was very much aware that a laser beam could burn its way through his chest at any moment. But he had to trust Miller and the others. Crouching, he grabbed onto the Karacknid battle tank. “Heave!” he bellowed. His HUD flashed and alarms went off as his combat armor screamed in protest at the forces being placed on it. For a second, Johnston thought he had mis-calculated the weight of the enemy battle tank. Then it moved. First just a centimeter or two, then several inches and then the tank began to lift up onto its side. Beside him, Johnson heard both marines grunt as they strained to flip the tank. Mere moments later it finally flipped onto its side. Johnston sprang behind it to take cover. He had a wide grin on his face. There was no way the Karacknids had expected their tanks to be filppable. Yet the Karacknids didn’t fight with battle armor. Without it, Johnston doubted even ten special forces marines could flip the battle tank. Probably a hundred ordinary marines couldn’t. But combat armor made it possible.

Johnston fired a few plasma bolts at any Karacknids that he spotted. Then a whirring noise made him look up. The tank’s arms were coming out to flip it upright. “Oh no you don’t,” Johnston said as he turned his plasma rifle and fired a series of bolts at one of the arms from nearly point-blank range. It took ten seconds of continuous fire, but eventually he burned through the arm. The tank immediately crashed back to the ground. “Time for the next one!” he called over the squad COM channel.

Jumping to his feet, he charged the third tank. Either because it hadn’t realized what had happened or its commander didn’t know what to do, the tank hadn’t moved yet. Even as Johnston ran towards it, its main turret recoiled as it blasted another apartment complex. The shockwave almost bowled him over. Johnston used it to throw himself into a slide. Then he jumped back to his feet and pivoted in the air as his back slammed into the tank. Once again, he looked around for targets, but no Karacknid foot soldiers appeared to be tracking him. A thud to his left made him spin around. He stopped raising his rifle when he saw it was Suzuki. “Where’s Manson? He asked. As he glanced past Suzuki, he got his answer. A marine with two large holes in his armor was lying the in the street halfway from the tank they had just flipped. Johnston swore. There was no way the two of them could flip the tank.

“Three o’clock low,” Suzuki snapped a moment later. Johnson swung round to see four Karacknids raising their rifles from inside the shop they had taken cover in. With no time to see for himself Johnston had no choice but to trust in his enhanced reflexes. Snapping his rifle to his shoulder, he squeezed the trigger six times. Three bolts each hit two of the Karacknids. Six from Suzuki took out the other two. Johnson didn’t have time to be impressed by his shooting. There were bound to be more Karacknids coming. Desperately he scanned all around him. The sudden movement of something towards the tank they had just flipped got his attention. For a split second he started to track it with his rifle, then he realized there was no way it was a Karacknid foot soldier. It was moving too fast. In what seemed like only a couple of heartbeats, Miller landed beside them. “I hear it takes three to flip one of these beauties,” he said as he reached down to grab hold of the tank. Johnston did the same. There was no time for a smart reply. Instead the three special forces marines grunted as one as they heaved on the tank together. Johnston’s combat armor and muscles protested at the effort, but in no time, they had the battle tank flipped over.

“Let’s get out of here,” Johnston screamed as soon as the tank was over. Leading Miller and Suzuki, he charged across the open street into the building where they had to shoot down four Karacknids. They cleared its ground floor. Then Johnson swung back towards the tank. It had its arm out and was trying to right itself. Plasma bolts from Johnston and Miller burnt through the arm. “Fall back,” Johnston snapped over the squad COM channel. He only waited long enough to glance back towards the first tank they had toppled. It still hadn’t righted itself. With a nod of satisfaction he turned and ran to the back of the shop. He was sure the Karacknids would have reinforcements coming their way. Hanging around any longer was only going to get them all killed.

For a block Johnston sprinted behind Miller as he led the way to the rendezvous point they had organized. When they got there, the other three were already there. “Everyone okay?” Miller asked as they hid in the basement of a commercial building.

“Smith has been hit harder than he’s letting on,” Hernandez said, but he ran all the way here, so I guess he’s not out of the fight yet. Miller moved over and checked out Smith’s injury. The Karacknid laser beam had burnt right through his combat armor and Johnston could see a lump of charred flesh. Soon the smell hit his nostrils as well.

“I don’t think they hit the bone,” Miller said as he stepped back. “But the pain meds from your combat armor aren’t going to last forever.”

“He stays here,” Johnston decided as he held Smith’s gaze. “Speed is our best advantage. We can’t risk taking you with us. Stay here, let your armor and implants work on your leg. Once reinforcements are landed the fighting will head back in this direction. We’ll link up with you then.” If it had been Miller or some other junior rank marine giving the order, Johnston suspected Smith would have protested. But he was hardly going to disobey an order from his General. “All right then,” Johnston said as he turned back to Miller. “The Karacknids will be hitting Theta-two any moment now if they haven’t already, we need to keep moving.” A quick check of the chronometer on his HUD told Johnston just eight minutes had elapsed since he had left the skyscraper. The reinforcement shuttles were just two minutes away. As soon as the Karacknids spotted them they’d throw everything they had at Theta-two. “Let’s get moving,” he ordered.

Chapter 10

Whilst fleet tactics have changed and evolved to match the changes in weapons and drive technologies over the centuries, the strategy and tactics of ground warfare have remained almost unchanged. The realities of a battle for a planetary body are still the same; one side typically occupies a particular piece of real estate and to get it, the other must push them off it. At least to a retired naval Rear Admiral, that is how it seems to me.

-Excerpt from Empire Rising, 3002 AD.

As Johnston moved closer to defensive line Theta-two with his squad of special forces marines, the sound of fighting grew louder. “Let’s not rush into the unknown,” Johnston cautioned when they paused in an apartment complex. “The Karacknids will know there are still enemy forces behind their lines. They will be on the lookout.”

“I’ll send Hernandez and Suzuki forward to scout things out,” Sergeant Miller suggested. Johnston nodded in response. The two marines quickly left the complex and disappeared from sight. Sixty seconds later Johnston peeked out one of the windows. Imperial shuttles were descending through the atmosphere. The sight made him smile. It turned into a frown when more than a hundred missiles streaked into the sky. Defensive weapons from the shuttles took out many of them, but at least three shuttles were blown apart.

Hernandez returned seconds later, apparently unaware of what was going on in the skies above them. “There’s at least a platoon of Karacknids dead ahead of us. They are attacking Theta-two. It looks like our guys have already been pushed back by half a block at least.”

“It will take at least five if not ten minutes for that first wave of reinforcements to get to the defensive line,” Miller commented.

Hernandez shook his head. “They will not hold that long.” As he spoke, he sent a file to Miller and Johnston. It was a map of the local area with the enemy units they had spotted marked on it.

Johnson studied it for several seconds. It looked like the Karacknids had three squads protecting their rear whilst the rest of the platoon was engaging Theta-two. “We’ll take out this squad here,” Johnston decided as he selected the southernmost rear-guard squad. Then we’ll push straight into the Karacknids’ flank. That will grind their advance to a halt. We’ll strike hard and fast and then pull back. I don’t want us getting bogged down. If we do, we’ll be no use to anyone.”

“Understood General, my marines can handle that,” Miller responded.

“Take charge Sergeant,” Johnston said as he gave Miller a nod. “I’ll stick with you and provide fire support.” Squad on squad engagements was what special forces marines trained for day in day out. Though Johnston knew all the strategies and tactics, Miller was far more in tune with his marines than Johnston would be.

“Yes sir,” Miller replied. He barked out orders as he organized how his squad would proceed. Moments later they were on the move. Just before they reached the point where the Karacknid squad was, Hernandez split off from the group. Moving left while the rest of the squad moved right, he entered a building that faced the Karacknid squad. He sent a single click across the squad COM channel to say he was in position. Miller sent two clicks back. At once Hernandez opened fire on the Karacknids. Their response was swift. Tens of laser beams peppered Hernandez’s building. “Move,” was the only verbal order Miller gave. The other four special forces marines and Johnston reacted instantly. They rushed towards the Karacknids. Everyone held their fire until the first Karacknid turned towards them, then every rifle began to spit superheated blobs of plasma. None of the Karacknids were able to return fire. Without pausing the marines charged down the street the Karacknids had been guarding. Ahead they could see weapons fire being exchanged between the Karacknids and the Human defenders.

“These two buildings,” Miller said as he selected two buildings on everyone’s HUD. The densest Karacknid fire was coming from them. “Hit the first two floors and then pull back.”

Sticking to Miller’s shoulder, Johnston followed him into the southern building. It was a bank or some other commercial building with a large foyer. Only two Karacknids were guarding the ground floor. Both fell before they knew what was happening. Quickly the Marines found a stairwell leading up. Suzuki took point. As soon as his head reached the next level he fired. Barrow and Miller were right behind him. As Johnston charged up, he was greeted by chaos. There were at least fifteen Karacknids spread out across a large office space. Two thirds were still at the office’s windows firing towards whatever marines and militia they were attacking. The rest had figured out they were under attack from behind. Some were firing where they stood, others were diving for cover. Miller and his marines had already found cover and were firing back. For a second Johnston found himself the focus of most of the Karacknids’ fire, cursing he dove to the ground and rolled behind a large desk. Knowing it would give him next to no protection, he was on his knees firing back in a split second.

With the fire coming from the defenders of Theta-two, it took a number of seconds for many of the Karacknids to figure out they were under attack. The marines did not waste those seconds. Most of the Karacknids shooting at them were taken out as the marines quickly moved from cover to cover. As he advanced, Johnson pulled his plasma pistol. With rifle in one hand and pistol in the other, he charged into the midst of the Karacknids, both triggers fully depressed. He shot the Karacknids who were facing him first, then he tore into those who still had their backs to him. In a matter of seconds it was over. All of the Karacknids were on the ground. Many were smoking as plasma burned through their armor and thick scales.

“Sergeant,” Barrow called out. His tone of voice made Johnston spin. Barrow was crouched over the form of another marine.

“Suzuki,” Miller said as he rushed over to the marine’s side. With a tap on Suzuki’s helmet, the combat armor retracted. It revealed a lifeless expression. Gently Miller half turned Suzuki’s body over. He revealed three deep scorch marks on the marine’s back.

Just as Miller looked up to share a look with Johnston something landed on the other side of Suzuki. An explosion picked up Suzuki’s body and smashed it into Miller’s. It also threw Johnston off his feet. “Grenade!” he shouted as he looked around to see where it had come from. Movement at the far end of the offices caught his eye. Karacknids were moving into the open area from a side door. “There’s probably another stairwell over there,” he said as he flashed the area on his HUD. “There is no cover here, we can’t hold this position. It’s time to bug out.”

“You heard him,” Miller roared as he pushed Suzuki’s body off himself and rose to his knees.

Johnston fired blindly over his shoulder as he rushed towards the stairwell they had taken up from the ground floor. Barrow beat him to it and took point. Together the three of them rushed down the stairs and out of the building. The three marines who had taken the north building were back on the street. They too had clearly decided they had done enough damage. As all five marines sprinted down the street, laser beams zipped past them. From his original position, Hernandez laid down covering fire. Johnson didn’t dare turn back to see what the Karacknids were doing, but thanks to Hernandez their fire slackened. It took just a handful of seconds for them to reach the bottom of Hernandez’s building and the marines all rushed in. “Don’t stop,” Miller ordered. “Hernandez, get down here.” Following their Sergeant’s orders, the marines rushed through the building and out one of its rear doors. They passed through three more before Miller finally called a halt to the retreat. “Hernandez, take point, move us east. No contact unless absolutely necessary.”

Slowly, the squad moved off. After thirty seconds or so without any sign of pursuit, they picked up their pace. Content to let the marines keep an eye on their surroundings, Johnston accessed the command datanet. Information on it was a hodgepodge of reports and estimated enemy positions. One thing was clear, Theta-two was about to break, if it hadn’t already. “Three more blocks,” Johnston ordered. “Keep heading this way for three more blocks. Then we need to turn and hit the Karacknids again. The defensive position there is faltering.”

Johnston felt small tremors run under his feet. For a second he thought it meant tanks were nearby. The customary rumble that accompanied the advance of Karacknid tanks didn’t reach his ears though. Orbital bombardments, he told himself. Some allied ships had begun to hit whatever Karacknid forces were outside the city. As he was in a narrow alleyway between two large buildings he couldn’t look out towards the outskirts of the city. But Johnston was sure that if he could, he’d see multiple streaks of fire reaching down from the atmosphere.

“We are here,” Miller said over the squad COM channel. “Hernandez, take a look and report back.”

As the rest of the squad remained in the alley taking cover, Hernandez disappeared. He was back within thirty seconds. “It looks like another full platoon is pushing forward. There are hardly any signs of anyone resisting them. They have a tank as well. And I think they are expecting us. Looks like several squads are on high alert covering their rear.”

Miller turned and glanced at Johnston. “There’s nothing else for it,” Johnston said to the Sergeant. “We’ll attack them head on. If we can punch through their rear-guard then we’ll keep moving. If not, at least it will distract their main attack.”

“Understood sir,” Miller replied. He laid out an attack plan to his marines and then they were on the move. Splitting into three fireteams of two, they sorted out good firing positions. When Miller sent a click across the squad COM channel, they all opened up on one of the Karacknid squads.

Expecting an attack, only two Karacknids fell before the rest were behind cover. They returned fire. A second Karacknid squad quickly joined the fight. In position with Miller, Johnston switched his fire towards the new threat. Behind them he saw more movement. “They are trying to flank us,” he reported.

Ducking back down behind cover, Miller glanced in the direction Johnston had indicated. “Fire team one, stay where you are. Fire team two fall back to the West. Cut off any flanking attack.” As soon as he stopped speaking, Miller popped up and fired a few more plasma bolts towards the first Karacknid squad. Johnson was still engaging the second. “I don’t think we can break through them,” Miller informed Johnston. “Not like this.”

“Engaging their flanking attack,” Hernandez reported over the COM channel. “Two squads are trying to break past us.”

“Fighting retreat,” Johnston snapped. “We’ll pull back and try and disengage. Then we can circle around and try and hit the platoon’s attacking units.”

Miller snapped out orders. Seconds later, Johnston was on his feet as he followed Miller out of the building. Glancing towards the Karacknids, he saw they had left their cover and were advancing. Firing a few bolts from his hip, Johnston forced a couple of Karacknids to dive for cover. Then he turned a corner and they were out of sight. Over the next minute the marines fell back and regrouped. Then they counter-attacked the two squads that had been trying to flank their position. Four Karacknids fell before the rest halted their charge. “Other squads will try and flank us now,” Miller guessed. “Keep falling back,” he ordered as he led the marines back through two more blocks. “All right, now we turn west. Don’t engage unless you’re spotted.”

For a couple of minutes the special forces marines snuck around the Karacknid squads pursuing them. They ended up just a couple of hundred meters to the west of where they had initially engaged the Karacknids. “They’ve already pushed forward by at least a block or two,” Hernandez reported after moving forward to recon the rest of the Karacknid platoon. “The tank is almost constantly moving forward. The defenders have nothing to stop it.”

Johnston swallowed hard. He knew they had a technique that would work, but if there was a full platoon of Karacknids out there Miller’s marines would be cut apart if they tried to get close enough to the tank out in the open. “Move up and engage their foot soldiers, perhaps we can get the tank to try and take us out rather than keep advancing,” he said to the marines. “The reinforcements can’t be far away now. The first wave will have landed and should be moving up to the front. They’ll have hyper velocity missiles and other anti-tank weapons. We just need to buy time.”

“Then let’s get to it,” Miller responded. “Three fire teams again. We’ll leapfrog one another as we advance.”

Sticking with Miller, Johnston sprinted forward with the squad. Hernandez and his partner engaged the Karacknids first. Three were killed within seconds. As the rest of the squad and another one turned to face the new threat, the next fire team appeared on their flank and hurled more plasma bolts at them. Then it was Miller and Johnston’s turn. Rushing out of the building they had used to move forward, they charged into the midst of the Karacknids. Once again Johnson had his rifle in one hand and pistol in another. They got to within five meters before the Karacknids spotted them. It was far too late. Within seconds they had dispatched all twelve Karacknids from both squads. Glancing behind him, Johnston saw that the other two fire teams were already moving up to continue the advance. Turning back around, he raised his plasma rifle and fired down the street towards the Karacknid battle tank. Miller did the same. Instantly new weapons fire was directed their way as Karacknid foot soldiers followed the stream of plasma bolts back to its source and opened fire. Ducking for cover, Johnson and Miller waited a second and popped up to fire more bolts at the battle tank. They didn’t stop until the tank’s turret began to turn towards them. “Let’s move!” Johnston snapped. They made it off the street and into a nearby building just as a shell blew the two air cars they had been using for cover to bits.

“We’re pinned down,” Hernandez reported. “I don’t think we are moving forward anymore.”

“The other squads we slipped past will be circling back around behind us,” Johnston said to Miller even as he popped out of one of the building’s windows and took out a Karacknid. He was still looking out the window when two extremely fast-moving blips flew straight up the street and struck the Karacknid battle tank. It blew apart in a massive ball of flames. Suddenly there were other forms racing down the street from the direction the Karacknids had been attacking. It took Johnson a second to figure what he was looking at. The shapes were moving far too quickly to be ordinary marines. Yet they didn’t look like special forces marines. The clearest giveaway were the purplish munitions that were streaming from each shape. It looked like each soldier had two guns that were firing hundreds of shots in quick bursts. At least ten of the shapes flowed down the street. They moved and fired with an efficiency Johnston could hardly believe. As they came closer, he was able to make out their shape. All he could think of was a velociraptor. The description sent his mind to the Gramrians. He had met a couple before. Yet they had never moved with such speed. Momentarily distracted from the danger he was in; Johnston stood and watched the Gramrian soldiers overrun the Karacknid positions. Their charge was so quick that they were through the Karacknids’ front line before the Karacknids could put up any resistance. The rate at which the Gramrians switched targets was like nothing Johnston had ever seen. It seemed like both of their rifles were firing in separate directions independently of one another. Yet, as far as Johnston could see, they were hitting their targets every time.

Movement just in front of him caught Johnston’s attention. Three Karacknids were trying to fall back. He blasted them with his plasma rifle. The two nearest Gramrians swiveled towards him. For half a second he thought they were going to open fire. Instead, they lowered their heads and charged in his direction. They were close enough that he was able to see forked tongues flicking in and out as the raptor like creatures accelerated through the street. Stepping back from the window, Johnston waited for them to join him. In the blink of an eye, they burst through the window and moved to take cover from any fire that might come from the street.

“Lieutenant Him’sla,” the Gramrian began. It paused when its eyes settled on Johnston’s rank insignia. “General? We weren’t expecting to encounter a General on the front lines.”

“General Johnston,” Johnston replied as he gave the Gramrian a slight bow. “I’m the senior commander of New Shanghai’s ground forces.”

“Even more peculiar,” Him’sla replied.

“Your soldiers fight extremely well,” Johnston commented. “That was an impressive engagement.”

“Thank you General, from what we’ve seen, it looks like your people have been heavily engaged. We are glad to provide assistance,” Him’sla said.

“What is the strategic situation?” Johnston asked. “How many of your troops are there?”

“We have several thousand,” Him’sla replied. “Most have been landed. We are pushing through the Karacknids’ frontlines at several points and driving into their rear. The marines and other troops that have been landed are beginning a more general assault right across the frontline. We are breaking up the Karacknid defenses and driving them back.”

Johnston nodded, given what he had just seen of the Gramrian’s abilities, it seemed like an effective use of their skills. A sudden movement caused both Johnston and Him’sla to turn slightly. At the other end of the small foyer, four Karacknids had just appeared. For a fraction of a second both groups stared at one another. Then they charged. Him’sla and the other Gramrian reached the Karacknids first. Claws, tails and razor-sharp teeth crashed into one another. For a split-second Johnston hesitated as he looked for an opening. Then a Karacknid arm swung towards him. Ducking under it, he rammed his nano carbon knife into the Karacknid’s armpit. Ripping it out, he smashed the muzzle of his rifle into the Karacknid’s back and held down the trigger. By the time the Karacknid slumped to the floor, the fight was over. Both Him’sla and his partner were covered in Karacknid blood, yet they looked unharmed. Johnston glanced at Miller; he was standing on the edge of the fight. The sergeant gave a slight shake of his head, he hadn’t even been able to engage the Karacknids.

“That was impressive General,” Him’sla said, “I see now why you command your species’ ground forces.”

Johnson didn’t know how to reply. He had killed one whilst Him’sla and the other Gramrian had killed three between them. He was the one who was impressed. “How would your squad like some company?” he asked instead.

“Five minutes ago and I would have asked if you could keep up,” Him’sla replied. He glanced at Miller and back to Johnston. “But I suspect that’s not a relevant question for you two. You can join us if you wish, but remain in the rear, you can provide extra fire support.”

Johnston nodded, that was fine with him. Though a part of him felt like he should be returning to link up with General Wu and whoever was commanding the reinforcements, he wanted to see just what the Gramrians could do. And I’m going to see this through to the finish, he said to himself. “Lead on,” he said as he bowed to Him’sla. “We’ll provide fire support and cover your rear.”

The next ten minutes were largely a blur for Johnston. With the rest of Miller’s squad, he remained in the middle of the Gramrian formation as they charged through the Karacknid lines. They encountered two reserve battalions. Each time they cut a path right through the middle of the enemy formation with barely a moment’s pause. It was almost all Johnston could do to keep up with the Gramrians. He maybe killed one or two Karacknids, but that was it. What amazed him the most was the accuracy the Gramrian soldiers displayed. With a rifle in each hand, it seemed they could take out targets at almost any angle. On more than one occasion, Johnston saw both rifles from one Gramrian shoot at the same time and hit both targets. It’s their eyes, Johnston finally realized. With raptor like heads, the Gramrians’ eyes covered an angle of nearly two hundred and seventy degrees. When he looked closely at Him’sla when he came close to Johnston again, he saw that each was moving independently from the other. They can see even better than I can with my augments and combat armor, he was forced to conclude. The perfect predator.

By the time Him’sla called a halt to their charge, Johnston was very relieved that the Gramrians were on their side. As scary as the Karacknids were, especially to non-augmented marines, the Gramrians were on another level. He still had no idea how they had arrived at New Shanghai, but he didn’t care about that at the moment. When Him’sla led them round a corner into a large open square Johnston was taken aback. There were at least a hundred Gramrians spread out within the square. “I’ll take you to our Colonel,” Him’sla said as he led Johnston towards the center of the square.

Minutes later Johnston understood the Gramrians’ plan. To his surprise, the Colonel had been able to fully connect Johnston’s combat armor to the Gramrian command and control network. It seemed a lot of work had already been done to integrate the Gramrian forces into the Imperial Marines. Along with the group of one hundred and forty Gramrians gathered with Johnston, twenty other groups were being formed behind the Karacknids’ main forces. As the Imperial Marines that had been landed began to push forward against the Karacknids, the Gramrian forces that had already punched through their lines were forming up into larger battalions and turning to encircle the Karacknids from behind. On the 3D map of Bozhou, Johnston could tell the battle was already over. The Karacknid forces had been bloodied in their desperate attempt to take the city before reinforcements could be landed. The sudden appearance and charge of the Gramrians had caught them by surprise. Now their lines were a mess. The Imperial Marines were pushing back the Karacknids in every sector of the battle. A second wave of reinforcements was being landed and other forces were being landed outside the city to push in from that direction as well. There were still tens of thousands of Karacknids fighting within Bozhou, but they had lost their cohesion. “All right,” Johnston said to the Gramrian Colonel, a grim expression on his face. “Let’s finish this.”

Chapter 11

In order to lead, a naval commander must know the mind of his Captains.

-Excerpt from Empire Rising, 3002 AD.

IS Drake, New Shanghai orbit (6 hours later).

“Thank you all for coming,” James said as he stood and looked around the conference room at all the Admirals, Flag Captains and Marine Commanders present. Usually the familiar faces would have brought a smile to James’ lips. Yet all he could think about were the faces that were missing. The room should have been twice as full. “I know the last twenty-four hours have been harrowing for all of us,” he continued solemnly. “We have all lost friends and allies. The battle of New Shanghai is the greatest military defeat Humanity has ever suffered. Yet here we are, our ships are once again in orbit around the colony. For now at least the Karacknid battlefleet has pulled back. We have Rear Admiral Becket and the Conclave species to thank for that.” Pausing, James nodded to each of the senior Conclave Admirals. “Without them, we’d be retreating to Earth certain that our homeworld was just weeks away from being conquered.” Pausing again, James placed both hands on the conference table. “We must face reality. That scenario is still a serious risk. The time Becket’s fleet has bought us will likely be numbered in hours and days, not weeks. We must decide what our next steps will be. The fate of Earth and indeed the entire war hangs in the balance. All of our collective wisdom is needed in making this decision, so where do we think we are at?”

“On behalf of the Alliance fleet, let me first add my thanks to our Conclave friends for their timely arrival,” Ya’sia said as she bowed deeply towards where the Conclave Admirals sat. “If the Karacknids had decided to pursue us, we might all be dead now if it weren’t for your willingness to come to our aid.”

“We share a common foe,” Admiral Shraw said, speaking for the Conclave commanders. “We all stand or fall together. Though I will admit, seeing the size and destructive power of the Karacknid battlefleet is quite different from simply reading about it in the Kalassai intelligence report. Nevertheless, our ships will fight this enemy to our last.”

“If your warships fight as impressively as your ground troops, then there may be hope for us yet,” Johnston commented.

As James looked around, he saw Johnston was sharing a glance with the Gramrian General sat next to Shraw. He then looked to James. James gave him a smile. He had been more than a little relieved when he had learnt Johnston had survived the battle. His concern had grown again when it had come out that Johnston had been on the front lines and had fought with the Gramrian ground troops. Still, he was here now which meant somehow the General had survived the odds. “Perhaps beginning with you is the best place to start,” James said, still looking at Johnston. “Can you update us on New Shanghai’s condition?”

Johnston nodded as he brought his hands together. He took a deep breath before speaking. “The Karacknid invasion forces have largely been defeated. Though at great cost. Their initial landings and attacks on our major cities cost us most of the ground forces we had committed to the defense. At least thirty thousand marines and militia have been KIA. Half that again are serious casualties. We estimate as many as eighty thousand Karacknids have been killed. Many of those thanks to the orbital bombardments from your warships. That leaves as many as eighty thousand more still active on the planet. Most have been scattered by our counterattacks. A few key towns and one city are still in their hands. We have forces moving to retake those locations as we speak. The rest have gone to ground. They are mainly hiding in the colony’s urban areas. It may take weeks or even months to root them all out.”

“What is the condition of your remaining forces?” Lightfoot asked.

“We have about twenty thousand troops currently involved in combat operations,” Johnston answered. “There’s at least another thirty thousand scattered around, we’re currently working to reform them into combat units. Once we do, we will have a much larger force to root out the surviving Karacknids. Though it may take a day or two.”

“And civilian casualties?” Becket asked.

Johnston shook his head. “There’s no way to know for sure. All the hospitals are back up and running, at least those that have been cleared of Karacknids. They are being overwhelmed with civilian casualties. Given the destruction I’ve seen in Bozhou alone, we could be talking about deaths in the tens of thousands. Across the whole colony, I’m afraid I don’t have any way of judging that yet.”

James ground his teeth together. He had read Johnston’s initial report on the ground fighting. He knew most of the civilians had been evacuated to the center of Bozhou. Even though the fiercest fighting hadn’t reached that area before Becket’s reinforcements were landed, the loss of life was still severe. His fleet had lost more than three hundred thousand dead in the space battle. With the losses the Marines, Militia and civilians had suffered, that number was only going to keep rising. “I’ve already given orders for all the medical supplies we can spare to be sent down to the planet,” he said. “We are also ferrying up some of the more seriously injured to care for in our medical bays, but we have a very limited capacity given all the casualties we have suffered ourselves. Tell me, how long do you think you could hold the colony if we had to break orbit with the fleet?”

Johnson glanced left and right at the other senior Marine officers he had brought with him before turning back to answer. “Half a day, maybe several hours longer than that. But no longer. The main thing keeping the scattered Karacknid forces from combining into an army that could go on the offensive is the threat of orbital bombardment. As long as we can keep the Karacknid forces separated, we can use our mobility and air superiority to take them out group by group. I have very little confidence we could actually retake the planet without orbital support, even with Becket’s reinforcements.”

“Then we must take that into our considerations,” James said with a nod. Though it was only one more thing to add to his list of concerns. As important as New Shanghai’s population was, he had the whole Empire to think about. “Whatever we decide now,” he continued as he looked at his fellow Admirals, “lives are going to be lost. Including some of our own. Even with our reinforcements we cannot defend everywhere.”

“That may be what it takes,” Jil’lal said. “When Becket’s fleet first arrived, we chose to charge the Karacknids thinking that they would likely stand and fight us. We were fortunate that they retreated. It has given us the opportunity to come to General Johnston’s aid. But stopping the Karacknid ground forces has not changed the strategic situation. It made sense to try and bring the Karacknid battlefleet to battle now while it is still damaged and potentially at its weakest. Should we not break orbit and pursue them further? An engagement now may still be our best chance at cutting their numbers enough to prevent any further conquests.”

“You just heard General Johnston’s report,” Shraw countered. “If the fleet breaks orbit now, the planet may fall back into Karacknid hands. We would be abandoning the ground forces we just landed.”

James was pleased at the Gramrian Admiral’s willingness to speak up. He didn’t want the Conclave Admirals to think they weren’t an equal part of the discussion. Mentally he gave Becket a nod of approval. She had clearly set a good example for them.

“I understand the consequences,” Jil’lal responded. “And I know what it may mean for all of us. But we are fighting a large multisystem war. As important as New Shanghai is, the colony’s loss will not change things one way or another. With the loss of all the orbital battlestations we brought here, the colony has little strategic importance. That was why Admiral Somerville ordered us to retreat when he did. We were all willing and ready to fight to the last to defend the colony and its battlestations. But things have changed.”

“Jil’lal is right,” Lightfoot agreed. “We must think of the wider picture. However, several things have changed over the last few hours. The Karacknids have had time to begin repairs. Even with just half a day they have probably been able to return a lot of their warships to something akin to combat readiness. We have been doing the same with our ships but their numerical superiority means they will be getting more ships back to combat readiness quicker than we can. We also detected eighty new ships joining their fleet. Eighty is far smaller than the one thousand Becket joined us with, but it still tips the balance more in the Karacknids’ favor.”

“And those eighty ships are ships we have detected before,” Ya’sia said as she joined Lightfoot’s argument. “They were scout and raiding ships that have returned. We know there are at least another one perhaps two hundred more out there. They could be on their way back to the system as well. If we charge out and attack the Karacknids now, we may be offering them their best chance to completely destroy our fleet. At the moment the Karacknids appear to be hesitant about fighting us. That in itself may buy us time for reinforcement fleets from Alliance space to join us.”

“And yet we know that the Karacknids have more ships as well,” James cautioned. “Captain Scott detected ten thousand warships in their battlefleet. So far no more than half that number have advanced into our territory. We suspected the Karacknids had fuel issues. That may be why no more ships have been able to advance. But they’ve had months to correct that problem. And they’ve captured the Rillelio system. If and when the Alliance reinforcement fleets arrive, they may be just in time to see thousands more Karacknid warships join the enemy battlefleet. At the moment the balance of strength is as much in our favor as it has been since this battlefleet was first detected. We may not get a better chance to strike them than right now.” As he finished speaking, silence descended around the conference table. Everyone understood what had just been outlined. If they attacked now, they would undoubtedly lose all their ships, yet they could also cripple the Karacknid battlefleet and prevent it from advancing further. Yet if significant Karacknid reinforcements were on the way, they could fight and die and it might all turn out to be for nothing.

“We are forgetting to consider our opponent’s position,” Admiral Nogamoro eventually said to break the silence. “We know the Karacknid commander is very capable. He did not fall back from New Shanghai simply out of fear. Equally, he has not retreated from the system for a purpose. Right now his ships sit right on the edge of the system’s mass shadow. He could jump out at any moment. That may make trying to launch an attack impossible, even if we wanted to. If we broke orbit and pursued him, his fleet could simply jump out. On the other hand, if they didn’t jump out it would tell us he was willing to fight. That in itself should worry us.”

“Unless he can’t jump out,” Jil’lal responded. “We know our fighters hit many of their ships hard. Perhaps the Karacknids have several hundred or more ships that are not yet shift space capable. If we advanced on them the Karacknids could be forced to leave a large squadron behind. And even if they didn’t, simply forcing the Karacknids to jump out of the system would buy us several days if not a week in and of itself.”

Nogamoro nodded. “Or they could be baiting us. They could have more reinforcements ready to jump into the system at a moment’s notice. They could wait until we got close enough so that we couldn’t disengage and then bring them in.”

Jil’lal brought her forehands together in a Vestarian sign of agreement. “There are risks and unknowns with attacking or retreating. Without access to information we do not have about Karacknid reinforcements and the current condition of their fleet, we may never be able to discern the correct decision.”

“I have heard from some of you,” James said as he looked from Lightfoot to Ya’sia, Jil’lal and Nogamoro, “but what about the rest? All of your opinions are important here.”

James listened as the other Admirals weighed in on the debate. Though he had been leaning in one direction before the conference had begun, it was only as the others spoke and presented arguments and counter arguments that he came to a settled position. “I think,” James said when a lull in the conversation occurred, “that there are too many risks in attacking. Nogamoro is right. With the Karacknids keeping their fleet right on the mass shadow, we cannot try and bring them to battle. Either they will jump away and avoid contact, or if they don’t, it will be because they are confident of victory. Unless someone has a new argument to make, I believe we should make preparations to pull back from New Shanghai. We will stay here as long as the Karacknids allow us to, but as soon as they begin to advance, we will fall back. The Alliance reinforcements are several weeks away from Earth. If we can keep the Karacknids busy here that long, then when we are forced to fall back, we may yet meet them on more even terms. To that end I propose we make every effort to fortify New Shanghai again. We can try and salvage the damaged battlestations and hangar bays that are still in orbit. We can send some of our empty supply freighters to nearby systems and bring in more supplies and even more fighters if we can get our hands on them. If we can make it look like we are preparing to defend the system again, the Karacknids may delay their eventual attack as they wait for their own reinforcements. In reality, we’ll be making preparations to retreat and bring much of our strength with us. Anything we can salvage from the damaged battlestations we can use to defend Earth.”

Lightfoot was the first to respond. “That sounds like a good plan Admiral. It will give our crews something to focus on. If we just sat around waiting in orbit for the Karacknids to advance everyone would end up replaying our first defeat over and over again.”

“I am in agreement as well,” Ya’sia said. “I know Alliance High Command understands just how critical this sector of the war is. If we can delay the Karacknids’ advance to Earth long enough, the reinforcements we need will arrive.”

Following Ya’sia, each Conclave Admiral voiced their consent to the plan. Finally, only Jil’lal had not spoken. James turned in his seat to face her and raised an eyebrow. Slowly she nodded. “There are great risks involved in either course of action. I fear that if we fall back Earth may come under serious threat. But if this is your decision, then I will follow you. Of course I will.” James returned the Vestarian’s nod. The truth was he didn’t know what the right course of action was. Jil’lal’s fears might very well turn out to be correct. But he couldn’t see how he could bring the Karacknid fleet to battle, not when they were sitting right on the system’s mass shadow.

“What about my marines and all the ground troops your fleet just landed?” Johnston asked. “As soon as your fleet pulls back, the Karacknids will return, retake the orbitals and resume conquering the planet.”

James took a deep breath. “If we pull back, we will be handing New Shanghai over to them. There is no getting around that. That is why we will make preparations to evacuate all our ground troops. Your forces will continue to eradicate the Karacknids that are on the colony’s surface. But they must be ready to pull back to our ships at a moment’s notice.”

“And just abandon the colony?” Johnston asked as his voice rose. “Tens of thousands of my people have died defending the colony’s citizens. Every square inch the Karacknids advanced has been bathed in marine and militia blood. Every square inch we retake will cost even more. How can we just hand it back to them when they return?”

“I understand your feelings,” James said as he raised a hand towards Johnston in a conciliatory gesture. “The Navy has paid a heavy price in blood to defend New Shanghai’s orbitals. But we must think of the bigger picture. The ground forces the Karacknids landed here were no doubt earmarked for the conquest of Earth. That we have hurt them so badly and inflicted such casualties on them hopefully means they will not be able to invade Earth so soon. If they cannot conquer the planet’s surface, then they may delay trying to take Earth’s orbitals. Therefore, the harder we make it for the Karacknids to land a ground army on Earth, the more time we will buy for the Alliance reinforcements to reach us. That is why we need every marine and militia on New Shanghai to come back to Earth. If the Karacknids see us taking your forces away, they will know we are redeploying you to Earth. They will have to gather enough of their own forces to be confident of taking our homeworld before pushing forward. Your soldiers will better serve the war on Earth than by remaining behind on New Shanghai.”

Johnston grimaced. James opened his mouth to say more before his friend could argue. He stopped when Johnston looked down at his feet. “My people aren’t going to like this. I don’t like this. We have lost too many of our own to simply hand the planet over to the Karacknids. But I understand the strategic situation. We will just have to get over the sour taste it will leave in our mouths.”

James gave his friend a nod of thanks when Johnston slowly raised his head. He then clapped his hands. “Then the decision has been made. I am not any more pleased with it than General Johnston. But I believe it is the best plan we have. Now, my Chief of Staff has a number of items he wishes to run through with us. Sooner or later we are going to have to fight the Karacknids together. Our fleet now represents thirteen different species. As much as we can, we must fight as one.” Turning to Miyagi, James gestured for him to take over.

For the rest of the meeting, James allowed Miyagi and his Admirals to work through the finer details of how the fleet might fight together. His mind was still very much on the decision he had made and its possible implications. Only when they had covered everything Miyagi wished to, did he thank all of the Admirals and ground commanders for coming. He shook hands and greeted each of them as they left. He was pleased when he saw Becket was the last to leave. When she held out her hand, he grasped it and then pulled her into a hug. “It is good to see you again in person,” he said as he released her. “You saved us, and in more ways than one. We were defeated when your ships arrived. Both physically and mentally. Now you have given us a new lease of life. Despite all the losses we suffered, there is hope. I have you to thank for that. Who would have thought it all those years ago when you were a green Sub Lieutenant back on Drake? Now you’re one of Humanity’s best Admirals. What you achieved in your Valley campaign was spectacular. And then you got your ships here just in the nick of time to stave off disaster.”

Becket’s cheeks reddened. She glanced down and shook her head as she looked up. “You can hardly attribute all that to me. Admiral Shraw and the others were just as vital in the Valley campaign. And if it wasn’t for the Kalassai and the relationship Emilie built with them, we would have known nothing about the Karacknid battlefleet. At least not in time to have done anything about it. More importantly, if it wasn’t for your tutelage and example, I wouldn’t have been able to do any of it.” Stepping forward, Becket pulled James into another hug, as they parted, she gave him a light kiss on his cheek.

“What was that for?” James asked as his eyebrows rose.

For a couple of seconds Becket’s lips twitched. Then they broke into a wide smile. “I’m sorry. Christine demanded that I give you a hug and kiss from her. She said I’d enjoy your reaction.”

“You saw her?” James asked, his surprise already forgotten.

Becket nodded. “And little Jonathan. My fleet needed to refuel so I had a few hours on the surface before we left Earth.”

“How is he?” James demanded.

Becket’s smile reappeared as she pulled out a datapad. “I have a bunch of videos and pictures from Christine to share with you. She insisted I show them to you in person. She said I’d get a kick out of watching you watch them. Perhaps we could retire to your quarters. I’m sure after everything that’s happened over the last two days you could do with a moments rest.”

Despite all the pressure on him and the massive weight of grief he still felt, James found himself genuinely smiling. “For pictures of Jonathan I’m sure I could spare you a few minutes. If you’d care to come with me Rear Admiral,” he said as he turned and gestured towards his quarters. “I think I might have something to trade you for them. I’m remembering a certain drink Ya’sia brought with her from Cria for you. I told her I’d look after them until you returned. Though I confess I have sampled a bottle or two.” James smiled again when Becket’s eyes lit up at the mention of the Crian beverage.

“I think we have a deal,” she said quickly as she moved out of the conference room. Still smiling, James followed her out.

Chapter 12

Over the years numerous cadets have come to me after graduation once they received their first assignments. They always come looking for advice. Invariably I direct them to make every effort to befriend their ship’s Chief Engineer. The list of problems a Chief Engineer can solve for a Sub Lieutenant long before it reaches the First Lieutenant or Captain’s ears is long indeed.

-Excerpt from Empire Rising, 3002 AD.

IS Drake, New Shanghai orbit, 19th June 2484 AD (5 days later).

Stepping into his flagship’s second hangar bay, James nodded to the couple of engineers who were clearly startled by his presence. Stepping past them, he made his way towards where most of the noise in the hangar bay was coming from. Right in the middle of the bay, six large contraptions had a swarm of technicians moving around them. Contraptions was the best word James could come up with to describe them. Each was different from the other and they all looked like they had been put together from a hodgepodge of other pieces of equipment.

“Admiral Somerville,” Chief Engineer O’Malley called as he stepped out from behind one of the contraptions. “What do you think?”

James paused and took a moment to think. As he did, he carefully looked over the nearest piece of equipment. A few components he recognized, but he could hardly believe what he was looking at could actually perform any meaningful task. “I think you’ve been busy,” he replied. “So you better talk me through what I’m looking at.”

“ADDs,” O’Malley answered. “At least that’s what we’ve taken to calling them. Automated defense drones. Each one is slightly different, but that’s because of what we are working with. Take this one for example,” he continued as he reached out and patted the contraption he had been working on. “She has one mark IV missile launcher, a heavy laser cannon and six point defense plasma cannons. Her ECM unit is pretty impressive, but her sensors aren’t quite up to the specs of some of the others. As long as her targeting computers are tied in with the sensor feeds from the other ADDs or the fleet, that won’t matter though.”

“How many missiles can she launch?” James asked, his interest in the ADDs growing. O’Malley had been asking him to see what he had been working on for a couple of days, but James had been putting it off. Clearly, he shouldn’t have.

“We’ve built our own automatic firing rack from scratch,” O’Malley explained. “This one has one in the chamber and two in its rack. The fire rate won’t be quite fast enough to keep up with one of our battleships. But she could fire with every other salvo.”

“How do you envisage them being used?” James followed up.

O’Malley shrugged. “Tactics and strategy are more your field than mine Admiral. They could be dropped out of the hangar bay and towed behind Drake like we do with missile pods. When we have them at least. Though because of their bulk, we wouldn’t be able to carry out too many evasive maneuvers. Probably they’d just be one shot weapons. Their point defenses could bolster ours. Primarily I would see them being used to defend orbital bodies. They could slot into Earth’s orbit and be tied into the command-and-control center of a battlestation. I suppose they could be used to ambush ships that jump out of shift space as well if we knew where they were going to be. Like mines, only these babies could defend themselves, at least for a short period.”

James smiled. “You may not be a tactician, but you’ve clearly given it some thought. Just how many of these have you got?”

O’Malley brought a hand up and rubbed the back of his neck. “Well, along with these six, I think there’s another thirteen in Drake’s other hangar bays. Though none of them are quite finished yet. Across the fleet? We might have another twenty or so. Some of the other Chief Engineers are coming up with their own designs, though not all were convinced by my suggestion to try this.”

“Well, you’ve convinced me,” James said as he gave O’Malley a nod. “We have to test one of them out in a live firing drill, then we can upload their capabilities into our simulators and see just how they fare. How many of them do you think we could put together?”

“It depends how long we’re going to be here for,” O’Malley replied. “There’s more than enough materials to put together a couple of hundred, maybe more. Time is more of a hindrance than components.”

James pressed his lips together. He didn’t need reminding. Half the fleet’s shuttles were scavenging debris from the battle for New Shanghai. Any weapons, sensors and other important pieces of equipment were being salvaged. Initially James had thought they would be brought back to Earth and used to speed up the construction of new warships. O’Malley had come up with another idea. “Well, consider me impressed,” James said. “I’m going to send orders to the rest of our ships to go through the salvage we’ve recovered. I want the technical specifications of each of the ADDs you’ve put together. We’ll send them onto the other engineers and get them to work. We will also start deploying them around New Shanghai. At least a few of them anyway. It’ll make the Karacknids think we are preparing to defend the planet once again. When the enemy battlefleet moves on us, we should have enough time to collect them before we flee.”

“It should work Admiral; we’ve designed them so that they can be towed into place by shuttles. They also have their own maneuvering thrusters, but they’d be better towed by shuttles,” O’Malley recommended.

“Well, I will put you in charge of getting them placed,” James said with a smile. “So you can work out the best way for it.”

“Aye Admiral,” O’Malley responded as he flashed a quick salute.

Before James could ask more detailed questions, his COM unit beeped several times. It was a priority message from Drake’s bridge. “Go ahead,” James said after he pulled it out and half turned away from O’Malley.

“Sorry to disturb you Admiral, but more enemy contacts have just jumped out of shift space,” a Lieutenant said.

“Another supply convoy?” James asked. Everyone had gotten a fright three days ago when four hundred new ships had appeared. Instead of being warships, they had been supply freighters and other ship tenders. They’d immediately closed with the Karacknid battlefleet and began helping the Karacknid ships with their repairs.

“Not this time Admiral, the computer estimates that a majority of the new contacts are warships. We are still waiting on detailed reports from our forward scouts.”

“How many contacts?” James asked.

“Eight hundred Admiral,” the Lieutenant replied. “I’ve also alerted Captain Fisher and Commander Miyagi. I believe they are on their way to the bridge.”

“As am I,” James replied. He had already turned away from O’Malley and was moving quickly out of the hangar bay. Eight hundred was a massive number of new enemy warships. Their firepower was probably more than all the ships Becket had brought with her. “Contact General Johnston immediately. Tell him to prepare his marines for evacuation. Send a flash alert to the fleet, every ship is to make ready to break orbit.” James had little doubt what the arrival of the new Karacknid warships meant. That explained why the Karacknid fleet hadn’t fought his and Becket’s ships five days ago. Why would they when so many more friendly ships were on their way?

*

Slayer

Tanaka-lan smiled a feral grin full of razor-sharp teeth when the new warships appeared on Slayer’s holo display. He had been expecting five hundred warships, not eight hundred. Clearly one of his Under Admirals had underestimated the rate at which the ships he had left behind at Mar’am could be refueled and resupplied. “As soon as they join us, the fleet will advance,” he ordered. “Any ships still not capable of going to full military power will stay with the supply fleet. Let’s see how willing these newcomers are to fight us now.”

Just minutes after the reinforcements fell into formation around Slayer, Tanaka-lan’s flagship turned its nose towards New Shanghai and accelerated. “The Humans are reacting,” one of the flagship sensor officers reported. Tanaka-lan acknowledged the report with a wave of one hand. He could see it on the holo display himself. They’re forming up as if they wish to defend the colony. It’s a bluff, Tanaka-lan was sure. “We’re starting to get new sensor readings from the planet’s orbitals,” another officer informed him. “It looks like defense satellites are coming online. Charging up their reactors and sensors.”

“Fighters are launching too,” a third officer reported.

Tanaka-lan retracted his claws and sat up straighter in his command chair. They’re playing with me, he was certain. If the Humans had wanted a fight, they would have come after his fleet. Now that he had received more reinforcements than the Humans had, there was no way they would engage him in a straight up fight. “Enough with the games,” he said to his officers. “Alter course, set us onto a trajectory for the shift passage out of the system towards the Human’s capital. Launch all our fighters. Let’s see if they are willing to remain in system with their only line of retreat cut off.”

As his ships altered course and hundreds of fighters launched from their carriers, Tanaka-lan’s claws extended again. He had been waiting months for the fighters to arrive. Though only half of what he had been promised was now with his fleet, they were finally here. Six carriers, each housing one hundred fighters, had swelled his numbers. Given that his fleet had engaged and destroyed more than a thousand enemy fighters in the battle for New Shanghai, he knew he had the numerical superiority. Let’s see if you really want to stay and defend the colony, he thought. If the Human fleet broke orbit now, they could escape before his fleet could catch them, but his fighters were another matter. If Tanaka-lan wanted, they could charge the enemy fleet and tear into their capital ships.

His feral grin returned as the holo display of the enemy colony changed just seconds later. The ships were powering up their reactors and engines. It wasn’t long before a flurry of shuttles took off from the planet’s surface. Soon hundreds of them were racing back-and-forth. “They are evacuating their ground troops,” Tanaka-lan guessed. “They know they cannot defend the planet any longer. Signal our troop fleet, they are to proceed to New Shanghai and finish the conquest of the colony.” Tanaka-lan had no doubt that the ground forces he had landed nearly a week ago would have been hit hard by the enemy warships. But there would still be thousands of them left. With the one hundred thousand he still had on board their troop ships, it would be more than enough to conquer and pacify the enemy colony. He wouldn’t have quite as many to push on towards the enemy’s homeworld with, but he had already sent orders back for more troops to be moved to the front. Once we have conquered their homeworld’s orbitals, we can take all the time we need to pacify the surface. “Order our fighters to form up into an attack formation. They are to move towards the enemy fleet as it breaks orbit. Let’s see how many fighters they will launch against us.” The one unknown Tanaka-lan still worried about were the new ships that had joined the Allied Fleet. Some of them were of a similar design to ones that had launched the raid at the other side of the Karacknid empire. The reports on their capabilities were sketchy at best. Other ships were of designs he had never seen before. He doubted they were more powerful than the warships the Humans and Varanni Alliance had, but he didn’t know for sure. Nor did he know whether they carried fighters or not.

“Human ships are breaking orbit,” a sensor officer reported ten minutes later. “Fighters are moving away from their main fleet.”

Tanaka-lan watched the holo display closely as the swarm of fighters broke away from the Human fleet. Once they were far enough away, Slayer’s sensors were able to get a better read on them. Four hundred, he said to himself. It was half the number he had. No doubt the Humans would have more on their homeworld, but if they had hundreds more, they would have sent them forward to New Shanghai. For once we will have the superior fighter numbers, Tanaka-lan thought as he felt saliva building up around his teeth. In every engagement he had fought with the Humans so far, their fighters had exacerbated the losses his fleets had taken. The tables have turned, he thought with glee. “Recall our fighters,” Tanaka-lan ordered. “Have them refueled and ready to launch. Signal our supply fleet to prepare to follow us. We will pursue the enemy fleet to the next system and see what they plan to do there.” Another time, he promised the enemy fleet. Now that he had forced the Humans to show how many fighters they had, he would wait for a better opportunity to utilize his advantage.

As he watched the Human fleet race across the system, Tanaka-lan studied them closely. His main focus was on the array of new ships. They were clearly split into five squadrons, each made up of a group of ships of similar design. The five Conclave species, he was certain. The data he had on the Conclave species was patchy at best. According to the initial surveys Karacknid scouts had carried out more than a century ago none of them should have had the technical capabilities to threaten the Karacknid Empire. Even the more recent scouting that had been carried out after their neighbor, the Nanee, had been absorbed into the Empire hadn’t deemed them a threat. And yet here they are with hundreds of warships each. Warships that have the drive technology to keep up with Human and Varanni ships. They have been receiving help. There was no other explanation. The Humans or the Varanni or both had to have been sharing technology with the Conclave species for at least a year or more. Which begs the question, how many more warships do they have? With no way to get an immediate answer to his question, he filed it away with the other pressing concern he had. He still had no idea how the ships had traveled all the way from Conclave space thousands of light years away. The quickest route would be through the Karacknid Empire, but even then, it would take more than a year. It was possible the Conclave species had dispatched the warships he was watching that long ago, yet it made no sense. If they had so many warships, why would they not have just continued their attacks against the Empire from their sector of space? No, there had to be another explanation. One Tanaka-lan knew he wouldn’t like, but one he was determined to discover as soon as possible. That was why he was intent on pushing towards the Human’s homeworld. He would find his answers there. With such thoughts running through his mind, he remained on Slayer’s bridge and watched the enemy fleet retreat across the system and disappear as it jumped into shift space. When his fleet reached the same point three hours later, he waited just long enough to confirm that his troop fleet was having no problems landing their soldiers. Initial reports quickly proved his guess that the Humans had evacuated their own ground troops correct. Then he gave the order for his fleet to jump to the next system.

*

IS Drake, 23rd June 2484 AD (4 days later).

As soon as Drake and the rest of the fleet exited shift space into the Changhai system, James ordered them to move towards the next shift passage. There was no way to know how close behind him the Karacknids were and he didn’t want to be caught out. As soon as his fleet was in formation and underway, he retired to his office and opened a COM channel to Rear Admiral Becket. “Rear Admiral,” he began as he gave Becket a smile. “I’ve spoken with Ya’sia and Lightfoot. We have a job for you and Admiral Shraw.”

Becket’s smile quickly turned to a frown. “What is it?” she asked slowly. “I’m not leaving the fleet. Not when the Karacknids are moving on Earth.”

“I’m afraid you are,” James said. “Though I assure you, you will get all the action you desire. We need to threaten the Karacknid supply convoys,” he pressed on before Beckett could complain. “That or force them to split their fleet. It’s the only real option we have to delay them. I need you to lead the attempt.”

Becket shook her head. “We missed the battle of New Shanghai. I won’t miss the battle for the Sol system. Not when it may be our last.”

“I think you have been enjoying independent command too much,” James said as he chuckled and shook his head in an attempt to defuse the situation. “I’m the senior commander here Rear Admiral… Not to mention your Emperor. This needs to be done. Are you saying you’re going to refuse?” Though it sounded like a threat, James raised an eyebrow and winked at Becket.

Becket looked down at her feet. “You know I won’t. Of course not, but I cannot miss another major engagement.”

“If everything goes to plan, you won’t have to worry about that,” James assured her. “You’re going to take one hundred Imperial warships and one hundred of Admiral Shraw’s. He can join you or send a subordinate, whichever he prefers. Your task will be to head towards the Ming system. If you can, you are to slip behind the Karacknid battlefleet as it passes through the system and hit their supply convoys. If the Karacknids detect you and detach a force to chase you down, then you’re to lure them back to the Void. You can send word ahead of you for all the ships currently being constructed there to be prepped to join your fleet. As far as we know the Karacknids don’t know about the Void, you can use that to your advantage. Either destroy the fleet the Karacknids send after you or lose them and race back to the Sol system via Britannia. The Alliance dark matter repeller cruisers have been creating artificial shift passages to the former British colonies. You should be able to get back to Sol just a week or so after we will arrive. We are going to do all we can to delay the Karacknids. If we can hit their convoys or split their fleet, it may buy us even more time. I need you to do this for me. You know the odds as well as I. If the Karacknids keep up their pursuit all the way to Earth, we cannot beat them. Half of my ships are barely battle ready. We will not have a chance to stop and repair them before Earth. If the Karacknids attack as soon as they get there, we will not have time to carry out repairs. What do you say?”

“I don’t like it,” Becket said as she raised her eyes after a moment’s pause. “I want to fight at your side. But I know the odds we face. I’ll do my best. If we can’t hit their supply convoys, we will draw away as many of the Karacknids as we can and I promise you, they will not reach the Sol system.”

James nodded at Becket’s tone. It was exactly why he wanted her to lead the diversionary fleet. “Thank you,” he replied. “Now, here’s what I was thinking.”

When Becket’s face disappeared minutes later, James glanced at the chronometer in his office and let out a sigh. Drake would soon be in two-way communication range with the Changhai colony. He would have to speak to the colony’s Governor and other leaders. They probably suspected already, but he would be informing them that he would not be defending the system. In just a matter of hours they would be at the Karacknids’ mercy. Changhai was a far less habitable planet than New Shanghai. As a result, it had a population of just twenty-six million. It was possible that the Karacknids’ wouldn’t bother landing ground troops to secure the colony. On the other hand, it would only take a few thousand ground troops to take control. Then they could do whatever they wanted to the populace. Taking a deep breath, James jotted down some notes as he prepared what he would say to the Governor. Then he started another set of notes. He knew that Christine would want him to address the populace. It was his duty as Emperor. Neither task was going to be pleasant.

Chapter 13

Many ship names have come to hold special places amongst the Fleet’s roster; Drake, Endeavour, Vengeance, Viper, Enterprise and Trident are but a few.

-Excerpt from Empire Rising, 3002 AD.

IS Viper, Changhai system.

Thirty minutes after breaking away from James’ fleet, Becket ordered her ships into stealth. At the same time, two hundred drones in the midst of James’ fleet activated to mimic Becket’s ships. Becket almost wished a Karacknid scout would show itself. If there were Karacknid scouts already in the system, it would put an end to James’ plan before it began. Then her ships could rejoin the Allied fleet and head straight to Earth. No anomalous sensor readings were detected though. Instead, Becket’s fleet continued on its ballistic trajectory towards the Ming shift passage. “How do the decoy drones look on our sensors?” she asked her staff officers.

“They pass an initial analysis,” Lieutenant Salaman responded. “Though there are a couple of discrepancies. I’m running a more thorough examination on three of the contacts now… There’s something not quite right,” he added moments later. “Each of the three contacts is dropping its decoy emissions. It is only for a fraction of a second every two or three minutes, but if we’re detecting it, then so will the Karacknids. One of the malfunctioning decoys is meant to be representing Viper.”

“Shall we signal Drake and inform them of the problem?” Lieutenant Rondon asked from his COM station.

Becket shook her head. “Not this time. Our sensors are detecting exactly what they are meant to.”

“Admiral?” Salaman asked from the tactical console.

Becket glanced at commander Wilson, her Chief of Staff and then back to Salaman. She flashed him a grin. “You figure it out Lieutenant.”

As her staff officers looked at one another, Becket turned back to the holo display. The Karacknid fleet had been right behind them as they had jumped out of the New Shanghai system. She was expecting them within the next hour or two.

“I think I understand,” Lieutenant Levitt said a minute later. Everyone turned to him. “Admiral Somerville wants the Karacknids to know we have left his fleet.” Becket nodded to him. Though that much was obvious. “He’s going to pretend we have more or less ships than we actually do,” Levitt continued. “He’ll let the Karacknid’s figure out some ships have left the fleet, then he’ll disguise just how many. That’s why we are in stealth already.”

“Well done Lieutenant Levitt,” Wilson commended. “That’s the idea at least. We are about to find out just how well it works.”

“Is Admiral Somerville hoping to get the Karacknids to under or overestimate our strength?” Salaman queried.

“That is the question isn’t it,” Becket replied. She paused to let the suspense build. If the Karacknids underestimated the strength of her fleet, they wouldn’t send many ships after Viper. But if they overestimated it, then her ships were going to be seriously outnumbered. “Admiral Somerville wants us to try and draw as many Karacknids away from their push towards the Sol system as possible. That means he’ll be trying to get the Karacknids to overestimate our numbers. If we can, we’re going to try and give whatever force comes after us the slip and get behind the Karacknid supply lines. Depending on how many ships are sent against us, that may be difficult.” As Becket looked at her staff officers, it quickly became apparent that they thought such a feat would be impossible. They were likely right, but Becket intended to try. If she drew whatever part of the Karacknid fleet that was after her towards the Void and then the former British colonies, they would reach Earth eventually. On the other hand, if she drew them back towards Karacknid space they would be a long way from the battle for the Sol system when it occurred. Even as she thought about it, she ground her teeth together for it would mean she and Viper would be far away as well.

An hour later the blaring of alarms announced the arrival of the Karacknid battlefleet. Several hundred scouts jumped out of shift space and spent ten minutes carefully surveying the end of the shift passage. Then the main battlefleet arrived. In the space of just two minutes, three thousand eight hundred additional warships appeared on Viper’s sensors. At once they set off in pursuit of Admiral Somerville’s fleet with hundreds of frigates and destroyers fanning out to form an umbrella like formation ahead of the main fleet. For half an hour the Karacknid warships continued on their course, then there was a sudden flurry of activity. Hundreds of new scout ships broke away from the Karacknid fleet, spreading out in a far wider search formation. “They’ve detected the decoy drones,” Captain Rogers commented.

“Now for Admiral Somerville’s part,” Becket responded. Seconds later every ship in the Allied fleet disappeared off Viper’s gravimetric sensors. They had all cut their engines and gone into stealth. The Karacknids would still be able to detect and analyze the electromagnetic energy given off by the Allied fleet’s reactors and internal systems for the next half an hour. But beyond that, they wouldn’t be able to tell for sure just how many ships Somerville had. On the flipside, in stealth, the Allied fleet’s acceleration would be severely hampered. That would allow the Karacknid battlefleet to catch up with them. “Let’s get our drones ready,” Becket said as she glanced at Commander Wilson. Wilson gave orders to Becket’s command staff as they prepared the next part of the ruse.

For four more hours, Becket stayed on Viper’s bridge as she watched the Karacknid scouts comb the system for Allied ships that might be hiding. Luck was on her side. Twice scouts came close enough to detect her ships, but the search pattern pulled them away at the last moment. Eventually it looked like a Karacknid scout was going to get close enough for its active sensors to burn through the stealth coating on her and Admiral Shraw’s ships. “Signal our ships, tell them to prepare to go to full military power. Launch our drones,” Becket ordered. “On my mark we will go active. The drones will begin releasing their decoy signals at the exact same moment.” As her orders were confirmed, Becket watched the Karacknid scout. She waited until the very last moment before it would detect them. “Now!” she ordered. The two hundred Human and Gramrian ships under her command powered up their reactors to full. Seconds later their impulse engines ramped up their acceleration rates. Alongside her ships, one hundred drones mimicking more warships appeared. “Signal Rapture to begin her pursuit,” Becket ordered once she was certain the drones were all operating as they should. The destroyer Rapture and three other destroyers turned out of formation. They laid on a course for the Karacknid scout and gave chase. The scout decelerated, but that was all Becket wanted. She didn’t want the Karacknids getting too close a look at her ships and drones. “Jump us out of system as soon as we reach the mass shadow,” she said as she caught Commander Wilson’s gaze.

With the mass shadow just half an hour away, Becket didn’t have long to see what the Karacknid battlefleet’s response would be. It was long enough though. She had to keep her lips firmly pressed together when five hundred warships broke away from the main Karacknid battlefleet on a pursuit course for her ships. It looked like at least sixty of the scouts were also angling to keep in contact with her. Becket swallowed hard as she stared at the Karacknid numbers. Nearly six hundred enemy warships would now be pursuing her instead of Admiral Somerville. It was a sizeable force she was luring away from the Sol system. That was good. Yet giving the Karacknid fleet the slip to hit their convoys was going to be difficult. And, at some point, we’re going to have to engage them, Becket thought. That was not a pleasant thought. Admiral Somerville was right. Even if she missed the impending battle for Humanity’s home system, she would have to face her own impossible battles.

*

IS Viper, Ming system, 25th June 2484 AD (2 days later).

“Take us towards the gas giant,” Becket ordered twenty minutes after her fleet entered the Ming system. She had deployed a number of scouts to check out local space around the shift passage. The Karacknids had besieged Admiral Somerville’s fleet in the New Shanghai system for several weeks before the battle. It was possible they had a number of ships within the Ming system. Yet her scouts had detected nothing. She had hoped that was the case. Settling back into her command chair, she watched as her fleet raced towards the system’s second gas giant. Watching it on the holo display, Becket admitted it was the most beautiful gas giant she had seen. It had four gigantic rings each a slightly different shade of orange. Against the silvery grey color of the planet’s atmosphere, the arrangement of the rings was impressive. Its beauty was not what had attracted her to the gas giant though, the arrangement of the rings was. Rather than form around the planet’s equator, they crisscrossed one another, forming an X shape. The gas giant also had four large moons and over thirty others. Between them all, she hoped to hide her fleet. That was, if the Karacknids allowed her to get to the gas giant before their scouts arrived and detected her whereabouts. As the minutes ticked by, Becket felt her nerves increasing. Every moment her fleet came closer to the gas giant, the greater chance they had of hiding. At the same time, every moment that passed brought the Karacknid fleet closer.

“We will enter the gas giant’s orbit in five minutes,” Lieutenant Levitt reported, making Becket let out a sigh of relief. “It will take us seven more minutes and two revolutions to get into the orbit we want, but we’ll be behind the first planetary ring almost as soon as we enter orbit. That should start to hide some of our emissions.”

“Cut our engines in sixty seconds,” Becket decided. As relieved as she was, something, an uneasiness, made her want to hide her ships even earlier. “Adjust our trajectory so that we can coast into our selected orbit.”

“Understood Admiral,” Levitt replied.

The next fifteen minutes passed without incident. Carefully, Levitt maneuvered Viper and the rest of the ships in Becket’s fleet through the gas giant’s rings and past a number of its moons. Eventually they settled into the orbit Becket had chosen. Technically, orbit wasn’t entirely correct. Becket’s plan called for her fleet to carry out a small course correction every time the fleet circled around behind the gas giant relative to the shift passage they had just exited. In that way they would keep passing through the gas giant’s planetary rings. If any Karacknid scouts did come sniffing around, her ships would have a chance to put some of the gas giant’s rings and moons between them and detection.

Eighteen minutes later, just three minutes after the last trace of electromagnetic energy given off by Becket ships reached the shift passage, new contacts suddenly appeared on the gravimetric plot, setting off alarms. Becket felt both Captain Rogers and Commander Wilson glance towards her. She turned to them and shrugged. It had just been a hunch, nothing more. Whatever it had been, her ships had gone dark just in time.

“Contacts are Imperial destroyers,” Lieutenant Salaman reported. “Four of them, gravitational waves suggest they are Rapture and her consorts. They are accelerating hard for the next shift passage.”

Five minutes later more alarms went off. This time thirteen new contacts appeared as they accelerated away from the shift passage. Becket was certain they were Karacknids. There was no one else they could be. The contacts spread out and checked the edges of the shift passage for ships hiding in stealth. Then they turned and headed into the system. Some pursued Rapture whilst others extended their search. Over the space of twenty minutes another forty ships joined them. Becket glanced at Rogers and Williams again when it became evident that a couple of scouts were headed towards the gas giant. They were about to find out if her plan to hide worked.

Before the scouts got close to the gas giant, the Karacknid fleet arrived in the system. They wasted no time powering up their engines and setting course after Rapture. Becket hoped that the Karacknid commander would assume her ships had already raced across the system and jumped into shift space. Yet if the enemy commander feared that she was trying to give him the slip and double back to hit the Karacknid supply convoys, he would do a thorough search of the system.

“If they keep up their current trajectories, the second Karacknid scout heading our way will be almost right on top of us,” Salaman said as he projected the path of the enemy scouts. Neither was angling as if it wished to enter the gas giant’s lower orbits, both of them were going to swing around the gas giant in a high orbit.

Becket felt the hairs on the back of her neck stand up as the two scouts came closer and closer. The path her fleet was on already had her ships following the best course they could. As one scout passed overhead two of the gas giant’s rings would be between her ships and the enemy vessel. Then, as the second scout approached, one of the gas giant’s larger moons would obscure her ships for most of the scout’s brief orbit around the gas giant. Still, a lot was riding on her ships being able to successfully hide. She knew Karacknid sensors were good. She was about to find out just how good.

When the scouts were just minutes away from the gas giant, every conversation on the bridge died. Every officer was staring at the holo display waiting and watching to see if the scouts would show any signs of having detected them. For the three minutes it took the first and second scout to swing around the gas giant, Becket had to make her hands into fists to stop her fingers from tapping. Despite her nerves, neither scout twitched. They both completed their loop around the gas giant and settled on trajectories to rendezvous with the Karacknid fleet. Slowly, Becket allowed herself to relax. She turned to Wilson. From the look on her Chief of Staff’s face it was clear Wilson felt that they had been successful. As conversation started between her Staff Officers and Viper’s bridge officers, their tone suggested the same.

Becket shifted her focus from the Karacknid scouts to the Karacknid fleet. “You don’t think we’re through the woods just yet?” Rogers asked from his command chair.

Becket shook her head. “We know the Karacknids are good. If they detected us, do you think they would want us to know it?” Her comments caused an abrupt halt to a number of conversations between the junior officers.

“If they did detect us, they’ll need some excuse to double back in this direction,” Rogers mused. “We’ll see soon enough I expect.”

“Look at that,” Lieutenant Armitage said as he pointed at one of Viper’s secondary holo displays. “That frigate is going crazy.” Becket swung towards the display. The frigate was indeed going crazy. It was carrying out several weird course corrections, one after the other. “A prearranged signal?” Armitage suggested. “Those course changes could be communicating something.”

“That is what they want us to think,” Becket replied. It was possible to use the gravimetric waves given off by a ship’s engines to communicate across a system faster than the speed of light. A specific course change could communicate a simple message like enemy spotted. Becket had used such tactics herself in the past. Now, with the largest Imperial capital ships being equipped with their own gravimetric pulse generators, such maneuvers weren’t as frequent. Yet the Karacknids had seen Admiral Somerville use such a tactic before. Becket had seen reports that they had started to adapt and use the tactic as well. Still, she thought, we know there’s nothing out there.

“The Karacknid fleet is changing course,” Lieutenant Salaman reported excitedly. “They’re turning towards that frigate.

Becket glanced at Rogers again then she turned to her Chief of Staff. “Signal the fleet, we’re breaking orbit. Lay in a course to the next shift passage. Maximum acceleration.”

“Aye Admiral,” Wilson replied at once.

It took just a handful of seconds for the course to be calculated and sent to the rest of the fleet. Unsurprisingly, Admiral Shraw was requesting a COM channel.

“You think they have detected us,” Shraw said as soon as his reptilian face appeared on the holo projector on her command chair.

“There’s no other reason for them to be making such a course change,” Becket replied. “Our ruse has failed. They’re trying to close the range before they turn and charge.”

“My thinking exactly,” Shraw agreed. “They have nearly a hundred frigates and destroyers scouting the system. There was no way we could sneak past them. What is the plan now?”

“Now we fall back to the next system and try again,” Becket said as she tried to make her words sound like they carried more hope than she felt. “If we can, we’ll keep falling back.” She had already sent word to the systems ahead of her, all the way to the Void, to warn them of the Karacknid fleet approaching. Any ships or freighters that she could get to help were to rendezvous with her there.

“Very well, let us get out of here before the enemy catches us,” Shraw said as he showed his razor-sharp teeth and ended the COM channel.

As she looked back at the holo plot of the system, Becket saw her ships were already breaking orbit. The Karacknids responded immediately and turned directly towards the gas giant. Thankfully, they were not far enough into the system to be able to close with her ships. Becket had no intention of letting her ships be caught out in the open. Whatever she was going to do to give the Karacknids the slip in the next system, she’d have to make sure she left an easy escape route open. Allowing the Karacknid fleet to bring her ships to battle on their terms would spell disaster for her command. As her ships raced ahead of the Karacknid fleet, she pulled up a star map of the next system. She brought a hand up to her chin and idly stroked it as she tried to figure out her next step.

Chapter 14

To this day the Void is one of the Empire’s chief centers of economic activity. Today interstellar travel is no longer restricted to shift passages and so it is hard for us to grasp; but when it was, having so many systems within a dark matter bubble propelled the development of the area ever onwards. This lead over the surrounding systems has lasted even with the developments in the shift drive that have done away with the need to travel along shift passages.

-Excerpt from Empire Rising, 3002 AD.

IS Viper, shift space approaching the Void, 2nd July 2484 AD (7 days later).

For the past several days Becket had been fighting to hide her frustration from her officers. In two more systems she had tried and failed to give the Karacknid fleet pursuing her the slip. Now she had been forced to fall back to the Void. It felt strange for her to be approaching the large dark matter bubble. It would be the first time she had been back since discovering it as a Sub Lieutenant on board the exploration frigate Drake. She had followed the dividing up of the four habitable planets between the various UN nations and their subsequent colonization and development. She knew from her position as a Rear Admiral that several key shipyards were stationed in the Void. With so many solar systems within the Void it was an ideal position for the buildup of the Empire’s military-industrial complex. Minerals mined from one system could be easily transported to another within the Void. And now it will all be at the Karacknids’ mercy, she thought. No one knew if the Karacknids knew about the Void, but their scouts had been following her fleet mercilessly. If they didn’t know before, they soon would.

As Viper approached the end of the shift passage, Becket took a deep breath and smoothed her expression. She had been simulating a number of different strategies for fighting in the dark matter bubble, but a lot would depend on what she found when she got there.

“Exiting shift space in ten seconds,” Lieutenant Salaman announced.

Becket closed her eyes as she was jolted in her command chair by the jump out of shift space. As soon as the motion ended her eyes snapped open. Viper’s sensors were sifting through every joule of electromagnetic radiation that reached them. For about ten seconds nothing but blackness was portrayed on the holo plot. Suddenly, two massive energy spikes appeared. Alarms blared as targeting sensors locked onto her flagship. Becket opened her mouth to order her ships to lock onto the two energy spikes. They were so large she couldn’t imagine them being anything but Karacknid dreadnoughts. When no more energy sources appeared, she hesitated. There was no way there were only two Karacknid dreadnoughts out there. The readings were from something else.

“We’re being hailed,” Lieutenant Rondon announced from his COM station. He spun towards Becket. “It’s on a Navy COM channel.”

“Unidentified targeting sensors have removed their lock on us,” Armitage added.

“On-screen,” Becket replied. “Keep our target locks for now.”

On the holo display a visual of a command bridge remarkably similar to Viper’s appeared. Sitting in the central command chair was a man in a Rear Admiral’s uniform. “Rear Admiral Becket,” the man said as he nodded to Becket and saluted. “Welcome to the Void. I am Rear Admiral Chambers, senior commander of the systems here.”

“Thank you Rear Admiral,” Becket replied as she returned his salute. She had read his file and seen a holo image of him, but it was good to see him in person. He looked far more relaxed than Becket imagined the commander of a station that had hundreds of Karacknid warships bearing down on it would. “Tell me, where are you speaking to me from? What is going on here?”

Chambers looked to his left briefly. “Lower the cloaking field,” he ordered as he turned back to Becket.

Gasps from a couple of officers made Becket turn to one of the secondary holo displays. Two large ships had suddenly appeared. Viper and the rest of Becket’s fleet were right in between them. She frowned for a second, they looked familiar. “Gift Forts,” she realized.

Chambers smiled. “Exactly. One of the shipyards at Excalibur was given the contract to build them. Two had already been delivered to the Gift when news of the Karacknid battlefleet reached us. Construction had begun on these two, but it was paused to focus on battlestations and warships. These were far too large to be towed through shift space for any length of time. When I received word you were coming I had them towed here instead. Their cloaking fields are second to none. There are also more reactors on one of these babies than ten battleships. It has allowed us to include some Mindus tech we haven’t been able to deploy before. With all the generators, I’ve been focusing on getting them armed with heavy grazer cannons. Though we do have a few missile tubes installed as well.”

Becket nodded as she processed the new information. “What range do you have on your grazers?”

“We can burn through the armor on a Karacknid cruiser at one light second,” Chambers answered. “With the two forts positioned as they are, any ships that exit shift space between them can be struck by both. If the Karacknids jump out on either side, that fort will have to engage on its own though.”

“And your cloaking field,” Becket asked as she spotted several warships that were clustered around each fort. They hadn’t been visible to Viper’s sensors either. “It extends out beyond the fort?”

Chambers smiled again. “It does, we can probably hide all of your ships if we split them between each fort. I can’t guarantee how long the cloaking fields will last; they are a massive drain on our reactors. We have been too afraid to test the cloaking fields for any real length of time for fear the reactors will burn out. I think they will last us a couple of weeks, but maybe not any longer than that.”

“That will be more than long enough,” Becket said as she returned Chambers’ smile. “This is a pleasant surprise. It’s something we can certainly use. Now tell me, what other surprises do you have for us? How many other warships and freighters have you got? What about a gravity well cruiser?”

As Chambers answered her, Becket’s mind raced. She had come up with a number of strategies, but they were dependent on a number of things she had hoped to find in the Void. Some of them Chambers confirmed that he had access to, others he did not. She quickly adapted a number of her ideas and shared them with Chambers and her command staff. With no guarantee of how long they would have before the Karacknids arrived, they would have to work fast.

*

IS Viper, the Void (eighteen hours later).

After meticulously planning out as many different scenarios as she could with Shraw and Chambers, Becket had retired to her quarters to get some much-needed sleep. Her COM unit waking her up just five hours later brought a groan to her lips. “Yes?” she responded sleepily.

“They’re here,” Wilson informed her. “Three scouts have just jumped out of shift space.”

Becket was on her feet in moments. It took just a few seconds to put on a fresh uniform and step across the corridor to Viper’s bridge. Viper’s passive sensors were showing six more enemy scouts. They were filling the area around the mouth of the shift passage with electromagnetic energy as their active sensors tried to overwhelm any stealthed enemy ships. Chambers had briefly explained how the forts’ cloaking devices worked. Rather than absorb the electromagnetic energy like the stealth tech Viper was equipped with, the Mindus derived tech actually cancelled out the emissions from the Karacknids’ active sensors. If the Karacknids knew what to look for, they’d be able to figure out something was up. But even then, their targeting sensors wouldn’t be able to get a clear lock on the forts, not unless they got very close. And they’ve never seen such technology before, Becket hoped. The Mindus technology files they had shared with Humanity before they had been conquered suggested that they had never actually used the cloaking field in combat.

As the scouts moved past the two forts and headed deeper into the Void to continue their scans, Becket turned to Wilson and flashed her Chief of Staff a grin. It was working. “Signal our ships, make sure they have their weapons and shift drives ready,” she ordered. It took ten more minutes for the main Karacknid battlefleet to arrive. By then another thirty scouts were scanning the area. Yet none had shown any sign of detecting the two forts. When the first larger Karacknid warships appeared on Viper’s passive sensors, Becket clenched her hands into fists. They had them. “Signal rear Admiral Chambers, he may open fire,” she ordered.

Without even having to drop their cloaking fields, the two forts fired. Neither were anywhere close to being finished so one was equipped with just six heavy grazer cannons whilst the second had five. Even so, with so many reactors, they could be recharged extremely fast. Just seconds after Becket gave the order, a Karacknid battleship in the heart of the Karacknid fleet blew apart. In the blink of an eye a heavy cruiser detonated as well. For several seconds the Karacknid fleet continued its slow acceleration into the system, seemingly unaware of what had just happened. Then, five seconds after firing the first shots, each fort fired again. Two more large Karacknid capital ships detonated. Chaos broke out among the Karacknids. Their battlefleet split into several smaller groups and every capital ship began evasive maneuvers. More than a hundred scouts turned towards the general direction the grazer beams had been coming from. Even though the Karacknids couldn’t detect the forts, they could pick up the energy spikes as the grazer beams passed by them.

Before the Karacknids managed to do much else, two more ships were struck. Another battleship was blown apart as four beams punched right through its inner hull and out the other side. A medium cruiser was hit by just two beams, but they were enough to knock out its engines and send it spiraling away. “Several scouts are heading our way!” Salaman reported. “They’re directing all their active sensors at our fort. They’ll know something is up soon if they don’t already.”

“Target their scouts with our plasma cannons, launch multistage missiles at the further out targets,” Becket snapped. The longer she could keep the Karacknid scouts away, the longer the forts would have to wreak havoc among the Karacknid capital ships. Launching missiles would give away the position of the fort, but the Karacknids still wouldn’t know what they were facing.

The nearest Karacknid scouts were carrying out evasive maneuvers, clearly concerned that they could be targeted by whatever was taking out their larger consorts. Yet as the one hundred ships in Becket’s fleet fired their plasma cannons, there was no way they could dodge so many plasma bolts. Nine of them were blown apart in quick succession. Two hundred and sixty multistage missiles also streaked out from Becket’s ships. The Karacknid scouts that they were targeting tried to close with one another to offer mutual support, but Lieutenant Salaman had fired more than enough missiles to saturate their defenses. They too were blown away.

“Admiral Shraw’s fleet is engaging the Karacknid scouts near the second fort,” Lieutenant Armitage reported.

Becket spared a glance at Shraw’s ships to see that he was destroying the scouts near his fleet. Then she turned back to the main Karacknid fleet. Four more ships had been taken out while her fleet had engaged the Karacknid scouts. As she watched, the Karacknid capital ships all turned towards Viper. She nodded at her opponent. It was the best choice they had. Under fire from two different directions, they had to charge one of the unknown threats. According to the best intelligence she had on the Karacknid ships, it would take another fifteen minutes for them to charge their shift drives. In that time the two forts could destroy twenty or thirty more capital ships. They had to try and fight their way out of the ambush.

“Target all our missiles on their dreadnoughts,” Becket ordered. “We only get one shot at this, let’s take out as many of them as we can. I’d rather not have to worry about them later.”

Becket watched in silence as both forts hammered the Karacknids. As the Karacknid fleet got further and further away from the second fort, it was forced to target smaller and smaller warships to ensure each series of shots scored a kill. The fort Becket’s fleet was arrayed around didn’t have the same problem. It kept hitting dreadnought after dreadnought.

“The Karacknids are opening fire,” Salaman reported as soon as the Karacknids got into missile range. Becket doubted that they knew what they were firing at, but their missiles were spread out such that they were going to score some kills.

“Order Rear Admiral Chambers to evacuate his fort,” Becket requested. “Slave the fort’s controls to Viper. Keep hitting their capital ships.”

As the enemy salvo raced towards Viper and her ships, Becket waited patiently. Only when they were sixty seconds away from piercing the cloaking field did she give the order to fire. As soon as her one hundred warships released their thousand missiles, every one of them carried out a micro shift space jump. Jumping just three light minutes away, they were able to look back in time and watch the battle unfold. Every five to seven seconds two explosions erupted in the midst of the Karacknid fleet. Then thousands of new contacts appeared as the missiles they had fired raced across the gap towards the Karacknids. Before they reached their targets, the Karacknid missiles burst through the fort’s cloaking field. Many of them were travelling too fast to lock onto the fort, but more than enough were close enough that they dove in and blew the fort into smithereens. The Karacknid fleet then turned its point defenses onto Becket’s missiles. Only nineteen made it into attack range. As soon as they did, they detonated and converted their thermonuclear energy into three grazer beams each. Five more Karacknid dreadnoughts were blown apart or crippled. Still under fire from Shraw’s fort, the Karacknid fleet continued to flee. A number of destroyers and frigates were taken out, but nothing heavier than that. Five minutes after the destruction of the first fort, the Karacknid fleet disappeared from Viper’s sensors. They had jumped back into shift space.

“Order Shraw to rendezvous with us,” Becket ordered. “Make sure the second fort’s computers are set to engage any contacts it detects.” There was no point trying to defend that fort now. The Karacknids would figure out what had happened pretty quickly. Either they’d return and destroy it or use the very edge of the shift passage to avoid it altogether. Either way, the first stage of her plan to defend the Void was over. The Karacknids had lost a lot of capital ships, but they still had hundreds more.

*

“Status update?” Becket asked as she stepped onto Viper’s bridge eight hours later after taking a brief break to get something to eat.

“They still haven’t moved Admiral,” Wilson responded. “Scout ships keep jumping out and returning, but the main fleet is stationary.”

“They are still figuring out exactly where they are,” Becket guessed. According to the survey information Humanity had collected and from what the Kulreans and the Varanni had shared with them, the Void was unique; a massive bubble in the dark matter that typically filled space between solar systems. Within the bubble were thirty-two star systems. No shift passages were needed to travel between each system making trade between them extremely efficient “They’ll guess that they’re in some kind of bubble pretty quickly as they explore its outer edges. But finding the other shift passage out will take them longer. How are our converted freighters coming along?”

“We got a status update several minutes ago Admiral,” Lieutenant Rondon replied. “They estimate they’ll have all twenty-four ready in the next fifteen minutes or so.”

“The gravity well cruiser is in position and Admiral Shraw reports his fleet is ready as well,” Wilson added.

“Perfect,” Becket said with a smile. “Send everyone an updated time estimate on when the plan will begin. We will send the first wave of freighters in as soon as they are ready.” Becket was thankful for the presence of the gravity well cruiser. Like the two forts, it wasn’t fully constructed, but it had been close enough to being finished to be rushed into service. All it has to do is produce one gravity well, that’s all we need, Becket hoped.

Seventeen minutes later the sudden arrival of twenty-four freighters just off Viper’s port bow signaled that the engineers at the Excalibur shipyards had finished their work. “Send them the Karacknid fleet coordinates and then have the engineers evacuate,” Becket ordered.

“The engineers report they have cleared the freighters and their shift drives are charged,” Rondon reported fifteen minutes later. On the holo display focused on the freighters, shuttles could be seen taking off from them.

“Alert the fleet, Operation Fire Ship is about to begin,” Becket said as she nodded to Rondon. She waited several seconds for the message to be sent then she turned to Salaman. “Transmit the jump authorization to the freighters.”

With the touch of a button Salaman sent half of the freighters into shift space. They each carried out a micro jump right into the midst of the Karacknid fleet. Though the enemy ships were too far away for Viper’s sensors to detect them, Becket could easily picture what followed. Each freighter was equipped with four or five missile tubes and three or four heavy plasma cannons. As soon as they reverted to real space their targeting computers were programmed to shoot at the closest enemy ships. Each freighter would most likely get its missiles fired off and perhaps two or three salvos of plasma bolts. Karacknid energy weapons would no doubt tear them apart within seconds but that didn’t matter. Firing their first salvos was all they were intended to do. “Launch the next wave of freighters,” Becket ordered after slowly counting to twenty. “And the final batch,” she ordered after another twenty seconds.

Calmly, she placed her hands on her lap. This was one of the advantages or, in this case, disadvantages of the Void. With no nearby dark matter, there was no way for the Karacknid fleet to stop ships just jumping into the midst of their formation. At least, there was no way if they remained where they were. The only defense against Becket’s tactic was to jump to a new location.

“New contacts!” Lieutenant Salaman shouted in excitement. “Ships being pulled out of shift space!”

Right on cue, Becket thought as a smile spread across her face. Both her and Shraw’s ships were spread out along the outer edge of the gravity well being created by the half-built interdiction cruiser Admiral Chambers had rushed out of its construction yard. Becket had positioned her fleet right in front of the Karacknid fleet’s trajectory. She had gambled on the enemy commander ordering his ships to jump out along the course they were already pointed towards. The interdiction cruiser had pulled them back into normal space just seconds after they had jumped. “Fire!” Becket ordered after waiting a couple of seconds for her ships’ targeting computers to get a lock on the enemy fleet.

Split into four squadrons, Becket’s two hundred and thirty ships released two thousand seven hundred missiles towards the Karacknids. They quickly closed from multiple angles, surrounding the Karacknids in a cocoon of fire. Just moments after firing, with their shift drives fully charged, Becket’s fleet winked out of existence as they jumped into shift space. The Karacknids had no such luxury. Forty fast destroyers rushed ahead of the fleet as they tried to get into missile range of the interdiction cruiser. The rest huddled in a tight ball as they prepared to receive the missiles racing towards them. Point defense fire blew apart hundreds of the incoming missiles. But not all of them. The first to reach attack range were the Human mark IVs. Sixty grazer beams pierced the Karacknid fleet. The explosions and evasive maneuvers caused enough disruption that another twenty-five Gramrian missiles got close enough to strike Karacknid warships. The missiles detonated in blinding thermonuclear explosions.

When the explosions finally ceased, the sole Human ship still in the vicinity, the scout frigate Wasp, carefully analyzed the Karacknid fleet. Its sensors confirmed that twenty-two Karacknid warships had been destroyed and at least forty-six had been seriously damaged. Its job complete, Wasp jumped out to bring the news back to Admiral Becket.

Chapter 15

Taking one’s enemy unawares is one of the hardest feats any commander can accomplish. A great deal of luck and planning is required. And even then, victory is not guaranteed.

-Excerpt from Empire Rising, 3002 AD.

IS Viper, the Void (eight hours later).

“We’ve found them,” Commander Wilson reported over the COM channel. “Weasel has just returned. They are in the Muspelheim system.”

Becket was in one of Viper’s gyms trying to work off some stress. She immediately stopped cycling and reached for her COM unit. “Good work,” she responded to her Chief of Staff as she moved towards the showers. “Lay in a course and jump the fleet there right away. Keep us ten light minutes from the mass shadow. Prepare orders for a squadron of scouts to go into the system and keep tabs on the Karacknids.”

“Yes Admiral,” Wilson replied.

By the time Becket stepped onto Viper’s bridge her flagship was flying through shift space. A timer on the main holo display told her they would reach Muspelheim in ten minutes. “Let’s see Weasel’s report,” she requested as she moved to her command chair.

“Sending it to you now,” Lieutenant Salaman responded.

Becket scanned through it. Her hunch had been right. After her attack the Karacknid fleet had jumped to shift space again as soon as they had recharged their shift drives. The Void meant that she could repeat her trick with an interdictor cruiser any time she wished. Of course, she no longer had one, the Karacknids had destroyed it, but they didn’t know that. To protect themselves, the Karacknids had retreated to one of the thirty-two solar systems within the Void. Within the mass shadow each star created, her ships couldn’t jump right into the midst of their formation. Suspecting that would be their next move Becket had sent out scouts to every system. Weasel had been the one to find them. As of half an hour ago it seemed the Karacknid fleet had taken up position in orbit around one of the three gas giants in the Muspelheim system. “What do you make of it?” she asked her Flag Captain after she finished reading Weasel’s brief report.

“They’re figuring out what to do next,” Rogers answered. “And probably carrying out some repairs. We know some of their ships have taken serious damage.”

Becket nodded. The Karacknids response to everything that had happened so far told her they hadn’t known about the Void. It was no doubt presenting them with a whole host of new strategic and tactical possibilities they hadn’t encountered before. Since she had ambushed them a constant flow of contact reports had been coming in from the inhabited systems within the Void. It seemed Karacknid scouts were probing every system to get an accurate picture of what was going on. And no doubt they are surveying the outer edges of the Void looking for any other shift passages out of here.

“Which means we need to figure out what we’re going to do next,” Becket said. She was sure the Karacknids had left a sizable force of scouts watching the shift passage that led back towards New Shanghai. But if the Karacknids intended to hole up within the Muspelheim system, then she could punch through their scouts and race back into the rear of the main Karacknid fleet’s supply train. No doubt the ships she was facing here would give chase, but she could gain several hours or more over them. We need to know more first, she reminded herself. Despite her recent victories she was all too aware that whatever she did against this Karacknid fleet was second fiddle to what would soon be happening in and around the Sol system. By now the Karacknid battlefleet could be out of the former Chinese colonies and heading towards the Beta system. If that were the case, disrupting their supply convoys would likely have little to no impact on what would happen at Sol.

Her mind awhirl as she contemplated the different possibilities, Becket barely noticed the slight tremor as Viper exited shift space. Only when Wilson asked her for permission to dispatch the scouts did she look at Viper’s main holo display. The Muspelheim system dominated the view. A quick scan of nearby space told Becket that there were no Karacknid ships nearby. At least none that had been detected yet. “Proceed,” she replied to Wilson’s question. “Get me a COM channel with Admirals Shraw and Chambers,” Becket continued as she stood. “Rogers, Wilson, join me in my office,” she ordered.

As her Flag Captain and Chief of Staff handed off their responsibilities, Becket stepped out of the bridge and into her quarters. When she tapped her desk’s holo display to life, Shraw and Chambers’ faces were waiting for her. Rogers and Wilson quickly entered and sat down opposite Becket. “We don’t know how badly just yet, but let’s assume that we have hurt them hard,” Becket began. “That has made the Karacknids wary. But that will only last for so long. Sooner or later they’ll come out of the system. Either they’ll try and hunt us down or attack one of the built-up systems in the Void to force us to fight. Right now, we have the advantage. If the Karacknids are still in orbit around that gas giant it will take them a couple of hours to exit the system. We could have at least that much of a head start. So what are we going to do with it?”

“If we have damaged a lot of their ships, then they could spend several days carrying out repairs,” Shraw said as his forked tongue flicked in and out. He raised his lips to show his razor-sharp teeth. “I say we double back and go hunting for their supply convoys. That was our original mission. We failed to sneak past them before. Now the way is clear for us and the prey is out in the open.”

“We cannot simply abandon the Void,” Rear Admiral Chambers protested. “The Karacknid fleet here would destroy everything. Combined, the contribution the Void makes to the navy’s military-industrial complex is nearly as much as the Sol system.”

“But it is home to less than one thousandth of the population,” Rogers countered slowly. “Our priority has to be the Sol system. It is the capital of our Empire and Emperor Somerville’s fleet is the only chance we have of defeating the Karacknids. We must do what we can to support them.”

“And yet?” Becket asked, picking something up in her Flag Captain’s tone.

“And yet we all know that rear Admiral Suarez already tried and failed to attack the Karacknid battlefleet’s supply convoys,” Rogers responded. “He failed because they were too heavily defended. We might have been able to take one convoy if we had caught them by surprise. But if we disappear from the Void now, the Karacknids will know we have doubled back. They will pursue us. We’d run the risk of being caught between the anvil of the supply convoy’s escort and the hammer of the Karacknid fleet in the Muspelheim system. We’d be destroyed easily and prove to be no use to Admiral Somerville.”

For several minutes Shraw and Rogers discussed the possible risks and rewards of trying to find a Karacknid convoy to attack. Chambers occasionally joined in to support Rogers’ points, though Becket suspected he was simply trying to encourage her to keep her fleet in the Void. It was his responsibility to protect the Void’s thirty-two systems. The more Shraw argued though, the more she was quietly convinced. Yes, there were risks to trying to attack a heavily guarded Karacknid supply convoy. Yet there were strategies and tactics they could employ to overcome that problem.

“There is another possibility,” Wilson said. She continued when Becket nodded to her. “We have shift gates from the Void all the way to Britannia. We know one of the Varanni dark matter repulsers was working towards the colony as well. If we left now and destroyed the shift gates behind us, we could get to the Sol system in less than two weeks. If the Karacknids followed, it would take them another week or more to catch up. Somerville will get to Sol first, but we could still get there ahead of the main Karacknid battlefleet. If it is too risky to go after their convoys, then we will best serve Somerville by rejoining our strength to his.”

Becket shook her head. She understood Wilson’s reasoning, but she couldn’t see how they could make any real difference. “The Karacknids have four thousand warships bearing down on the Sol system in their battlefleet. Our two hundred will likely not make a difference one way or another. By tying up four hundred Karacknid warships here, we’re contributing more than we might in the Sol system. We have to find a way to make better use of our forces. We’ve already destroyed at least one hundred Karacknid warships, we need to increase that number.”

For another half an hour Becket continued the conversation with her subordinates. They discussed a number of tactics they could employ when defending the Void and so destroying more and more warships, or when slipping behind the Karacknid battlefleet’s line of advance and harassing their convoys. With her mind still leaning towards attempting to carry out some raids, Becket did have to admit that Chambers had a couple of good ideas for how they could try and lure the Karacknids into more one-sided engagements in the Void. If she could destroy enough Karacknid warships she could then turn and head back to the Chinese colonies without fear of being chased. A beep from commander Wilson’s COM unit stopped their conversation. “Go ahead,” Becket’s Chief of staff said.

“The first couple of scouts have returned Commander,” Lieutenant Salaman said. “There has been a scuffle between some of our scouts and several Karacknid frigates. We got close enough to have a look at the Karacknid fleet though. Our scouts have a report Admiral Becket needs to see.”

“Send it to us,” Wilson responded. She tapped a few buttons on the office’s holo display. Instead of a text report, a visual recording started to play. It showed four Imperial frigates engaged with three Karacknids. One of Becket’s ships was destroyed while two Karacknids were taken out. As more Karacknid scouts rushed towards the area, one of Becket’s ships ignored them and raced in towards Muspelheim’s third gas giant. The image shifted to show the sensor feed from the frigate. It launched several drones towards where the Karacknid ships had last been detected. The timestamp on the image jumped forward fifteen minutes. As soon as it did the Karacknid fleet appeared. Instead of the four hundred ships Becket had been expecting, there were six hundred and twenty!

“They’ve received reinforcements,” Chambers said in shock. “At least two hundred more ships. Everything we’ve done to them, all the ships we’ve destroyed, it has been for nothing.”

Becket didn’t respond. Sadly, it was a feeling she was getting used to. The Karacknids always seemed to have more ships. She was trying to assess the new situation. The Karacknids might very well be carrying out repairs to the ships she had damaged, but they now had more than enough ships to move out whenever they wished. Six hundred ships is a lot, she thought. And if they have diverted them here, it means they won’t be in the Sol system. Suddenly Wilson’s suggestion didn’t seem so far-fetched. There was no way she could stop the fleet in front of her from doing whatever damage they desired to the Void. Equally, the enemy fleet would easily stop her from raiding any supply convoys. But if we can race back to the Sol system ahead of these ships, adding our ships to Somerville’s could perhaps tip the balance of forces. If the Karacknid’s were down six hundred ships whilst she could add her two hundred to Somerville’s fleet, then the odds would not be so heavily stacked against her homeworld. “We’re going with Commander Wilson’s plan,” she said, instantly bringing the whispered discussions amongst her subordinates to an end. Standing, she continued, “Send word to the rest of the ships in our fleet. They are to prepare for a hard push towards the Sol system. We will be maxing out our reactors, impulse engines, and shift drives. Any ships that don’t think their systems can hold up to the stress will remain here to bolster what little defenses the Void has. Wilson, get Lieutenant Levitt to plot us a least-time course to the Sol system. We are leaving within the next five minutes.”

*

IS Drake, Beta system, 4th July 2484 AD.

Moments after his flagship exited shift space into the Beta system, James’ hopes took another dent. The Beta system was the gateway to what had been the Japanese, German and American colonies. Immediately after the battle of New Shanghai he had sent word calling for every possible ship left in those systems to meet his fleet at Beta. Yet no more than two hundred ships greeted him. Barely a quarter of those were warships. The only slither of encouragement were the one hundred Alliance warships keeping station beside the Imperial ships. Even so, their presence served to assail James’ hope. The Beta system was the gateway to Alliance space. Once the Karacknids took it, any further Alliance reinforcements would have to fight or sneak their way past the Karacknid battlefleet.

James shook his head as he turned his gaze to the Beta colony. The system was the second system discovered by the first shift space exploration ships sent out from Earth. The Beta colony, a small rocky world with the thinnest of atmospheres, had been claimed and colonized by almost every Earth nation. Its borders were a hodgepodge of different national territories. In the last three hundred years its population had grown to more than five hundred million. When James had first learnt that he had been surprised. With tens of other colonies on far more habitable worlds, he had expected most of the Beta colonists to have left. Yet they hadn’t. It turned out that simply being born on the planet gave one an attachment that was hard to give up. Of course, James felt the same way about Earth, but Earth was Earth. Not Beta. The colony’s population wasn’t what made him shake his head though, it was its orbitals. There was barely a functioning station left. A Karacknid fleet had clearly raided the system sometime after Becket and her Conclave fleet had passed through. James had been hoping to mount a defense of the system. Or, at the very least, to put up a show of it to try and delay the Karacknid battlefleet. Yet he wouldn’t be able to now. There was nothing to defend. If he tried, the Karacknid commander would see it as a bluff right away.

Almost with a sigh he turned to Miyagi. His Chief of Staff gave a slight shake of his head. None of the strategies they had discussed would work. A beep from a nearby console made James turn to his COM officer. “We’re getting a report from the Alliance squadron,” Lieutenant Martinez reported.

“Send it to my command chair,” James replied. He scanned through it. The Alliance Commodore estimated that any further reinforcements would be several weeks away. Though it seemed he expected about three hundred ships to have arrived just ahead of him. Given that James had not encountered them he assumed they had gone on to Earth. It was a small bit of good news but it didn’t change his current circumstances. “All right,” he said as he tried to put a brave face on it. “Signal all the ships in orbit around Beta to rendezvous with us. Set course for Earth. There’s nothing more for us here.” As his officers turned back to their consoles, James bit his lip. He couldn’t help but look longingly at the star map that dominated Drake’s bridge. The Varanni Alliance and their fleets were the only way that he could see Earth survive the coming onslaught. Yet their path was about to be blocked. The Karacknids could station a fleet of five or six hundred warships in the Beta system and block anything but the largest of Varanni fleets from getting through to Earth to help him. As his fears started to well up, he glanced at the other systems on the far side of Earth. The Conclave species, Vestarians and the Kulreans had already sent all the help they could or were willing to. No more help would come from that direction either. Earth was on her own.

Chapter 16

The Sol system is often said to be the crown of the Empire. Species from a hundred different civilizations look to her for direction. Far more flock to the world of Humanity’s birth to seek out the Emperor’s favor. Yet to our enemies, it is a thorn in their side, one that has almost been plucked out more than once.

-Excerpt from Empire Rising, 3002 AD.

IS Drake, outer Sol system, 6th July 2484 AD (two days later).

A gasp escaped James’ lips as his flagship jumped into the Sol system. The solar system looked dead. He knew hundreds of freighters had been converted to makeshift warships and sent to New Shanghai. Yet he hadn’t been prepared for the impact it would have on his home system. Sol was usually a hive of activity. Thousands of freighters, private spacecraft and military ships would customarily be thronging the system. Now, they were nowhere to be seen. Barely a handful of contacts were moving about. Most seemed to be heading towards either Mars or Earth from the mining operations in the main belt. Beyond that, the system was devoid of contacts. For a second, James feared that the Karacknids had somehow beaten him to the system. Yet as his gaze settled on Mars and turned to Earth, he saw that both planet’s orbitals were lighting up. All the industrial nodes and construction yards he expected to see were still there. As he looked away from the holo display, James found most of his Staff Officers and Drake’s bridge officers were staring at him. “Take us to Earth,” he ordered. “I’m sure there’s an explanation.”

As Drake moved into the system some answers became apparent. The freighters and other craft James had expected to see moving around within the system were largely gathered in Earth’s and Mars’ orbits. It wasn’t hard to imagine what was happening. They were being upgraded so they could help in the defense of Earth. James was pleased to see that there were nearly three hundred warships in orbit around Earth. Most were the Alliance ships he had been expecting, though nearly a hundred were Imperial or Vestarian. He was certain they were all fresh out of their construction yards. Most probably hadn’t even completed their space trials. Despite seeing so many ships in Earth’s orbit, the passage to his homeworld was an eerie one. Normally James’ command staff would have had their hands full navigating a fleet of two thousand warships through the Sol system’s cluttered traffic. This time, they all sat in silence with nothing to do. James was worried about Earth’s and Mars’ economic situation. Both planets relied heavily on food and raw materials imported from Humanity’s other colonies. It seemed such imports had dried up. James remembered all too well the risk of starvation that Earth had faced when Admiral Koroylov had besieged the planet with his fleet of Russian warships. James doubted the Karacknids would have the patience for such a long siege, but if Earth was facing food shortages already, then it would become exponentially worse if the planet fell to the Karacknids. James was certain that the Karacknids wouldn’t bother trying to import food to feed Earth’s populace if they did conquer the planet.

When Drake got close enough to Earth to make out individual ships with her sensors, James’ hands clenched into fists. One of the contacts had been identified as the light cruiser Avalon, Christine’s personal cruiser. Becket had told him that she had been making final preparations to leave Earth with the colony ship Last Hope. Last Hope was supposed to rendezvous with the Varanni colony ships that were being dispatched deep into unexplored space. “Are we detecting Last Hope?” James asked as he fought to keep his tone level.

“No sign of her Admiral,” Lieutenant Anderson answered moments later.

James’ fists tightened. When news of the loss of the battle of New Shanghai had reached Earth, he would have expected Last Hope to be launched immediately. If she had been and Avalon was still here, that meant only one thing; Christine and Jonathan were still on Earth. “Ready my shuttle,” James requested. “As soon as we reach orbit I’ll head down to the Palace. Make sure every ship in our fleet is refueled, rearmed, and given the attention they need. Arrange a conference with our senior commanders in the Palace for this evening. We must begin our preparations for defending Earth. I have no doubt the Karacknids are not far behind us.”

“At once Admiral,” Miyagi responded as he and the rest of James’ command staff got to work. James spent the last twenty minutes of the flight to Earth brooding in silence as he thought about his wife and son’s fate. By the time Drake settled into orbit, James was buckling into his flight seat on his shuttle. It lifted off seconds later. In less than ten minutes the shuttle burst through the high clouds over the Swiss Alps and banked towards the Imperial Palace. As they flew over Geneva, James saw that work on the Commons Building had been largely completed. It now was an exact replica of the Senate Buildings that faced it. Work on a third identical building, the House of Servants, looked to be well underway. He barely registered the new buildings, in just a week or two all three would very likely be rendered useless.

When the shuttle touched down just forty meters away from the Palace’s main entrance, James quickly descended its access ramp. He looked neither left nor right to take in the high mountains that surrounded the Palace nor the lush green forests and alpine grasses. He only had eyes for the solitary woman who was walking out to greet him. Moving forward, not quite as quickly as he might have expected a day or two ago, he pulled Christine into a hug.

“It is good to see you,” Christine said as she held onto him.

When she sniffled a couple of times and her head bounced on his shoulder James pushed her back slightly to find tears running down her cheeks. “What is the matter?” he asked, suddenly full of concern. “Is it Jonathan?”

Christine quickly shook her head. “No, no. He is doing great. No, it’s just seeing you. The first reports that came back after the battle of New Shanghai were chaotic. We didn’t know whether you had survived or not. And even if you did, we thought your fleet would have been caught and destroyed before making it back to us.” She pulled him into a hug. “I’m simply happy to see you. And to hold you.”

James held Christine even tighter for several seconds before taking a deep breath. He still needed to ask her about Last Hope. As upset as she was, he couldn’t shake his own anger. As Christine moved back though, movement from over her shoulder stopped James short. One of Jonathan’s maids had been following closely behind Christine. As he watched, she bent over and set a toddler down onto the landing pad. The little boy ran over and grabbed onto Christine’s leg. Though James recognized his son, he was stunned. He had been away from Earth for six months. Jonathan had barely been crawling then. Now he was walking!

“He’s walk… When?” James blurted out.

Christine flashed him a grin and then reached down and picked Jonathan up. “A couple of weeks now. I think he wants to be an Olympic sprinter. He’s certainly giving the Palace staff a run for their money.” Gently, Christine lowered her lips and kissed Jonathan on the forehead. Then she turned him towards James. “Jonathan, aren’t you going to welcome your daddy home?”

As Jonathan looked up into James’ eyes, he babbled something. Suddenly afraid Jonathan might start to cry if he took him, James hesitantly reached out towards his son. A flood of emotions assaulted him as Jonathan reached out and allowed James to take him away from Christine. As Jonathan stared at his face and babbled, James hugged him tightly. As he bounced him up and down, James told Jonathan how much he loved him. When he glanced back to Christine to smile at her, he saw a very different expression to what he expected. It was the same one Christine had when one of her political schemes proved successful. It lasted only a second before being replaced by a wide smile full of joy. James’ eyes narrowed all the same. Christine had known he would be upset by the fact that she and Jonathan were still on Earth. She had intentionally brought Jonathan to meet him. She’d probably planned to surprise him with Jonathan’s walking as well.

“Come inside,” Christine said as she stepped beside James and looped her arm through the one James was not holding Jonathan with. “It’s time for Jonathan’s lunch. I’ve also arranged a light meal for the two of us. You can feed Jonathan while we eat. Then we can talk.”

Her tone as she finished speaking told James that Christine knew how concerned he was. Smiling at her, he pushed his anger down. They could enjoy a meal and then get to more important matters.

*

Finished with his lunch, James picked up a napkin and wiped his lips. He nodded to the maid who lifted Jonathan from his highchair and took him for his afternoon nap. “So,” he said as he sat the napkin down and turned to Christine. “Are we going to talk about Last Hope?”

“First things first,” Christine said as she stood and came over to James. Taking one of his hands, she pulled him to his feet and led him over to one of the couches in the kitchen that was part of their apartment within the Palace. Gently, she pushed him into the sofa and sat on his lap. Putting her arms around James’ back, she rested her head on his shoulder and gave him a hug. “I’m so sorry about Scott and Koroylov and all the rest. You have suffered so much loss already. I cried when I heard about Scott.”

James reached his arms around Christine and held her as she sobbed into his chest. “It doesn’t get any easier,” he said as he kissed her forehead. “Which makes you and Jonathan still being here all the harder. I sent word for you to evacuate. You must have known after New Shanghai that Earth was next. There’s nothing we can do to stop them. Not with the numbers they have. Why are you still here?”

Christine released him and sat up a little straighter. Her eyes were bloodshot when she raised them to meet his. “I planned to go. I really did. We had a proposal prepared to go before the three houses. Fairfax was going to act as my Regent and stay to defend Earth. But then news of New Shanghai came. It was mayhem. Some reports suggested you were dead, later ones came saying that you had survived. But we didn’t know what was true.” Christine shook her head. “I couldn’t just run away. Not then. Our people needed me. We had to do everything we could to prepare Earth’s defenses. Then, when news came that you were alive and that your fleet was following you back, we still didn’t know what would happen next. Most of my advisers thought the Karacknids would pursue you and catch your fleet before it got back here. In any case, someone needed to bring the people together. If I had run away, the three Houses would have descended into infighting and bickering. No one would have taken charge. It would have been a mess.”

“And yet at the end of the day, what have you accomplished?” James asked coldly. “Unless you have worked miracles, Earth will still fall. The colonists on Last Hope needed a leader as well. Someone to prepare them for the struggles ahead. It will take centuries for them to find a new world and rebuild everything we will soon lose.”

Christine raised her chin. “Everything I’ve done has prepared Earth to face her fate. If the Karacknids come here wishing to conquer, we will not fall quietly. We’ve been equipping every freighter we can with mark IV missile launchers. Our fighter factories have been working around the clock at accelerated rates. Every pleasure craft and independent freighter that we didn’t send to New Shanghai has been rounded up and gathered here. Everyone in the system knows what is at stake. They are ready to fight because of me.”

“Is that worth Jonathan’s life?” James forced himself to ask. The sudden hurt that crossed Christine’s face made him want to take it back. Instead, he held her gaze.

Slowly Christine lowered her eyes and closed them. When she did a tear ran down her cheek. “How can I answer that?”

“I’m sorry,” James said as he pulled her into a hug. His anger slowly fading. Guilt quickly replaced it. “I know you were only doing what you thought was right. What you had to. But I am here now and I need you to promise me something.” Gently James prized Christine back. “I have a briefing scheduled with all of our senior commanders for later today. I need you there to brief us on what you and Fairfax have done. But after that I need you to take Avalon and Jonathan and leave. You can catch up to Last Hope in Alliance space and join them. Far too many of us are going to die defending our homeworld. I cannot have you be among them.” James lifted Christine’s chin so that she was looking at him. “Please, I need you to promise me this.” Slowly, ever so slowly, Christine nodded. “I need you to say it,” James pressed.

“Okay,” Christine whispered. “Okay, I promise. We will go. We will leave you to die if that’s what you want.”

As more tears appeared on her cheeks, James pulled her into another hug. He knew he had been harsh, but he needed to be. If that’s what it took to get Christine and Jonathan to safety, he wouldn’t regret it. As Christine’s sobs turned into full-blown cries, James stroked her back and kissed her forehead. After several minutes he lifted her and carried her to their bedroom. Then he set her down and pulled her into a cuddle. As she cried, he imagined all the weight that had been on her shoulders over the last several weeks. He knew no one but Christine could have achieved what she had. Quietly, he told her how proud he was.

Eventually her tears stopped and Christine rolled around to face him. “I’m proud of you too,” she said as she cupped his face in her hands. “Even in the face of defeat you managed to hold your fleet together. It may not accomplish anything in the long term, but once again you have shown that our people made the right choice when they chose you as Emperor.”

“It may not make much difference in the long term, but it means I am here now,” James said. “It means our fleets can fight here to drain the Karacknids of their strength while you and Jonathan and our colonists flee. If my life can accomplish nothing more than that, then I will die a happy man.”

Though another tear ran down her cheek, Christine leaned in and kissed James deeply. When they broke apart, James moved forward and kissed her again and again.

Chapter 17

There is wisdom in a council of war, but a strong leader must be willing to do what is right no matter who stands in his way.

-Excerpt from Empire Rising, 3002 AD.

“Thank you all for coming,” Fairfax said as he stood and gestured for the whispered conversations around him to come to an end. With more than seventy people in the Palace’s largest briefing room, Fairfax had to repeat himself before there was silence. “You all know why we are here. We must make our final preparations to face the Karacknid battlefleet.” Pausing, Fairfax looked around the room as he let his words sink in. He then nodded to no one in particular. “Commander Miyagi will give us a briefing on everything that has happened since New Shanghai and an update on the latest intelligence our scouts have gathered. Then we will turn to Earth’s defenses.” Moving back to his seat, Fairfax gestured towards Miyagi.

As Miyagi stood and took Fairfax’s place, James only half listened. He had already read over his Chief of Staff’s briefing. Instead, he looked from face to face as he took in all those who had been called to the meeting. Every Admiral, Commodore and Flag Captain in his fleet was present. James knew all of the Human ones very well by now. Most of the aliens except for the Conclave officers and newer Alliance officers he also counted as friends. There were also several other Imperial officers that had been working alongside Christine. In one small cohort, General Johnston and several other Marine Generals were clustered together. Beyond the military personnel the rest of Christine’s Inner Council and the leaders of the biggest parties in each of the three Houses of Government were present. In short, everyone who Christine thought could add their support to Earth’s defense was there.

Though James didn’t think of himself as a politician, he found that he was able to read the expressions or body language of most of the Humans present. He had clearly picked up a thing or two from Christine and Fairfax. Fear was the strongest emotion that he got coming off of the Humans. Fear, mingled with a firm resolve. As Miyagi described the size and power of the Karacknid battlefleet, even the civilians could read the odds. Earth was in trouble. When Miyagi turned to the reports being sent via the tachyon pulse generator from Varanni Prime, it became clear that any further Alliance reinforcements were weeks away at best. No more help would be coming from that angle.

When he finished with his briefing, Miyagi glanced at James and sat down. James took a deep breath, cleared his throat, and slowly stood. Copying Fairfax, he glanced around at the gathered officers and politicians before speaking. “None of you need me to spell out what all of this means. You have all seen first-hand, or in the recordings of the battle of New Shanghai, just how devastating the Karacknid battlefleet can be. The second battle for Earth will soon be upon us. In the first we won, but at great cost to our fleet and our civilian population. Out of those ashes we have built an Empire designed for one purpose. To stand up to the Karacknids and protect our species from conquest or extinction.” James paused; he knew his next words would not be taken well. But they were the truth. “At New Shanghai that purpose died. Our fleet has been shattered. Even with our friends and allies who are here with us now, the Karacknid battlefleet will overwhelm us. We fight now not to save Earth, but to give our species a chance. Last Hope is on her way to Varanni Prime. From there she will join Alliance colony ships that will flee into unexplored space. It is in Last Hope that the future of our species’ freedom lies. The longer we can hold the Karacknid battlefleet here, the longer she has to escape. The time we buy now will allow the Alliance to firm up their border with us. Perhaps they may be able to wage war long enough that they can overcome the Karacknids and free us once again. Yet Earth will fall. I fear there’s nothing that I or any of us can do to prevent that. But we can hurt the Karacknid fleet. We can bleed them so that they cannot advance any further. The more time we buy with our ships and our lives, the better the chances Last Hope and the Alliance have.”

Turning slightly, James addressed Ya’sia and the Alliance officers with her. “Our friends and allies have fought bravely by our sides. Tens of thousands of Alliance naval personnel have died defending Humanity’s colonies. Yet this is a battle that none of us will walk away from. I am therefore relieving you of the responsibility to remain and fight with us.” Turning again, James nodded to the Conclave officers as well. “All of you have your own worlds that will come under threat once Earth falls. Dying here will deny your worlds vital ships that will be needed to defend them. You must all return home and join your strength to the rest of your fleets to prepare for what will come your way.” Finally, James let his gaze rest on Christine. He had been avoiding her so far. As he saw her bloodshot eyes and the moisture around her lashes, he almost didn’t say his final words but they had to be said. “We all live to serve the Empire, our species and one another. Now we must die to do so. Like so many of our friends and comrades have already done. Last Hope has sixty thousand of our best and brightest. Her military escort adds another twenty thousand. I intend to send Avalon and Empress Christine to join Last Hope. Our people will need a leader who understands the sacrifice we have all made to guide them into the future.

“Beyond those who we have sent away, every one of us must be prepared to fight and die to bleed the Karacknids. That means every ship we have must be prepared to fight,” he said as he looked at his naval officers. Then he turned to the politicians. “And every marine, militia, police officer and even our civilians on Earth’s surface and, indeed, on the rest of our colonies must be armed and prepared to fight. This is not a battle that can be fought by the Navy alone. All of us must fight. Only by bleeding the Karacknids with our own lives can we give hope to the future of our species.” Finished, James sat down. He was greeted with silence. He kept his eyes fixed on his hands, afraid of how those around him would respond.

The musical sound of Ya’sia’s voice finally broke the silence. Her words made James look up. “Sadly Emperor Somerville, I agree with you in every instance. Bar one that is. You’re right, we cannot defeat this enemy battlefleet. We cannot save your homeworld from being conquered. But that does not mean I or my fleet will simply abandon you. When we first met, our fleets almost engaged each other in battle. You convinced me to trust you. You convinced me to join you in stopping the Flex-aor from threatening any more of our worlds. Then, when news came of the Karacknids, and we still did not know what kind of threat they were, you joined us in trying to help the Mindus. In doing so you drew the eye of the Karacknids to your species. Since then we have fought side by side, my people and yours, to defend our common freedoms. And so you’re wrong, we will not simply turn tail and run. We will stay by your side and fight with you. Your fate will be ours.”

James smiled at his friend as he blinked rapidly to fight away the little bit of moisture forming on his own cheeks. “Thank you,” he replied, barely louder than a whisper.

“As will my ships,” Jil’lal said as she stood and brought her four hands together to make a ball. “Vestar knows our fate is tied with Earth’s. We will not abandon you.”

Most in the conference room turned towards where the Conclave officers sat. Suddenly Christine spoke. “Let me echo my husband’s words,” she said to the Conclave Admirals. “We thank you for your willingness to come to our aid. Your ships were vital in allowing my husband’s fleet to escape New Shanghai. You have given us time that we did not think we would have. For that I thank you. But your species are new to this war. Your homes are thousands of light years away. They may come under threat at any time. We do not expect you to fight and die so far from your homes for us. We will not think anything less of you if you wish to return and defend your own people.” James briefly smiled at his wife. He hadn’t told her everything he had been planning to say at the conference. Her words told him that she understood, that she was in agreement.

Admiral Dra’cam rose to her feet after glancing at the other Admirals around her. James mentally nodded to himself. The Conclave species were going to go home, he was not surprised. Nor did it upset him. Dra’cam led the Folian fleet. Of the five Conclave species they were the least aggressive. They had almost arrested his niece when she had first visited their homeworld and they had certainly been very suspicious of her claims. Privately Emilie had told him that she had been shocked when their warships had joined the other Conclave species to come to Earth.

“We will stay,” Dra’cam said simply. “We came this far to help defend your homeworld. We knew the odds when we left. We will not turn back now. We will stay.” For a moment Dra’cam looked around at all those who were staring at her, as if she was going to say more, then she simply sat down.

James shook his head in surprise. Then he stood again. Taking a couple of deep breaths, he looked at the different aliens gathered within the conference room. He couldn’t help but think that twenty years ago he would have been shocked by the presence of even one of the aliens. Now there were twelve different species represented. “Thank you,” he said as emotion filled his voice. “Thank you to each one of you,” he said as he looked at each alien Admiral in turn. “I cannot express in words what it means to us that each of you are willing to fight and die with us. It will give us courage when hope has gone to know that you are standing shoulder to shoulder with us.”

“We would be nowhere else,” Ya’sia responded.

James nodded and smiled at her. He wanted to give his friend a hug, but he knew now wasn’t the time. Later though he would. Still full of emotion, he turned to Lightfoot and gestured for him to take over. “Now we must decide how to proceed,” he said before he sat down. Quickly Lightfoot stood and began to lead the gathering.

With each species having made their decision, the discussion quickly turned to how best to defend Earth, Mars, and the other colonies within the Sol system. Various strategies and tactics were proposed, debated and rejected. Plans and timetables were drawn up for how to best fortify Earth and Mars’ major cities and to arm the civilian populace and organize them into units that could operate together and carry on a guerrilla war after the Karacknids’ initial landings. As the conversations passed back and forth all around him, James couldn’t help but feel a depressing sense of déjà vu. It felt just like before the battle of New Shanghai. Except this time, they had less battleships, warships, fighters and everything else that they had gathered to defend the Chinese colony. Despite the fortitude that he had tried to instill in his officers with his words, James felt his own slip. Even with Ya’sia, Jil’lal and the others remaining with him, their fleet would be outnumbered and crushed. No tactic or strategy could prevent that. Then his mind turned to Jonathan. It was for his future that he would be fighting. And for the future of all those on the Last Hope and, indeed, the future of the descendants of those who lived on Earth and the rest of the Empire’s colonies. Yes, they might be enslaved by the Karacknids, but one day they could be freed, if, and only if, the Karacknids’ conquest could be delayed long enough to allow Last Hope to get far enough away. Gritting his teeth, James sat up straighter as he prepared to rejoin the conversation.

The swoosh from the door behind him opening made him turn around instead. Alfaro, his flag officer was standing on the threshold. “Sorry to intrude Admiral,” he said quietly, the conversation still going on behind James. “But the duty Captain in the C&C room has requested your presence immediately.”

James was on his feet instantly. There was only one thing that would force the Captain manning the Palace’s C&C to call him. The sudden silence that filled the room told him that everyone else had figured out what was going on. Turning, James caught Lightfoot, Ya’sia and Jil’lal’s eyes. Then he gestured for Christine to join him as well. “We’ll be right back,” he said to the rest, “continue with the planning.” He doubted they would do anything of the sort, but it felt like the right thing to say.

With Lightfoot, Christine and the others trailing behind him, James rushed from the conference to the C&C room. His heart was beating fast and he had to fight not to glance back at Christine. When he stepped in, he was greeted by the largest holo display he had ever seen. It showed a massive image of the Sol system. Every colony, orbital structure and shape was identifiable. James sought out the shift passage to the Beta system. What he saw made him close his eyes. He wanted to scream! When he opened them again, the contacts hadn’t disappeared. There were more than a hundred of them and new contacts kept appearing. The Karacknids had arrived far sooner than James had expected or feared.

“We detected the first contacts three minutes ago Emperor,” a Captain said as she stepped closer. “We’re currently tracking one hundred and sixteen. Their acceleration profiles suggest they are all frigates and destroyers.”

“It looks like they are splitting into three groups,” Lightfoot observed. “They’ll cover the two shift passages out of the system and move a force in to monitor our fleet.”

James didn’t care about what they were doing. Not at that moment. Instead he turned to Christine. From the look in her eyes it was clear she knew what the Karacknids’ arrival meant. In defiance she raised her chin and held his gaze. Slowly she gave him a nod to show that she accepted her fate, though her lower lip trembled. James shook his head as he bit back a series of curses. The Karacknid battlefleet could be an hour or a week behind their scouts. Either way, it didn’t matter now. There was no way Avalon could get past the Karacknid scouts. Christine and Jonathan would not be able to join Last Hope. In desperation, James tried to think of some other way to get her out of the system. He could simply order her onto Avalon and order the cruiser to fly away into open space using her sub light engines. The Karacknids would never follow her then. They would be safe. Even as he thought of it, he grounded his teeth together. Christine would never accept it. She would never run away no matter how much he might wish her to.

As a soft hand gently gripped his elbow, James turned to see Christine looking up at him. “You cannot change this,” she whispered softly to him. “We cannot run. Not any longer. We will face this Karacknid fleet together like everyone else. You, Jonathan, and me. Our fate will be tied with that of our people. That is how it should be.”

Everything within James wanted to rail against Christine’s words. He felt like he had spent his life fighting to protect his country, then his species, and then his family. Now it had all come to this. To nothing. Yet even as anger filled him, pride swelled up to push it down. Christine, his wife, was prepared to meet the Karacknids knowing what it would cost her. What it would cost her son. How could he not do the same? Ever so gently, he nodded to her as he took her hand in his. “Very well,” he replied in a whisper. “We will face this together.” Christine smiled at him and squeezed his hand. Then she gestured back towards the holo displays with the twist of her head.

James turned to see Lightfoot, Ya’sia and Jil’lal had moved slightly away from them. They were all staring about the holo display a little too resolutely. “You can stop ignoring us now,” James said with a chuckle. “Come, let us see how we can prepare a warm welcome for these unwelcome visitors.”

Chapter 18

From the beginning of the Empire our leaders have tried to carefully walk the line between preserving the Imperial citizen’s freedoms and protecting them from external and internal threats. Human history shows us how easy it is to slip into totalitarianism on the one hand or anarchy on the other. The Empire has not always walked this tightrope well, but each time our founding constitution has rebalanced us when we have strayed. Long may it continue.

-Excerpt from Empire Rising, 3002 AD.

Milan, 8th July 2484 AD (four days later).

“Impressive,” James said as he stood on a third-floor balcony looking out over the massive factory below him. He could see at least thirty Spitfire fighters in various stages of construction. “This has all been put together in the last six months?” he asked as he tried to remember the short briefing his Flag Lieutenant had given him on the shuttle flight from his previous public engagement.

“It has Emperor,” the factory manager assured him. “We’ve produced sixty Spitfires since then. It took us a while to get up and running, but now we have a new one coming off the construction line every two days.”

“A praiseworthy effort indeed,” James said loud enough for the holo news recorders arrayed around him to hear. He kept his concerns to himself. Whether it was two or twenty every two days, he doubted the factory’s efforts would make any difference. He also had some suspicions about the Spitfires’ safety. With them being produced so quickly, shortcuts were almost assuredly being taken. Yet he kept his mouth shut. Christine and Fairfax were trying to press every business and corporation that hadn’t already done so to switch its industrial focus to helping defend Earth. His tour was meant to be a part of that PR campaign. And, in the end, a squadron of potentially faulty spitfires was better than none at all. Even if only half managed to attack the Karacknids, they would cause some damage. “Let’s take a closer look, shall we?” James asked as he flashed the factory manager a smile. No doubt the manager and owners of the factory were making a pretty penny from the Imperial Navy, but they had switched over their manufacturing industry to producing war material six months ago. They deserved some credit for that.

As a manager showed him round the large factory where thousands of Human and robotic workers were frantically carrying out their jobs, James asked a number of questions to appear interested. He then climbed into one of the completed Spitfires for a photo shoot and shook the manager’s hand. Just fifteen minutes after arriving at the factory he was back outside and heading towards his shuttle. “Where to next?” he asked Alfaro.

His Flag Lieutenant glanced at his datapad. “One of the civilian training camps just outside London,” Alfaro answered. “It’s a four-minute shuttle flight away. Then we are to visit a series of underground bunkers being built in the Ukraine to hide guerrilla fighters. Then there is a new heavy cruiser being launched from one of the orbital construction yards you are to officiate over. Then we have a senior naval officers’ briefing and then Christine has scheduled an Inner Council meeting.”

James made a face as he stepped up the shuttle’s access ramp. He wanted to be on Drake’s bridge carrying out battle simulations with his Admirals, not running here, there, and everywhere. Yet Earth’s populace needed to see their Emperor. As much as he hated it, he understood. Lightfoot, Nogamoro, Ya’sia, Jil’lal and the others had things under control. “Very well,” he said with a sigh as he sat in his flight seat. “Let’s stick at it.”

As the shuttle took off and flew over the Alps, then the open French countryside and the English Channel, James enjoyed the familiar scenery. When they approached London, a scowl appeared on his face. What had once been the capital of the British Star Kingdom was still a blackened ruin. The two large craters from the nuclear detonations were visible as his shuttle flew over the outskirts of the former city. Here and there small pockets of order could be seen where some stubborn or foolhardy refugees had returned to try and rebuild their homes despite the radiation levels. But, for the most part, the city was abandoned. James couldn’t help but fear that the entire planet would end up looking like the devastation below him. He hoped the Karacknids would prefer to capture Earth rather than destroy it. In fact, he was fairly sure that’s what they would do. Yet their policy of reducing an enslaved species’ technological level could force most of the populace back into the Middle Ages even without nuking the planet a second time. James’ fists tightened into balls, he wanted to promise himself that it would never happen again. Yet he couldn’t bring himself to do it. He knew it would be an empty promise. As the shuttle passed over London, he forced himself to forget about the city. Dwelling on its loss wouldn’t help him now.

Three minutes later James was standing behind a line of civilians. They were being equipped with plasma pistols or chemical propellant weapons. As James watched, they took turns shooting at stationary and then moving targets on the makeshift firing range a squad of marines had set up. After giving them all a salute of approval he was escorted to another group of civilians who were being instructed on how to build their own IEDs. The next group were receiving instructions on guerrilla warfare tactics while another was running through a training exercise. Some of Earth’s militia were playing the role of a Karacknid patrol whilst the civilians practiced ambushing them. James spoke to a number of the marines overseeing the training and several of the civilians. Once again holo news recorders were there to record his interactions. When James felt like he had given the recorders enough for their reports, he thanked the marine Major who had been showing him around and returned to his shuttle.

A couple of minutes into their next flight James heard Alfaro’s COM unit beep. As his Flag Lieutenant pulled it out and a voice began to speak, James raised an eyebrow. “What is it Lieutenant?” he asked.

“A new group of ships have just entered the system from the Alpha shift passage,” Alfaro responded quickly. “They’re engaging the Karacknid scouts there.”

“Take us to Drake immediately,” James ordered the shuttle’s pilot. The shuttle’s nose banked upwards and James and Alfaro were squashed into their seats by the G forces from the acceleration. As soon as the shuttle broke through Earth’s atmosphere, James felt the pressure on his lungs decrease. “What other reports are we getting?”

“It looks like a fleet of Imperial ships,” Alfaro answered. “There are at least a hundred Imperial warships and quite a few freighters. There are other contacts as well.”

“Rear Admiral Becket,” James was certain. “She raced here from the Void. If she has freighters, then she is bringing vital war supplies. We need to get help to her. The other Karacknid scout squadrons will try and intercept her as well.”

“Admiral Lightfoot is already on it, Emperor,” Alfaro replied. “Sixty of our fastest destroyers are breaking orbit. They are moving to rendezvous with the new contacts.”

“Of course,” James said with a nod. Lightfoot would be able to read the situation as quickly as he could. As long as it’s not a trap, James added to himself. In the two days since the Karacknid scout squadrons had arrived, there had been no sign of the Karacknid battlefleet. But that didn’t mean it wasn’t hiding out beyond the system’s mass shadow. If even a portion of the Karacknid battlefleet was out there, they could jump in and trap Becket’s fleet and whatever reinforcements Lightfoot sent. Sixty destroyers though, if we lose them, it wouldn’t totally compromise our defenses, James supposed. He imagined that’s what Lightfoot had decided as well.

“Should we continue on to Drake?” Alfaro asked.

James knew what his Flag Lieutenant was getting at. If Lightfoot had the situation under control, then there was no need for him to abandon the PR events and meetings scheduled. “Yes,” James said with a nod. “Becket will be sending her report to us even as we speak. I need to see it and consider what updates she has. Plus, she may yet need our help.” And, James thought, Becket’s arrival is a good excuse to return to my flagship and survey just how the preparations for Earth’s defense were going.

As soon as his shuttle touched down in one of Drake’s hangar bays, James rushed to the bridge. By the time he got there, the newcomers had been confirmed as Becket’s fleet. With over two hundred warships, they had easily punched through the squadron of Karacknid scouts that had been blocking the Alpha shift passage. To James’ relief, no other Karacknid fleet had jumped into the system to ambush Becket’s warships. Instead, Becket was racing straight towards Earth. Behind her more Karacknid scouts were moving from the Beta shift passage to reinforce their brethren guarding the Alpha passage. For several moments James seriously considered ordering Christine to board Avalon and sending her with a small escort to the Alpha shift passage. With just a couple of heavy cruisers she’d be able to fight her way past the weakened Karacknid scouts to safety. Yet the safety would only be relative. From the Alpha colony, she could flee to the Kulthar system or even through the Gift to the Conclave worlds. But what good would that do her? James asked himself. The Karacknids’ would catch up to her eventually. And she’d never agree to it. He could have convinced her to join Last Hope and lead the search for a new safe system to rebuild the Empire. But if she went to the Alpha system, she’d simply be running away. And there was another concern. Just because the Karacknids didn’t have additional ships to ambush Becket didn’t mean they wouldn’t have them in place in a couple of hours’ time. With a gentle shake of his head, James gave up on the idea.

“We’ve just received Rear Admiral Becket’s initial report,” Commander Miyagi informed James as he swiveled around in his command chair.

“Send it to me,” James responded. “And request Rear Admiral Becket to report on board Drake once Viper reaches Earth.”

“Yes Admiral,” Miyagi acknowledged.

As James took his time to read through Becket’s report, he was impressed. Though she had failed to attack any of the Karacknid supply convoys, she had managed to destroy more than one hundred of their warships without taking any serious losses. She had also raced ahead of more than six hundred Karacknid warships. Meaning that if the Karacknids attacked Earth any time in the next couple of weeks, Becket’s two hundred warships would be able to join the fight whilst the Karacknid six hundred wouldn’t. It was a small tilt in the odds that were stacked against them, but a significant one. Just as interesting were the manifests of the seventy freighters Becket had gathered on her race back to Earth. They were stuffed full of everything that Becket thought might be useful. Once he finished Becket’s report, James turned to the preparations Lightfoot and the others had been making. He also watched a few simulated battles of how the Karacknids might attack Earth. They quickly darkened the rise in his mood Becket’s appearance had caused. Every simulation ended in a disastrous defeat. Hardly any Karacknid warships had been destroyed. Their numerical advantage was just so large that with the ships available, it was going to be hard to do them serious damage.

James was so caught up in the plans and simulations that he looked up in surprise when Lieutenant Anderson informed him that Becket’s shuttle had just landed. “I’ll meet her on her way here,” he said as he stood. He turned to his Flag Captain. “I’ll send her your way once I’m done with her,” he said to Fisher as he flashed her a smile. Becket and Fisher had been Sub Lieutenants on his first command, the exploration cruiser Drake. As he left the bridge, James took the shortest route towards hangar bay one and he bumped into Becket being led towards the bridge by a Sub Lieutenant. “I’ll take it from here,” he said to the Sub Lieutenant as she snapped him a quick salute.

“Of course Admiral,” the Sub Lieutenant said quietly without meeting his eyes.

As the Sub Lieutenant turned and quickly shuffled off, Becket chuckled. “I think you’re getting scarier with age. Though perhaps it’s something to do with all these titles you keep gaining. Admiral, Emperor and whatnot.”

James held out his hand and gave Becket a warm handshake. “I’m pleased you made it back in one piece. It seems your little side mission was a success.”

Becket lost her grin. “I would have liked to get at one of the Karacknid supply convoys. But I fear none of my fleet would be here to tell the tale.”

“No,” James agreed. “Not if they had six hundred warships to send after you.” That was the one thing that had worried him about Becket’s news. If the Karacknids had six hundred ships to send in pursuit of Becket’s squadron to protect their rear, did that mean they had even more reinforcements bolstering their battlefleet? There was no way to answer such a question though so James kept it in the back of his mind. “Now, let’s retire to my quarters. I’m sure Fox has already put on a cup of tea for us both. I’ll fill you in on all the preparations we’ve made so far. Lightfoot and Ya’sia will appreciate your input at the next Admirals’ briefing.”

*

Imperial Palace, 11th July 2484 AD (three days later).

Despite his impending sense of doom and the constant reports of more and more Karacknid scouts entering the system, James smiled as he looked at the guests he had invited to join him and Christine for dinner. For the first time in several days, he had managed to push out thoughts of the Karacknids. He was determined to enjoy himself. “Thank you all for coming,” he said as he raised a glass. “To family,” he toasted.

“To family,” Christine, Emilie, Becket, and Andrea echoed. Everyone laughed when little Jonathan sitting in his highchair grabbed his drink and took a sip as well.

Sitting back down, James looked around and caught Fox’s gaze. When his steward had heard about the meal he had been planning, he had insisted on coming down from Drake and taking charge. James had been all too happy to have Fox organize everything for them.

“It really is amazing,” Emilie said as she stared at Jonathan. “Every time I see him it seems like he has developed into a completely different person. He is getting new skills every day.”

Everyone laughed as Jonathan babbled back at Emilie and broke into a grin.

“He is going to be a ladies’ man,” Becket commented as servants appeared and laid out the first course. She glanced at Christine and winked. “Though I have no idea where he gets that from.”

Christine and Emilie both chuckled. “I’m as much at a loss as you are,” Christine replied. She reached over and touched James’ elbow. “Though he does have his moments.”

James gave Becket and Emilie false glares of disapproval. “I didn’t invite you here to be insulted I’ll have you know,” he protested.

“Who else is going to do it for you uncle?” Emilie asked a little too sweetly. “You’re an Emperor now. Everyone else is bowing to you and groveling at your feet. You need a small insult now and again to keep you grounded.”

“I’m sure I could hire someone to do that for me if I really wanted it,” James said as he turned his nose up at Emilie.

She laughed and rolled her eyes. “You’d have to pay them a fair amount to give someone who didn’t know you the courage to insult you. But I suppose, once you got them going, it wouldn’t be too hard for them to find enough material to stick at it.”

This time James rolled his eyes and shook his head. He took a few bites of the melon Fox had prepared for him in the hope that someone else would change the topic.

“So,” Christine said after taking a bite of her own melon. “I bumped into a certain captain Alvarez several months ago. When I told him his name sounded familiar, he blushed an awful red…” Christine said as she turned to Emilie. “He seemed very relieved when I remembered he had been one of James’ tactical officers several years ago. Maybe you could shed some light on my confusion? Why was he so shy?” Christine asked as she gave Emilie an innocent smile. The façade disappeared as she turned to James and gave him a wink.

James turned to Emilie in time to see her eyes widen. She quickly set down the melon she had been eating. “I don’t know what you’re talking about aunty,” Emilie replied. As she spoke, she turned to Becket and gave the Rear Admiral what James interpreted as a warning look.

Becket simply laughed at the expression. “Don’t think you can threaten me. I suspect our Empress knows more than she’s letting on anyway.”

“I’d say that’s a safe bet,” Andrea said. “I was with her when we bumped into Alvarez. It was an interesting conversation.”

“Perhaps I do, perhaps I do,” Christine answered with a wry smile. “I hear his destroyer and your cruiser are assigned to the same squadron. I’m sure that gives the two of you plenty of opportunities to attend briefings together. That must be nice. Though not as nice as I’m sure it was when you were both on Intrepid together in Conclave space. Being far from home on an epic adventure looking for the Kalassai, that must have been romantic. Was it not?”

Emilie spun from James to Becket and then back to James. “Who told her? Who was it?”

Becket chuckled as she raised her hands. “Don’t look at me. I told no one nothing.”

“Don’t blame either of them,” Christine said as she smiled at Emilie. “Your uncle told me about his suspicions, but that was nearly two years ago. I could tell from your letters that you were happy. Happier than I’ve known you to be. When I met Alvarez I knew right away. You can’t hide these things from me.” Christine turned to Becket. “Though I do have a bone to pick with you Rear Admiral. I suspect all this has been going whilst they were serving together under you in Conclave space. Emilie just so much as admitted that you knew. Why did I not hear this from you?”

Becket smile disappeared, making James burst into laughter. “This is more like it,” he said. “You’re all in trouble now. It’s just a pity I didn’t think of inviting Alvarez as well. It would have been fun to watch Christine make him squirm.” Emilie shot him a dirty look, but it didn’t dampen James’ mood. “It’s good to have the three of you here,” he said as he turned more serious. For years he had thought of Andrea as the older sister he had never had. He had come to think of Becket as a younger sister as well. With Emilie and Christine present, they were the closest friends he had left. As servants came and took away the empty plates from the first course, he was content to sit back and listen as the other women probed Emilie about her relationship with Alvarez. Then, when the main course came he couldn’t help but lick his lips at the well-done steak that was placed in front of him.

When six steaks were set around the table, Fox passed James’ elbow staring at the one sitting by an empty chair. “I’m so sorry Admiral, there must have been some kind of mistake.”

James quickly reached out and grabbed Fox’s wrist. “There’s no mistake my friend. This one’s for you. Please, sit down and join us. That’s an order,” he added, hardening his voice slightly. He knew full well Fox would refuse otherwise. “You’ve served me well ever since I inherited you from Raptor’s previous Captain. You’ve been with me for as long as Becket has. You’re eating with us to.”

As everyone tucked into their steaks, James made sure Fox’s wineglass was kept full. It took nearly twenty minutes, but eventually he visibly relaxed and joined the conversation.

“I’d like to propose another toast,” Becket said as she stood. She raised a hand as she finished chewing on a piece of steak and swallowed it. “We’ve already toasted to family. Let us now toast to friends and family who are no longer with us. To Romanov, Gupta and Scott and all the others we have loved and lost.”

James felt his heart clench at the mention of the names Becket had said. He brought his glass to his lips with everyone else, but his mind was far away. Gupta had been his First Lieutenant back on the exploration frigate Drake and Romanov had been his Second Lieutenant on Raptor. Scott he had met a couple of years later when she had become his Science Officer on Endeavour. If they had been alive, James would have invited them to this meal. And yet they weren’t. They had all died fighting the Karacknids. It made James look around the table. Each of his friends were going to face the Karacknids in the coming days. None of them would survive either.

Christine’s firm grip on his forearm stopped his thoughts cold. He could feel her nails biting into his skin. When he turned to her, she had a small smile on her lips. He knew what her eyes were saying. He couldn’t get lost in his thoughts. He was meant to be enjoying their meal together. Just then Jonathan let out a short sharp scream. When James turned to him, he saw Jonathan had a spoon in each hand which he proceeded to bang on his highchair. Once again, he elicited smiles and chuckles from everyone around him. “I think he is still hungry,” Christine said as she released her grip on James. She stood and grabbed Jonathan’s chair and pushed it closer to James. “You’ve still got a little steak left. Maybe he’d like to try some.”

James smiled and nodded at Christine. He needed the distraction. With care he cut up small sections of his steak and fed them to his son. Jonathan very happily took each piece and chewed on it furiously. James focused on Jonathan as he listened to Andrea tell one embarrassing story from their time at the British Naval Academy after another. He couldn’t help but smile at one or two of them. They seemed like a lifetime ago, back at a time when he hadn’t had a worry in the world. At least looking back now it didn’t feel like he had any back then.

When desert came out everyone let out ohs and ahhs. James had requested that each person’s favorite desert be made. Emilie had a pavlova, Christine a slice of chocolate fudge cake, Andrea a sticky toffee pudding and Becket had several large scoops of her favorite honeycomb ice cream. A small bowl of ice cream had even been brought out for Jonathan. Like Emilie, James had his own pavlova. Just as James placed the first forkful in his mouth, his COM unit vibrated furiously. He heard similar vibrations coming from everyone else around him. They all fumbled for their units. Andrea was the first to fish hers out of her pocket. “It’s from the Palace C&C, hundreds of new contacts are entering the system.”

James looked up from his own COM unit and met the eyes of his friends. “They are here,” he said slowly. In a very deliberate move, he picked up his fork and scooped up another slice of pavlova. “We are here to have a meal together. They cannot get here in the next five minutes. Let us finish and enjoy this. We may not get another chance.” Following his lead, everyone else resumed eating. Everyone looked around at each other as they ate, but no one spoke. They all knew the significance of the moment.

“There is one thing I’d like to share with you all,” James said after he ate his last mouthful. “When the Karacknids make their final push on Earth. Christine and Jonathan will be joining me on Drake.” Pausing, he turned to Christine and took her hand. He could feel the speed of her pulse. “We will face our enemy together.”

Christine closed her eyes as she squeezed his hand. A tear ran down each cheek. When she opened her eyes again her lips moved very slowly. “Thank you,” she whispered barely loud enough for James to hear. James simply nodded in return. He knew she would not be able to handle hiding somewhere on Earth whilst he fought alone in orbit. Nor could either of them bear the thought of leaving Jonathan with some of his maids in some underground bunker whilst Christine led the resistance against the Karacknid landings. No, if they were going to fight, they would do so together. “The Empress and Emperor of Humanity will face our greatest threat together. Our fate will be that of our homeworld,” he said to Christine, though his words were as much for himself as those around him.

When he finally looked away from Christine, he saw that the others wanted to protest. Especially Emilie. He gave his niece a gentle shake of the head. There was no point arguing. It would not accomplish anything. “One last toast,” he said as he picked up his glass. “Then we must go. We are needed…. Death to our enemies,” he said with a sudden vengeance. “Death to our enemies and a curse on their Empire.”

Everyone drank to James’ toast as they repeated his epitaph. James stood. He picked Jonathan out of his highchair and stepped towards Christine. Christine stood to take Jonathan from him. As she did, James pulled Christine into a hug. He gestured for Emilie to join them. For several seconds he held his wife, son, and niece. Then he let them go. “Let us go and see what the Karacknids are doing,” he said as he nodded to Becket and Andrea. The meal was over. It was time to face their enemy.

Chapter 19

According to all first-hand accounts the Karacknid battlefleet was awesome to behold. Of course we can observe it now on any holo display. Yet to our eyes, so accustomed to modern superdreadnoughts, the Karacknid fleet looks like a set of child’s toys. To our forefathers, nothing was further from the truth.

-Excerpt from Empire Rising, 3002 AD.

Imperial Palace

When James stepped into the Palace’s C&C he knew something was wrong immediately when he was greeted by complete silence. Everyone had been expecting the Karacknid fleet. They all knew what they were going to have to face. And yet a sense of shock washed over James as he took in the room’s atmosphere. As he glanced up at the holo plot he stopped dead. The Karacknid battlefleet was clear to see. Yet instead of five thousand warships, there were six thousand five hundred.

“So many,” Christine whispered as she stepped up beside him. She placed her hand in James’. “How can we face so many?”

“This changes nothing,” James said loud enough for most of the nearby officers to hear. He hoped his words would be spread around the rest of the C&C and the fleet. “Our job is to hurt the Karacknids. To cut down their numbers so our friends and allies can defeat them. The more ships they have, the more targets it gives us.” When he turned to Christine, she gave him a firm nod. She understood. If they were going to be defeated, it didn’t matter if the Karacknids had six or ten or however many thousands of ships. They would fight to the end one way or another.

“What do we do now?” Emilie asked from his other side.

“Now, you two go back to your ships,” James said as he half turned to Emilie and Becket. “It will take the Karacknids hours to move close to Earth, but you should be with your crews. Good luck.” Before they left, James gave each of them another hug and then gestured for them to get going. He didn’t want to prolong their goodbyes. Not when he did not know if he would see them again in person or not.

After Christine hugged each of them, she stepped back beside James. “Are you going to Drake?”

“In a few moments,” James said as he placed a hand on her shoulder. Instead of saying anything more, he turned back to the holo display. Together they watched the Karacknid battlefleet move into the system. Five hundred enemy warships broke away and headed towards the Alpha shift passage. Another five hundred had been left behind to guard the beta shift passage. For an hour the enemy battlefleet headed towards a point between Earth and Mars. Then the fleet broke into eight smaller fleets. About two thousand ships moved to place themselves between Earth and Mars. The rest headed for several of the Sol system’s key colonies. Mars, Titan, Ceres and Europa all had warships headed towards them. James felt Christine’s grip tighten as the Karacknid ships moved towards the colonies. Hundreds of millions of their citizens were about to be attacked. This was why James hadn’t left. If the Karacknids decided to nuke the colonies out of existence, he wanted to be at Christine’s side.

As each enemy fleet reached their target, they met no resistance. Every orbital defense platform had been pulled back to Earth. James had given orders for the populations of each of the colonies not to resist. There was no point. Earth was where the real fighting would take place. When the smallest Karacknid fleet got into missile range of Ceres, James held his breath. When there were no missile separations detected, he let out a sigh of relief. The Karacknids hadn’t come to destroy. At least they weren’t going to destroy everything. Minutes later more than a hundred shuttles left the Karacknid fleet and made for Ceres. No doubt they were full of Karacknid ground troops. The asteroid colony would be in their hands within the hour.

“Now I must go,” James said as he released Christine. Movement from one of the Karacknid fleets made him pause. More than one hundred contacts had broken away. They were immediately identified as freighters. All were headed towards the Sol system’s main asteroid belt.

“They’re going to collect asteroids,” Christine said as she saw what James was looking at.

James nodded. The enemy commander had used Korolyov’s tactic against them at New Shanghai. It seemed he intended to do it again. Though it meant that the battle, when it came, would be even more one-sided, the freighters made James smile. They also meant the enemy commander was trying to conserve his forces. Presumably for his planned advance into Alliance space. The more James could hurt his fleet, the more damage James could do to the Karacknids’ long-term plans.

James took another glance at the two thousand Karacknid warships hovering near Earth. They were clearly trying to goad Earth’s defenders. Every colony in the system was falling to the Karacknids and James’ fleet was doing nothing. He could order them to attack, but the Karacknids would just fall back to their comrades. Then his forces would be surrounded and torn apart. Just wait, he thought towards the two thousand enemy ships. Your time will come. Turning away from them, he gave Christine a quick hug. “Don’t worry, I’ll send for you and Jonathan when the real battle is about to begin. It will not be today. Nor for several days if my guess is correct. You should speak to our people. Let the colonies that have fallen know that we have not abandoned them. And let Earth’s populace know what is coming our way. They have heard many warnings from us, but now the enemy fleet is here. They need to hear your voice.”

“Of course,” Christine replied. “Fairfax has already had some remarks written up for me.” She paused as she looked back at the holo display. “Though now that I see the enemy fleet, I think I will make some changes.”

“Just speak from the heart,” James said as he leaned down and gently kissed Christine. “I’ll speak with my Admirals and then call you.” Christine flashed a brief smile and then squeezed his hand. James nodded to her and turned. “Let’s go,” he said to Alfaro who was standing off to one side.

*

IS Drake

By the time James got to Drake and spoke to his Admirals, he was just able to tune into the last few minutes of Christine’s speech. It was being broadcast on every holo news channel so he was able to find it easily. When he saw his wife, he clenched his teeth. Most would probably miss it, but he knew her well enough to see how hard she was fighting to keep her face straight. The emotion running through her almost had her whole-body trembling.

“And so, this is where we find ourselves. The enemy battlefleet has arrived,” Christine was saying. “Many of you listening to this throughout the Sol system are already facing them. Our thoughts and prayers are with you. Know that we who are preparing to fight around Earth do not resent your pacifism. Emperor James and I have given direct orders for you not to resist. Your colonies are too fragile. The Karacknids would simply kill you. But though you do not fight today. That does not mean you must simply bend the knee to our new enemies. In the silence, in the shadows, you must prepare. In secret make your plans to strike them when the opportunity comes. Only by hurting the Karacknids again and again and again can we win our freedom back. That must be the goal of every Human in the system. It may take years. It may take decades, but we must fight our enemy. Not blindly, not foolishly, but with the foresight that looks to the generations of our species that we wish to see free in the centuries to come.”

As Christine paused to take a breath, James glanced around Drake’s bridge, he saw images of his wife on several consoles. Nearly half of his officers were watching.

“And now, to the rest of us. We have long enjoyed the peace and beauty that our homeworld has brought us. Earth is our species’ birthplace. It is the center of our government. It is a symbol of everything that we have accomplished together. Whilst others may not fight our enemy yet, we will. In orbit and on the planet’s surface, we must fight the Karacknids to the last man and woman. They intend to conquer our homeworld to show to the rest of our colonies that we are a defeated species. To show to our allies that resistance to their quest for dominance is meaningless. In this they are mistaken. For I am convinced that in taking our homeworld, the Karacknids will be sealing their own downfall. Every one of you on Earth listening to me now has already received instructions. Some of you will fight during the first landings. Others will wait to strike after the Karacknids have arrived. We have weapons, munitions and stores hidden all around the world ready to be used in the next months and years. There are over twelve billion of us on Earth. It is my intention that if the Karacknids seek to enslave or kill each one of us, that we will each take a Karacknid with us. We will make it so costly for them to hold our homeworld that they will be forced to retreat from our system. We will cause them to divert so many resources to trying to control us that our allies will be given the time they need to win this war. That is my goal and my hope.

“I know the odds look strongly stacked against us. Yet that is not the case. For there is one factor on our side that numbers alone cannot account for. We are fighting for our freedom, for the freedom of our children and grandchildren. The Karacknids simply fight for conquest. That may win them a battle or two, but it is our resolve that will keep us fighting in the months and years that are to come. And so, this is the message… No, the command that I leave you with. Whether Emperor James and I survive the initial fighting or not, it does not matter. Our Empire is not based on us, but on the ideas of our founding constitution. Each and every one of us is equal in value and dignity, made in the image of our creator, we hold rights that are inalienable to all of us. These things the Karacknids cannot take from us. It is these things that will ensure that we fight to the bitter end. It is these things that will make us endure their occupation and win the war of attrition that now stands before us. We do not simply fight for ourselves, but for our children, and for their children, and for the freedom of our people for all of time.” Pausing again, Christine looked down and then back up at the recording device. “I know that in this none of you will let me down,” as she spoke, she gave her first small smile.

She held the smile for several seconds, then it vanished and Christine gave her audience a solemn nod. “Though I know we will win in the end, as your Empress it is my responsibility to be real with you all. We cannot ignore the fate coming for us. We must face it. This Karacknid battlefleet will destroy our fleet. The enemy will land their ground troops on our homeworld. We do not have the strength to prevent these things. But knowing this means we can be prepared. And so, right now, each of you listening to my voice must prepare yourselves. You must prepare yourselves to resist them with everything that we have. Now, and in the coming weeks and, if necessary, for as many decades as it takes to rid Earth of these vermin… Go now and spend time with your family and loved ones. Comfort yourselves with their presence. But do not shrink back in fear. We cannot run from what lies ahead. We must face it head on. The few weeks that we have until the Karacknid battlefleet comes are of the utmost importance. We must use them to prepare. You will all receive further instructions from the Navy and Marines, follow them and find courage in one another. Do this and you will not let me nor Emperor James nor our species down. In you all I have placed my trust. I know I will not be disappointed.”

After a slight bow to the holo recorder, Christine disappeared. She was immediately replaced by several talking heads who were no doubt about to dissect her message. James switched off his display. When he looked up, he found that most of his staff officers were staring at him. “You heard her,” he said as he forced himself to speak in a level tone. “We must make the best use of the time we still have. Don’t waste it gawking at me.” At once his officers spun back to their consoles and at least appeared to tap furiously on them.

For nearly an hour, James contented himself with watching the movements of the various Karacknid squadrons as they established control over all of the Sol system but Earth. He hoped to detect some chink in the Karacknids’ movements. Some flaw in the way they were going about besieging Earth. Yet his enemy made no mistakes. There would be no opening for his fleet to break orbit and catch a part of the Karacknid battlefleet alone and separated. Slowly, a noose was placed around Earth. No additional warships or supplies would reach Humanity’s homeworld. Nor would the two thousand four hundred warships James had under his control be able to break out. The Karacknids had them closed in. It was only a matter of his opponents choosing the time for the final battle.

“Some of the enemy ships seem to be acting strangely Admiral,” Lieutenant Anderson reported as he turned to catch James’ attention. “Look at the lead ships from these three fleets. They’re all turning towards us.

It took James only a couple seconds to see what Anderson had already spotted. So far, no Karacknid warships had moved within four light minutes of Earth. Yet now it looked like at least eighty ships were about to break that barrier.

“They’re not going to attack us so soon, surely?” Captain Fisher asked.

Suddenly alarmed, James glanced at the other Karacknid fleets. More than four thousand ships in six different fleets were circling Earth. Yet none were in ideal positions to suddenly turn and charge towards his ships. If they tried to, they would not all be able to engage together. “I can’t see it,” he replied. “But they are up to something. Give me a zoomed in visual of those ships.”

When the visual came up on Drake’s main holo display, James nodded to himself. The designs were definitely Karacknid. But they were slightly different than anything he had seen before. Essentially the length of a Karacknid heavy cruiser, they were much fatter. “They have been built for a singular purpose,” he commented. What it was though, he had no idea. As the Karacknid fleets kept their distance from Earth, he had no sense that the strange Karacknid ships’ movements were a prelude to an immediate strike. But whatever else it meant; he did not know.

It took nearly half an hour to find out what the Karacknids were up to. During that time exactly eighty ships broke away from the Karacknid fleets and closed to within two light minutes of Earth. Then they decelerated and settled onto courses that crisscrossed around the planet. Suddenly, each ship’s energy readings dramatically increased. The increase in energy output continued for five minutes. It got to the point where James was certain that all the extra space on the warships had been devoted to installing additional reactors. Then, for barely a split second, every ship’s energy readings ceased. In the blink of an eye every ship disappeared. For a second James thought that they had carried out some kind of shift space jump. Then he realized that the eighty Karacknid ships weren’t the only contacts to have disappeared off Drake’s sensors. The Karacknid fleets, Mars, the Sun, and everything else in the Sol system was gone.

“A jamming field,” Miyagi said, his voice full of awe. “A massive jamming field.”

James nodded to his Chief of Staff. They had seen Karacknid jamming fields around planets before. But not one so large. Crucially, the ships producing the jamming field were sufficiently far away from Earth that if he tried to break orbit to find and engage them, the Karacknid battlefleet would have ample time to close and engage him. And, without being able to see the Karacknid battlefleet, he wouldn’t know where they were. For all he knew, their fleets could be combining into one massive fleet and then charging straight towards him. He would barely get half an hour’s warning to arrange his ships to face them. We are completely blind, James thought. Completely blind and at their mercy.

“There’s something strange about the jamming field,” Anderson said. “The frequencies the Karacknids are using are different than what we’ve detected before. There are also some strange exotic particles in the mix. I’m no physicist, but they’ve adapted their jamming fields considerably.”

James’ mind immediately went to Scott. If she had still been alive, she would have been able to tell him exactly what was happening. In this instance though, he thought he could guess. “The tachyon pulse generator,” he said as he turned to Fisher and Miyagi. “Somehow they know about it. The jamming field has cut it off. I’m sure of it.”

“There’s only one way to know for sure,” Miyagi said. “I’ll send orders for the pulse generator to send a message to Varanni Prime.”

“Do it,” James said with a nod, “request an immediate reply.”

It took just seconds for the pulse generator to power itself up. Then massively powerful tachyon pulse waves were released and directed towards the distant Varanni Prime. It normally took twelve minutes for a message to reach their ally’s homeworld and a reply to be sent back. When the time came and went, James shared a look with his Flag Captain and Chief of Staff. Now they were not only blind but they were all alone as well. The Varanni would know something was up within the next few hours. When they sent their next message and didn’t receive a reply. The last message they will have received from us would have been informing them of the Karacknid battlefleet’s arrival, James thought. Then everything will have gone dark. They’ll think we have been conquered. He wanted to curse. If the Varanni thought Earth had fallen, they wouldn’t send more reinforcements. Instead, they would seek to build up their own defenses. We really are blind and alone now, he thought as he stared at Drake’s empty holo display. The entire might of the Karacknid battlefleet was just light minutes away from him and he didn’t know where they were nor what they were doing. A fresh sense of helplessness washed over him. How could he plan to fight an enemy fleet he couldn’t see?

Chapter 20

Tanaka-lan is a name that has gone down in infamy. Millions of our ancestors died at his hands. Tens of millions more were enslaved and made to suffer horribly. Despite all the horror he caused, he is remembered mainly among military historians; and he is known more for his tactical brilliance than his atrocities. Little did those who fought him in the War of Doom know that his actions there were only a foretaste of what was to come.

-Excerpt from Empire Rising, 3002 AD.

Slayer, Sol system.

Now the trap is complete, Tanaka-lan thought as the Human’s homeworld and fleet disappeared behind his ships’ jamming screen. Every other Human colony within the system was under his control. His enemy’s ships were cut off from detecting or communicating with anything beyond a couple of light minutes from their planet. In effect, the only Allied fleet of any significant size within several hundred light-years was all but defeated. Seconds later the enemy fleet reappeared as several probes penetrated the jamming screen and relayed their sensor feeds via laser COM links. Tanaka-lan could watch the Humans whilst they could see nothing.

“It is time to dispatch our scouts,” Tanaka-lan said to his subordinates. “I want a thorough search of every Human system. The warships from the Conclave species got here somehow. I want that mystery solved. Have prisoners taken from each system to be interrogated. I want to know if the Conclave fleet passed through their system before coming to the frontlines. One way or another we will trace the route they took to get here.”

“At once High Admiral. The scouts will be dispatched within the hour,” a COM officer replied.

“Organize another squadron of scouts to head back to the last system we were in. There must be an artificial shift passage from it towards Alliance space. I want it found and explored immediately,” Tanaka-lan added. The artificial shift passages his predecessor had discovered in Varanni space had been one of the few genuine surprises the war with the Alliance had thrown up. The other two were the enemy fighters and their FTL communication abilities. His own fleet had copied the enemy’s fighters, and now their FTL had been negated. Only the artificial shift passages were still beyond his scientists’ understanding. Tanaka-lan was not worried about that though. His reasoning was simple; artificial shift passages were only an advantage if they remained in friendly hands. Now that he had discovered one linking what the Humans called the Beta system to their home system, it told him the Varanni had extended their network of artificial shift passages into Human space. That was fine by him. Now that he had penetrated this far into the Human’s territory, it opened up their entire network of artificial shift passages to his ships. He intended to find the shift passages that led back to Varanni space. They would prove the ideal corridor for his fleet to carry out the next stage of its advance. In front of him, on his command chair, he already had a holo map of the eastern territories of Varanni Alliance space. Now that the Human fleet was helplessly trapped in orbit around their homeworld, it was time for him to decide what systems would be his next target.

“Send word back to our supply convoys. Have them all assembled here. Bring up our troop fleet as well,” Tanaka-lan ordered as he studied the holo map. He’d already designated Mars as a key site that would be developed into a supply depot for his fleet. The Humans had destroyed all their orbital stations when his warships had approached, but that had been expected. But what they hadn’t destroyed, what he knew they wouldn’t, were all the engineers and technicians that had built the stations. He intended to press them into service. They could either rebuild what they had destroyed or face the death of their families. Without even a flicker of emotion from his conscience towards the Humans who would soon be rounded up, Tanaka-lan focused on how his conquest of Varanni Alliance space would proceed. He was certain it was just a matter of time before Earth fell. Then he would move on to bigger and even juicier targets.

*

IS Vigilant, 13th July 2484 AD (two days later).

“It looks like they’re about to finish up with the latest two asteroids,” Vigilant’s sensor officer reported.

Commander Brooker nodded as he held his breath. Since the group of four Karacknid mining freighters had entered his sector of the asteroid belt two days ago, he had been slowly stalking them. Now he was almost within weapons range. He just needed the enemy freighter to head his way as it searched for asteroids. Brooker felt the rest of his officers tense. They all knew what was at stake over the next few seconds. Though Brooker had not known it before, finding the right asteroids to hurl at a planet’s defenses was a careful process. The asteroids had to be the right size to compactly fit into the freighter so as to maximize the freighter’s load. They also had to be of a particular make up of elements. Asteroids with high levels of rare elements would play far more havoc with targeting sensors than the more common asteroids. As a result, he had been watching the Karacknid freighters slowly move around the asteroid belt examining many potential candidates. Learning from them, Brooker had found his own candidate. Now his customs corvette was lying in stealth under the shadow of a much larger asteroid waiting patiently, all of her systems but her passive sensors fully powered down.

“They’re coming our way,” Brooker’s sensor officer whispered, clearly afraid that the Karacknids would somehow hear her.

“That they are,” Brooker replied normally as a smile spread across his face. “Alert the crew that we will be engaging momentarily. Prepare to flash start the reactor.”

As his officers got to work, Brooker’s mind went to his parents back on Mars. He had last seen them four weeks ago on his twenty third birthday. Though Vigilant had been in stealth before the Karacknids had entered the system, his Corvette’s passive sensors had detected the Karacknid warships entering Mars’ orbit. He hoped his parents were still alive, but he had no way of knowing. Even so, he easily pictured them. This is for you, he thought towards them. I hope you are proud.

“Reboot all systems!” he ordered as soon as the Karacknid freighters came into range. It took two seconds for Vigilant’s single reactor to power up. As soon as it did, its energy was directed towards the Corvette’s active sensors, single missile tube and twin plasma cannon.

The enemy freighters and their two escorts reacted at once. The freighters veered away from the source of the sudden energy spike whilst the two destroyers turned their active sensors to bathe the area in electromagnetic energy. With her active sensors already trained on the Karacknid freighters’ rough position, it took just one second for them to get a firm lock. As soon as they did, a single missile erupted from Vigilant’s nose. At the same time, the corvette’s plasma cannon fired three rounds of two plasma bolts at the other freighter. The first two missed, but the second and third pairs punched into the freighter. They burnt into the depths of the Karacknid ship and blew right out its other side. No secondary explosions followed the weapons fire, but the freighter lost power and broke into two sections. The crew of the freighter targeted by Vigilant’s missile weren’t so lucky. The missile struck the freighter’s engines, sending a cascading explosion through the rear of the ship towards its reactors. Just moments after being hit the freighter disappeared in a blinding explosion.

“Excellent work everyone,” Brooker said over the COM channel he had open to all twenty of Vigilant’s crew. “We took out both freighters. Excellent work…” He paused to check the active sensor feed. “Enemy missiles are just fifteen seconds away now. It has been an honor to serve with you. I thank you for your service.” As sixteen missiles raced towards his small ship from the two enemy destroyers, Brooker didn’t say any more. There was nothing more to say. His crew had known that they were dead from the minute they revealed themselves. There wasn’t even any point ordering Vigilant into evasive maneuvers. She couldn’t escape so many enemy missiles. Brooker shared a glance with his First Lieutenant and other bridge officers. Then he began to turn back to the holo display to watch the enemy missiles. He was too slow. Vigilant was blown apart before his eyes could focus on the display.

*

IS Drake, 27th July 2484 AD (2 weeks later).

Fifteen minutes before his shift as senior commander of Earth’s fleet began, James stepped onto Drake’s bridge. He nodded to Miyagi and Fisher and made his way to his command chair. As soon as he sat down, he scanned the main and secondary holo displays. The Karacknid jamming field was still casting an ever-present shadow around Earth. Nothing was visible beyond two light minutes out. James couldn’t help but grimace at the sight. It was the reason for him having to spend the next five hours on Drake’s bridge. For the past two weeks the Karacknid battlefleet had been launching probing attack after probing attack. The jamming field meant that their units could charge towards Earth and James’ ships wouldn’t be able to detect them until they were less than half an hour from attack range. Every senior Admiral in the fleet was taking shifts commanding Earth’s defenses. There was simply no time to wait for James or Lightfoot or whoever would normally be assigned to command the fleet to get to their station. Someone had to be ready at a second’s notice to respond to whatever trick the Karacknids might try next. The constant attacks were having another impact on James and the fleet’s crew. With attacks coming in almost daily and without any warning, everyone’s nerves were frayed. The fleet was in a constant state of high alert, and it was wearing down his people’s endurance. James had no doubt that was the Karacknid commander’s intention. The vast majority of the Karacknid battlefleet was no doubt training and preparing for their main battle, knowing full well when it would come. James’ crews and ships had no such luxury, they constantly had to fight off the latest Karacknid attack. Yet there was nothing James could do about it. At the moment about twenty percent of each of his ship’s crews were on shore leave. No one was getting more than a couple of days away, and they all had to be within ten minutes of a shuttle so they could go back to their ship within half an hour, but it was something.

The Karacknids’ jamming field was also responsible for the congestion James saw in Earth’s orbit. With the Karacknids’ ability to strike anywhere around the planet so quickly, all the main orbital stations had been clustered together. They all had to use their maneuvering thrusters to avoid one another, but there was no other option. Several stations had already been destroyed by stealth attacks from Karacknid fighters. James and the fleet were doing their best to keep them protected. Though it would mean almost nothing in the long run, the longer all the construction yards on each orbital station were kept alive, the more they could work towards producing more ships and weapons that would contribute to the final battle. It might only mean a handful of extra Karacknid ships being destroyed, but that made them worth defending.

As he waited for Lightfoot’s shift to end, James pulled up the most recent report on Operation Farsight. He had put Andrea in charge of organizing a team to try and figure out exactly how the Karacknids’ jamming screen worked and counteract it. As he scanned the report, James shook his head. Despite more than a hundred of Earth’s leading scientists and engineers being assigned to the task, they were no further along. Several attempts had been made to counteract the jamming to no avail. Additional attempts to send probes through the jamming field to get a look at the Karacknid battlefleet or even to try and rush an armed freighter through had all failed. The Karacknids had intercepted each attempt.

“I’ve got Admiral Lightfoot on a COM channel Admiral,” one of Drake’s officers called, pulling his attention away from the report.

“Put him through,” James replied as he looked up. Lightfoot’s face appeared on his command chair’s holo display moments later.

“Admiral,” Lightfoot said as he gave James a quick nod. “Surprisingly, nothing to report. The last five hours were quiet. Though you can probably guess what that will mean.”

“Aye,” James responded. The Karacknids had been launching probing attacks against Earth’s defenders almost every day. The next attack was already overdue. It was likely James would be the one to face it when it came. “But don’t worry, I’ll make sure you’re woken up before the shooting begins.”

“How very kind of you,” Lightfoot replied as a small smile appeared on his lips. It vanished less than a second later. “Their main attack cannot be delayed too much longer. We don’t know how our traps for their mining freighters fared, but even if we managed to destroy a number of them, it can’t take too much longer to gather the asteroids they need.”

“No,” James agreed. “That may explain their delay hitting us today. Perhaps my shift will prove uneventful too. Though if it does, I will not take that as a good thing.”

“No indeed,” Lightfoot echoed.

James took a breath and forced the somber look from his face. “In any case, there’s nothing more we can do about it. We are as prepared as we can be. Go and get some rest. Spend time with your family. Make the most of it. We’ll be here when you get back.”

“Thank you Admiral, I have a meeting scheduled with the Inner Council, I’ll say hello to Christine for you,” Lightfoot replied as he gave James another nod.

“Please do,” James said as he waved to his friend and ended the COM channel. Turning back to the display, he settled into his command chair as he got comfortable for the next five hours.

Just twenty minutes before his shift was over, alarms all across Drake’s bridge went off. James was instantly alert. “One hundred Karacknid warships have just appeared through the jamming screen,” Lieutenant Anderson reported from his tactical console. “Wait, the number is still rising.”

James watched as the text appeared on the bridge’s main holo display. The number quickly rose to four hundred then stopped. It wasn’t hard to see their trajectory. “They’re going for section twenty-three of our orbital stations,” he predicted. The section was right on the outer edge of where all the stations had been huddled together. It was the furthest from where James had the majority of his fleet. As he glanced at his fleet dispositions, he made a snap decision. “Order Admiral Nogamoro to move his fleet to intercept. Have Rear Admiral Chen launch two hundred of his fighters, they are to get into position to back Nogamoro up.”

“At once Admiral,” Miyagi replied.

James nodded to his Chief of Staff and glanced at Captain Fisher. “It’s the largest force they have sent against us yet,” she commented. “It could be the opening move in their assault.”

“It could,” James agreed. That was the problem. Four hundred Karacknid warships was a sizeable force. Yet it could easily be nothing more than a feint. If he dispatched too much of his forces to intercept them, the main Karacknid fleet could hit him with his fleet divided. “Have Ya’sia get her fleet ready to join Nogamoro. But she is to remain at her station for now. Make sure we have another two hundred fighters prepped and ready for immediate launch.”

With the Karacknid warships already traveling at high velocity, events happened very quickly. Nogamoro’s ships got to section twenty-three and formed up to face the Karacknids. The Karacknids altered their heading to one that would take them up and away from Earth. It made James breathe a sigh of relief. But, three minutes later, they reverted to their original course. More than one officer around James swore. “Send Chen’s fighters in now!” James ordered. The Karacknids’ were actually going to engage. As soon as Chen’s fighters accelerated out towards the Karacknid squadron, the hairs on the back of James’ neck rose. The Karacknid commander was up to something. He was sure of it. Yet he couldn’t decide if it was the opening stages of a full-on attack, or some other trick. If he chose wrong, it could end in disaster. This time James swore. “Launch our next wave of fighters. Have Ya’sia move closer to Nogamoro.”

By the time his orders had been carried out, Nogamoro’s fleet of five hundred warships had already opened fire on the Karacknids. They, in turn, had fired a missile salvo themselves. “New contacts!” Anderson announced. “Enemy fighters emerging from the jamming field!”

Three hundred Karacknid fighters were easily detectable as they accelerated hard after the Karacknid fleet. Just behind them, three hundred more contacts appeared. This time they were all warships. Drake’s sensors quickly identified them as destroyers and frigates. They were accelerating as fast as they could. Finally, James understood what was happening. Confirming his suspicions, the original Karacknid fleet began to pull up and away from Earth again but not before it fired a second salvo towards Nogamoro. “It was a feint,” he said to his staff officers. As he spoke, James stared at the two hundred fighters he had ordered to charge the original Karacknid fleet. Their momentum was already such that if they tried to break and reverse course, the charging Karacknid fighters would catch them. With the speed advantage, the Karacknids would tear them apart. There was nothing he could do to save them.

“Admiral,” Lieutenant Martinez called out. “Rear Admiral Chen is requesting permission to dispatch his next two hundred fighters.”

“Permission denied,” James responded. “He is to order his first fighter wing to strike the Karacknid fleet. Take out as many of their capital ships as they can. Then they are to engage the Karacknid fighters. Inform them their Emperor expects them to spend their lives dearly,” James forced himself to say. Several of his officers looked at him, James kept his face impassive as he stared at the holo plot. The Karacknid plan was designed to draw out as many of his fighters as possible and destroy them. The three hundred additional Karacknid destroyers and frigates would combine with the three hundred Karacknid fighters to engage whatever came against them. Sending in more fighter wings piece by piece would only ensure they all were torn apart.

“Nogamoro is engaging the Karacknid missiles now,” Anderson informed everyone, drawing their attention back to the battle. James nodded as Nogamoro’s ships took out most of the Karacknid missiles. Twelve contacts disappeared from Nogamoro’s fleet. In return, his missiles destroyed or crippled twenty Karacknids. When the second group of mark IV missiles crashed into the Karacknid fleet, Chen’s two hundred fighters attempted to follow them in. The Karacknid fighters were just in time to intercept them. A deadly dog fight ensued. Barely sixty of Chen’s fighters managed to break away from the Karacknid fighters to launch their own missiles at the Karacknid fleet. By then the Karacknids had dispatched most of Nogamoro’s missiles and diverted the majority of their fire power towards the fighters and their missiles. Only twelve of the fighters’ plasma missiles struck targets. Each hit scored a kill, but it came at a great cost. None of the sixty fighters that had charged the Karacknid fleet survived.

For several more minutes the battle between the two groups of fighters continued, then the Karacknid frigates and destroyers joined the fray. Their point defenses ripped into the Human Spitfires. In less than sixty seconds the battle ended. James’ hands clenched into fists. For the loss of just eighty fighters and thirty-six warships, the Karacknids had destroyed two hundred of his fighters. When he turned to look at Nogamoro’s fleet, James’ anger rose. Four more ships had been destroyed and it looked like several more had taken damage. His heart stopped when he saw that Nogamoro’s flagship, the battlecruiser Yamato, was among them. “I want the damage report from Yamato immediately,” he demanded. As the battlecruiser slowly rotated on the bridge’s holo display, he got the answer he was looking for. A Karacknid antimatter missile had struck the large warship directly amid ships. Yamato’s slow roll eventually brought the full extent of the damage into view. A massive hole had been made by the antimatter. James knew enough about Yamato’s design to know that her main bridge had been obliterated. Nogamoro was gone. With his hand still clenched, James shook his head as he looked up at the Karacknids’ jamming screen. He wanted to raise his fists and scream at the enemy commander. Yet he knew it would do him no good.

“It’s the Karacknids jamming screen,” Fisher said from her command chair, clearly picking up on James’ mood. “It just gives them too much of an advantage.”

James didn’t respond, he wasn’t in the mood for excuses. The Karacknid commander had bested him once again. And the main battle hasn’t even begun yet, he couldn’t help saying to himself.

Chapter 21

Losing one battle almost never means the end of a war, but losing several, that is another matter. The early years of the Empire teach us this truism very clearly.

-Excerpt from Empire Rising, 3002 AD.

Imperial Palace, 28th July 2484 AD (one day later).

“Which is why I have decided we can no longer protect our orbital stations. Our fleet is the only real means we have of inflicting damage on the Karacknid battlefleet. We cannot split it to defend Earth’s orbitals any longer. We must keep the fleet ready to fight as one,” James concluded as he addressed the Inner Council meeting Christine had called. The loss of two hundred fighters and Admiral Nogamoro had sent shockwaves through the fleet and Earth’s populous. Without avoiding the blame James knew he personally held, he had given a brief account of what had happened and the ramifications of the Karacknids’ attack.

“But the orbital stations are still churning out new weapons and fighters,” Commoner Nichols, leader of the Loyalist Party, responded. “Surely they are still worth defending?”

Before James could answer, Andrea jumped in. “Perhaps if the siege was expected to last months rather than weeks. But we are already starting to run out of the raw materials we need to keep most of the orbital factories operating at full capacity. Before the week is out my team expect to have to reduce most factories to fifty percent capacity or even shut some down. We’re also starting to run out of point defenses and the launchers for the conversion work we are doing on our freighters. We are fabricating additional units, but the process is slow. It will be slowed even more once our factories have to reduce capacity. In a week’s time there may not be much left worth defending.”

When it looked like Nichols wanted to argue more, James placed his hands on the conference table they were all sat around. When she looked at him, he gave a slight shake of his head. They had worked closely together in the immediate aftermath of the first battle of Earth and the destruction of London and Manchester by Karacknid nuclear warheads. He knew she trusted him. “We cannot keep protecting the stations. There’re simply not valuable enough. Not given the current strategic situation. The Karacknids’ jamming technology simply gives them too much of an advantage.”

With reluctance still written across her face, Nichols nodded and sat back in her seat. “Are there any other questions about yesterday’s engagement?” Christine asked. “We know our forces were tricked by the Karacknids, but we cannot blame our commanders. The jamming screen around Earth puts them in an impossible situation.” James shot his wife a look of thanks, even if he didn’t entirely accept her explanation. He was to blame. There was no point in her trying to defend him.

“How many pilots did we manage to recover?” McCarthy asked.

“That was the one positive,” Miyagi answered on James’ behalf. “Sixty-three were picked up by our rescue shuttles. Most of them will be able to fly again in other fighters. Though the newer ones coming off the production lines aren’t up to the standards that they are used to. They will make do.”

“Are we to expect many more of these probing attacks?” Nichols asked. “How long before they launch their main attack? I had thought it would have come already.”

Miyagi glanced at James and James nodded. “To your first question, yes, it’s possible more probing attacks will come,” James said. “But if we have our fleet combined, we can respond to any Karacknid probe or feint with our full force. That should limit the damage. As to when the Karacknids will attack with their full force, your guess is as good as mine. Though I feel it will be sooner rather than later. My senior commanders and I suspect that the jamming field plays two roles. It prevents us from anticipating Karacknid attacks and it keeps us from communicating with our allies via the tachyon pulse generator or trying to slip messenger ships out of the system. I fear that the Karacknids are setting up a forward operating base in the Sol system. Probably in orbit around Mars. There are plenty of raw materials and components they can take from our colonies and mining operations. Even with most of our orbital stations throughout the system being scuttled, the Karacknids can pick through the wreckage and make use of a lot of our materials. The Sol system is a prime location to set up a base in preparation for advancing into Varanni Alliance territory. The Karacknids’ delay may be because they are waiting for their own repair yards to be up and running before they fight us. They could also be waiting for more reinforcements.”

Fairfax shook his head and momentarily looked at his shoes. “The odds just keep mounting against us… Why do you think their final attack may come sooner rather than later?” he asked as he looked up again.

James glanced at Miyagi and then Christine. She gave him a slight nod to encourage him. “It’s nothing more than a hunch,” he said reluctantly, he didn’t like briefing civilians based on a hunch. At least, he didn’t want them thinking he was basing his decisions on his feelings rather than facts. Internally though, James trusted his instincts. They had been honed through decades of combat. “The Karacknid commander took a risk sending seven hundred ships and three hundred fighters against us yesterday. It was a significant escalation. It may be that yesterday marks the upping of the ante and a number of similar attacks will follow. But I think it was one final feint to really test our response. The main attack may now follow.”

“Which brings us to the second point on my agenda,” Christine said before anyone else could follow up with James. “If the Karacknids’ main attack is imminent. Where are we on our preparations to face them ground side?”

“We’re as far along as we can be, given the circumstances,” General Johnston replied as everyone turned to him. “As you all know, the civilians of certain sectors within Earth were far more heavily armed than others before the Empire was formed. In those areas we’re working to organize towns, villages, and city blocks into operational groups. They will each fight together as best they can to kill Karacknid soldiers. As per our decision the last time we met, we’re instructing each operational group to wait at least three months before beginning active missions. Throughout the rest of Earth’s sectors, we’re trying to get as many arms into the hands of civilians as possible. We’re also setting up hundreds of hidden supply bunkers right across the planet. Their location is only being revealed to marines of rank Colonel and above. They will be used by whatever marines survive the initial landings to carry on a guerrilla war.”

James could feel the tension rising within the room. When the decision had first been made, a number of politicians and other Inner Council members had objected to just handing out weapons. In theory the Marines were carrying out background checks. Though the reality was that anyone who wanted a weapon for nefarious purposes could easily attain one on the black market. So far, giving out so many weapons hadn’t resulted in a spike in the crime rate. At least, that’s what several of the Palace’s statisticians had assured Christine and him. Given the chaos that Earth had become, he had no idea how they could be so certain.

“And there’s nothing more we can do to help you speed up the process?” Andrea asked when Johnston paused.

Johnston shrugged. “Not unless you can stop the protests, the people fleeing the cities and all the transport chaos. I know our Emperor has sung your praises on many occasions when it comes to your organizational abilities, but I’m not sure even you could pull that off.”

Andrea shot Johnston a small grin. “I’m afraid you may be right. I am also afraid that shipments of new weapons from orbit will start to dry up in the next day or two. Our small arms orbital factories are the first we will have to shut down.”

“To be expected,” Johnston replied. “As many Karacknid soldiers as I hope our people will be able to kill in the months and years ahead, I’d rather take out an extra one of their bloody warships than see civilian bodies being piled up.”

James grimaced at Johnston’s words. He’d hit on the very point that had so many people against the idea of arming the citizens to resist the Karacknids. He had little doubt that the Karacknids would launch reprisals against civilian attacks on their ground troops. The cost would be high. Possibly unimaginably high. And yet continuing the fight after the fleet’s destruction was the only long-term hope Earth had.

“How bad is it on the surface now?” Christine asked as she turned to Servant Musk. She was one of the Inner Council’s newest members. Since being appointed to the house of Servants by the Senate, she had quickly risen to become one of its leading lights. After the first Karacknid attack on Earth, she had stepped down as CEO of Earth’s third-largest corporation to focus on using her wealth to help the recovery effort. James had actually been one of the ones to push Christine into tapping her management skills to help deal with Earth’s populous.

“I think General Johnston’s description was an understatement in all honesty,” Musk answered. “Everyone knows what happened at New Shanghai. The reports and holo recordings of the aftermath of the Karacknid landings had leaked to the populace weeks ago. Everyone that can has been trying to get out of our major cities. Yet there are only a certain number of places they can go. Many of our smaller towns and villages are being overrun with people fleeing. There are also food shortages in several sectors.” Musk quickly raised her hands in a consolatory gesture. “We have more than enough food to go around. The changes we made to our agricultural practices after Admiral Korolyov’s siege have ensured we are not under threat in that area. At least not for several months. But panic buying and hoarding have been causing some short-term shortages.”

“Do you think you can get a handle on them?” Christine pressed.

“To a certain extent,” Musk replied slowly. “The problem is, it’s extremely hard to predict where the next problem will arise. The waves of fear and panic sweeping across our citizens come and go without warning. Yesterday’s battle in orbit hasn’t helped things either. It has set off a whole new wave of fear. We are working to try and shore up our transportation infrastructure so that in the immediate aftermath of any Karacknid landing, shortages of food and other supplies will not continue. At this point I am afraid that a series of famines will kill more of our people than any fighting our civilians try to get involved in.”

As Christine drew other members of the Inner Council into the discussion, James sat back as his mind wandered. All the work happening on Earth’s surface was important, he knew that, but he had little to do with it. He couldn’t help but feel that a lot of the plans now being discussed would prove irrelevant. If he was right, the Karacknids would be attacking soon.

*

Stealth Probe 13, high Earth orbit, 30th July 2484 AD (2 days later).

Science Officer first class Jake Williams reached up and wiped the sweat from his brow. Though he wanted to blame the heat of his stealth probe for the thick film of sweat that coated his body, he knew there was more to it than that. It was taking a significant amount of his mental capacity to simply stop himself from shaking. Come on Jacky, he told himself, pull it together. You’ve been through worse than this. His thoughts almost made him laugh. The worst he had been through was his final thesis defense for his PhD. Then he had been sweating buckets, but now that felt like nothing. Proposing a new theory for how the shift drive interacted with weak gravitational fields was a cakewalk compared to trying to penetrate the Karacknids’ jamming screen. You didn’t even have to be here, he scolded himself, not for the first time.

Twelve previous attempts had failed. Each time the Karacknids had detected the probe before it had reached their jamming field. That had told Williams and the other scientists assigned to work on the problem at least one thing. The Karacknids’ likely had hundreds of scout ships or probes peering through the jamming field. Whilst Humanity’s ships might be blind, the Karacknids’ were not. In part that was why Williams was sweating so much. The probe he was in was designed to absorb every millijoule of electromagnetic energy that touched it. It also contained and stored all of the stray emissions its few electronic devices produced. With zero energy being emitted by the probe, most of it was being turned into heat. “But this time it’s going to work,” Williams said, mimicking the confident tone he had used when he had brought the adaptions to his supervising officer. After careful analysis of all of the data regarding how Karacknid active and passive sensors worked, Williams thought he had cracked it. With a slight alteration to the stealth probes’ outer stealth coatings, Williams had been sure that attempt number thirteen would work. So sure that he had volunteered to fly the probe himself. In part he had argued that it was because the probe’s active energy absorbing field needed to be monitored. If need be, he was the best one to alter it on the fly. After volunteering, he had been more honest with himself. Since the first probe had been lost, he had been watching pilot after pilot go to their deaths due to his work.  The guilt was too much for him. Either attempt number thirteen would work, or he wouldn’t have to live with the weight of being responsible for sending others to their deaths. Besides, it’s not like you’ve got anyone to leave behind, he thought in an effort to shore up his resolve. Both his parents had been killed when the Karacknids nuked New York. At just twenty-five, he didn’t have a wife or children. He had devoted his efforts to getting his PhD and joining the Imperial Navy to avenge his parents’ deaths. This is your chance, he thought as his probe edged closer and closer to the Karacknid jamming field.

A smile spread across his face when his probe passed the point that number ten had reached. He was further away from Earth than any probe had yet made it. He wiped more sweat from his forehead. Then he blinked several times as a drop reached his eye anyway, causing it to sting. When a light on one of his consoles flashed, Williams forgot about how hot he was. The active sensor emissions colliding with the probe’s hull were rising dramatically. There are at least two ships out there scanning the area, Williams figured. He frowned when his console gave him some strange readings. They’ve altered their active scanning frequencies, he realized. That’s how they’re peering through the jamming field. The jamming field used some kind of exotic particle to prevent tachyon waves from penetrating it. Whatever the Karacknids were doing to allow themselves to see through it, it was like nothing Williams had seen before.

Reaching for his controls, Williams altered the active absorbing layer on his probe. Having never seen the Karacknid sensor emissions before, he was doing things on the fly. Relying as much on his intuition as actual science, he battled the rising levels of sensor emissions that were washing over his probe. Sweat ran between his eyebrows to the tip of his nose, he ignored it. His attention was focused on making sure the Karacknid sensor emissions didn’t reach a level where his probe’s stealth tech would be overcome. He was so focused that he didn’t notice his probe entering the Karacknid jamming field. Nor did he immediately notice it exit the other side. Only when the sensor emissions hitting the probe suddenly changed and reverted back to the kinds of emissions he was used to was he snapped out of his trancelike state. The sudden change in sensor emissions undid all the work he had been doing. In the blink of an eye probe thirteen’s stealth technologies were overcome and alarms went off all around Williams. He was visible to every Karacknid ship around him. Yet the sudden change in sensor emissions meant something else. He had passed through the Karacknid jamming field! Amazed, Williams flicked on his probe’s active sensors. Then he searched out the nearest Karacknid warships. One was less than a quarter of a light second away. Well within energy weapon range. Immediately Williams initiated the probe’s emergency protocol. From the rear of the probe a series of small rockets were launched back towards Earth. Every three seconds a new one was updated and fired out with the latest sensor returns the probe was getting. Only four rockets were launched before a laser beam intersected probe thirteen, burning it and science officer Williams out of existence.

Chapter 22

Every month it seems one scientist or another announces a new discovery that will transform the way interstellar wars are fought. As a young cadet numerous such announcements excited me greatly. Now after many years in the Navy I have come to see that things change slowly. Rarely does a new technology scale up to where it can be implemented into the Fleet’s arsenals very quickly. Yet there have been exceptions down through the centuries. And with enemies on every front, the Fleet cannot afford to leave any stone unturned.

-Excerpt from Empire Rising, 3002 AD.

IS Drake

As the estimated position of the probe reached the furthest point any attempt to break through the Karacknid jamming field had yet made, James held his breath. Amazingly, no weapons fire appeared from behind the jamming field. He shared a glance with Fisher. For the first time in days, he felt a spark of hope. His Flag Captain looked like she felt the same. He turned back to the holo display, his hope rising. There was still no sign the Karacknids had detected the probe. Then, after nearly a minute, the dot representing the estimated position of the probe passed beyond the jamming field. James tore his eyes away from the display to look at his command staff. He was expecting some kind of message from the probe. Surely they were getting something? Yet they were all looking at the holo display themselves.

As the seconds ticked by, James felt a nervous energy building within him. He needed to know what had happened. Yet it was dawning on him that he might never know. If the probe was destroyed in the jamming field or once it got through it, there would be no way for Drake’s sensors to detect anything. The probe might have malfunctioned, he said to himself as he wondered what else could explain the silence. It might not have even made it through the jamming field yet. It could be on its way back right now.

Just as he was getting his emotions under control, a tiny blip appeared right where the probe was supposed to have reached the jamming field. James’ officers scrambled to figure out what was happening. Before anyone gave him an answer, another contact appeared.

“It’s the probe’s emergency communication rockets!” Fisher shouted. “They’ll be sending us sensor data.”

Not as familiar with the technical aspects of the mission, it took James a second to realize what Fisher was saying. As soon as he did, he spun towards Lieutenant Martinez.

“I’ve got it,” James’ COM officer announced without looking up from his console. “Sending it to the holo display.”

A large angle of the blackness that encompassed Earth disappeared, replaced by familiar sights. Mars, Venus, and Neptune were all visible. Hundreds of smaller contacts much closer to Earth marked the Karacknid fleet. Other groups of ships were moving here and there. For twelve seconds the holo display was alive with activity. Then it cut out as suddenly as it had appeared.

“That’s everything,” Martinez reported. “No more data has been sent to us.”

“There were only four communication rockets,” Anderson added. “Twelve seconds of sensor data is all we would expect. The probe must not have survived long enough to get any more.”

James’ mind went to the profile he had read on the scientist manning the probe. The young man had an impressive record. He had been full of potential. Like all those who died before him, James thought. “Then let’s make use of what we’ve got,” he ordered. “Replay the sensor data on a loop and analyze it.”

Leaving his officers to examine the finer details, James contented himself with watching the brief images the probe managed to send back. As soon as the data started playing again, he noticed a number of things he had missed the first time. Instead of being distracted by seeing the Sol system again, he focused on the enemy’s positions. The Karacknid battlefleet had formed into three large fleets of nearly two thousand ships each. His opponent was preparing for a major attack. Then he spotted something else, a small group of forty ships was making its way towards Earth from Sol’s main asteroid belt. It looked like they were freighters accompanied by a small escort of warships. The Karacknids’ mining freighters. If they were on their way back, then they had all the asteroids they needed for their attack. Squinting, he looked more closely at the holo display. He estimated that the freighters were no more than two hours away from the Karacknid fleet. They could attack as soon as they get there. “Confirm that the contacts heading towards Earth from the asteroid belt are the mining freighters we detected with their fleet when the Karacknids arrived,” James requested.

“Their drive signatures match,” Anderson reported moments later. “There are not quite as many of them, but it’s the same group.”

“Send out the call for all of our crews on shore leave to return immediately,” James ordered. “Alert all our senior commanders that an attack could be imminent. Make sure they have this data sent to their Staff Officers. And get me a COM channel to the Palace. I need to speak to Empress Christine right away.” As he waited, James’ mind went to the officer who had commanded the probe. His sacrifice had not been in vain. His data was vital. Now we just have to make the best use of it, James said to himself. That was going to be easier said than done. By his rough guesstimate, the Karacknids had received another three or four hundred warships. They could be the ships that Becket had given the slip, or another squadron that had come from Karacknid space. Either way, the odds had tipped another notch in the Karacknid’s favor.

“I have Empress Christine waiting for you Admiral,” Lieutenant Martinez informed James.

James nodded to Martinez as he stood. “I’ll take it in my office. You have command Captain,” he added as he glanced at Fisher. Walking the few steps out of the bridge to his adjoining office, James sat at his desk and switched on the built-in COM unit.

“Has something happened?” Christine asked right away. “The Palace suddenly seems to be a hive of activity.”

“Our latest attempt to get a probe through the jamming field worked,” James explained. “We only got a brief glimpse of what the Karacknids are doing, but their mining freighters were on their way to rendezvous with their battlefleet. They could be ready to launch their main attack within the next couple of hours. The fleet was already in a battle formation. If our probe has been destroyed, then the Karacknids probably know we got a glimpse of what they were doing. They know we are preparing for them. It will probably mean they’ll strike as soon as they can.”

“So this is it?” Christine responded, barely above a whisper.

Her tone reminded James of the wider implications of the Karacknid attack. He’d been so focused on responding correctly that he hadn’t thought through what was about to happen. Somberly, he nodded. “I’m afraid it is. If you’re still happy to join me you may make your final preparations,” James said, though as the words left his mouth it felt like his world began to spin. Was he really going to bring his wife and son onto his warship?

“I don’t have much to do. Everything is ready. I’ll speak to the planet again and then I will head straight to the shuttle. I’ll alert Jonathan’s maids.”

“Wait!” James exclaimed as Christine leaned forward to tap her COM unit to end the call.

Christine’s eyes widened at his tone. “What is it?”

“It’s Jonathan,” James said slowly as he closed his eyes. It was so easy for him to picture his son running around with his arms outstretched wanting attention. Now that the Karacknid attack was imminent, he realized that he couldn’t bring his son up to Drake. Not when it meant certain death. As much as he feared what would happen to Jonathan if he stayed on Earth, he couldn’t be responsible for causing his son’s death.

“What are you thinking?” Christine pressed.

“Are we really doing the right thing?” James asked, still with his eyes closed. He opened them as he stared at his wife. “Can we take his future from him, even if all he has to look forward to is a Karacknid occupation?”

“You don’t want us to join you?” Christine responded, her tone perfectly level. James knew it meant she was trying very hard to remain calm. “You want to fight and die alone up there and leave us here? You know what will happen if the Karacknids learn that Jonathan and I are alive. They will hunt us down relentlessly. They’ll see me and Jonathan as the foci of any rebellion attempts.”

James nodded slowly. “They will.”

“And you would consign us to that fate?”

James had to blink back tears. Though he was trying to hide them, he wanted Christine to see how difficult this was for him. “What else would you have me do? If you join me, you will die for sure. I know I’m asking you to go on without me. But isn’t that what our people need? And maybe they need Jonathan too? We don’t know who he will grow up to be. Maybe he will want to lead the resistance efforts. Think about the burden we feel for our people. He may come to share that in time.”

Christine shook her head as she lost her composure and tears streamed down her cheeks. “I don’t want to go on without you. I don’t want Jonathan to grow up without a father.”

“Neither do I,” James replied. “But neither do I want him to die today. I don’t want that for either of you. Can you not see what I’m saying?”

“Of course I can see it. He is my son,” Christine moaned. “You don’t think I haven’t had second thoughts? Of course I have. But I do not want to lose you. I can’t do this on my own.”

James wished with all his heart that he could reach out and pull Christine into a hug. Yet all he had to comfort her were his words. “I know you feel that way my love. But you can do this. Remember everything you have accomplished in your life. You left the British Star Kingdom to become the Empress of China. You led China’s fleet to Earth to save it from the Karacknids. You formed Humanity into one Empire out of the ashes of a nuclear holocaust. You have been the best mother Jonathan could have ever hoped for. You are strong. Far stronger than you realize. I know you can do this. I am sure of it. For Jonathan’s sake and for Earth’s.”

Christine closed her eyes as she shook her head. “What if I don’t want to do it?” she asked, barely above a whisper.

James couldn’t help but chuckle. Christine’s eyes snapped open and flared in anger. James quickly raised his hands. “I’m just thinking about all the times I’ve said that myself.  To you more than anyone else. And what have you always said to me in response? We have always had a duty to our people, you and I. From when we were teenagers it has been upon us. As we’ve grown, so too has the weight of this duty. But now we’re parents, that means we have the biggest duty of all. That means it doesn’t matter what either of us wants. It’s what we must do that counts.”

Rather than chide him in anger, Christine looked away for several seconds. Then she slowly turned back and James saw that her expression had changed. She wasn’t going to argue any more. Instead, she looked at him and cried. “This is the last time we will get to talk isn’t it?” she managed to get out between sobs.

“I’m not sure,” James lied. “The Karacknid attack may be delayed for some unknown reason. They may wait a day or two even. I may yet get down to the surface to see you…. But you’re right, it could be our last chance. I want you to know I love you more than life itself. And I’m so proud of you. For everything you’ve done and for what I know you will yet do.”

Raising her hands to her eyes, Christine did her best to dry them. When she looked back at James her eyes and cheeks were red and puffy. “I don’t want to be crying as we do this,” she told him. After taking a big sniff she continued. “I am proud of you too. If I didn’t know you could not win, I’d want no one else leading the forces defending our homeworld, defending our family. You have done more for our people than anyone I’ve ever known.” Christine actually smiled as she spoke. “You’ve even managed to keep a modest head on your shoulders. I love you James Somerville. I love you, and I love your son. And it’s for that love that I will not join you. I’ll keep Jonathan safe. He’ll grow up to know everything you’ve done for him. Though he may not remember you, I’ll make sure he knows you. And when he’s ready, I’m sure he will continue the fight in your stead…” Christine looked away as she wiped her eyes. “I know the fleet needs you, if the attack is imminent, every second is precious,” she said when she looked back. “Go now before this gets any harder. I need to speak to our people. Then my people need to make preparations. If we are not joining you, we need to get somewhere safe.”

With every fiber of his being, James wanted to keep talking to his wife. The thought of ending the COM channel terrified him. Yet he found himself nodding . “Of course, General Johnston needs to know of your change of plans immediately. He will take good care of you. I love you.”

“And I love you,” Christine said as she raised a holographic hand towards James. James mimicked the gesture and they interlocked fingers, though neither could feel anything. “Goodbye my love,” she said as she slowly leaned forward to end the COM channel.

“Goodbye,” was all James could bring himself to say. As soon as Christine’s image disappeared his head fell into his hands. Tears finally began to flow freely. All he could picture in his mind was Christine and Jonathan as he had held and hugged them both just hours ago.

When he had got control of himself, James stood and stepped out of his office into his quarters. He wasn’t surprised to see that Fox had laid out his dress uniform on his bed. It was the same one he had worn for the battle of New Shanghai. Then too he had thought that that battle would be his last. This time no one was going to come to his rescue. There were no additional Alliance forces or Human fleets that could miraculously appear to save the day. Fox appeared at his side and helped him change. Silently, James nodded to the man who had served him for more than twenty years. They needed no words. Then he left his quarters and returned to the bridge. “How are our preparations?” he asked as soon as he sat in his command chair.

“All of our crews on leave are back on the ships or in transit Admiral,” Miyagi answered. “We are launching all the partially constructed warships and converted freighters from their berths. Every fighter is armed, fueled, and prepped for launch. They’ll be ready to go at a moment’s notice.”

“Very good,” James replied. “A moment’s notice is all I suspect we’re going to get.” Pausing, James looked up at the holo display of the Karacknids’ jamming field. His enemy could appear at any second. “Arrange a conference call with all of the fleet’s senior commanders once our personnel have returned,” he requested. He knew Lightfoot, Ya’sia, Becket and all the others knew what the plan was. Still, it wouldn’t hurt to go over it once more. And it would be good to see them one last time, even if it wasn’t in person.

As James waited for the final shuttles to reach their ships, a small beep from his command chair told him that a systemwide broadcast had begun from the Imperial Palace. James’ finger twitched towards the button that would bring up the broadcast. He stopped himself. Instead he glanced around at his officers. He doubted he could keep it together if he had to watch Christine speak of the coming battle and subsequent ground invasion. Not when he knew it would be the last time he would see her. He didn’t want his officers to see him like that. Instead he squared his jaw and waited for the conference call to begin.

Chapter 23

Whilst space fighters no longer play the significant role in naval warfare they once did, fighter simulators are still the chief attraction at many a colonial fair. There is something noble and yet primal about facing off against a single opponent in a dogfight to the death.

-Excerpt from Empire Rising, 3002 AD.

IS Drake

“In total we have one thousand one hundred fighters fully equipped and ready for combat,” Rear Admiral Chen reported as he gave a final rundown on the readiness of his forces to the other Admirals. “About a third of those are Spitfires that have been rushed into production. I can’t guarantee they will achieve the same combat effectiveness as the others, but they should do their jobs well enough. Pilots are another concern; we lost the vast majority of our experienced pilots at New Shanghai. I don’t think we can expect the same level of efficiency from our numbers as we once might have. Still, my people know what they are about. They are as trained and prepared as they can be.”

“Thank you,” James replied from where he sat in his office’s chair. “You have done miracles to have so many fighters at our disposal. It gives us a real threat. With luck, the Karacknids will feel the bite of your fighters.”

“Sorry to interrupt Admirals,” Lieutenant Anderson said sheepishly as his face suddenly appeared as part of the holo conference. “Karacknid warships are emerging from their jamming field. There are hundreds of them.”

“This is it,” James said as his heart beat faster. “May God be with us all. And may we show the Karacknids that Humanity and her allies will not go into the darkness quietly.” As each Admiral said their own goodbyes, James took one last look at each face before it disappeared. Slowly he stood. Taking a deep breath, he paused and calmed himself. Then, at a measured pace, he strolled back onto Drake’s bridge. A scene he had seen in hundreds of battle simulations now greeted him in real life. Three massive fleets of Karacknid warships, each numbering more than two thousand, were accelerating straight towards Earth. In front of them forty freighters and six hundred fighters were leading the way. This is indeed it, James thought. He was looking at his death. Strangely, now that the moment was upon him, he didn’t feel fear. He didn’t even feel a sense of loss. He knew he was going to die. He was going to lose Christine, Jonathan, and everything else that he loved. None of that bothered him. Not any longer. Instead he felt a relentless wave of rage building up within him. The enemy warships in front of him had come to annihilate everything that he held dear. He was going to repay their evil with death and destruction.

“Status of the fleet?” James asked as soon as he sat in his command chair.

“Every squadron and ship have reported ready Admiral,” Miyagi answered.

“Send the order, we will break orbit in twenty seconds,” James responded. “Every fighter is to be slow launched and follow at twenty percent thrust.” When the Karacknids had used asteroids against him at New Shanghai, they had used them to take out the hundreds of battlestations defending the colony. Earth had barely forty such battlestations. It would be a waste to use the asteroids against them. That meant they would be used against James’ ships. He had no intention of making it that easy.

As his ships broke orbit and formed into their pre-arranged formation, James stared at the enemy fleet. What will you do? James asked his opponent. The Karacknids had no doubt planned to launch their first missile salvo to coordinate with their wave of asteroids. James’ move threw that timing off. Less than a minute passed before the Karacknids reacted. Each of their three fleets decelerated. Then their freighters all blew apart, releasing thousands of asteroids. The Karacknid fighters moved forward to take up station within the wave of asteroids. They would no doubt pull back just before the asteroids reached James’ ships, and then use the confusion to get into attack range. James waited as he watched each group of ships move closer and closer together. Having simulated what was about to happen a number of times, he had a good feel for when the right moment would come. As soon as it did, he turned to Miyagi. “Now!” he ordered.

Seconds later Chen gave the order to his fighters. One thousand one hundred and sixty contacts suddenly appeared behind Drake. Going to full acceleration, the Human and Alliance fighters raced past the Allied fleet. At the same time, James’ warships altered formation. Instead of one large wedge, they formed twelve dense cubes of ships. Energy spikes suddenly appeared from the moon. Twenty mark V missile launchers had been placed there. They were the last James had access to. Rather than guard them with a defensive fleet, James had hidden them in plain sight. The Karacknids had clearly not suspected the moon was a danger.

Three hundred warships broke away from the nearest Karacknid fleet and turned towards the moon, accelerating towards it. James guessed the launchers would get off three salvos before they were taken out. Yet they were doing their job. “That’s our target. Designate it enemy Alpha fleet.” James said as he pointed towards the Karacknid fleet that had just been reduced by three hundred warships. “Make sure Chen and every ship knows it.”

A series of alarms went off as the Karacknid fleets finally opened fire with their own missiles. James’ ships had to wait another thirty seconds for the Conclave warships to get into range with their missiles. Then the Allied fleet fired. Even with the hundreds of missile pods that James’ fleet had, the difference in missile numbers told the story of the battle. From each of the three Karacknid fleets, twenty-six thousand missiles were racing towards Drake. From James’ fleet, twenty-nine thousand had been fired in return. Three to one odds, James couldn’t help but conclude. And the Karacknid missiles would be coming from three divergent angles.

Before any missiles reached their target, Chen’s fighters crashed into the wave of asteroids and Karacknid fighters. Using their energy weapons and anti-fighter missiles, Chen’s forces engaged asteroids and enemy craft alike. James’ warships opened up with heavy plasma and laser cannons and targeted all the asteroids directly in front of each cube of ships. Asteroids that would pass harmlessly between each group were left alone. For half a minute James watched in amazement at the skill of Chen’s pilots as they dodged asteroid fragments, enemy fighter fire and even the heavy energy beams being released by his own ships. Even as they did all this, they were blowing Karacknid fighters apart in their dozens. Of course, the Karacknids’ were scoring their own kills, but this was the one part of the battle where the Allied forces had the advantage. Seconds before the asteroids entered range of the James’ point defense weapons, Chen’s fighters broke away from the engagement. More than four hundred had been destroyed in the fighting, just over seven hundred and fifty to peel away and charge after the missiles James’ ships had fired towards the weakened Karacknid fleet. James wasn’t in the least surprised to see that Chen had timed the maneuver perfectly. His fighters would reach the Karacknid fleet just after the missile salvo. “Begin decelerating,” James snapped. It was time for his ships to play their next role in the plan.  James could hear Drake’s point defenses fire as they engaged the remaining asteroids and Karacknid fighters.

The next couple of minutes were a blur as James’ attention was pulled away from the wider battle to events in and around Drake and her nearest consorts. Exploding asteroids filled nearby space with debris that hampered his flagship’s active sensors. Twisting and weaving Karacknid fighters hurled particle beams into the midst of his fleet. Here and there asteroid chunks that had been missed crashed into Allied ships or caused formations to break apart as ships desperately tried to avoid collisions with the fast-moving asteroids. As explosions appeared all around Drake, James knew his fleet was taking a battering.

Suddenly, the destruction ceased. For nearly a minute there was complete calm as James’ ships passed through the wave of asteroids and the one hundred Karacknid fighters that remained pulled away. Vainly they turned to chase Chen’s fighters. They had no hope of catching them before Chen’s fighters could engage the Karacknid warships but they would tear into them just moments later. The eye of the storm, James thought as he stared at the three waves of Karacknid missiles approaching his ships. His fleet was falling back towards Earth and the safety of the battlestations and defense satellites. But at least one enemy missile salvo would strike before his ships got there. With more than sixty thousand missiles bearing down on his fleet, James swallowed hard. It would have been worse if the missiles had struck just as the asteroids and fighters were attacking. It was going to be bad all the same. Sparing a glance at his own missile salvo, he saw it was not far away from Alpha fleet. With the addition of Chen’s fighters, the Karacknids were going to be hurt too, but it gave him little comfort. Not when so many missiles were bearing down on his people. “Order the fleet to reform,” he said quickly, they needed to make the most of the brief respite. Expecting the order, it took just moments for the fleet to return to its wedge formation. Then every ships’ officers and crew prepared for what was to come.

Here we go, James thought as he gripped his command chair tightly seconds before his fleet opened up with their point defenses. Multistage AM missiles reached out first to take out hundreds of Karacknid missiles and force thousands more to carry out early evasive maneuvers, wasting fuel. Then flak cannons sent a cloud of shrapnel through which the Karacknid missiles had to fly. Thousands more were destroyed. Lastly point defense plasma bolts, laser beams and electricity waves from the Alliance arc emitters joined the fray. Tens of thousands of Karacknid missiles were destroyed. On the holo display it looked like a wave of explosions was hurtling towards Drake. As impressive as it looked, James knew that it wasn’t nearly enough. For every missile that was shot down, another appeared to take its place. As the Allied ships did their best to defend themselves, the wave of explosions raced right up to them. As soon as it reached James’ ships, the explosions got far larger as anti-matter warheads detonated.

*

Rear Admiral Chen focused on the Allied missile salvo that was closing with the Alpha fleet. While defensive fire from the enemy Alpha and Beta fleets were cutting Somerville’s missiles apart many were still twisting and weaving. They were only seconds away from reaching attack range. “Come on, come on,” he called as he rocked back and forward in his cockpit. He had taken out three Karacknid fighters in the short but intense skirmish amidst the asteroids. He was eager for a capital ship kill. Admiral Somerville had ordered him to command his fighters from Enterprise’s bridge. But there had been no way he was remaining on board the carrier. Not when this was the last battle his fighters would engage in. “Yes!” he screamed as the remaining Human missiles got close enough to detonate. The thermonuclear warheads poured all their explosive energy into the focusing crystals, releasing hundreds of grazer beams towards the Karacknid fleet. Explosions rippled up and down the enemy warships. The damage and confusion allowed the remaining Alliance and Conclave missiles to race in and score even more kills. Then it was the turn of Chen’s fighters. “Get their capital ships!” Chen shouted over the COM channel for his entire attack force. He knew it would be his last command.

Almost before he finished speaking, Karacknid point defense fire zipped past his Spitfire. Instinctively he threw his fighter about as he jinked randomly. His vision narrowed as he spotted a Karacknid dreadnought. All that mattered to him was getting to that target. Chen felt like he was having an out of body experience. It was as if he could sense each laser beam or kinetic round being fired at his fighter. Every slight twist of his flight stick evaded the enemy’s fire. Then, he finally got close enough to fire his plasma missile. Slamming his thumb down on the release button, the missile sped away from his Spitfire’s short stubby wing. Instead of pulling up and away to safety, Chen kept his fighter on course towards the enemy dreadnought. For the briefest of seconds he glanced down to where he had placed an old-fashioned picture of his wife and son. With his free hand he picked it up. He held it to his chest as his eyes flicked back to the enemy dreadnought. There was one other thing he had done that he hadn’t told Admiral Somerville about. Every fighter in his force had at least one additional plasma missile warhead stowed in its cockpit. Given the circumstances, he suspected Somerville might have actually approved, but Chen hadn’t wanted to risk him finding out.

As the enemy fire coming at his fighter slackened, Chen smiled. The Karacknids were focusing on the plasma missiles his fighters had released. You’re too late, he thought. Even if they figured out what was happening, it was too late. In just three seconds his Spitfire covered the final kilometers to the enemy dreadnought. Chen had just enough time to see his plasma missile slam into the dreadnought. It made him smile even as his own fighter plunged into the gaping wound his missile had just burnt into the dreadnought’s inner hull.

As his fighter detonated, it blew the dreadnought clean in two. All around the stricken Karacknid capital ship, more plasma missiles and fighters hurtled into their targets. Heavy cruisers, battleships and dreadnoughts disappeared as plasma missiles destroyed critical systems, causing power overloads and secondary explosions.

*

IS Drake

When the explosions around his flagship finally stopped, James couldn’t help but breathe a sigh of relief. Drake hadn’t been targeted. Or, at least, she’d managed to shoot down every missile coming at her. Even a cursory glance at his fleet told him that many other ships hadn’t been so lucky. With multiple ships falling out of formation, others spinning away uncontrollably, and still others struggling with serious damage, it was impossible to tell exactly how hard his fleet had been hit. On the other hand, Chen’s fighters had decimated the enemy. James couldn’t believe it. Of the one thousand nine hundred ships that had been there minutes before, five hundred were gone. At least two hundred were lagging behind. It looked like most of them had turned away from the battle. Alpha fleet’s numbers had almost been cut by a third.

James’ bridge officers were frantically working to reorganize his fleet. He waited for a few moments and then caught his COM officer’s eye. “Martinez, signal Chen and tell him that his pilots did him proud.”

Leaving Martinez to it, James waited patiently for Miyagi and his other officers to get to grips with how badly his fleet had been hit. Turning his attention to the Karacknids, James saw that their Beta and Gamma fleets were still charging in towards Earth unhindered. Two more salvos were on the way towards his fleet. James studied them dispassionately. The closest one was the same size as the one his ships had just weathered. The one behind it was slightly reduced thanks to the damage he had just done to Alpha fleet.

“I think we’ve got as many ships ready to fire again as we are going to get,” Lieutenant Anderson reported. “Permission to fire Admiral?”

“At once,” James responded. When just twenty-three thousand missiles erupted from his fleet, James got as good an idea of how much damage his ships had taken as any report Miyagi was going to send him.

“Our freighters and converted civilian craft are breaking orbit to join us,” Ivanov announced. “They’ll be here before the next Karacknid salvo. The battlestations’ point defenses should cover us as well.”

Now we move to the final phase of the battle, James thought as his ships prepared to slot into orbit around Earth. He had no more tricks. He simply didn’t have the ships or fighters or anything else to try anything fancy. Now his force would simply form up into the tightest formation it could and seek to batter the Karacknids for as long as possible. The mark V missile launchers on the moon would beef up his salvos, at least for as long as they survived.

“Admiral, I’m afraid I couldn’t get hold of Rear Admiral Chen,” Martinez announced as he looked up from his COM station. “It seems he took a fighter out with his attack wing. He led the attack on Alpha fleet.”

James spun in his command chair. He just stopped himself from demanding an explanation. Chen was by far the best fighter pilot he had seen. Months ago, James had forbidden him from flying himself. He was too valuable as a commander and flight trainer. All of which counts for nothing now, James reminded himself. He understood exactly why Chen had done what he did. In effect, James was doing the same thing. There was no running from the Karacknid battlefleet. Facing it head on was the only option left. “Then he led his attack magnificently,” James replied to Martinez. Though there was still something else going on, he suspected. Even with Chen at the helm, his fighters had done more damage than James had expected.

“I have the final count,” Miyagi said quietly from his position just in front of James’ left hand.

A flash on James’ command chair told him the file had just been sent over. Tapping on it, James bit down to keep his face straight. Five hundred and forty Allied ships had been destroyed or rendered useless. Nearly a quarter of his force was already gone. It would have been worse if he had allowed the asteroids to strike his fleet in conjunction with the Karacknid missile salvo. Many more ships would have been destroyed. Knowing that didn’t change James’ sense of loss. Below the list of ships, Miyagi had listed flag officers and Captains who were confirmed dead. James didn’t even allow himself to look at it. He didn’t want to know. All of his senior officers had extremely capable subordinates. Whatever losses had been suffered; others would have to step in to fill their shoes.

“Firing again!” Anderson announced. As soon as another twenty-three thousand missiles raced towards Alpha fleet a counter appeared in the main holo display. The next Karacknid missile salvo was just two minutes away.

As his staff officers and warships went through the motions of defending themselves, James felt detached from what was going on. He had given the only orders he could. His plan was being carried out to perfection. There wasn’t much else he could contribute. His fleet was as close to a well-oiled machine as it would ever be. They all know they are fighting for their lives and the lives of their loved ones. It had added an extra edge to their efficiency. With nothing else to do, James simply watched as tens of thousands of Karacknid missiles were taken out. The point defenses of the hundreds of freighters that had joined his ships and the battlestations and defense satellites in orbit around Earth meant more Karacknid missiles were destroyed than in their previous salvo. Hundreds still reached attack range. Once again anti-matter explosions bloomed all around Drake.

Abruptly James’ restraints tightened around his chest and he was thrown from side-to-side. Evasive maneuvers, he thought as he fought the G forces that were making his vision darken. At least one missile was targeting Drake. Though he tried to look up at the holo display to see if he could spot it, James couldn’t lift his neck high enough. Then the G forces suddenly shifted, slamming him back into his command chair. Before he could get a sense of himself, he felt a sudden jolt and a wave of vibrations race under his feet and up his command chair. Something had struck his flagship. A second later he was flung forward and his world went completely dark.

Chapter 24

Hope is never something a naval officer should allow to be extinguished.

-Excerpt from Empire Rising, 3002 AD.

Slayer

We have them, Tanaka-lan said to himself, saliva dripping down his teeth. The Allied fleet had been devastated by his second salvo and he had two more accelerating hard towards their targets. Two more and they are done, he was certain. It might take another couple of half strength salvos after that to clean up the stragglers, but the Human’s resistance would be broken. All of their battlestations had been taken out by his missiles and their fleet was reeling as explosions erupted within their formation. His claws dug into his command chair as he looked towards Revenge fleet. The enemy fighters sacrificing themselves against his capital ships had gutted Revenge of most of its capital ships. Their losses were serious. It would significantly reduce the force he hoped to invade Alliance space with. But we will have the Humans’ homeworld, Tanaka-lan reassured himself. And there are always more reinforcements.

“High Admiral,” one of Slayer’s bridge officers squeaked.

The tone was so out of place that Tanaka-lan turned around, almost ready to swipe the officers head off with one of his clawed hands. Then he saw the look on his officer’s face. “What is it?” he demanded.

“A frigate has just come through the jamming field; they’re reporting a fleet of one hundred ships heading our way.”

Tanaka-lan’s claws flexed in and out of their sheaths. That did not explain his officer’s tone. “What difference does one hundred ships make?” he snapped.

“It’s not their number High Admiral. It’s their size. They are the same size as the Kulrean ship we fought at the Human’s last colony. And they are travelling at speeds we have never seen before. They will be here within minutes.”

Tanaka-lan froze. The Kulrean worldship had been impressive. Extremely so. Yet his fleet had destroyed it. He had scientists combing through the wreckage that had been recovered. He had already sent word back to the Imperator recommending that the Kulreans be the Karacknid Empire’s next target. But now they are here, a voice in Tanaka-lan’s mind told him. It was one he didn’t recognize. It was the voice of fear.

“I was wrong,” the same officer shouted, his tone even more high-pitched. “They are even closer than that.”

As Tanaka-lan turned to the holo display showing the jamming field, his mouth fell open. This time there was no saliva drooling down his teeth. At first, just one of the massive worldships appeared through the jamming field. Even though Tanaka-lan was expecting it, he could hardly believe his eyes when more and more of the giant ships appeared. Their speed shocked him. Almost in the blink of an eye they were out of the jamming field and racing towards Earth. Even as he sat frozen, their weapons opened up on the missile salvo closest to the Humans. Thousands of missiles were blown out of space.

*

IS Drake

James’ world was black and silent. His mind was a haze of fog. Ever so slowly he became aware. He was alive. He knew because of the pain coming from his shoulder. I must have smashed it against something, he figured. The thought triggered his memory. He was on Drake’s bridge. His flagship had just been hit by a Karacknid missile. His world shook. A fuzzing noise reached his brain. Slowly it cleared to reveal a voice. “Admiral, Admiral, are you all right?” a familiar voice asked. James was shaken again. Each movement sent jolts of red-hot pain down his shoulder and left arm. Groaning, he struggled to open his eyes. Nothing happened. “Admiral, Admiral can you hear me?”

The pain made James groan. Giving up on opening his eyes, he tried to speak instead. “…Yes,” he croaked. At least that’s what he tried to say. It came out all wrong. “Yes, I am,” he tried again, a little more clearly. “Don’t,” he said hastily as he felt a hand rest on his shoulder again. “My shoulder.”

“I’m sorry,” the familiar voice said, strangely sounding less concerned. “I’ll get a pain relief hypo-spray right away.”

Lieutenant Anderson, James realized. Moments later he felt something press against his right arm. Within seconds the pain in his left shoulder lessened. Taking a couple of deep breaths, James tried to open his eyes. As soon as they were open a crack, a lancing pain burst into his head. The hypo-spray and his augments didn’t seem to be doing anything to help it. Despite the pain, James’ mind was clearing. His fleet was still in a deadly battle with the Karacknids. He needed to know what was happening. Forcing his eyes open made another groan escape his lips. Even so, James did his best to ignore how he felt and sought out Lieutenant Anderson’s face. “What is our condition Lieutenant?” he asked when he found that Anderson was hovering almost on top of him.

“We took a direct hit from a Karacknid anti-matter missile. It hit Drake’s nose. The damage is still being assessed, but we have lost the forward fifth of the ship,” Anderson replied as he took a half-step back to give James some room. “Commander Miyagi is hurt, but Captain Fisher is okay and still in charge. She is organizing the damage repair teams. COMs and sensors are out.”

As if Anderson’s explanation had suddenly reminded James of the bridge around him, the sounds of alarms, officers shouting, and Captain Fisher’s familiar voice flooded James’ consciousness. Everyone sounded scared and concerned, yet there was an order to what James was hearing. Drake is not out of the fight yet, he told himself. With the pain from the light flooding into his eyes lessening, James took a moment to look around the bridge. Miyagi was on the floor; Ivanov was seeing to him. A couple of other officers were missing. James spotted another one on the floor. Presumably, the others had been taken somewhere for treatment. Eventually he looked back to Anderson. “What about the fleet?”

Anderson shook his head. “We have no contact with anyone else. Hundreds of anti-matter missiles breached our defenses. I’m afraid it will be bad when we do make contact.”

“Is Admiral Somerville all right?” Fisher’s authoritative voice suddenly asked. James looked around to see that she was staring at him. Concern written across her face.

“I think so,” Anderson answered before James could. “He’s shaken up, and he may have broken or dislocated his shoulder. It looks like he bashed his head as well. But his restraints protected him from anything worse.”

“How is your ship?” James asked to show Fisher that he was okay.

“Not good,” Fisher replied quickly. “We think we’ve lost everything forward of bulkhead twelve. We are open to space back to bulkhead ten. About a third of our missile tubes, point defenses and sensors are gone or inoperable. It’s a miracle power fluctuations didn’t cause more damage further along the ship. I’m prioritizing getting COMs and sensors repaired so we can coordinate another salvo with the fleet. Whoever has taken charge needs to know that Drake can still contribute to this fight.”

“Don’t let us go out of this fight with a whimper,” James ordered, certain that his Flag Captain felt exactly the same. She gave him an authoritative nod and swung back to bellow out more orders to her officers.

As the officers around James worked frantically to get Drake back into the fight, James tentatively reached up and probed his left shoulder. Every touch sent more jolts of pain down his arm. Giving up on it, he twisted his back so that he wasn’t resting on the shoulder. Then he reached up and felt around his head, he had a lump forming on one side, but it wasn’t too large. The throbbing in his head was starting to recede.

“I think a repair team has just linked up a couple of sensor relays,” one of Drake’s bridge officers shouted.

Everyone turned to him. “Well, what are you waiting for?” Fisher responded. “Send the data to the main holo display.”

The image that appeared was far from perfect. Rather than clearly identifiable contacts with range and velocity estimates, there were a lot of things Drake’s computer was struggling to make sense of. Yet there was enough to have a sense of what was happening. To James’ horror, the next Karacknid salvo looked to be just minutes away. The Allied fleet still looked a shambles. It had been hit hard by the last salvo. This one could be the end of our resistance, James realized.

Something else caught James’ eye. It made him frown. There was another group of blips. Ones that were further out. He shook his head and blinked a few times as he struggled to make sense of them. He thought his mind was playing tricks on him. He knew he recognized them, yet he couldn’t quite identify them. His eyes suddenly widened in amazement. “Kulrean worldships!” he half whispered, his throat dry and hoarse. Coughing, he tried again. “Kulrean worldships!” he shouted as he pointed. Astonishment filled his voice. It only grew when he realized how fast the Kulrean ships were going. And then they opened fire!

James’ mouth fell open. At New Shanghai he had seen one Kulrean worldship destroy hundreds of Karacknid missiles. What he was witnessing now dwarfed that entirely. It looked like a volcano had suddenly erupted in the midst of the Karacknid missile salvo. Thousands of pieces of red-hot lava were being flung towards Drake in a massive fountain. Yet the red-hot spikes weren’t lava, they were Karacknid missiles being shot down. For a second, James feared for his fleet. Being behind the Karacknid missile salvo, the Kulreans’ fire was heading their way. Yet the accuracy of the Kulreans’ strange weapons assuaged his fears. Hardly any shots were missing.

By the time the Karacknid missiles reached defensive range of the Allied ships, more than half had been destroyed. Clearly just as stunned as James, it took more than five seconds for the first Allied ship to open fire. When it did, the rest quickly joined them. Over the next thirty seconds every single Karacknid missile was destroyed. Not one reached an Allied warship. James, his mouth still open, couldn’t help but stare at the fuzzy holo display. He couldn’t believe what he had just witnessed. He had been sure the Karacknid salvo was going to finish his fleet. For weeks he had been preparing himself to face death. He had accepted that his homeworld was going to fall to the Karacknids. Now everything had changed. He simply couldn’t process what was happening.

“We’re being hailed,” Lieutenant Martinez announced, breaking the spell of silence that had bewitched everyone on the bridge.

“What? How?” Fisher asked.

“One of the damage repair teams got our long-range COMs operating. Sorry, I missed it with everything that just happened,” Martinez explained.

James finally realized his mouth was still hanging open. He quickly shut it. “Don’t worry,” he said with a chuckle to hide his own shock. “You’re not the only one who has been distracted. Let’s not keep whoever wants to talk to us waiting any longer, put it on the main holo display.”

When a very alien face appeared in front of everyone, James broke into the widest smile he had given anyone for weeks. “Superintendent Hallock,” he said as formally as he could given all the emotions surging through him. “Welcome back to Earth.”

“Thank You Emperor,” Hallock replied in a far flatter tone, making James’ smile. It sounded like Hallock had just returned from a short pleasure cruise to the moon instead of having just obliterated an entire Karacknid missile salvo. “I am glad that we arrived in time. I was worried when we received no reply to our FTL message informing you of our decision to intervene. Now I think I understand why.”

James figured Hallock was talking about the Karacknid jamming field. “Yes, we haven’t heard anything from outside for more than two weeks now. It would have taken a lot of weight off our shoulders if we had known you were coming. And with so many ships. We really owe you our thanks! But I don’t understand, why are you here?”

“Tranquility’s destruction,” Hallock replied, a hint of emotion finally filling his voice. “The recordings of Captain Kalong and his crew’s demise stirred something within my people. Not for several centuries has a Kulrean died of anything but natural causes. The Karacknids’ unwillingness to open dialogue with Kalong and their destruction of our worldship has caused a shift in the political landscape on Kulthar. For the first time my people felt fear. We now know the Karacknids will try to conquer us if they defeat you. Whilst we may be able to win such a war, many more Kulreans would die.”

James felt his hopes soaring. “Does that mean your ships are here to join us? That you are entering the war on our side?”

“To a certain extent,” Hallock replied slowly, giving James pause. “We are here certainly. And we do not intend to let the Karacknids do anymore damage to your homeworld or your fleet. I have permission from the other Superintendents to help you push the Karacknids out of Human and Alliance space. After that, we hope the Karacknids will be willing to come to terms with us.”

James sat back in his command chair. He felt overwhelmed.  His emotions had gone through a roller coaster. Mere minutes ago he had thought he was about to die as Drake was hit. Then, despite still being alive he had known his ships had taken grievous losses. The final Karacknid missile salvo had been closing in to finish the battle. And yet now, out of nowhere, his fleet was saved. And so too was his homeworld along with Christine and Jonathan.

“Are you alright Emperor?” Hallock asked. “I know your ship has been damaged. Were you injured?”

It took James a couple of seconds to answer. He was still lost in his thoughts. “No, no, I’m fine,” he answered quickly when he realized Hallock was staring at him. “Well yes, I am in a bit of pain,” he added when a new spark of agony shot down his arm. In his surprise he had forgotten all about being hurt. “But that is not the cause of my silence. I’m just struggling to find the words to thank you.”

“Your thanks are not necessary,” Hallock replied. “My people owe you a great debt. You once saved my homeworld, it is my pleasure to return the favor.”

James smiled at him. “I want to thank you all the same.” Before he could find more words to say, Fisher cleared her throat loudly, making James glance at her. When he did, she nodded towards Lieutenant Anderson.

“Sorry to interrupt Admiral, but the Karacknids have fired another salvo. It’s coming our way,” James’ tactical officer informed him. “Intrepid just sent us the long-range sensor data.”

“Right,” James said with a nod as he fought to stop his cheeks from reddening. He had momentarily forgotten about the battle. “Can you handle the missiles?” he asked as he turned back to Hallock.

Hallock nodded. “We should be able to. We’ll move our ships to intersperse them between yours, that way we will be able to give you the best protection. And your ships can help us engage them as well.”

“Thank you,” James found himself saying again. “I’ll let my people know what is happening.”

“Perhaps you would like to take a shuttle to my flagship?” Hallock suggested. “If your ship is too damaged to fight, you can coordinate our efforts better from here?”

James pursed his lips as he thought. He would be better able to coordinate his fleet if he transferred his flag to another Human battleship, if one was still battle ready. But Hallock’s ships would be doing the majority of the fighting. “Ok, I’ll bring a few staff officers and come right over,” he decided.

“Then we can speak face to face soon,” Hallock replied. “I will see to arranging my ships.”

“Of course,” James said. “And thank you once again.”

Hallock actually cracked a half smile. “You have now thanked me more than enough Emperor.”

“Of course,” James repeated, then the COM channel ended.  “Is Vengeance still in the battle?” he asked as he turned to Ivanov.

“Yes Admiral,” his operations officer replied.

“Perfect,” James said as he felt a wave of relief that Lightfoot was still alive. “Inform Admiral Lightfoot that he is to assume command of the Alliance fleet. I will be transferring my flag to Stargazer. Let him know that I’ll be liaising with Superintendent Hallock.” James assumed Lightfoot had already taken charge after Drake was hit, but it made sense to make it official. “Anderson, Ivanov and Alfaro, you three are with me. Fisher, I’ll leave the rest of my staff officers to help you with the repairs. Look after her for the both of us.”

“She is in good hands,” Fisher assured him. “You go and win us this battle.”

A feral grin spread across James’ face as his mind turned towards the Karacknid ships. For the first time since he had fought against the Karacknids, they were going to be the ones at a disadvantage. He was going to enjoy the next few hours. “I will,” he promised Fisher. “I will.”

Chapter 25

At the end of the day the Empire is made up of families. They are the bedrock of our society. It is for them we fight and to them we long to return home.

-Excerpt from Empire Rising, 3002 AD.

As soon as his personal shuttle cleared Drake’s hanger bay doors, James tapped his seat’s COM unit. Not surprisingly, it took more than thirty seconds for a connection to be established. He had no idea where Christine had been hidden, but he suspected it would be hard to get a connection through to wherever it was.

“James, is that you?” his wife’s familiar voice asked.

James felt a medley of warm emotions wash over him. He hadn’t expected to speak to Christine again after they had parted last. “Yes, it’s me dear,” he said gladly. “The battle isn’t over yet. But I had to contact you. I’m sure you’ve heard. We have been saved.”

“What is going on?” Christine demanded in a tone that didn’t quite match James’. “We’re getting all sorts of reports. Some say the fleet has been destroyed. Others that the Karacknids are in full retreat.”

Of course, James thought. No one in the Allied fleet would have had time to keep up a running report on the battle for Christine and her staff. “The truth is somewhere in between,” he said quickly. “We have been severely damaged; I don’t know how bad. But Drake was hit and I assume many more ships have been lost.” As he spoke, James leaned forward in his flight seat to look out one of the shuttle’s viewports. What he saw made him freeze. He could only see a part of the Allied fleet but it was enough. Damaged ships were everywhere. The three nearest him all had gaping holes in their hulls. Slowly expanding balls of debris marked the former locations of other warships.

“Are you ok?” Christine asked, “please tell me you are ok?”

“I’ll be fine,” James answered as he forced himself to look away from his fleet. Gently he rolled his left shoulder. Drake’s doctor had met him just before he had boarded his shuttle to put his arm in a sling and inject him with more pain medication. It was the best she had been able to do. “And far more importantly, so will the fleet. The Kulreans are here,” he said, excitement filling his voice again. “They have at least one hundred worldships, and they have taken out an entire Karacknid missile salvo without taking any losses. They are now protecting the fleet. I’m going to Superintendent Hallock’s flagship to coordinate our efforts with his. I don’t know what is going to happen next. But I think the battle is won. The Karacknids can’t hurt us now.”

“What?” Christine asked as her voice rose. James smiled and gave her a moment to take in what he had just said. Then, as he might have predicted, the questions stated coming in thick and fast. “How did they get here? Exactly how many ships do they have? Are they going to destroy the Karacknid fleet? What does this mean for the rest of the war?”

“Slow down, slow down,” James responded as the questions became too much for him. He was still trying to get his mind around the sudden shift in circumstances. “I really don’t have answers to any of those questions yet.”

“But you’ve spoken to him, have you not?” Christine pushed.

“I have,” James admitted. “But Drake had just been hit and Hallock’s ships had just saved the fleet from being destroyed by a Karacknid missile salvo. There is another one just minutes out. I’ll have more answers for you soon, when the fighting is over. But I just wanted to give you a call and tell you we’re going to be ok. I don’t know more than that just yet.”

“Ok, ok,” Christine said, sounding like she was speaking to herself as much as to James. “Well I will not get in your way. You have a battle to fight. I’ll let you go. Thanks for calling. And James…”

“Yes?” James responded.

“Update us as soon as you can. You have no idea how hard it is to sit down here knowing nothing.”

“I will, I promise,” James said.

“Thank you,” Christine replied.

“We’re here,” the shuttle pilot announced just as James cut the COM channel.

Once again, he strained forward in his seat’s restraints. Once again, his breath was taken away. This time in a good way. The ship in front of him was massive. More massive than even Tranquility had been. And she looks even better armed, James estimated as he took in all the weapon emplacements. Hallock’s flagship was literally bristling with strange looking weapons. “What is her size?” he asked the pilot’s shuttle.

“Our sensors can’t quite get an exact fix on her, even up this close,” the pilot replied. “But the computer is estimating her to be about one point four times the size Tranquility was.”

James shook his head. He had no idea how the Kulreans built ships so massive. Hallock’s flagship had to be at least as big as some of Saturn’s smaller moons. It dwarfed anything Humanity had built. It even dwarfed anything the Karacknids had built. As his shuttle passed through a circular opening in the worldship’s hull, the focus of James’ amazement changed. The Kulrean hanger bay, if that’s what it was, was entirely silver in color. Everything he looked at reflected the starlight coming through the opening back at him. Then, as the hangar bay door closed, interior lights came on making everything sparkle. James had to raise a hand to protect his eyes. By the time he lowered it again and had a quick glance around, the familiar thud of the shuttle’s rear access ramp hitting something solid reached his ears. Unbuckling himself, he stood up and turned to head down to the rear of the shuttle. He gestured for Anderson, Ivanov, and Alfaro to follow him. As he expected, several Kulreans were already waiting for him.

“Emperor Somerville,” the closest one said. “I am Lieutenant Manlon. Please, if you would follow me, Superintendent Hallock has requested your presence on the bridge immediately.”

“Of course,” James said as he bowed and stepped down the shuttle’s access ramp. “Lead on,” he said as he noticed the rank insignia under the Lieutenant’s shoulders. As far as he knew, the Kulreans hadn’t utilized any kind of militaristic hierarchy. It seemed they had now though. Falling into step behind the Kulrean, James couldn’t help but gaze all around him. When he first encountered Alliance warships, they had looked advanced to him. Yet what he saw here made them look like child’s toys. Everything was sleek and made of some kind of silvery metallic alloy. Though there were a number of what looked like computer terminals in the hangar bay with Kulreans manning them, James couldn’t figure out what they were for. They were simply too strange to his eyes. When the Kulrean leading him stopped in front of what looked like a dead end on one side of the hangar bay, James frowned. Then his eyes widened. A door had appeared as if from nowhere. It retracted into four sections to reveal what looked like an elevator. Following his guide into it, James looked around for controls. There were none. Instead, the door simply closed behind them. For the briefest of seconds James felt a hint of acceleration as his feet were pushed into the ground. It was so quick he wasn’t entirely sure he hadn’t imagined it. Barely five seconds later he felt the same sense of motion. Then the doors silently retracted in front of him.

“Welcome to Stargazer’s bridge,” Lieutenant Manlon said as he gestured for James to proceed him out of the lift.

James couldn’t help but peek out to confirm that they were indeed at Stargazer’s bridge. “Is the bridge near the hangar bay?” he asked.

“The bridge is at the very center of our ship,” Malon answered. “Please, Superintendent Hallock is waiting.”

James shared a glance with Ivanov and Anderson before he stepped out of the lift. That was no simple turbo lift, he thought. Whatever he had just been in, Humanity had nothing like it. They had just covered several kilometers in the space of seconds and he hadn’t even felt it.

If what he had seen so far impressed him though, as he stepped onto Stargazer’s bridge, James was taken aback again. The first thing that caught his eye was its size. Drake’s bridge could easily have fitted into it ten times over. What made its size all the more impressive was the massive holo display. Far larger than the one built for the Imperial Palace, its resolution and depth of detail stopped James dead. It seemed magical, for every time he focused his eye on one part of the display, it seemed to zoom in to give him a fuller view. Anderson and Ivanov had the same startled look on their faces. Clearly the display was zooming in on different sections for them as well.

“Emperor Somerville,” Hallock called out from the midst of the display. “Come and join me, we are about to engage the next Karacknid missile salvo.”

Moving over to Hallock’s side, James saw that the Superintendent was standing in between where the Allied fleet was positioned in orbit around Earth, and the incoming Karacknid missile salvo. As he studied the Karacknid missiles, every one of them, more than sixty thousand enemy weapons were visible. Despite the fact that he was on a Kulrean worldship, and he had witnessed the power of the Kulrean’s point defenses, James couldn’t help but feel nervous. When he turned to study his own fleet, his nerves turned to dismay. For the first time since Drake had been hit, he could see just how badly the Karacknids had ravished his ships. Of the two thousand three hundred warships he had started the day with, at least seven hundred had been destroyed. Many more looked badly damaged. Including Drake. He winced when he laid eyes on his flagship. The forward fifth was simply gone. Whilst the rest looked largely intact, there were still debris and atmosphere coming out of what was left of her nose section. Even as he watched, many of her point defenses moved to target the Karacknid missiles. Fisher didn’t intend to let her ship idly sit by and let others defend her.

“Enemy ordnance entering range of our weapons,” an officer called somewhere behind Hallock.

“Do not worry my friend,” Hallock said as he stepped closer to James and placed a hand on James’ uninjured shoulder. “Your ships have nothing to fear.”

Before James could respond, the worldships opened fire. Intense waves of strange energy bolts raced towards the Karacknid missiles. Even with the improved detail from the holo display, James could not tell what kind of weapons the Kulreans used. Whatever they were, their accuracy was insane. Barely a handful of the blue energy beams missed. Karacknid missiles disappeared in their thousands. James could only stand there, his mouth hanging open again, as Karacknid missile after missile was destroyed. Despite their best efforts at carrying out evasive maneuvers, once targeted, none escaped the Kulrean’s fire. Several thousand did get close enough that the Allied warships opened up with their point defenses. It was a gesture more than a necessity though, for between them, the Kulrean and Allied ships took out every single Karacknid missile long before they got close enough to threaten their ships.

“You see,” Hallock said in an even tone. “You have nothing to fear.”

With the threat at least momentarily passed, James turned and fully faced Hallock for the first time. A range of emotions washed over him. He wanted to pull Hallock into a tight hug and kiss him. Equally, he wanted to grab the Kulrean and gave him a shake. His ships had just destroyed the largest Karacknid missile salvo James had ever seen. Surely Hallock could show some emotion? Mostly though, he felt an overwhelming sense of relief. Though he knew Hallock would scold him for it, he couldn’t help himself. “Thank you once again my friend. Your ships are truly a wonder.”

Hallock gave him a slight bow. “I will allow this one additional thanks. But let that be the end of it.” He gave James the smallest of smiles. “I’m sure your own technologies would appear to be a wonder to many of our galaxy’s inhabitants. Perhaps one day ours will not seem so amazing to your species. Now that you are here though, we have more important matters to discuss. For example, what happens next? You are the experienced military commander here, not I.”

James wanted to slap himself. Instead of gaping at every little thing his eyes laid over the last five minutes, he should have been thinking strategy! Half turning from Hallock, he sought out the Karacknid fleet. He nodded when he saw what the enemy commander had done. Faced with the unknown, the six and half thousand Karacknid warships still in the battle had combined into one large fleet. It allowed them to better defend themselves. There were two more massive missile salvos on their way towards the Kulrean worldships. Wisely though, the Karacknid ships were gently accelerating away from Earth, apparently moving to maximum engagement range. They don’t know what the worldships can do, they’re scared! James figured. It wasn’t a hard conclusion to come to, in the same position, James knew he would be too. “How much can you tell me about your ships’ capabilities?” James asked as he turned back to Hallock. “What anti-ship weapons do you have?” Captain Kalong of Tranquility had been tight-lipped about his worldship’s capabilities. Given that Halleck had brought an entire fleet of worldships with him, James figured that was no longer an issue.

“None,” Hallock answered, causing James’ eyes to widen. “Our worldships were built to defend our home system after the Vestarians tried to attack us. To defend oneself, one does not need offensive weapons. At least, that was the position that my people adopted. It has allowed us to keep our commitment to pacifism. Without offensive weapons, worldships could never be used to harm anyone that did not first intend harm to us. As you know, even that compromise was a hard fought one.”

James nodded as he processed the information. It was a disappointment to say the least. Yet the strength of the Kulreans’ point defenses was still a massive tactical advantage. “How are you prepared to use your ships then?” he asked. “You have clearly brought them here to help defend us. How far are you willing to go?”

“We will help you defend your home systems from invasion. That much I have been able to get the other Superintendents to agree to. I cannot take my ships beyond the borders of your space though. We will not assist you in conquering systems that are not your own,” Hallock explained.

“So, you will help us attack and drive off Karacknid fleets that are in our space?” James pressed. “Even if we are using our offensive weapons against the Karacknids.”

Hallock gave James one sharp nod. “We will protect your ships as they do what you believe needs to be done to protect your systems. We will not destroy enemy ships, but if they refuse to retreat, then we will keep your ships safe if you have to engage the enemy.”

“All right,” James replied as his mind flooded with potential strategies. The Kulrean’s ethical position made no sense to him. What difference did it make if they pulled the trigger that killed Karacknid warships, or if they simply protected Allied ships to allow them to do the killing? In his mind there was no difference. Still, he wasn’t going to look a gift horse in the mouth. “I need some way to contact and coordinate with my ships. We have taken losses, but with your help I think we should be able to drive the Karacknids from the Sol system. With luck, the Karacknid commander will recognize the threat your ships face and retreat all the way back to his own territory.”

“My ships are at your disposal Emperor,” Hallock said as he raised a hand and gestured towards a part of Stargazer’s bridge to one side of where they stood. “I’ve had four command consoles set up for you and your staff here.”

“Thank you,” James said as he stepped past Hallock and moved to the consoles. He wasn’t in the least surprised when a silvery metallic chair grew out of the ground. Sitting in it, James found that it fit his form perfectly. As he raised his hands towards the console in front of him, screens and buttons appeared. They were identical to the tactical consoles on Drake. Turning to his officers he gestured for them to join him. As they got settled in, he accessed the COM part of the console and found that he could hail Vengeance. Seconds later Lightfoot’s face appeared in front of him projected from a mini holo display.

“Admiral Somerville, you made it to the Kulrean worldship?” Lightfoot asked.

“I did,” James said quickly. “And you wouldn’t believe the half of what I’ve seen. There’s no time for that now. The Kulreans have agreed to protect our fleet. We are going to break orbit and close with the Karacknids. We’ll hit them with as many missile salvos as we can. My staff officers will work out the details of our formation and attack plan with the Kulrean officers and send them to you. You can start getting the fleet ready. I’d suggest we start transferring as many missiles as possible from our damaged ships and supplies to our functioning warships. If the Karacknids intend to make a fight of it, we might run out of missiles before we can destroy all their ships.”

Lightfoot nodded. “That could be a problem. But you’d think the Karacknids would realize they can’t win and pull back.”

“That’s what I’m hoping,” James agreed.

“Very well,” Lightfoot said as he flashed James a grin. “This is not quite how we expected the battle to go. But I’m certainly not complaining. I’ll see to it immediately.”

“My staff officers will keep in touch,” James replied. When the COM channel ended, he turned to Anderson, Ivanov and Alfaro and outlined what he wanted to do. He then helped them coordinate with Hallock’s officers and communicate everything to Lightfoot and the rest of the Allied fleet’s senior commanders. Just a handful of minutes later he stepped away from the console and re-joined Hallock. “I think we are ready to proceed Superintendent.”

“Then you may give the order Emperor,” Hallock said as he gestured towards the holographic display of the Kulrean and Allied Fleet.

“Break orbit and set us onto our intercept course,” James said as he glanced at Anderson and the Kulrean officers near him. The ships on the holo display responded almost instantly. Moving away from Earth, the Allied ships formed a tight ball that was surrounded by Kulrean worldships. As they moved towards the Karacknids, the Kulreans and then the Allied ships engaged the next missile salvo. All of the enemy missiles were destroyed. As the Karacknid ships held their position, James had to admit they were brave. He had thought that before, but they were showing another level now. The Karacknids were throwing everything they had at the Kulrean worldships and they hadn’t even caused a scratch yet.

As soon as James’ ships came into range, they fired their own missile salvo. It was puny compared to the salvos the Karacknids kept throwing out. When his fourteen thousand missiles reached the Karacknids, their point defenses tore into them. With the Kulreans impressive sensors, James could see that twelve missiles made it into attack range. Five Karacknid warships were destroyed and three more damaged. At this rate we will need more than one hundred salvos to destroy them all, James thought. Anderson had already checked, even if every missile was taken from the damaged ships and the orbital storage stations, his fleet wouldn’t be able to fire more than twenty-six salvos. We could end up with a stalemate, he realized. It was a surreal thought. If his fleet fired all their missiles and the Karacknids didn’t retreat, they could simply remain in high orbit around Earth blockading Humanity’s homeworld. There would be nothing James could do about it. As good as the Kulreans point defenses were, he was sure they had no way to stop energy weapons. If James tried to move his ships close enough to use their plasma and heavy laser cannons, the Karacknids would blow them all apart.

Despite his misgivings, there was nothing else James could do so he ordered salvo after salvo be fired at the Karacknids. In turn, the Karacknids kept up their bombardment of his fleet. After the seventh Karacknid missile salvo was completely wiped out, something finally happened. With Stargazer’s impressive holo display, James saw it instantly. The largest Karacknid dreadnoughts began to turn their noses, then every other ship followed suit. In the space of ten seconds the Karacknid fleet turned onto a heading that would take them through their jamming field. James gave orders for four small squadrons to be formed. He sent them back towards Earth to pass around the planet and head out of the Karacknid jamming field far away from where the Karacknid battlefleet was headed. There was no way he was bringing his main fleet out. Not when he wasn’t sure where the Karacknid battlefleet had gone. If he tried to follow them, he was certain the Karacknid commander would pounce on his ships and engage them with his energy weapons.

An hour passed after the last Karacknid missile salvo was destroyed before the first squadron returned through the jamming field. When the report reached them, James breathed a sigh of relief. The Karacknid battlefleet was continuing on a course towards the Beta shift passage. Even as he read the report, the jamming field disappeared from around Earth. The ships that had formed it were in retreat as well. The Karacknid siege had been broken! But the Karacknid fleet is still intact, James thought as he sought out the Karacknid battlefleet, now visible once again. His enemy still had more than six thousand warships. Turning, James caught Hallock’s eye. The question now was, what were they going to do next? The immediate answer was clear, James wanted to hold Christine and Jonathan again. But after that he had no idea. At least, not yet. A part of him was still amazed that he was alive, let alone safe.

Chapter 26

To this day the Kulreans have not ventured to form a colony beyond their home system. In many ways our technologies now match or even surpass theirs. Nevertheless, we still owe them a great dept. It should never be forgotten.

-Excerpt from Empire Rising, 3002 AD.

Stargazer, Sol system.

“What are your orders now?” Hallock asked James as Stargazer’s advanced sensors sought out the fleeing Karacknid fleet, confirming the scout reports from minutes ago.

“Now we return to orbit and lick our wounds,” James answered. “My fleet has been ravaged, but there are many survivors who need to be rescued and there are a lot of damaged ships that can be saved.”

“I will instruct my ships to aid yours at once,” Hallock responded. “Our sensors should be able to detect any of your people that are adrift in space. And we can maybe assess the damage your ships have taken better than their own crews might be able to. If we can assist in the repairs as well, we will.”

James gave Hallock a warm smile. “Any help you can give will be appreciated.” He just managed to stop himself from thanking the Kulrean again. “If you don’t mind, I’d like to try and speak to my Flag Captain. I want to know how Drake is getting on. Then, if you can spare a shuttle, I should head to the surface. Empress Christine will want to know exactly what is going on. My staff and I can better organize recovery efforts from the Imperial Palace as well. “

Turning to one of his officers, Hallock gestured with a hand. Moments later James was looking at Captain Fisher. She looked haggard. Her hair was a mess, there were several bruises on one side of her face and black soot marks on the other. Still, her eyes were as fierce as ever. James gave her a small smile. “How is your ship Captain?” he asked.

“She is still alive,” Fisher replied without returning his smile. “That’s about the best I can say. We’ve had to shut down half of our reactors for fear they might overload. As you no doubt saw, we lost our nose section from bulkhead fourteen forward. That has reduced our offensive and defensive capabilities by about thirty percent. Two hundred and eighty-four crew are missing. I’ve got as many more seriously injured. Chief O’Malley tells me we couldn’t sustain more than 0.15c without risking more of the ship being torn off.”

James grimaced. It was just as bad as he had feared. “I’ll make sure Drake gets a priority space in one of the repair yards. She has earned it. What about Miyagi and Martinez? How are they?”

Fisher glanced away, obviously checking a display screen or getting an answer from one of her officers. “They’re both in the infirmary,” she said as she looked back. “They’re stable, but they’ve already been scheduled to be taken down to Earth for treatment. We simply don’t have the facilities to deal with all our wounded. Not with the damage we’ve taken. I’m afraid I can’t tell you anything more than that at the moment.”

“That will have to do then,” James replied. “I’m taking my staff officers down to the Imperial Palace. We will coordinate with Admiral Lightfoot from there. At the moment our priority is saving as many crew and ships as we can. I’ll let you go back to your ship Captain. Don’t hesitate to let me know if you need further assistance.”

“We will,” Fisher promised. “And thank those Kulreans for us. We’d have been done for in that final salvo without them.”

“I already have,” James assured his Flag Captain. “And I’m sure we will again. Good luck,” he added as he gestured for Hallock’s officer to end the COM channel.

“We have a shuttle ready for you Emperor,” Hallock said as soon as James turned back to him. “Don’t worry about your fleet, we will assist Lightfoot as much as we can until you reach the Palace.”

“Thank you my friend,” James said as he reached out and placed a hand on Hallock’s shoulder. “I’ll be in touch as soon as I can. There is much we need to discuss. Your arrival has changed a great many things.”

“Once we have rescue operations well underway, then I’m sure that will be our next priority,” Hallock agreed, thankfully choosing to ignore James thanking him once again.

With a final nod to Hallock, James turned to Anderson and Ivanov and gestured for them to follow him. Then he looked around for the Kulrean officer who had been their guide to Stargazer’s bridge. The officer was already standing at a door that had just appeared in the bridge’s silvery metallic wall. Seconds later James was in the turbo lift that was able to take him to Stargazer’s hanger in just seconds. As Hallock had said, a shuttle was already waiting for them. It took just fifteen minutes for the shuttle to reach Earth, descend through the planet’s atmosphere and land at the Imperial Palace.

As soon as James stepped off the shuttle, he broke into a wide smile. Christine and Jonathan had beaten him there. They were already running across the landing pad towards him. Quickly he matched their speed. In moments he crashed into Christine and scooped her up into a hug. He was careful to help her support Jonathan. Holding both of them in his arms, James rested his head down onto Christine’s neck. For several seconds they held each other, simply enjoying being in one another’s presence. Even Jonathan barely squirmed as he was pinned between mother and father. Eventually, Christine moved back slightly. Her free hand reached up and stroked James’ cheek. “I still can’t believe it. I can’t believe you are here. I had tried so hard to resign myself to your death. I cried and cried until I could cry no more. And now you are here. The Kulreans’ arrival. It is a miracle.”

“I’m still struggling to get my head around it myself,” James replied. “But I know this much,” he said as he gave her another squeeze. “We are both here. All three of us are safe. The Karacknid battlefleet cannot hurt us anymore. Not now at least.” Leaning in he gave Christine a deep kiss. “I love you my dear,” he said as they broke apart. “More than you will ever know.”

“And I you,” Christine replied kissing him. “Just as much.”

Content to just hold Christine, James let go with one arm and brought it up to help support Jonathan. Leaning in he kissed his son on the forehead. He allowed himself to enjoy holding each of them tightly for several minutes. Now and again he leaned in to kiss one or the other, but for the most part he simply stared and smiled at them. He too had resigned himself to not seeing either again. And yet now they were right in front of him within reach of his hands and lips.

Sometime later James caught movement out of the corner of his eye. Glancing around, he was startled to see a handful of officers and Palace officials all gathered around them. They must have followed Christine and Jonathan out. He hadn’t heard them, and he’d been so focused on Christine and Jonathan that he hadn’t seen them either. Half releasing Christine he turned towards the senior naval officer. “Rear Admiral Mandow, I’m sorry, I didn’t see you there.”

“That is quite all right Emperor,” Mandow said, sounding as if he was trying to hide a chuckle. “Empress Christine and Prince Jonathan are your priority.”

“So too is the fleet,” James said as he fully released Christine. “You should be at the C&C room. As should I.” He looked back to Christine. “There will be time for reunions later, the fleet needs us.”

Christine gave him a firm nod. She gestured for one of her aides to come to her. Handing Jonathan to her she turned back to James and Mandow. “I’m going to help as much as I can. Let’s go.”

With a nod to Mandow, James signaled for him to lead them back into the Palace. Then he took Christine’s hand in his and marched after the Rear Admiral. When they got to the C&C, the giant holo display told James all he needed to know. A massive rescue operation was underway. Intact warships, freighters and tugs were pulling hundreds of damaged ships back towards Earth’s orbitals. Several thousand shuttles were zooming around searching the debris for survivors and ferrying the injured down to Earth for treatment. James took a minute or so to take in everything that was happening, then he threw himself into helping with the rescue efforts.

A full hour passed without him realizing it. Only when Christine appeared at his side with a mug of hot coffee did he pause long enough to glance at a chronometer. About to make a comment about how quickly the time had passed, James stopped when he glanced down at Christine. Her hand was still held up towards him from when she had handed him the coffee. Yet her face was turned towards a small holo display. Shock was written across it. “What is it?” James demanded.

Christine simply shook her head. Then her hand moved to point to the display. “I thought she was okay. I thought Intrepid was okay.”

Spinning towards the display that had caught Christine’s eyes, James quickly scanned it. As he did, his heart rate slowed to a snail’s pace. He felt his hands begin to sweat. One of the first things he had done upon entering the C&C was check on Intrepid’s status. His niece’s cruiser had been reported as undamaged. Now an updated report had come in. It was saying Intrepid had taken a direct hit from a Karacknid missile. An initial survey of the ship had deemed it unsalvageable. James swallowed hard when he read that. For such a conclusion to be reached so quickly meant the cruiser had been very badly damaged. The next line told him the survivors were being shuttled down to Geneva for medical treatment. When James saw how many shuttles were assigned to the task, ice ran through his heart. There were barely enough shuttles for twenty percent of Intrepid’s full crew compliment.

“We need to go and see her,” Christine said as she grabbed one of James’ hands and held on tightly. She then turned to James. “We need to go and see.”

James nodded as he turned around and sought out Mandow. The Rear Admiral was already staring at him. “We have things under control here Emperor. You can be in Geneva in a couple of minutes. Go, I’m sure you’ll be back momentarily.” James didn’t wait to reply, he turned and rushed out of the C&C. The next few minutes were a blur as he and Christine half ran through the Palace and across to the shuttle landing pads. Before he knew it, they were in the air and racing towards Geneva. On the way, James pulled up the report on Intrepid and continued to read it. When an image of the cruiser appeared on his datapad, he couldn’t help but curse. The anti-matter missile had eaten away most of the cruiser’s innards. The warship was nothing but a skeleton of her former self. Not wanting Christine to see the image, James quickly shut the datapad down. Before he could really prepare himself for what he was about to face, James felt the shuttle touch down on the hospital’s landing pad. Christine beat him to her feet and, like a flash, moved down the shuttle towards its rear access ramp. Reluctantly, James followed close behind her.

When he stepped off the shuttle, they were greeted by a scene James was all too familiar with. Two shuttles from Intrepid had already landed. The survivors were wandering around the landing pad looking completely lost and disorientated. Most had visible signs of injury. Either their clothes were torn, they were covered in bruises or blood, or someone had attempted to bandage their wounds. Here and there a couple of officers were shouting as they tried to organize the survivors, but for the most part no one seemed to be in charge. As James watched, medics appeared from the hospital and moved among the survivors as they triaged them. “Come on,” he said as he took Christine’s hand. He threaded his way through the survivors as he made his way towards the only officer he could see. As they walked, he and Christine checked every face they saw. Some of the injured were so bandaged or had their clothes so torn up that they could have been wearing a Captain’s uniform and it would be impossible to tell.

“Lieutenant,” James shouted, easily carrying his voice over the near deathly silence that surrounded the survivors. “Lieutenant come over here,” he added as he waved for the Lieutenant who had been trying to organize the survivors to come to him. For a second the Lieutenant turned and stared at James. Then his eyes widened, and he rushed over. Though he snapped a quick salute once he got close, James could see the fatigue and strain on his body.

“At ease,” James told him. “You know who I am. We are here for Captain Kansas. Please, tell us, did she survive?”

The Lieutenant shook his head causing James to take a sharp breath. He felt Christine’s hand tighten around his like a vice grip. “I don’t know,” the Lieutenant said. “I’m sorry, I don’t know. We lost life support throughout most of the ship. What was left of her anyway. Communications were down all across the ship. I was stationed with the starboard missile batteries. I got out as many of my people as I could. I’m sorry. But I don’t know,” he repeated as he wobbled.

“It’s okay,” James said as he reached out to steady the Lieutenant. “I’m sure you’ve done your best. You got your people to safety. Go and see to them now. Make sure the worst receive medical treatment first.”

“Yes Emperor,” the Lieutenant said as he looked from side to side, confusion written across his face. Before James could say anything more, he wandered towards a group of survivors that had several doctors working on them.

James shared a glance with Christine. Her face said exactly what he was feeling. They were both scared. Though they were clinging to hope, they were very scared. Noise overhead made James look up, four more shuttles were descending towards the landing pad. At once he led Christine towards the open space where they would touch down. By the time the shuttles’ access ramps opened and more survivors streamed down them, he and Christine were there. Looking from face to face, they searched every survivor as they left the shuttles and moved towards the medical staff who were trying to organize them.

“Are these the last shuttles?” Christine asked as they passed more and more survivors and there was no sign of Emilie.

“I think so,” James forced himself to say. Their hope was running out. When the last few survivors stepped out of the shuttles, James stopped. He spun and looked at those who were walking or limping away from him. He hadn’t seen Emilie among them. But maybe he had missed her? Surely he had? Desperately his eyes moved back-and-forth across the survivors as he tried to spot someone who looked like his niece. Yet none did.

“James,” Christine said, her voice barely above a whisper. She tugged on his hand to turn him around. “James,” she half croaked again. As James turned, he saw that she was pointing towards the final shuttle that had landed. One final survivor had appeared and was slowly walking down its access ramp. James recognized her at once. In a flash both he and Christine ran towards Emilie. As they moved, James took in his niece. Her uniform was scorched and it looked like half of her hair had been burnt away. Thankfully, her face looked untouched, though it was bruised and bloodied. She looked very similar to how Captain Fisher had. Except, as James got closer, he saw Emilie’s eyes. Where Fisher’s had been full of grit and determination, Emilie’s looked empty.

As soon as they got close to her, James and Christine pulled Emilie into a hug. James had expected her to try and avoid their public affection. He would have been pleased if she had. It would have meant she had some fight in her. Instead, she simply allowed them to embrace her without resistance. She didn’t hug them back, but nor did she try to hold them off. She simply stood limp as they hugged her. “We’re so happy you are alive,” Christine said. “When we heard about Intrepid, we feared the worst…” When Emilie didn’t acknowledge Christine’s words, she spoke again. “I’m so sorry for your ship. And your crew. We have lost so many good people today. But I’m happy you were not one of them.”

When Emilie didn’t respond, Christine reduced the strength of her hug. She looked up and caught James’ eye. “You’re in shock,” James said gently to his niece. “That’s understandable. It will take you days to process what has just happened. But Christine is right. You are alive. So too are some of your crew. That is something to be thankful for.”

“And what about those who are dead?” Emilie said as she finally raised her eyes to meet James’, though she only held his gaze for a split second. It was enough for James to see the grief that filled his niece. “I need to see to those I didn’t fail,” Emilie said as she brushed off their hugs. Without another word, she moved past them and down the shuttle’s access ramp.

Christine made to move after her but James caught her hand. Silently he shook his head and pulled her into a hug. “She’s alive,” he whispered so that Emilie wouldn’t hear. “She’s alive and in one piece. That’s enough to be thankful for. The rest will come with time.”

“It better,” Christine whispered back fiercely. “She’s too good to lose her to her own self recriminations. And we’ve lost too many good officers to waste the ones we have left.”

“Agreed,” James replied. “But there’s nothing we can do right now. There are others who need us. She needs to see to her crew. We can’t come between that. Let us get back to the Palace.”

“Of course,” Christine consented. “This day is far from over yet.”

James couldn’t help but nod. As bad as Intrepid had been hit and as injured as many of her crew were, other ships had fared even worse. They needed his help as well.

Chapter 27

Some say the Emperor and Empress today are too beholden to the five main political parties. They are constantly having to compromise to get the resources they feel they need for the Fleet and the defense of the Empire. Whether there is truth to that concern I will let others decide, but there was a time when our leaders could act quickly and decisively. They had to; our survival depended on it.

-Excerpt from Empire Rising, 3002 AD.

Imperial Palace, 31st July 2484 AD (1 day later).

Standing, James took a moment to look around the large oval conference table. Nine different species were present and, in total, the leaders before him represented a further twelve species. James couldn’t help but think he was about to open one of the most important meetings in Humanity’s history. As his eyes passed over Christine, he smiled despite the gravity of the situation. He was still overjoyed by her presence. By the fact that he could look at her and smile at her and, in the coming hours, hold her as well.

When Christine gave him a quick smile and gestured with her head for him to continue, James returned her nod and turned back to the other Admirals and political leaders. Taking a deep breath, he began. “Beyond our expectations and hopes, Earth has been saved. Each and every one of you played a part in accomplishing this and all of your people have suffered because you chose to stand with us. On behalf of Empress Christine and all my species, I want to thank you all. Especially, I wish to offer our appreciation to the Kulreans one last time. Not just my appreciation, but the appreciation and gratitude of every Human your coming has saved.”

Though he paused for just a second, James was interrupted. First Ya’sia, then Jil’lal and then each of the senior Conclave Admirals added their thanks to his. When they were done, Hallock stood and bowed deeply to everyone. “Some of you I have met before, others are new to me, and even to my species,” Hallock said as he glanced at the Conclave admirals. “It is a pleasure to renew friendships and to form new ones. The gratitude you have all shown is much appreciated, but unnecessary. The Karacknids are a threat to us all. I and my people now realize this. Our fates are tied to one another. Let us hope that together we can indeed protect one another.”

James bowed to Hallock as the Superintendent sat down and looked at James attentively, allowing him to continue. “Each of you commands your species’ forces in this system, but now you must represent the will of your people,” James said as he looked from alien to alien. “The Kulreans joining us in this war is the most significant development since the Karacknids began their conquest of our space. At the moment, the Karacknid battlefleet is in full retreat. Scouts have already been sent to confirm what I suspect will be true, that the Karacknids will not just fall back to the Beta system, but likely as far as New Shanghai, if not further. The Kulrean worldships are a complete unknown for the Karacknids. They do not yet know the full combat effectiveness of our new allies. We know the enemy commander is good. The wisest course of action would be to fall back to a position they can defend whilst they gather more intelligence on the Kulreans. That means we have a window of opportunity. One that may stay open for several months, or even longer. But it will not remain so indefinitely. Sooner or later the Karacknids will gain the numbers or a new strategy or technology that will give them the confidence to engage the Kulrean worldships. We must use the time we have to our advantage. This meeting is the first stage in figuring out how we should do that.

“I have sent word to Varanni Prime now that our FTL relay is no longer being jammed. Alliance High command knows that the Kulreans have joined us in this war. They are still processing this new development, but they did send back an updated report on what has been going on in their space over the last several weeks. This information will be vital in helping us determine what steps to take, I have therefore asked Rear Admiral Becket to briefly update us on events in Alliance space.” As he sat, James gave Becket a nod. Several of his senior Admirals had been lost fighting the Karacknids, including Nogamoro, but both she and Lightfoot had survived. Of that he was incredibly pleased.

“Thank you Emperor,” Becket said after she cleared her throat. With a tap on the holo display’s command terminal, a star map of the frontline in Alliance space appeared. “It appears the Karacknids have launched two significant attacks against the Alliance’s border worlds. The timing makes it clear that the attacks were coordinated with the Karacknid battlefleet’s drive on Earth. Instead of sending more aid to us, Alliance High command has been struggling to defend their own borders. Both attacks were driven off by the Alliance fleets defending their border forts. The western thrust penetrated through two more systems before it was stopped here at the Mustifas system. Both sides suffered heavy losses and the Karacknids were forced to retreat. They fell back to the border system they conquered and appear to be licking their wounds there. The eastern thrust was more successful, they managed to capture the Crian colony of Jamaral. Enough reinforcements have been rushed to the sector to prevent the Karacknids from advancing any further. But Alliance High command has not yet been able to gather a strong enough fleet to drive the Karacknids back. A stand-off has developed, at least for the moment. It appears the Karacknids are bringing in reinforcements almost as quickly as Alliance High Command can. Though the Alliance’s defenses are holding, they are in a precarious situation. More than a thousand ships have been lost in the fighting. A third Karacknid attack would push their defensive lines past the breaking point.”

“How many Karacknid warships were involved in each attack?” Rear Admiral Humis asked. She was the senior surviving Poideal commander.

“Approximately two thousand in each,” Becket answered.

Humis let out a strange hissing noise as she looked at her fellow Conclave Admirals. “We have seen nearly seven thousand in the attack here, and another four thousand were also fighting against the Alliance’s forces. How many warships do the Karacknids have committed to this war? How can we defeat so many?”

“The number is much worse than eleven thousand,” Becket replied, clearly not in the mood to console Humis. “As well as launching their two offensives, at least half as many warships again were defending the border systems the Karacknids have along the frontline. That is where they are now drawing their reinforcements from. But to answer your question, according to the intelligence the Kalassai shared with us, the total number of warships the Karacknids have throughout their Empire could be as many as one hundred thousand. The vast majority of them are stationed along their massive border. Others are committed to other wars they are involved in.”

Humis made another hissing noise but said nothing more. James quickly jumped in. “Thank you Rear Admiral,” he said to Becket. “Next, I’m going to ask Hallock to explain the position of his fleet. We all need to understand the limits his people have placed on his worldships.”

Once again Hallock stood. “As I’ve already said, some of you are more familiar with my species than others. For centuries, my species has prided ourselves in being pacifists. We inhabit one single star system and that is enough for us. We have no desire to conquer or exploit any of our neighbors. However, the danger of our philosophical system was made abundantly clear to us two decades ago. One of our neighbors, though our technological inferior, threatened to attack us.” As he spoke, Hallock glanced at Jil’lal. “Though that is now in the past, it was a wake-up call. But for Emperor Somerville’s intervention, many of my species might have been killed. Since then, we have learnt that it was the Karacknids who furnished our neighbors with weapons powerful enough to threaten us. The combination of these two events caused us to build many of the worldships you now see as part of my fleet. Their design is purely one of defense. They contain no offensive weapons. They were built to stand in the way of any hostile fleet that threatens our home system. With the destruction of Tranquility however, we are forced to consider our position once again. It is clear that the Karacknids want nothing more than the conquest of this entire sector of space. Though we believe we could defend our home system for many years against them, eventually their numbers would wear us down. In addition, we do not wish to see our friends and neighbors enslaved by them. That is why I and my fleet are here now. Yet there are limitations in how far we can go. My species has the greatest revulsion towards taking the life of another sentient. It is anathema to us. This is a line we will not cross. Our help therefore comes with two conditions. Number one; Kulrean ships will not directly attack or destroy any enemy warships with sentient life on board, and number two; my fleet will not cross the border from your species’ territories into the Karacknid Empire. We will defend your systems, but we will not aid you to conquer the Karacknids. With these exceptions, we believe we can protect many of the values that our society holds most dear whilst also confronting the Karacknid threat. I’m sure many of you would want us to go much further, but neither my people nor my fellow Superintendents are prepared to do so. Amongst my people I’m seen as the most progressive, or heretical as some would say. Yet even I am unsure as to whether we could or even should do more than this.”

“And so this is where we are,” James said as Hallock sat down and he stood. “Even with the Kulreans’ help, this war is far from over. How then should we proceed? All of our collective wisdom is needed to answer this question. I am eager to hear all of your thoughts.” Sitting, James made it clear that the floor was now open for discussion.

As several of the Admirals probed Becket for more information on the events in Alliance space and then Hallock on the capabilities of his ships, James was content to listen. He knew most of the answers already. It was only when Lightfoot obviously felt everyone had asked enough questions to turn the conversation to what to do next that he sat forward in his chair. “Given the various threats that we face,” Lightfoot began, “I see only one general strategy that we can adapt. To prevent being overwhelmed on either front, we must split Hallock’s fleet. Some of his ships should remain here to help us push the Karacknid battlefleet out of our space, especially if they fall back only as far as New Shanghai or some of the other Chinese colonies. The rest should be sent to Alliance space to back up the Alliance fleet preparing to counterattack at Jamaral. We cannot keep all of Hallock’s fleet here, it would allow the Karacknid battlefleet we have just driven away to pivot and reinforce the attacks into Alliance space. If the six thousand warships we have just faced were added to those already pressing the Alliance, their defenses would be overrun.”

“But surely that is giving up some of our advantage?” Admiral Shraw asked, his razor-sharp teeth on display as always. “We have our enemy on the run. For the first time in the war, we have a fleet more powerful than theirs. Surely we should pursue them and strike as hard and as fast as we can.”

Lightfoot smiled at the reptilian alien. “My instincts are telling me the same thing. At least to a certain extent they are. Yet with what force will we strike at our enemy? You heard Superintendent Hallock. They will only help defend our borders. And even if the Karacknid battlefleet chose to fight us at New Shanghai, we have nowhere near enough ships to actually cause them any serious harm. No, I’m afraid that the arrival of the Kulreans, as much as a blessing as it is, only allows us to shore up our defenses. It cannot win us this war. At least there’s no way that I can see.”

“What about Mindus territory?” Jil’lal asked as she turned to Hallock, James knew the Vestarian Admiral well enough to see that she was slightly embarrassed. Though she hadn’t been involved in the attack on the Kulrean home system, some of her species had. “They were our allies in this war from its beginning, though they have been conquered now. Would your ethics allow you to defend their worlds? If so, we could launch a campaign to retake their homeworld Jaranna. If we could take and hold it, it would cut off the Karacknids’ main supply route to the frontline along Alliance space. We may force them to have to pull back from their entire offensive.”

Hallock shook his head in a very humanlike gesture. “I’m afraid I have been given strict instructions by my fellow Superintendents. The Mindus were not our friends before this war, nor were we in contact with them. I have instructions to help defend Alliance and Human territory, that is all.”

“But the Mindus have been fighting with us,” Ya’sia argued. “Their refugees have settled on a planet within Alliance space. Though their numbers are few, they are building their own warships to join with our fleets. By protecting Alliance space, you are already protecting some of their species. Surely that could be extended to those who have already been conquered?”

Again Hallock shook his head. “I can send a query back to Kulrea. But I believe the answer would be no. If the Karacknids have already conquered these planets, then they will have begun to settle their own troops and people there. We will not aid you in conquering them. Too many lives would be at risk.”

“What about our systems?” Humis asked “If they are threatened, will you not send ships to help us?”

Hallock turned to the Poideal and bowed slightly. “Your presence here was a surprise to me, as it will be to my fellow Superintendents. I will query them about your species as well. In this case, I believe our offer of protection may be extended to your systems.”

Humis made a gesture with her arms and sat back in her seat. James guessed it was a Poideal way of showing thanks or relief. The rapid flicking in and out of Shraw’s forked tongue told him that the Gramrian Admiral wasn’t as easily appeased. “An attack on Jaranna may not be as effective as we might like to hope in any case,” James said to cut off any further argument. Hallock’s position was disappointing, but he didn’t want it causing any divisions amongst those gathered for the conference. “We have already raided the system once and attempted to do so a second time. The Karacknids have had more than two years to develop other supply routes to the frontline. Plus, if it was successful and did force the Karacknids to pull all their warships back to their own systems, would that do us any good?” James turned to Hallock. “If the Karacknid battlefleet was able to combine with the ships currently attacking the Alliance, could your worldships fend off missile salvos from eleven thousand Karacknid warships?”

“Nine thousand and I think we would not be threatened,” Hallock answered. “But eleven thousand, of that I would not be entirely confident in our ability to defend ourselves. Not on our own at least.”

Hallock’s words sobered everyone in the conference room. No one spoke for several seconds as they processed that information. Though James had known it already, it was still disappointing to hear again. Hallock’s worldships were not a silver bullet. They would not win the war with one shot. The Karacknids were too big a threat, their Empire was simply too large for one hundred Kulrean warships to turn the tide.

“What if we use the threat of the Kulreans to cause the Karacknids some serious damage. Damage that may well buy us the time to continue to build up our shipbuilding capacities?” Becket asked.

“Go on?” James pressed, his interest piqued.

“I agree with Lightfoot, we have to split the Kulrean ships, our position is too precarious to do otherwise. We must shore up our defenses both here and in Alliance space. But once we have done that, that may be where our window of opportunity is. If we can drive the Karacknids out of our colonies and out of Alliance space, they will know for certain that the Kulrean worldships are a force to be reckoned with. If we keep the worldships stationed along our borders, it would then free up many of our own ships for offensive operations. At several times throughout this war we have tried to raid Karacknid systems. At some of those times we have encountered success and at other times failure. But what if we launched several raids with large fleets? Admiral Shraw and I have already shown that it can be done in the Valley. If we could put together two or three fleets of a thousand or more warships, they could pierce through weak spots along the Karacknid border and drive deep into their space. Ten or twenty systems deep. There we could destroy much of their infrastructure, supply convoys and even shipbuilding capacity. Without having to worry about defending our own borders, we could wreak havoc behind their own lines. At the very least it would draw much of their warships back into their own space instead of threatening ours. At best, it might buy us several years to rebuild our fleets.”

“That is a plan that appeals to me,” Admiral Shraw said needlessly, his body language was already showing that he agreed with Becket. The reptilian Admiral’s claws were extending and retracting as he considered the possibility.

“But one that would be very risky,” Lightfoot cautioned. “All it would take is for us to lose one of these powerful fleets and it would set us back years, not the Karacknids. And given that we would be operating in their territory, where they could rely on many reinforcements coming from various angles, being trapped would be a very real possibility. The Valley gave you a unique opportunity, trying the same thing in an open sector of space would be a different prospect entirely.”

“If we cannot push forward and retake territory from the Karacknids, nor even launch powerful raids into their space, then how can we bring this war to a conclusion?” Jil’lal asked, frustration filling her voice. “We know what the Kalassai intelligence tells us about the strength of the Karacknid Empire. So far they have only devoted a portion of their forces to conquering us. What do you think will happen once news of the Kulrean worldships reaches their Imperator? If it wasn’t the case already, conquering us will become the Karacknids’ number one priority. Tens of thousands more warships could be sent our way. We have mentioned this window of opportunity several times. I fear that if we do not use it to accomplish more than shoring up our borders, it will certainly pass us by.”

James opened his mouth to say something. He agreed entirely with Jil’lal, yet he felt as Lightfoot did, so far no war winning strategy had come to him. A spark of something made him stop, however. As others responded to Jil’lal, his mind was drawn back to his interrogation of the captured enemy general. It was now nearly four years since Holstein had been retaken from the Karacknids and Hux’lar captured. In all the time, he had given nothing away but what he had spat at James during their brief discussion. Many times over the last months James had revisited the conversation searching for something that would help them win the war. Yet nothing had come to him. Not until now. The Imperator, James thought. He is the key. Everything the Karacknids’ did, they did for the glory of their Imperator. There would be no peace unless the Imperator agreed to it. Of that James was certain. Even as he explored what had just come to him, he didn’t know how it could be done. It sounded crazy even in his own mind. Yet everyone knew they couldn’t win a prolonged war of attrition with the Karacknids, not if the Karacknids sent their full force against the Alliance and Human fleet. That meant a war winning strategy was needed. And James was sure it had to involve the Karacknid Imperator. Nothing less would work. Still, James had no idea what that meant. Realizing the Karacknid Imperator needed to be convinced to end the war and figuring out a way to accomplish that were two very different things. Certainly, it wasn’t something he and those around the table could accomplish. In total, there was barely more than a thousand battle ready ships in orbit around Earth. That was nowhere near enough to accomplish such a feat.

“We cannot win this war ourselves,” James said as he gave voice to some of what he was thinking. “Not with the forces we have at hand. That means we will need to join our strength to the Alliance fleets’. And it means we need to ensure that the Alliance does not fall. I believe we must split the Kulrean fleet. Some of their worldships can stay here and help push the Karacknids out of our space. The rest must go to Alliance space to help defeat the Karacknids there. After that we must find a way to win this war, or at the very least give us a significant advantage. Only with the warships of Alliance High Command can we do this. Our conversation has convinced me of this. I’m coming to the conclusion that Superintendent Hallock and I must go with the ships that go to Alliance space to meet with the Alliance High Command in person. Only then will we be able to find a way forward.”

Chapter 28

Often the hardest thing in war is to truly know one’s enemy. In times past the Empire has found itself fighting one adversary only to find out the real enemy was someone else entirely. The Silizzeras epitomize this. We fought many wars before we found out who was truly behind the attacks on our freedom.

-Excerpt from Empire Rising, 3002 AD.

“What do you have in mind?” Lightfoot asked James as he stared intently at him, rightly picking up that James had thought of something.

“Nothing concrete,” James answered. “It’s more of a feeling then an idea. I’m simply acknowledging the facts. We will need Alliance ships to launch any kind of offensive. Alliance High Command will have to play a role in determining whatever strategy we might pursue. Yet whatever we do, we all will need to agree. I think that means Superintendent Hallock and I need to go to Varanni Prime.” Turning to Hallock he asked, “how long would it take us to get there if we left in Stargazer?”

“With all the artificial shift passages that the Varanni dark matter repellers have created, it would be no more than three weeks,” Hallock answered.

James almost let out a whistle. That was two and a half weeks quicker than it would take the fastest Human ship. “All right then,” he said instead, “this is what I am proposing. Our forces will take a week or so to carry out as much repairs as they can. Then, with fifty of Hallock’s worldships, Admiral Lightfoot will proceed to follow the Karacknid battlefleet. If you can, you must drive them out of our space. If the Kulrean ships will not fight with us beyond our borders, then you must take every opportunity to engage the Karacknids here. Superintendent Hallock and I and the rest of his ships will proceed to Alliance space. Stargazer can go to Varanni Prime whilst the rest of the worldships head to Jamaral. They can help retake the colony and hopefully crush the Karacknid fleet there. Once we have secured all of our borders, then we can begin to enact whatever plan Alliance High Command comes up with. What do you think?” James asked as he turned to his wife.

Christine took a moment to respond. “I don’t like you leaving so soon. But you’re right, we’re not in a position to make this decision. Not if we need the Alliance’s full strength to use this opportunity the Kulreans have given us. Yet at the same time, we need to be at the table. You must go. If, of course, Superintendent Hallock is prepared to take you?” Christine finished as she turned to Hallock.

“It was always my intention to send ships to help the Varanni Alliance as well as yourselves,” Hallock answered. “And I will be happy to revisit Varanni Prime. Emperor James’ course of action is a wise one.”

“We are all in agreement then?” James asked as he looked at the other Admirals. “We can make some initial plans as to how to best engage the Karacknids before Hallock and I leave, but I trust Lightfoot and the rest of you are more than capable of doing this in our absence.”

“It would be a pleasure to lead our forces out against the Karacknids,” Lightfoot said as Becket and several other Admirals nodded. “I’m happy to leave the politicking to you Emperor.”

“I will accompany you,” Ya’sia said as she nodded to James. “I’ve already given Commodore Malek a field promotion to Vice Admiral. He can command what is left of the Alliance ships in our fleet. If we are to meet with Alliance High Command to decide the future of this war, I need to be there as well.”

“Of course you do,” James agreed. “It will be good to have you along for the journey to Varanni Prime.” James suspected Ya’sia’s wish to go had something to do with the Karacknids’ advance into Crian space. Her homeworld where her husband lived was just two systems away from where the Karacknid fleet currently was. “Then it is settled,” James said sounding more confident than he felt as he looked around at the other Admirals and leaders. He still had no clue how they might approach the inkling of an idea he had. He needed to think about it a lot more. But unless Jourm and the other Admirals of the Alliance High Command were able to come up with a better strategy, James suspected he’d have to find a way to make it work. “I will allow you all to return to your ships for now, we have a lot to organize if we are to depart for Varanni Prime and give chase to the Karacknid battlefleet. Make sure you update Admiral Clements on whatever needs you have as soon as possible. We will endeavor to get you the assistance you need.”

Before everyone left, James greeted each Admiral and thanked them again for their help. Only when he spoke to Hallock did he hold back thanking the Kulrean for the umpteenth time. When Christine was the last one left in the room, he stepped over to her and pulled her into a hug. “I want to go as little as you want me to. But I don’t see any other choice.”

“Then we will make the most of our time,” Christine said as she moved back from him and slipped a hand into his. “If you need to meet with Alliance High Command in person, then you should leave before the day is out. The sooner you go, the sooner you will be back. I suppose you’re not going to share whatever it is you’ve got banging around inside that thick skull of yours?”

James smiled as he shook his head gently. “It’s just a feeling. If we are going to beat the Karacknids, we need to force their Imperator to accept peace. Unless he does, the Karacknids will keep fighting to the death. We can raid as many systems of theirs as we want or even destroy several battlefleets, but they will not stop coming. Their Imperator is key. I’m sure of it. But that’s as much as I’ve got at the moment.”

Christine frowned. “Their Imperator is more than two thousand light years away on their homeworld. How are you going to convince him of anything? If we could use the Kulrean worldships to destroy all their fleets, then maybe, but that doesn’t seem to be on the cards.”

James shrugged, “Like I said, I haven’t got anything more than that yet. It’s not as if I could challenge him to a duel or something. I wouldn’t exactly fancy my chances in any case,” he chuckled.

Christine swatted his shoulder. “Don’t even talk about something like that. Now, let’s go and see Jonathan and get you packed. If you’re going away for a month or more, you will need some clothes. I’ll send word to Fox to grab some stuff from Drake. There’s another idea I’ve had as well concerning Emilie. I’ll tell you as we walk,” Christine said as she led James out of the conference room.

*

An hour later James had Jonathan in his arms as he stood in his and Christine’s quarters. He was rocking his son back-and-forth as Jonathan tried to grab at the rank insignia on his shoulder pads. Around him, Fox, Christine, and a couple of Christine’s aides were gathering up all the things Christine and Fox thought he was going to need.

“They’re here Emperor,” an aide said as she poked her head through the open door into the living quarters.

“Thank you,” James said as he nodded to the aide, then waved for Christine and Fox to keep doing what they were doing. Still holding Jonathan, he stepped out into one of the adjoining offices. Anderson, Ivanov and Alfaro were standing waiting for him. James smiled at each of them even as his mind went to Miyagi and Martinez. His two other staff officers had been taken to hospitals on Earth’s surface. The latest James had heard, both were in a stable condition, but neither would be returning to active duty for several days and it would be more likely a week or more in Miyagi’s case.

“Thank you for coming,” James said to his officers. “I’m sure there are hundreds of rumors flying around. I’ll come straight to it. The fleet is going on the offensive, at least as far as the borders of our space. If we can drive the Karacknids out, we will. I am not going with our ships, however. Superintendent Hallock and I along with half of his worldships will be heading to Alliance space. I’m not going to need a full staff of officers on this mission. What you do now is your choice. You can either come with me, where I am sure your expertise will prove useful. Or I can find other roles for you within the fleet. There are a lot of gaps within our officer ranks given the losses we suffered. I could probably get commands for you Anderson and Ivanov, and a First Lieutenant’s slot for you Alfaro. Each of you has served me exceptionally well. You deserve the positions if you want them.”

“I’m not ready to leave your side just yet Emperor,” Anderson said at once. “If you’re going to Varanni Prime, it must be for an important reason. I’ll accompany you.”

“As will I,” Ivanov responded.

“Me too,” Alfaro said. “I’m sure there’ll still be plenty of opportunities for us when we get back if your offer will still stand then?”

“Of course it will,” James said with a smile. “When that time comes, I may not take no for an answer. The fleet needs officers like you commanding warships, not just following me around everywhere.”

A beep from one of the doors into the office told James someone else wanted to enter. With a gesture of his hand he commanded the door to retract. When a face other than the one he had been expecting appeared, he frowned. “I’m sorry Admiral, I was unable to get in contact with Captain Kansas. She didn’t respond to any of the messages I sent.”

“And they were sent via the Palace’s COM system?” James queried. When the aide nodded, his frown deepened. Emilie should have known the messages came from him directly. Perhaps that is why she is ignoring them, he thought. From any other senior Admiral, she wouldn’t have dared ignore them. “Very well,” he said to the aide, “leave the matter with me.” Turning back to his officers, he gestured towards the open door. “We’ll be leaving before the end of the day. I suggest you go and pack what you will need. We will be gone at least a month, if not two.”

“We’ll get right on that,” Anderson responded as he glanced at Ivanov and Alfaro and then all three quickly shuffled out of the room.

As soon as he was alone, James looked down at Jonathan. His son had been content to watch James’ officers, but now he had turned back to look at James. “Your cousin is being very naughty,” he told his son. “Even if she has good reason. Your daddy is going to have to put a stop to it.” Pulling out his datapad, James queried the fleet’s personnel records to find out where Emilie was. He liked Christine’s suggestion, but it seemed he was going to have to make it happen himself. Stepping back into his living quarters, he moved over to Christine and handed her Jonathan. “I’m going to have to pop out for a moment, I’ll be right back.”

“A problem?” Christine asked.

“Hopefully not,” James responded, “I need to go and visit Emilie. It seems she thinks she can ignore a COM message from her Emperor without consequence.”

Christine chuckled as she reached forward and placed a hand on James’ arm. “Don’t be too harsh with her. You’ve been in the same boat. And there’s one or two people who would say you haven’t handled the loss of a ship and friends too well yourself.”

“I know, I know,” James replied. He knew exactly how Emilie was feeling. But it also meant he knew just what she needed to get herself out of it. A good kick up the backside, just like Gupta, Suzanna and Christine had had to give him over the years. Thoughts of Gupta and Suzanna didn’t lighten his mood, but it was with affection that he remembered them. They had been there for him when he had needed them. Now it was his turn to be there for Emilie. “I’ll be back as soon as I can,” he promised Christine. He ruffled Jonathan’s hair. “Don’t pack too much now, Fox won’t know where to stow it all.” With a final smile, he turned and left the living quarters. A couple of aides were standing outside in case they were needed. “Arrange a shuttle for me,” he requested. “I am going to the Admiralty.”

After a quick three minute flight to Portsmouth, James stepped off the shuttle and looked up at the Imperial Fleet’s new Admiralty buildings. They weren’t half the size of the Palace or the three complexes that housed the Senate, the Commons and the Servants, but they were impressive. As much as James hated it, he walked over to the customary welcoming party. Several senior Admirals and a bunch of junior officers were all standing at attention. After returning the salute, he held out his hand to Admiral Carruthers. She was in charge of Admiralty House and oversaw the HR side of the Navy. “I’m not here on any official business,” he said to her as they turned and walked towards the main entrance. “I’m only here to see my niece. I don’t want any more of a fanfare than we’ve already had.”

“Not a problem Emperor,” Carruthers assured him. “We have our hands more than full enough with everything that has happened over the last couple of days. We’ve got more than twelve thousand posts to fill in order to get Lightfoot’s fleet ready to depart.”

James had to stop himself from berating Carruthers. The way she spoke of it, it sounded like a logistical problem. Of course, to her it was. Yet to James each post that had to be filled represented one of his people who had died. “I know my way,” he said to her instead once they entered the buildings. “Thank you for the welcome. You can get back to it.”

“Of course Emperor, you can call me if you need anything. I’ll be there at the drop of a hat,” Carruthers assured him.

James nodded to her and then watched her leave. He waited a couple of seconds and then turned to the Imperial Guard marines who had followed him from the shuttle. “Wait here,” he told them. “I am as safe here as in the Palace.” Though he couldn’t see their faces, James could tell from their body language that they weren’t entirely happy. Yet as he walked off, they remained where they stood. Pulling out his datapad again, he checked where Emilie was. She was in a small office in one of the back buildings. With only a rough idea of how to get there, he set off in the general direction. Five minutes later and he thought he had found the right corridor. As he turned a corner, he almost bumped into someone in a Captain’s uniform. When their eyes met, James broke into a smile. “Captain Alvarez!” he said, his voice warm. Quickly he held out a hand to his former tactical officer. “It’s good to see you. I was relieved when I saw your ship had survived the battle unscathed.”

“Emperor Somerville,” Alvarez replied as he took James’ hand and gave a slight bow. He failed to hide his shock. “You are the last person I was expecting to see here.”

“I’ve come to speak to Emilie,” James explained, guessing Alvarez had already figured that out. “How is she?”

Alvarez shook his head. “She wouldn’t let me in. She only spoke to me over the intercom. She said she’s writing letters to the families of her crew that were lost in the battle.”

James gritted his teeth. Captains were advised to wait at least a week before embarking on such work. Having a few days of time and space from the dramatic events that had caused the loss of life was helpful. That Emilie had already started told James she was wallowing in her grief. Also, it was not expected that when a significant portion of a ship’s crew were lost that the captain would be the one to write the letters herself. Yet James suspected that was exactly what Emilie intended to do. “Well,” James said, “she might not let you in, but she’ll have to let her Emperor in. I’ll speak to her and then order her to go and find you. Take her mind off it, at least for a little while if you can.”

“I’ll do my best Emperor,” Alvarez promised. “Good luck,” he called after James as James patted him on the shoulder and moved down the corridor towards the room Emilie was holed up in.

When he got there, rather than try and convince her to let him in, he simply tapped an override command into the door’s access panel. It shot open in a flash. Just as quickly, Emilie’s head whipped up, her eyes flashing. When she saw James, she bit back whatever remark she had been about to make. Instead, her cheeks reddened and her eyes dropped. “I’m rather busy uncle,” she said quietly. “I’m sorry for not returning your messages.”

“No need to apologize,” James said as he stepped in and moved to sit at the opposite end of the desk she was at. As he did he took in his niece’s appearance. She had changed into a fresh uniform at least. Yet the bruises on her face and her burnt hair looked untreated. That was not a good sign. “I understand the desire to send letters out to the families of your crew. They deserve to know how their loved ones died. I’ve written hundreds of them myself. Too many to count.”

Emilie nodded, though she didn’t look up at him. James saw her lip tremble. It was clear she was trying not to show him how much she was upset. Instinctively he reached out and placed his hand on hers that was holding a datapad. Gently he pressed her hand and datapad down to the desk. “Which means I know that the families of those who have died are not waiting around holding their breath until your letter arrives. They’ve all already been informed. There are currently mourning their loved ones, not wondering where your letter is. Please, take a break. I need to talk to you.”

“I’m not sure I want another ship,” Emilie said, still keeping her head down. “I’m not sure I ever will. Intrepid was everything to me. Now she’s gone.”

“I felt the same way once,” James empathized. “When I had to give up Drake, I thought I’d never feel the same way about another ship or its crew. Yet I was wrong. There was Raptor and Endeavour, and then Titan and all the others. Each ship is different, each is special.”

“I still don’t want another,” Emilie repeated.

James nodded as he squeezed her hand. There was no ship for her, at least as far as he knew. And if there was, he wasn’t sure she was ready. In that regard, she was right. “That’s not why I am here. I’m here because I need you and I didn’t come to ask your permission.” Pulling out his datapad, he transferred a file to Emilie’s. “Those are your new orders. I’m heading to Varanni Prime today on Superintendent Hallock’s flagship, Stargazer. I no longer have a flagship, but I still need staff officers I can rely on. Commander Miyagi is in hospital. He’s stable, but I’m told it will take a number of weeks for him to be ready to return to duty. I need a new Chief of Staff. Someone I know I can trust. That is you. We leave within the next twelve hours.” When Emilie’s head shot up, James raised a hand to stop whatever argument she was about to make. “This isn’t up for debate. This is an order from your Emperor and your Admiral. Obey it, or face charges of insubordination.”

Emilie shook her head. “This isn’t fair. You can’t use your position like this.”

Despite how he knew his niece was feeling, James couldn’t help but laugh. “Not fair? You should try living my life for a while. I doubt anything’s been fair for me since I stepped foot on my first command.” When he saw his words didn’t have the desired effect; he changed his tone. “But this isn’t what you think it is. Yes, I’ve been where you are now. I know how easy it is to get lost in grief. To get lost in a sense of responsibility…

“I could tell you, you didn’t fail your people. That it is your duty to go on and keep fighting to make their sacrifice worth it. There was a time when I needed others to force those words into my head for me to actually get it. And yes, I want to pull you out of your despair before it swallows you up…

“But that’s not why I’m here. There is more at stake here than your feelings.” At the harshness of his tone, Emilie looked up, pain in her eyes. James ignored it. “The Kulreans joining the war may change everything. We may actually have a chance to go on the offensive. But our window of opportunity is small. We must act now. That’s why we’re heading to Varanni Prime at once. I need you. There is no one else for the job. So you need to pull yourself together, get yourself out of this office, and report to the Palace as soon as you have gathered your things. You can write your letters on the way there and have them transmitted back to Earth using the tachyon pulse generator. This is an order Captain, do you understand?” James adopted the tone he used to use to discipline Sub Lieutenants when he had been a Captain himself.

Slowly, but then with a little bit more speed, Emilie looked up and met his eyes. For a second, James thought she was going to say no. Then she nodded. “I’ll do what you ask uncle. I can’t pretend I’m happy about it. But I will do it.”

“Perfect,” James said as he stood and smiled. He knew he wouldn’t get any more from her. “And I do have one more order. You’re to go and see Alvarez before you go. We could be away for a couple of months. And by the time we get back, he’ll probably be out at New Shanghai. Go see him and say goodbye. That’s just as non-negotiable as my previous order.”

Emilie looked like she was going to protest. This time, James flashed a cheeky grin. “I have no problem not being fair when it’s for the good of my family,” he told her. He tapped his knuckle a couple of times on her desk. “Now get yourself organized. There’s no time to spare.” Turning quickly, he left the small office before Emilie could complain or think of some reason to change her mind.

Chapter 29

Divide and conquer – that is a key strategy that has lasted the test of time. Yet there is a danger in such an approach, for to lure an enemy into dividing his forces, one must at times divide one’s own forces. A good commander must therefore take every precaution to ensure his own stratagem is not turned against him.

-Excerpt from Empire Rising, 3002 AD.

Imperial Palace

When James got back to the Palace, Becket and Lightfoot were waiting for him in one of the smaller briefing rooms. “What have you got so far?” James asked as he sat down.

“I think we have to split our forces,” Lightfoot informed him as he gestured at the holo star map depicting Humanity’s colonies. “We can’t afford to let any sizeable Karacknid force remain behind our frontlines. As powerful as the worldships are, they cannot be everywhere at once.”

James nodded as he examined the star map. Three flashing red arrows showed where Lightfoot wanted to deploy his forces. “I take your point,” he said. It was expected that the Karacknid battlefleet would fall back towards New Shanghai, yet it was quite possible that some or all of their forces might head into the German colonies. From there they could retreat back to Jaranna. Additionally, smaller forces could remain hidden within the Japanese or Chinese colonies. And there are still at least five hundred ships in the Void, James reminded himself. If the fifty worldships that Hallock would be leaving with Lightfoot had to be split up again and again to cover so many systems, they might eventually be overwhelmed. Which is exactly what the Karacknid commander may try and do, James figured. He knows he can’t defeat the Kulrean worldships, not with the numbers he has. So he has two options, either increase his numbers, or decrease the Kulreans’. Half of Hallock’s fleet leaving for Alliance space was helping to accomplish the latter. “How are you going to handle it?” James asked.

“I will take the bulk of our fleet and pursue the Karacknid battlefleet,” Lightfoot responded. “Rear Admiral O’Neill will command a smaller force. They’ll detach from us and scout out the German colonies. If there’s no sign that any Karacknid ships went that way, they’ll quickly return to reinforce us. Shraw and Becket will retrace their steps back to the Void. They can destroy or drive out the Karacknid fleet there. With luck they will be able to drive them into the path of my ships. With each of the Karacknids’ three main avenues of retreat secured, our ships will be able to recombine and face them at New Shanghai, if the Karacknids want to make a stand there.”

“Face them how?” James asked as he brought a hand up to rub his chin.

“We’ll bring as many missiles as we can stuff into the few freighters we have left,” Lightfoot responded. “With the worldships providing cover, we can unload the missiles from the freighters and move close enough to fire them all together. It will take time, but I’ve been assured that even with just fifty worldships, the Kulreans should be able to protect our freighters.”

“All right, I’m happy to leave it in your capable hands,” James said as he nodded. “But you’re not to take any unnecessary risks. We’ve lost too many ships already. If all you can do is contain the Karacknids at New Shanghai for now, then that will have to do. Once we’ve helped the Alliance turn back the Karacknid incursions into their space, they should have more ships to send our way. Pushing the Karacknids out of our colonies may have to wait until then. But by all means, see if you can encourage them to pull back to their own space.”

“Thank you for your trust,” Lightfoot said as James stood.

James moved over and shook his hand. Then he pulled Becket into a hug. “You are the best two commanders we have left. Keep yourselves safe as well… Oh, and there is this,” James added as he reached into his pocket. He pulled out two Vice Admiral pips. Without waiting for permission he reached up and started to fasten one to Becket’s shoulder.

“What are you doing?” Becket said as she made to take a half step back. James stopped her by holding onto her tunic.

“What does it look like?” Lightfoot asked with a chuckle.

James didn’t speak until he was done. “There,” he said as he stood back. “That’s better, Vice Admiral. After your Valley campaign and your accomplishments in the Void, you’ve more than earned it. So let’s not have any arguments. With the losses we have suffered, there are lots of promotions being handed out. None more deserved than yours.”

“I don’t know what to say Emperor,” Becket replied. “I wasn’t expecting something like this. Thank you.”

This time James chuckled. “Don’t thank me yet. It’s not a gift. It comes with even more responsibility. But you’re more than up for the task. Now, let’s not waste any more time in sentimentalities Vice Admiral. You have a job to do.”

“Yes Emperor,” Becket responded as she snapped to attention and gave him a salute.

James retuned the salute then gave his friend an approving nod. “It suits you. Now it’s time for me to get going. Though hopefully I’ll be back soon with a strategy that might actually give us a chance to win this war.”

“You’re still not going to tell us what you’re thinking?” Becket queried.

James shrugged. “I’m not sure I have much more to say. This war won’t be over until their Imperator agrees to a peace deal. Everything we’ve learnt about the Karacknids tells us that. We need to find a way to bring him to the negotiation table. Defeating invasion fleet after invasion fleet is only likely to enrage the Karacknids. They deem us inferior. We are bugs to be squashed in their eyes. Until that changes, this war is not going to end.”

“And you have an idea of how to accomplish this?” Lightfoot asked.

James winked at his friend. “Not exactly. I still need to run a lot of numbers. Anything we try would be a long shot. And there are at least a couple of problems that I don’t know how we could overcome. But I have an idea I’d like to work on. My trip to Varanni Prime should give me the opportunity to do just that.”

Lightfoot shook his head. “It sounds like I’d be better off not knowing. We have enough problems as it is.”

“Just so long as it isn’t going to get you killed,” Becket added. “You’ve taken enough risks for several lifetimes already. You’re our Emperor now. You need to keep that in mind.”

James rolled his eyes. “You’re starting to sound like Christine. I get enough of that from her. We were all preparing to face death just twenty-four hours ago.”

“And now we’re not,” Becket countered without changing her tone. “Which means other considerations have to come into our thinking once again.” She smiled and winked at him. “But enough of that, I’ll let Christine be the one to badger you. Good luck with Alliance High Command. Hopefully between the lot of you, you’ll figure out how the Kulreans can help us win this war.”

“Hopefully indeed,” James agreed. He gave Lightfoot and Becket one final nod and then left them to go over their plans. He needed to find Christine and Jonathan to say goodbye. It didn’t take him long. Just moments after stepping out of the briefing room, he turned a corner and was confronted by Christine, Jonathan, and a group of aides.

“There you are,” Christine said as she moved forward and handed a squirming Jonathan to him. “We were beginning to wonder. All your things have been packed. I’ve sent Fox on ahead with a shuttle load to Stargazer. Hallock has signaled to say that his ships are ready to depart. It seems he doesn’t want to waste any time.”

“Nor do I,” James responded. They had already informed Alliance High Command that they would soon be departing. In theory at least, the Alliance fleets wouldn’t move against the Karacknids until the Kulrean worldships got there. But that didn’t preclude the Karacknids from renewing their own offensives. The sooner Hallock’s worldships got to Alliance space the safer things would become for the Alliance fleet. “I was just coming to look for you to say goodbye.”

“Well, you found us,” Christine said as she linked her arm through his. “Come on, we’ll walk you to the shuttle. Wait here,” she added as she glanced over her shoulder to her aides. “This is going to be hard enough as it is,” she said to James once they were out of earshot.

“I know,” James said as he leaned forward and kissed Jonathan’s forehead. “I thought I would never see either of you again. I’ll be away for at least a month, more likely two or three. All I want to do is hold the two of you and never let go.”

“I feel the same,” Christine replied as she slowed and brought James to a halt. Standing on tiptoes, she raised her lips to his. As they kissed, Jonathan giggled and squirmed even more, making Christine and James break into smiles.

“All right, all right,” James said as he leaned in and kissed Jonathan again and again. “There’s no need to be jealous.” Christine joined him as she kissed the other side of Jonathan’s cheek, causing him to squirm and try to swat them way. “I’m going to miss this the most,” James said when he finally relented from teasing his son.

Christine’s eyes widened and she slapped his arm playfully. “You’re not going to miss me the most?”

“I meant both of you,” James said with a smile. “Spending time with both of you, just being ourselves. No responsibilities, no pressure. It is so rare.”

“The cost of serving our people,” Christine said as they began to walk through the Palace again. “I know you wouldn’t have it any other way. Neither of us would, even if we could.”

Though James agreed, it wasn’t something he wanted to admit. For all of his life he had been burdened with a responsibility for others. First it was to those his father had wronged when he had brought the family’s business empire to near bankruptcy. Then to the Royal British Navy, and the British Star Kingdom’s citizens, now it was to every Human. It seemed the older he got, the more he felt responsible for protecting others. That will never change, James thought as he silently agreed with Christine. But as he looked at Jonathan, he knew that his desire to love and protect his son was as strong as his sense of duty towards the Empire’s citizens.

“Well, we’re here,” Christine said as they reached one of the smaller doors that led out of the Palace and to the shuttle landing pads. “It looks like it’s blowing a storm out there.”

Glancing up from Jonathan, James saw that sheets of rain were blasting across the landing bay. Strong gusts of wind could be seen and a wide canopy had extended from the Palace towards the nearest shuttle. It would keep him dry, but it wouldn’t protect him from the wind. “You two better stay here,” James decided. He pulled Christine into another hug. They held each other for nearly a minute despite Jonathan’s squirming.

“Stay safe,” they both said at the same time as they broke apart.

“I mean it,” Christine said as she poked James in the chest. “With the Kulrean worldships, we will be fine here. You’re not to do anything crazy out there. Promise me.”

James chuckled. “Isn’t that what you say I’m always doing? I can’t promise you I won’t be myself.”

“Then promise me you will come back to us. It seems like for the first time in months we have the prospect of a future together. The Karacknid battlefleet cast a dark cloud on any hope we had of winning this war. Now that that cloud has lifted, I can’t stand the idea of you going into danger again.”

James reached up with his free hand and caressed Christine’s cheek. “Don’t worry, I’m going to Varanni Prime. It’s far from the frontlines. I’ll be as safe there if not safer than here. You need to take care as well. There’s going to be a mountain of work for you. The Sol system has to be put back to rights. Whatever damage the raiding Karacknid fleets have done needs to be repaired. Our fleet needs to be rebuilt. Somehow our economy has to be brought back to life. Don’t run yourself ragged. You will be no good to anyone if you do.”

Christine smiled. “Don’t worry, I have Fairfax to delegate all the tasks I don’t like to. And Andrea will keep an eye or two on me I’m sure.”

“All right, well then I guess I may take my leave,” James said as he took his hand from Christine’s cheek and took her hand in his. He gave it one squeeze and then let her go. “Daddy has to leave now,” he said to Jonathan as he leaned in and kissed his son’s forehead again. He handed Jonathan over, gave Christine a smile, then turned and moved towards the door. It retracted as soon as he came close. Immediately the gusting wind hit James in the face. Without looking back, he crossed the landing pad to his shuttle.

When he saw Emilie was already strapped into one of the flight seats, he smiled at his niece. He was relieved to see her. A part of him, a very small part, mind, had been worried she wouldn’t show. More importantly, he was glad of the distraction. “Do you have everything you need?” he asked as he sat down.

Emilie nodded and patted a storage bag that was in the seat next to her. “I lost most of my possessions on Intrepid. This should do me for a couple of months.”

James reached over and grasped Emilie’s shoulder as a look of loss passed across her face. “It will take time, but the hurt will lessen,” he promised her. It’s what others had once told him. Now he knew it was true. Yet, in the moment, it didn’t really help. He knew that, but what else did he have to say? As the shuttle took off, James intentionally didn’t look out any of the view ports. Instead, he drew Emilie into a discussion about the Kulreans and their worldships. When the pilot informed them they were approaching Stargazer, the conversation ended instantly. Both he and Emilie lent forward to look out at the massive spherical ship. The last time James had approached Stargazer, the shuttle had been going at full speed. They had been in the middle of a battle. Now, the shuttle pilot took a more leisurely approach. James guessed he was as interested in seeing Stargazer as he and Emilie were.

James was amazed at the size of the Kulrean ship. It was easily the largest constructed object he had ever laid eyes on. Every part of its outer hull bristled with strange point defense weapons. Despite several attempts to get Hallock to divulge just how they worked; James was still none the wiser. Whilst willing to help protect Humanity and the Alliance species, the Kulreans were not prepared to share their advanced technologies. When Hallock had explained that to him, James had shaken his head in confusion. Like their unwillingness to help launch attacks into Karacknid space, it made no sense to him. The Kulrean’s strategy almost appeared designed to make the war go on indefinitely. James knew that wasn’t how Hallock saw it, but that didn’t stop him being frustrated all the same. Still, he said to himself as his shuttle passed through an opening in Stargazer’s hull that had appeared seconds before, they are helping us as best they can. It’s on us to figure out how to take advantage of their support.

When they stepped off the shuttle, James recognized the officer who was standing waiting for them. It was Lieutenant Manlon. “Welcome aboard once again Emperor,” the officer said as he gave a slight bow.

James returned the gesture. “It is a pleasure,” he replied. “I’m looking forward to traveling on your ship. The capabilities of your species are always a wonder to behold.”

“Superintendent Hallock and Admiral Ya’sia are awaiting you on the bridge, if you’d care to follow me,” Lieutenant Manlon said.

James nodded and half turned to gesture towards Emilie. “This is my Chief of staff, Emilie Kansas.”

As Emilie gave the officer a bow, another Kulrean Lieutenant stepped up. “I have been ordered to escort your Chief of Staff to the quarters we have set up for your team Emperor Somerville. The other Humans who proceeded you are already there,” he informed them.

Emilie glanced at James. “It’s all right,” James said as he gave her a conciliatory gesture with his hand. “I’ll speak to Hallock and then come and find you. I’m told there are several observation blisters where you can watch Stargazer jump into shift space. Maybe you should gather the others and take them to watch.”

Emilie nodded. “I’ll do that.” She turned to the Kulrean officer, bowed slightly and followed him as he led her away.

“The bridge it is then,” James said to Lieutenant Manlon. The alien stared at him blankly for a couple of seconds then turned and began to walk in a different direction. James shrugged and followed. When they got to the bridge, James moved over to join Hallock and Ya’sia, they were staring at a star map of Alliance space.

“Welcome Emperor,” Hallock said as he turned to face James. “There’s been a change of plans I’m sorry to say. Stargazer will be accompanying the rest of the worldships that are going to Jamaral. Then we will proceed to Varanni Prime.”

“What has happened?” James asked, knowing that there had to be a good reason for the diversion. It would add at least a week to their journey.

Ya’sia was the one who answered. “We’ve received word from Varanni Prime. The Karacknid invasion fleet at Jamaral has received significant reinforcements. They fear the Karacknids plan to resume their offensive soon.”

“We cannot divert any ships from driving the Karacknid battlefleet from your space,” Hallock added. “But Stargazer can add to the strength we are sending to Jamaral. Hopefully we are not too late.”

James nodded, though he couldn’t keep the frown from his face. If the Karacknids had received enough reinforcements that Hallock wasn’t sure his fifty worldships would be enough, what difference would one more make?

“I was skeptical as well Emperor,” Ya’sia said, reading his expression. “But Hallock explained it to me. Every worldship that is added to the Kulrean fleet increases their efficiency by more than just the defensive weapons they bring to bear. Kulrean ships fully integrate their sensors with one another. One ship increases the effectiveness of every other ship as well as adding its own combat strength.”

“Hopefully our addition will not be needed. If we can combine our strength with the Alliance fleet facing the Karacknids, we should have no trouble. But, if we have to face the Karacknids alone, then Stargazer’s presence will prove essential,” Hallock explained.

James nodded, “Then there’s no time to spare. My team and I have everything we need. We can break orbit when your ships are ready Superintendent.”

“We are ready,” Hallock replied as he gestured towards one of the officers nearby. The holo display changed to show the Sol system. Though there was no feeling of acceleration, the display showed that Stargazer and the worldships around her were moving. The readings on the display almost made James’ mouth fall open. In the blink of an eye Stargazer was accelerating at a rate far higher than his flagship could have achieved. In no time at all, the worldships closed with and then passed by the moon. Though James had said he would find Emilie and his other officers, he found himself fixed to the spot. He was simply too amazed to want to take his eyes away from what he was seeing.

“Ready to jump into shift space,” a Lieutenant reported just an hour later.

James’ eyes nearly bulged out of their sockets as he spun around to Ya’sia. She too looked startled. If the Lieutenant spoke truthfully, Stargazer was about to jump into shift space more than thirty light minutes before a Human or Varanni Alliance warship could. Every scientist James had spoken to about the matter had told him it was theoretically possible for a shift drive to operate closer to a gravity well than the current designs did. Yet no one knew how to make it happen. Clearly the Kulreans had no such issues. When Stargazer did jump into shift space, James’ shock only increased. He had to look twice at Stargazer’s indicated speed. It was nearly twice the velocity a Human ship could achieve using the jump gates that had been built throughout Human space. It was more like five or six times the speed a warship could achieve on its own. Again he looked at Ya’sia, this time they smiled at one another. The Kulrean worldships might not have offensive weapons, but they had many other things going for them. Let’s just hope we’re not too late, James thought as his mind turned to Jamaral and the nearby worlds the Karacknids were threatening. Cria, Ya’sia’s homeworld was one of them.

Chapter 30

History is a great lesson book; perhaps most is to be learnt from studying our enemies of the past and not just our heros.

-Excerpt from Empire Rising, 3002 AD.

IS Viper, 14th August 2484 AD (2 weeks later).

For a day and a half Becket had been struggling to make sense of the reports she had been receiving. Six days ago her small fleet of ninety warships and ten Kulrean worldships had passed through the Britannia system. To everyone’s amazement, the Karacknid fleet she had engaged in the Void hadn’t pushed forward to threaten the colony. Now back in the Void, Becket had been struggling to understand why. As soon as her fleet entered the Void, she had dispatched a handful of scouts. One by one they were returning with reports that Karacknid fleets were in orbit around every inhabited world within the Void. Yet there was no sign that they had attacked. Having neither advanced further into Human space, nor destroyed the Human infrastructure in the Void, Becket was at a loss as to what was going on. That was, until now. Letting out a whistle, she laid down the report from the last scouts she had sent out.

This is a development, she thought. Not once had the Karacknids attempted to open up negotiations with their enemy. Now they had. Her last scouts had been sent to Excalibur. Covertly, the Captain of the frigate had contacted Admiral Chambers. Chambers had reported that the Karacknids has actually sent them an ultimatum. The Karacknids were demanding that every orbital installation around the colony be abandoned. If they were, they had promised not to bombard the colony or land ground troops. There was only one explanation. They want to turn the entire Void into a forward operating base, Becket concluded as she let out another whistle. Given what Human and Alliance scouts had seen the Karacknids do in other systems they had decided to build up, Becket could only imagine what they would do in the Void. They’d likely set up mining operations in every single solar system and then ship all the materials back to Excalibur or one of the other colonies. With Humanity’s orbital infrastructure as a starting point, they’d be able to rapidly expand and build a supply depot and repair facilities for their entire battlefleet. It would give them a base from which to finish off the Alliance and even invade the Kulreans, Becket figured.

Well, not today, Becket told herself. In total, her scouts had detected six hundred and sixty-three Karacknid warships. Yet they were spread out across seven systems. Seven systems we can reach with ease, she knew. With a tap on her command chair, she opened a COM channel to Admiral Shraw and Captain Nimring, the senior commander of the ten Kulrean warships.

“Vice Admiral,” Shraw said when his image appeared in front of Becket.

Becket took a second to realize he was speaking to her. She was still getting used to the new rank Emperor Somerville had bestowed upon her. “You have read the latest scout report I presume?” she asked. “It makes for strange reading.”

“Indeed it does,” Shraw said. He paused and turned to Nimring. “I’d say they are keen to attack your home system Captain. The Void is a perfect location from which to prepare for such a mission.”

“I have little experience in multisystem wars, but even I can see that,” Nimring replied. “I’m glad that we are here with you.”

Becket smiled at Nimring. Of the few Kulreans she had spoken to, she seemed to be the least adverse to fighting the Karacknids. While the rest of the Captains that were part of her fleet looked upon it as a necessary evil, Nimring seemed to see the value in defeating the Karacknids. As a result, she had drawn Nimring into her and Shraw’s intimate strategy conversations and simulations. Over and above the training and simulations she had the entire fleet running, they had fought a number of battles against one another during their journey to the Void. “There is one war in my species’ history I’ve yet to tell you about Admiral Shraw,” Becket said as she turned to her reptilian friend.

Shraw’s tongue flicked back and forth excitedly. “I am all ears Vice Admiral. After the success of our Valley campaign, I’m always eager to learn from the great commanders of your species’ past.”

“Well,” Becket replied as she felt her own excitement rising. “This isn’t a masterful campaign by one commander, but a strategy that nearly won a multi front war. Let me tell you about the blitzkrieg…” As Becket gave Shraw and Nimring a brief overview of the opening strategy of the German army during World War II, she waited for them to grasp where she was going. She gave Shraw a wide smile when he spoke as soon as she was done. Often, she found their minds worked in perfect synchronization. This time was no different.

“They will not know what has hit them,” Shraw said as he peeled back his lips, revealing his glistening teeth.

*

IS Viper (one hour later).

“Jump us in,” Becket ordered as soon as her ships reported ready. In the space of two seconds her fleet carried out a micro jump. One moment they were hundreds of light hours away from the Karacknid fleet in high orbit above the valstronium mining facilities in the asteroid rings of the Ganymede system; the next they were just out of energy weapon range. At once all of the Human and Gramrian warships opened fire. Twelve hundred missiles raced towards the ninety Karacknid warships. It took just fifteen seconds for the missiles to reach attack range. By then, the Karacknids had responded to the sudden appearance of their enemy. Turning their formation, they prepared to engage the incoming missiles. Crucially, they didn’t get off a missile salvo of their own before the bomb pumped grazer warheads of Becket’s mark IV missiles detonated. More than two hundred grazer beams blasted into the Karacknids. Seconds later the missiles from Shraw’s ships arrived. Many more ordinary thermonuclear detonations erupted within the Karacknid formation.

To the Karacknids’ credit, almost as soon as the last missiles detonated, they returned fire. With the losses they had already suffered though, their salvo was severely depleted. Worse, Becket’s ships already had another salvo hurtling towards them.

“The Karacknids are changing course, they’re attempting to close the range,” Armitage called out.

Becket smiled as she watched the maneuver. All of the Karacknid ships were coming towards her fleet. The enemy commander hadn’t thought to dispatch one ship to escape to bring a warning to the rest of the Karacknid forces in the Void. “Reverse course, keep them at arm’s length if we can.” There was no need to let the Karacknids close enough to use their energy weapons. Becket had the advantage in a missile duel. She wasn’t going to let that go. It’s over, she thought as she stared at the battered Karacknid fleet. They didn’t know it yet, but the battle was already over.

The proof of her conclusion came moments later when Nimring’s ten Kulrean worldships opened up with their point defenses on the Karacknid missile salvo. Every single missile was destroyed before any of them reached the range of Viper’s point defenses. The Karacknids wouldn’t be scoring so much as a proximity hit against any of her ships.

“They’re changing course,” Armitage informed everyone.

“Let them fall back,” Becket responded. “They know they can’t hurt us. They’re not getting away now, whether they try and run or not.” Just as she predicted, it took two more missile salvos to obliterate every single Karacknid ship. Though they tried their best, no Karacknid missiles penetrated the point defense fire of the Kulrean worldships. Ninety down, five hundred to go, Becket thought. The first and easiest part of her plan was done. Now all they had to do was repeat the feat. “Set course for Excalibur. Jump the fleet to our prearranged sortie point as soon as every ship is ready,” Becket ordered.

Just half an hour later Becket was staring at the distant dot of Excalibur. Two hundred Karacknid warships were orbiting the colony just out of weapons range. Due to the system’s star, she couldn’t jump her ships into attack range. But she could get pretty close.

“Long-range scans indicate that they’ve received no additional ships in the last hour,” Viper’s sensor officer reported.

“Very well, jump us in,” Becket ordered. Seconds later she was facing her second Karacknid fleet of the day. “Maximum acceleration,” she snapped. “Take us straight towards them.”

“This Karacknid commander is a little more cautious,” Captain Rogers, Becket’s Flag Captain commented.

Becket nodded, though she didn’t turn to him. She was studying the Karacknid ships carefully. A full two hundred enemy vessels were forming up to face her. Outnumbered two to one, the Karacknids should easily win such a fight in a single missile salvo. The Karacknid commander would know that. That Becket was still accelerating towards them told her opponent that something had changed. What that something was though, Becket was hoping the Karacknids would have no idea about. Nimring’s worldships hadn’t jumped into the system with the rest of her fleet. As no ships had escaped from her last attack to warn of the worldship’s presence, her opponent should have no way to know what was about to befall them. At least, we’re hoping they don’t, Becket cautioned herself. It was at least theoretically possible that the Karacknid battlefleet had dispatched some ships to the Void via Britannia to warn the Karacknids here of the new threat even though none had been detected passing through the former British colony. Yet they are not running. The Karacknid fleet was moving onto a heading that would prevent Becket’s ships from closing to point-blank range, but it would allow the Karacknids to fire salvo after salvo at her fleet. That told her all she needed to know. They were going to fight.

Without the element of surprise, the Karacknids opened fire first. As soon as Shraw’s ships came into missile range they fired, Becket ordered her fleet to do the same. In total, three missile salvos were released by each side before the first missiles were engaged by either fleet’s point defenses. As the leading Karacknid missiles came closer and closer, Becket tensed. Five thousand missiles would swamp her ships’ point defenses. Though she kept her face squarely set towards the holo display, she could sense several of Viper’s officers glancing towards her. Nimring was cutting it close. Very close. Suddenly ten new contacts sprang into life on the holo display. Using their advanced shift drives, the worldships jumped much further into the system than Becket’s ships had. They rapidly accelerated, quickly closing the gap to Viper. Just seconds after appearing, the heat signatures from each worldship went off the chart as they opened up with their point defenses. Tens of thousands of strange energy bolts zipped past Viper and tore into the Karacknid missiles. Nimring had cut it close enough that soon Viper’s point defenses had to open fire as well. Even so, the last Karacknid missile was destroyed well before reaching any of Becket’s ships. By then Nimring’s worldships had caught up to Viper and slotted themselves in around the rest of Becket’s ships.

Becket couldn’t help but smile as she imagined how her opponent was feeling. From the prospect of a certain kill, now the Karacknid fleet found itself cornered. Unsurprisingly, the enemy warships accelerated harder and turned away from Becket’s ships. They had seen one worldship before at New Shanghai. It was likely that the Karacknids had underestimated the giant Kulrean ships, at New Shanghai, Tranquility had been relatively easily destroyed. Now however, they had seen what ten could do. It will do you no good, Becket thought towards her opponent. She had three missile salvos on their way to the Karacknid fleet. Within seconds a fourth would be launched from her missile tubes. On top of that, the Karacknid fleet was an hour away from the point where they could use their own shift drives to escape. Some might get away, Becket reluctantly admitted as she tried to calculate how the engagement would go. But not many.

Over the next hour the one-sided engagement played out without surprise. In total, her ships fired twelve missile salvos at the Karacknids. Every one scored some hits. By the time the final one crashed home minutes before the Karacknid fleet reached the system’s mass shadow, it destroyed a further thirty Karacknid warships. Only fifty remained to cross the mass shadow. When they did, thirty-eight disappeared as they jumped into shift space. The rest were too damaged to make the jump. A thirteenth and final missile salvo destroyed them. In return, the Karacknids had failed to land a single hit on Becket’s fleet. A couple of times she had been concerned, if it wasn’t for the combination of the worldships’ point defenses with those of her own fleet, a handful of missiles might have gotten through. But together they had handled the repeated salvos the Karacknids had fired.

“Another victory,” Shraw said when he established a COM channel to Viper. “I for one could get used to this.”

“Indeed,” Becket agreed. “Though now the word is out. The rest of the Karacknid forces in the system will be warned of our presence and capabilities.”

“Then there’s no time to spare,” Shraw replied. “Your lightning war must continue.”

Becket nodded, she’d already given orders for her fleet to jump out as soon as they recrossed the Excalibur system’s mass shadow. Camelot was next on her list of targets. At best the Karacknid ships that had just jumped out would get there half an hour ahead of her. Even if the Karacknids at Camelot tried to flee immediately, she should still be able to bring them under her guns. “If you have any ships that need to be refueled and rearmed send them to Excalibur, they should be safe there now,” Becket suggested. “I need to send a brief report to Rear Admiral Chambers before we jump out.”

“I’ll let you get to it then Vice Admiral,” Shraw said as he flashed Becket his teeth. “We will prepare to continue the hunt.”

“Let us hope it continues to go as smoothly as it has so far,” Becket said before she ended the COM channel. She got her command chair to record a message for Chambers. Briefly she outlined what had happened at Earth and what she was doing with the Kulrean worldships. She told him her ships would need to be refueled and rearmed once she had finished striking at the dispersed Karacknid fleets. By the time she was done, her ships were just minutes from the mass shadow. She sent the file to her COM officer. “Transmit this back to Excalibur. Jump us out as soon as we are ready,” she added as she turned to her navigation officer. There were still five other Karacknid fleets operating within the Void. She intended to hit as many of them as she could before they had a chance to realize what was going on and respond.

The flight time to Camelot was a short fifteen minutes. Knowing that the Karacknids would be forewarned, Becket jumped out on the edge of the system with her ships and the Kulreans in formation together. Unsurprisingly, the one hundred and forty Karacknid warships there were already accelerating hard out of the system. There was just one problem, she and Shraw had anticipated the Karacknids would do just that. Instead of jumping out on a direct line from Excalibur, Becket had brought their fleet to the far side of the system before exiting shift space. The Karacknids were accelerating right towards her. As soon as her ships appeared, the Karacknids decelerated hard. Yet their momentum carried them towards Becket’s charging fleet. As Viper’s computer ran the numbers, the projected courses of both fleets appeared on the holo display. “We’ll be able to keep them in missile range for thirty minutes,” Armitage announced.

“Let’s make the most of it,” Becket responded. Thirty minutes wouldn’t be enough to completely destroy the Karacknids. Their numbers meant they could fend off most of her missiles and their superior acceleration rates would allow some of their ships to escape. “Focus our fire on their capital ships. I don’t want any of them to escape.”

The Karacknids opened fire as soon as they could. Becket barely felt any concern as she watched the missiles approach. She had seen so many Karacknid salvos completely wiped out that she had full confidence in the Kulreans’ point defenses. For the full thirty minutes that her fleet was engaged, zero Karacknid missiles managed to reach her ships. Eighty of the Karacknid ships were not so lucky. “Full reverse,” Becket ordered as soon as her ships fired the last salvo that would be able to reach the Karacknids. Pursuing them deeper into the Camelot system was pointless. “Get us back to the mass shadow and prepare our ships to jump out. The Karacknid fleet in front of her would be able to escape, but there were others that she could hit.

*

IS Viper, Excalibur (twelve hours later).

As Viper finished decelerating and slotted into orbit around Excalibur, Becket finally allowed herself to relax. Gently she rolled her shoulders as she reached up and massaged them. She had been in longer battles, but none so action packed. Usually, a prolonged battle involved hours and hours of waiting. For most of the last day her ships had been jumping from point to point within the Void, striking at Karacknid fleets. The final count of destroyed enemy ships had risen to three hundred and eighty-four. With zero losses in her fleet, the scale of the victory was almost too surreal to believe. Even so, she was disappointed. Many Karacknid warships had disappeared. After the brief engagement in the Camelot system, her fleet had jumped to several locations to find that the Karacknids had already fled or were so close to escaping that there was no point chasing them. Still, they’d managed to hunt down three more fleets and engage them. One had still been deep within the system it had been guarding. Either the other Karacknids she had engaged had forgotten to send a warning to them, or they hadn’t believed it. Either way, her fleet had managed to destroy those sixty ships without any escaping. After striking the last known location of a Karacknid fleet, Becket had planned to take her ships to the Damang shift passage. There, she had hoped to ambush Karacknid squadrons as they tried to leave the Void. But by the time they had destroyed the last Karacknid fleet, most of her ships had shot themselves dry. That was why Viper was back at Excalibur. Her ships needed to refuel and rearm before pushing on towards New Shanghai.

“I have Admiral Shraw and Captain Nimring requesting to speak to you Vice Admiral,” Becket’s COM officer informed her.

“I’m going to retire to my quarters for a couple of hours,” Becket said as she stood, “put them through to me there.” She could trust Chambers to handle the fleet’s resupply. She had already spoken to Chambers and he had assured her that Excalibur had all the fuel and missiles her ships would need. They had continued production even after the Karacknids had besieged the colony.

“Commanders,” Becket said as she sat down behind her desk. Eagerly she reached for the steaming mug of hot chocolate her steward had set out for her. Taking a sip, she continued. “I’d say that went pretty well. Our first campaign with your ships, Captain Nimring, has been a resounding success.”

“I can only concur,” Shraw replied, his forked tongue flicking in and out excitedly. “Hopefully the day when your worldships are defending Gramrian space will not be far away.”

“The destruction of so many Karacknid warships and the death of their crews is not something I wish to celebrate,” Nimring replied. “However, I am glad that we have rid the nearby solar systems of their presence. If they will not fall back to their space voluntarily, then we must fight them. And if we must fight, then I am glad our side suffered no losses. Your lightning war, Vice Admiral, has certainly been taxing. My ships and crews are not used to combat. Protecting your fleet at Earth was our first experience of it. Now I think many of us are old hands. I have lost count of how many different battles we have fought this day.”

“Almost as many as we fought during the whole Valley campaign,” Shraw agreed. “Now I see why this blitzkrieg was so successful in your species’ past. We didn’t give the Karacknids in the Void a chance to realize and respond to our presence.”

“We have used our advantage well,” Becket responded. “Let us hope that the rest of the Karacknid forces have fled from the Void. But not too far. Once we are refueled and rearmed, we will continue hunting them down. If they’ve made the mistake of trying to hold Damang or one of the other Chinese colonies between here and New Shanghai, we’ll make them regret such a decision.”

“Indeed we will,” Shraw responded as he showed Becket a toothy grin. “I fear though my ships will not be as effective. We are running low on missiles and your mark IVs cannot be launched from our tubes.”

“I am all too aware of the problem,” Becket acknowledged. “Though I have been giving it some thought. According to Rear Admiral Chambers’ records, there are quite a number of the old mark IIIs still stored on several orbital stations around Excalibur.” She turned to face Nimring. “I was hoping that perhaps your worldships would have the facilities to adapt the mark IIIs so that they could be fired from Gramrian missile tubes. Or, better yet, that you could help the Gramrian missile tubes to fire mark III or IV missiles. If not, the offensive firepower of our fleet will be greatly diminished.”

Nimring made a facial expression that Becket had come to guess meant a Kulrean was considering something deeply. “I doubt we could alter your ships’ missile tubes quickly; they are incorporated into so many other of your ships’ systems, we’d have to take your ships apart to do it. But the missiles, that is another matter. I’m not sure how Superintendent Hallock or even some of my fellow Captains would feel about that. We’d essentially be providing you with weapons that you will used to kill others.”

Becket had to fight from rolling her eyes. “How is that any different from what you’re already doing?” she asked far more calmly than she felt. She knew she needed to reason rather than pressure Nimring into it. “Right now, the presence and protection your ships offer has essentially turned Shraw’s and my ships into far more powerful weapons than they were. Alone, we would never have been able to take on any of the Karacknid fleets in the Void. Simply by accompanying us, you are equipping us to destroy Karacknid warships. Allowing Shraw’s ships to continue to fire missiles will simply allow us to continue doing what you have already enabled us to do.”

Nimring took several moments to respond. In fact, it felt like a minute or more passed before she finally spoke. “I think I am in agreement with your assessment Vice Admiral. We will do this conversion for Admiral Shraw’s ships if we can. Superintendent Hallock may disapprove when I next speak to him, but until then, he placed me in charge. He will simply have to accept the moral reasoning I have used.”

“Excellent,” Becket said as she brought her hands together. “I’ll send word to my staff officers and Rear Admiral Chambers. We can transfer an initial batch of mark IIIs to your ship immediately for your engineers to examine. If they are confident they can make the conversion, we’ll ship the rest to your worldships and your crews can do the work as we continue on towards Damang. I want to spend as little time around Excalibur as possible. We need to get to New Shanghai and rejoin Admiral Lightfoot as quickly as we can.”

“That is okay by me,” Shraw replied.

“And I,” Nimring added. “I will alert my engineers that they are to expect a shipment from orbit.”

“Thank you,” Becket said as she gave Nimring a slight bow. “Now, if there’s nothing else, I’d like to take a few moments to relax before my staff officers start coming to me with problems that need my attention.”

“Of course,” Shraw said as he gave Becket a toothy smile. “I think we have all been worn out with today’s activities. Rarely has my species hunted so many prey at one time.”

“Thank you to you both,” Becket repeated, “you and your crews performed excellently. I’ll speak to you again soon.” As soon as she ended the COM channel, Becket finished her hot chocolate and moved through her office into her quarters. Without taking off her uniform she threw herself into her bed. For a few brief moments she reminded herself of how many Karacknid ships she had destroyed. Then, with a smile still on her face, she fell asleep.

Chapter 31

It is a sad reality the seeds of our first civil war were planted at the very beginning of the Empire’s founding. Whether there were any truths to the initial claims that sparked the conflict no one now knows, perhaps not even the Silizzeras.

-Excerpt from Empire Rising, 3002 AD.

IS Viper, Changhai system, 21st August 2484 AD (seven days later).

Moments after Viper and the rest of Becket’s ships jumped out of shift space into the Changhai system, a new contact appeared just under a light second way from them. It set off all kinds of alarms on Viper’s bridge. They quickly disappeared when the ship’s computer recognized the new contact’s profile. It was the frigate Amethyst, assigned to Admiral Lightfoot’s fleet.

“Amethyst is hailing us Admiral,” Lieutenant Rondon announced as soon as the alarms ended.

“Let’s speak to her Captain,” Becket said as a profile of the frigate appeared on her armchair’s holo display. “Captain Acharya, you gave us a fright,” Becket said by way of greeting when Amethyst’s Captain appeared in front of her.

“Sorry for that Admiral,” Acharya replied hastily. “It was Admiral Lightfoot’s orders. Every ship in the system is to remain in stealth. I was to wait here and pass on his orders to you.”

A beep from her command chair told Becket a file had just been sent across. “Thank you Captain. Whereabouts is Lightfoot now?”

“He has the rest of the fleet at the New Shanghai shift passage,” Acharya answered as she glanced in the direction of the shift passage at the other side of the system. “His fleet is in stealth. They’re attempting to ambush any scouts the Karacknids send through. The Kulrean worldships’ sensors are very good. The Karacknids cannot sneak past them.”

“What about any Karacknid ships coming from the shift passage we just left? We drove at least a couple of hundred enemy ships out of the Void. They cannot be more than a couple of days ahead of us.”

“I’m afraid we have detected no ships coming from the direction of the Void,” Acharya said as she grimaced. “We arrived in the system about thirty hours ago. Nothing has passed through. We would have spotted so many Karacknid warships.”

Becket let out a frustrated breath. She had hoped that Lightfoot’s fleet would beat her to Changhai. He had, yet he hadn’t been in time to catch the Karacknid survivors from the Void. No doubt they were already at New Shanghai and had reinforced the Karacknid battlefleet “The Karacknid fleet is at New Shanghai then?” Becket followed up.

Acharya nodded. “They fled before us all the way here. Our scouts report they have not fallen back from New Shanghai though. I believe that is why Lightfoot decided to wait here for you to re-join us.”

“Very well,” Becket responded. “We will proceed to Lightfoot’s position. You may fall into formation with my ships, unless you have additional orders?”

“No Admiral,” Acharya said as she now shook her head. “My orders are to accompany you after making contact.”

“Then you may take station astern of Viper,” Becket informed Acharya. “I’ll read Lightfoot’s orders and then I may want to speak with you again to get your impression of how the journey from Sol to here has gone.”

“Of course Admiral, I am at your service,” Acharya said as she saluted and Becket ended the COM channel.

“I’ve just sent a set of coordinates to you, Lieutenant Levitt,” Becket informed her navigation officer after scanning Lightfoot’s orders. “The fleet will proceed there in stealth.”

“Lightfoot wants us to remain in stealth as well?” Commander Wilson, Becket’s Chief of Staff, asked.

“Yes,” Becket answered. “As soon as we rendezvous with Lightfoot he intends to proceed to New Shanghai. If they have managed to intercept most of the scouts the Karacknids have sent, we may be able to get there and surprise them.” When Becket turned to her Chief of Staff and Flag Captain, she sought out both of their gazes. Surprising the Karacknid fleet of a couple of hundred warships at Excalibur was one thing, surprising a battlefleet of six thousand was something else entirely. Especially when they had just half the number of Kulrean worldships that had driven the Karacknids from the Sol system. Becket nodded at both of them to assure them she understood their concerns. There was nothing else they could do about it now. She needed to hear what Lightfoot was thinking.

With her fleet in stealth, it took five hours to cross the system. After the rapid advance from Excalibur, the much slower pace was welcome. It allowed Becket to relax, at least a little, and go over the reports Lightfoot had sent. Compared to her series of engagements in the Void, Lightfoot’s fleet had had it easy. A couple of times the Karacknid battlefleet had tried to probe Lightfoot’s fleet’s defenses, but each time the Kulrean worldships had seen the attacks early enough that they had been easily thwarted. Beyond trying to sneak a few scouts in close to get a better look at the worldships, the Karacknids had done nothing but run away. As well they might, Becket couldn’t help but think. After the display of power the Karacknids had seen from the Kulreans at Earth, only a fool wouldn’t run for safety. But sooner or later they’re going to realize not all the Kulrean worldships are with us, Becket figured. When that time came, she was certain the Karacknid commander would try something. From everything she had seen of him, he was too good a strategist not to. They’ll want to know what they’re really up against, she was certain. Finding out just how good the Kulrean worldships are might be worth another battle or two, even if they are lost. Such thoughts didn’t fill Becket with a great deal of excitement. Not when she didn’t know much more about just how effective the Kulrean worldships were than the Karacknid commander.

As soon as her ships reached the rendezvous point, Becket had Lieutenant Levitt flash a laser COM link on the exact coordinates Lightfoot had given her. Though Viper’s passive sensors had detected a host of contacts at such a close range, without going active it wasn’t possible to accurately identify Lightfoot’s flagship Vengeance. When Vengeance responded, she wasn’t surprised to see Lightfoot had requested to speak to her, Shraw and Nimring. Becket ordered her report be sent across to Lightfoot and then opened a COM channel.

“Well met commanders,” Lightfoot greeted them. “You have arrived just in time. Rear Admiral O’Neill rendezvoused with us six hours ago. He has confirmed that no Karacknid squadrons retreated back through the former German colonies. Our scouts report the full Karacknid battlefleet is orbiting New Shanghai. If your ships are ready, we will draw up our final plans and move forward to engage them. How was your trip here?”

“Eventful,” Becket answered. “We managed to drive the Karacknid forces out of the Void. Would you believe they had actually been trying to occupy all our orbital infrastructure? They were trying to get our forces to surrender the infrastructure intact. We drove them out before anyone could surrender or the Karacknids could destroy our industries. On the other hand, we destroyed more than three hundred Karacknid warships without taking a single loss.”

Lightfoot let out a whistle. “Congratulations Admiral. Admiral Somerville has had some one-sided victories in his time but you may have just beaten his record. The Kulrean worldships are certainly impressive.”

“That they are,” Shraw agreed. “May I ask, what is our plan now?”

“If the Karacknids wish to give us a fight at New Shanghai, then we will oblige them,” Lightfoot answered.

Becket shared a glance with Shraw. “Given our experiences in the Void, I’m not sure how wise this may be,” she said hesitantly.

“Go on,” Lightfoot said in a tone that told her he wasn’t offended.

“We fought more than six separate engagements in the space of twelve hours against the Karacknids in the Void. It was an impressive feat our captains and crews managed, to be sure. Yet we almost shot ourselves dry in the process. And we only managed to destroy three hundred Karacknid warships. Against a battlefleet of six thousand? We may not have enough missiles to actually defeat them. What happens when they realize we have run dry? They could simply fly right past us all the way back to Earth and land a ground invasion. We’d be all but helpless to stop them.”

Lightfoot nodded, not looking perturbed in the slightest. “I’ve had my people run a number of simulations. Either way you cut it, I don’t think we can destroy enough Karacknid ships to actually beat them if they want to force a fight,” he agreed. “But we could hurt a lot of them. And we have these,” he added as he tapped something in his command chair. The image in front of Becket momentarily changed to show a group of supply and troop ships. Several of the largest freighters were highlighted. “Each is carrying eight thousand mark IVs,” Lightfoot informed them when his face reappeared. “If needs be, we can fall back here and re-supply ourselves. Even then we probably wouldn’t have enough missiles to destroy the Karacknid battlefleet, but if they wanted to try and push past us, we’d be able to fight them all the way back to Earth.”

Becket nodded as she saw what Lightfoot was getting at. His plan to continue the advance even though the Karacknids had stopped retreating was one giant bluff. If the Karacknids let him, he’d fight them for as long as he had the missiles. With luck, the Karacknids would start to retreat again long before that time came. And if they don’t? Becket couldn’t help but ask herself. The idea of falling back to resupply was a good one, but the Karacknids might not play ball. There were a number of things they could do to prevent Lightfoot from reaching the freighters full of missiles.

“We have to try,” Lightfoot said, seemingly reading Becket’s thoughts. “There are nearly a hundred million colonists on New Shanghai. We are their only hope. General Johnston has gathered up every marine he can scrape together. We need to force the Karacknids to retreat so we can land our troops and help our people there.”

Becket nodded. “I understand,” she replied. “I’m certainly willing to try. What has Captain Catalen said about this plan? Is he confident his worldships can defend us from the Karacknids?”

Lightfoot gave Becket a reassuring smile. “With the addition of Captain Nimring’s ten worldships and your ships, he is. We will be relying on our own point defenses, and there will be risks, but we should be able to weather a number of their salvos. Enough for us to do some damage to their ships and show them that we are not afraid of them.”

Becket took a deep breath. “Then I guess there’s nothing for it. The sooner we advance, the less time they will have to prepare for our coming.”

“And the less time they will have to figure out a counter to the Kulreans,” Shraw added, bringing a nod of agreement from Becket. It was something they had discussed a number of times since Excalibur. So far, neither of them had been able to figure out a way to overcome the Kulreans’ impressive point defense weapons, but just because they couldn’t didn’t mean the Karacknids wouldn’t.

“Excellent,” Lightfoot said as he smiled again. “I’ll review your report more thoroughly and send through the plans my staff officers have come up with. We’ve already sim’d them with my fleet several times, but we’ll run a couple more simulations with your ships included. I’ve set a tentative departure time for six hours from now. If we’re all happy and ready to go by then, then we will continue our advance.”

Becket nodded as Shraw and Nimring acknowledged Lightfoot’s orders. As soon as the COM channel ended, she pulled up the battle simulations Lightfoot’s staff officers had drawn up for how they expected the fight to go. Sending them to her own officers, she reviewed them with her team. It was unlikely Lightfoot and the other commanders in his fleet had missed anything, but a fresh set of eyes never hurt. And we can’t afford to get this wrong, Becket was certain.

*

IS Viper, 23rd August 2484 AD (two days later).

The short two day trip from Changhai to New Shanghai was as intense a forty-eight hour period as Becket remembered ever experiencing. Fighting alongside the Kulrean worldships was still a new experience for the Allied Fleet and alongside simulating multiple battle scenarios, Becket had been involved in dissecting every moment of her multiple battles in the Void. Lightfoot didn’t want to leave any stone unturned as they prepared to face the Karacknid battlefleet. Becket almost felt relief when she returned to Viper’s bridge after Lieutenant Rondon had informed all of her senior officers that the flagship was just minutes away from exiting shift space.

After sitting in her command chair, Becket looked around at her officers. She nodded to Captain Rogers and Commander Wilson. They had everything and everyone ready and in position. Taking a deep breath, she composed herself. There were still five minutes before Viper would enter the New Shanghai system. When she did, Becket needed to be at the top of her game.

“Thirty seconds,” Rondon announced needlessly. Everyone was watching the timer on the holo display. Still, it was customary. “Five, four, three, two,” Rondon counted down. Then, just after he said ‘one’, a jolt ran through Viper. For the briefest of moments everyone sat completely still. Then, as data from Viper’s passive and active sensors flowed into the bridge, everyone around Becket got to work.

“No active contacts within five light seconds,” Lieutenant Salaman reported from his tactical console.

“Recon drones are reporting no ships in stealth within energy weapon range,” Lieutenant Armitage added.

The tension around Becket reduced instantly. Lightfoot had jumped his fleet out two light hours from the end of the shift passage. Doing so made it very hard to be ambushed, but not impossible. They were in the clear. Though the tension decreased, everyone’s alertness didn’t. They still had to find their enemy.

“I think I have them,” one of Viper’s sensor officers reported. “There’s a large cluster of active contacts one light hour out from New Shanghai. They’re directly between the colony and the end of our shift passage. The computer is still analyzing the acceleration profiles.”

The bridge’s holo display zoomed in to show the contacts. Essentially, they were a ball of fuzzy dots as Viper’s sensors hadn’t been able to distinguish between them yet. As the seconds ticked by, they began to firm up. “Confirmed,” Salaman said, “they are Karacknid warships. Estimate at least four thousand.”

“Confirm that number as soon as possible,” Becket requested. If there were only four thousand that meant the Karacknids had two thousand somewhere else. Likely they would be at the spot Lightfoot least desired.

“The number is growing,” Salaman reported. “The Karacknids are altering their formation. We’re getting a better look at them with our gravimetric sensors.” It was nearly a full minute before Salaman spoke again, when he did, Becket’s immediate concerns disappeared. “The count is now six thousand two hundred confirmed Karacknid warships in the fleet we have detected,” he reported. Another three hundred are in orbit around New Shanghai. At this range I can’t be sure, but I suspect most of them are freighters.

“If they have any sense, they’ll be evacuating as many of their ground troops as they can,” Captain Rogers commented.

“Let’s hope that’s what they’re doing and not landing more,” Becket responded. It would just be like the Karacknids to land more troops to cause more of a headache for General Johnston’s attempts to retake the colony.

“Let’s hope indeed,” Rogers agreed as the minds of everyone on the bridge turned to the plight of New Shanghai’s colonists.

“The Karacknid fleet is splitting up,” Salaman said excitedly, pulling everyone’s thoughts back to the present. “They’re splitting into ten separate squadrons.”

Becket sat forward in her command chair. The Karacknids’ favored tactic was to split their ships into separate fleets to catch their enemy in a crossfire. It often proved effective. Yet she had never seen ten such squadrons at once. And not with only six hundred warships in each one, she thought. Each squadron will be vulnerable if we can pick it off. Given that Lightfoot had just over a thousand ships in his fleet, if he could focus his fire on one of the Karacknid squadrons, he could obliterate it. We wouldn’t even need our extra missiles.

“What are they doing?” Commander Wilson, Becket’s Chief of Staff asked, matching Becket’s thoughts.

“Testing us,” Becket said. “They want to see just how effective the Kulreans’ point defenses are. If they surround us with those ten squadrons, they could focus fire on the Kulreans. That’s the best chance they’re going to get to break through the Kulreans’ defenses. The question is, will it work?”

“Message from Vengeance,” Lieutenant Rondon reported, “the fleet is to prepare to advance in sixty seconds.”

“I guess that answers that,” Becket said to her staff officers. Lightfoot must have spoken to Catalen. Clearly, the Kulreans weren’t concerned. “Prepare our ships to advance.”

As the one hundred ships directly under her command moved forward with the rest of Lightfoot’s fleet, Becket watched the Karacknid fleet warily. Out of all the potential situations they had sim’d, facing ten Karacknid squadrons operating independently had not been one of them. If the Karacknids had massed their ships into one single fleet, the plan had been to simply move into missile range and exchange a handful of salvos as an initial test. If the Kulrean defenses had held up, then Lightfoot had intended to push forward and keep hammering the Karacknids until they ran out of missiles or the Karacknids retreated. Now, instead, a competition of maneuvering and counter maneuver began. Just as Becket would have done, Lightfoot was attempting to position his fleet so that when both sides finally got into missile range, just three or four of the Karacknid squadrons would be able to fire upon him. For their part, the Karacknids were trying to get every one of their ten squadrons into missile range, and to have them arrayed around Lightfoot’s fleet in a sphere. For an hour and a half Lightfoot fought a battle of wits against the Karacknid commander. Initially, it looked like he was going to be the victor. Yet as the Karacknids carried out a series of maneuvers and counter maneuvers, slowly but surely more Karacknid squadrons looked like they were going to envelop Lightfoot’s fleet.

“The Conclave species are holding us back,” Lieutenant Salaman said in frustration as Lightfoot continued to get outmaneuvered.

“Their missile numbers are going to be what allows us to punch through the Karacknids’ defenses,” Wilson countered in a tone that told Salaman she didn’t appreciate his view of their allies.

Becket agreed with both of them. She kept quiet though, reprimanding her staff officers was primarily her Chief of Staff’s responsibility. It was true that the slower Gramrian and other ships of the Conclave fleets were holding the Human and Alliance warships back. But without them, there would be no way Lightfoot’s fleet would be able to throw out a large enough missile salvo to threaten the Karacknids.

“Admiral Lightfoot has sent a message to all the ships of the fleet,” Lieutenant Rondon reported. Becket turned towards the COMs officer like everyone else on the bridge. Clearly Lightfoot had more than a course change to communicate. “He wishes to inform the fleet to prepare for combat,” Rondon informed everyone.

Becket clenched her teeth as she turned back to the Karacknid fleet. Lightfoot had given up on gaining any more of an advantage than he already had. He was going to attack. Moments later a new course change came through. As Viper responded, her nose turned to point towards one of the Karacknid squadrons on the fringe of the pattern the enemy squadrons had made. Seconds later every ship went to full acceleration. The Karacknids responded instantly, several of their squadrons decelerated whilst the rest accelerated to move around to the side and behind Lightfoot’s fleet. Here we go, Becket thought as most of the muscles in her body tightened.

It only took ten minutes for the first Karacknid squadrons to get into missile range. As soon as they were able to coordinate their fire, three of them released eighteen thousand missiles each. Just sixty seconds later, Viper opened fire, adding her missiles to the salvo of fourteen thousand Lightfoot targeted at just one of the Karacknid squadrons. When the Karacknids were ready to fire their second salvo, a fourth squadron had come close enough to add its missiles. Then, when the third Karacknid salvo was launched, seven of their squadrons opened fire. Becket couldn’t help but swallow hard as she stared at the holo display. It looked like the Allied fleet was in the middle of a snow globe. Tens of thousands of contacts were closing in on it from every direction. It was hard to make sense of just what was going on. Focus, she told herself. The first Karacknid missile salvo was about to enter range of the Kulreans’ point defenses. That much at least she could easily make out.

It became even easier to see what was happening when the Kulreans’ joined the battle. In the blink of an eye, the fifty worldships opened fire. Suddenly space was filled with the strange blue triangular bolts the Kulreans fired. As soon as the wave of bolts reached the charging Karacknid missiles, explosions filled the holo display. In just fifteen seconds, every one of the Karacknid missiles in their first salvo was taken out. Becket found herself smiling along with her staff officers as she looked around at them. Quickly she straightened her face. Being relieved was stupid. The first salvo had been tiny compared to what was coming. She knew it was her nervousness that had her feeling so happy at such a small victory. I’d be much more pleased if we can hurt their ships, she told herself as the first missiles Viper had fired neared their targets.

Three of the Karacknid squadrons were close enough to one another to engage Lightfoot’s missile salvo. They shot down all but twenty-two mark IVs and a further thirty-four conventional missiles from the Alliance and Conclave ships. As the mark IVs detonated, throwing out their grazer beams to pierce into the Karacknid squadron, four ships were hit so hard they disappeared in blinding flashes. At least ten others fell out of formation or started to stream debris and atmosphere behind them. Moments later the rest of the missiles came in. Heat blooms filled Viper’s sensors. When they cleared, twelve more ships were gone. Others were no doubt badly damaged. Even as Becket watched the enemy squadron, twelve warships pulled back, clearly no longer able to stay in the fight.

Nowhere near enough, she thought. With one salvo they had only managed to take twenty-eight Karacknid ships out of the equation. That meant it could take as many as twenty salvos to completely obliterate just one of the Karacknids’ ten squadrons. And by the time we’ve fired off that many salvos the Karacknids will have completely enveloped us. Of course, Becket knew that for every enemy ship they destroyed, the Karacknid squadron’s defenses would be degraded. More and more missiles would start to get through. But the same was true for Lightfoot’s fleet. If the Karacknids could penetrate the Kulreans’ defenses, things would go south very quickly. With such thoughts running through her mind, Becket’s hands clenched into fists as the second Karacknid salvo entered range of the Kulreans’ point defenses. It was much larger than the first. Despite her concern, not a single Karacknid missile escaped the Kulreans’ fire. In return, Lightfoot’s second salvo destroyed or badly damaged forty-one enemy vessels.

Now comes the real test, Becket said to herself. The Karacknids’ third salvo was their full strength. Ninety thousand missiles were streaming towards Viper. Once again, she was impressed by just how effective the Kulrean point defenses were. Tens of thousands of contacts being tracked by Viper’s sensors disappeared as the Kulrean point defense fire reached out towards them. Even so, thousands more were getting closer and closer. When Becket heard the familiar sound of Viper’s flak cannons firing, she knew things were going to be close. Soon after the flak cannons had fired, AM missiles, arc waves, plasma bolts and laser beams were all hurled towards the Karacknid missiles from the Allied Fleet. Thirty thousand was reduced to twenty, then ten, then six, then three. With just ten seconds before the missiles reached the Allied Fleet, less than a thousand were left.

“Message from the flagship, the fleet is to prepare for evasive maneuvers,” Lieutenant Rondon announced. Becket saw Rogers nod towards Viper’s pilot.

“One missile tracking us!” someone shouted.

Becket felt her restraints tighten as Viper was thrown into an evasive maneuver. For a couple of seconds she had to fight the G forces that were threatening to close her eyes. Then they disappeared.

“We are clear,” Lieutenant Salaman announced. “The missile was destroyed just before it reached us.”

Becket looked up at the holo display. A number of energy spikes within the fleet’s formation told her that not every ship had been lucky. “How many missiles got through?” she demanded. “Who has been hit?”

“All ships from our squadron are reporting no damage,” Wilson informed her seconds later.

“Just four missiles got through all our defensive fire,” Lieutenant Salaman announced as soon as he got the information from Viper’s sensors.

“Vengeance is reporting just one ship hit within the fleet. The cruiser Edinburgh suffered a proximity hit. Her gaseous shields absorbed about half of the antimatter. She still has to pull back to safety,” Lieutenant Rondon reported.

“What about the Kulrean worldships, were they targeted by any of the missiles?” Becket asked. Given the threat the Karacknids’ now knew the worldships were, they were likely the target of most of the missiles.

“Three missiles targeted three separate worldships,” Rondon said as his voice rose. “They managed to dodge each of them. Their evasive maneuvers are bloody impressive!”

As a recording of one of the worldships suddenly accelerating out of the way of an incoming missile replayed on the holo display, Becket found her eyebrows rising in surprise. She already knew the worldships were fast, it also seemed they were far more agile than their bulk would suggest.

“The fleet is firing again in ten seconds,” Salaman announced.

Becket nodded to her tactical officer. She knew he could handle coordinating her squadron’s fire with the rest of Lightfoot’s ships. Her mind was still processing the Karacknids’ attack. Nine missiles was a tiny number. Yet it showed that the Kulreans’ point defenses weren’t impenetrable. With so many of the Kulrean ships dispatched towards Alliance space, Lightfoot’s fleet and, in turn, Earth was vulnerable. But if we can keep the damage to a minimum, we can still drive them out of our space. The damage to Edinburgh was more than a decent trade for the Karacknid ships they had destroyed or crippled so far.

Over the next thirty minutes, Becket’s appraisal of how the fight was going didn’t change. Though Lightfoot did his best to keep his fleet from being totally enveloped, the Karacknid squadrons slowly encircled the Allied ships. It meant that with each fresh Karacknid salvo, a handful of more missiles were able to evade everything fired at them. Even so, the numbers didn’t rise dramatically. It seemed the Kulrean worldships were able to handle missiles coming in from multiple directions almost as efficiently as they could when their targets were in one large formation. Seeing the worldships firing off hundreds of point defense weapons in ten different directions at the same time made Becket’s marvel at the Kulrean ships increase even more. Their targeting sensors grew to impress her just as much as their point defense weapons had.

Whilst the Allied Fleet suffered only suffered two or three casualties with every Karacknid salvo, the squadron Lightfoot was targeting wasn’t faring so well. By the time the eighth missile salvo struck it, nearly two hundred and ninety Karacknid warships had been destroyed or crippled. In an effort to reduce the losses, a fourth squadron had moved to come to its aid, but even so, more and more missiles were punching through the defensive fire to wreck destruction. Another five or so missile salvos will take them out, Becket figured. Unless, of course, the Karacknid commander pulled his squadron out of the fight first. That seemed more likely to her. If and when that happened, Lightfoot’s fleet would be all but invulnerable. With the tenth of their force out of the fight, the Karacknids wouldn’t have enough missiles to saturate the worldships’ defenses. Not that we’d have many missiles left by then. Just as Becket reached forward to bring up a count of how many missiles the fleet had left, the movement of three of the Karacknid squadrons made her freeze. Yes, they were still trying to further envelop Lightfoot’s fleet. But in reacting to the latest maneuver Lightfoot had put his fleet through, they weren’t on optimal courses to achieve a full envelopment. Something was not right. The enemy commander is up to something!

Chapter 32

The size and scale of the Karacknid Empire was impressive, even by our standards today. Yet it was fragile. Their method of controlling their conquered systems meant the economic and military strength the Karacknids could wield was many times smaller than a similarly sized civilization could today. In our first war with them we exploited this weakness, in many ways it gave us a lifeline without which we would have been overcome. Yet in exploiting it, we revealed their weakness to the Karacknids. In doing so we laid the foundation for the even deadlier wars that were to follow.

-Excerpt from Empire Rising, 3002 AD.

Slayer

Though he knew he was successfully trapping the Allied Fleet, Tanaka-lan’s claws were fully embedded into his command chair. His eyes were fixed on the giant Kulrean ships. His anger at what they had done to him and his fleet threatened to well up and wrest control of his mind. A part of him wanted nothing better than to charge all his ships into energy weapon range and blast the Kulrean ships into ionized particles. He knew he could do it. His fleet had destroyed one Kulrean ship before in this very system. They snatched victory from you at Earth, a small voice in the back of his head taunted him. Now they’re going to force you to abandon all the conquests you’ve made in Human space. You will be forced to retreat back to the Empire in shame. Tanaka-lan almost gave the order for the second plan he had drawn up to be put into motion. Almost. The rational part of his brain, the part that had carefully planned his invasion of Human space and the subsequent conquest of the Alliance home systems held him back. Yes, he knew he would be held responsible for the losses his fleet had suffered. For the disgrace the fleet would have to endure for abandoning so many conquered systems. Yet he couldn’t just throw away his ships. Not without cause. As vast as the Karacknid Empire was, replacing six thousand warships would be no small feat. Even if it meant he would have to return to the Imperator and face the public dishonor of being reprimanded and possibly even decapitated, Tanaka-lan could not do that to his fleet. “Initiate plan Probing Thrust now,” he ordered. Whilst he wasn’t going to send his ships into a deadly headlong charge, he wasn’t going to simply retreat just yet.

All ten of the squadrons he had carefully placed around the Allied Fleet altered their headings. Every warship pointed their noses towards the Allied ships and accelerated hard. Let our enemy think we are charging in a desperate attempt to win, Tanaka-lan said to himself. Whilst we instead gather the information we need to destroy this new threat. He now knew just how many missiles it would take to penetrate the Kulreans’ extremely efficient point defenses. He had been insulted when only half of the Kulrean ships that had forced him to retreat from the Sol system had pursed him. In an effort to punish the allies for their insult, he had tried to surround the Allied Fleet and blow it apart. Yet he had failed. Now he knew it had not been meant as an insult. They only needed half their fleet to see off his six thousand warships. Yet they had given him a glimmer of hope. If he had another thousand warships, he was certain he could punch many missiles through their defenses and start to seriously deplete their strength. That was valuable intelligence. Intelligence the allies should not have allowed him to gather. It was costing him five ships for every Human ship he destroyed, but even at those rates, Tanaka-lan thought it a fair exchange. Now there was just one more thing he needed to know. He was certain the Kulrean warships had no offensive missiles of their own. But did they have energy weapons? And if so, how powerful were they? Given the size of the Kulrean ships, it was quite possible they had directed energy weapons with multiple times the range and power output of even his dreadnought Slayer. Tanaka-lan knew that if he was going to get a chance to fight the Allied Fleet again, he needed to know just how powerful these ships were.

As his ships charged towards the Allied Fleet, Tanaka-lan waited until the very last moment. “Execute breaking maneuver,” he ordered his subordinates. Instantly nine of his ten squadrons flipped end over end and decelerated as hard as they could. One squadron continued. The squadron that the Humans had been slowly picking away at with their puny missile salvos. Alone, it hurtled towards the Allied Fleet. One final Allied missile salvo crashed into it. Then the warships of the squadron closed to energy weapon range. Tanaka-lan held his breath as he waited for some unseen energy beams to jump out from the Kulrean ships and swat his squadron out of existence. They never came. Instead, the remaining one hundred and eighty ships of the squadron got close enough to fire all their particle beams at the Allied Fleet. In return, plasma bolts and laser beams burnt into the heart of the Karacknid warships. Explosions erupted up and down both groups of ships. Tanaka-lan couldn’t help but lean forward. He didn’t care about the Alliance or Human ships being destroyed; he was wholly focused on the Kulrean ships. A snarl escaped his lips when he saw the Kulrean ships react. Their evasive maneuvers were unbelievably fast. Somehow, they were dodging the beams of hydrogen atoms that had been accelerated to almost the speed of light by his warships. It was as if they were detecting the beams before they were fired. Yet that was all but impossible!

As his own ships dodged and weaved and continued to fire, Tanaka-lan snarled again. In the space of just a handful of seconds over half of his squadron had been destroyed. He almost opened his mouth to give another order. Yet he knew it was pointless. By the time his order was received, the squadron would be entirely wiped out. To his amazement, the remaining ships of the squadron did exactly what he wanted them to. Whoever was still commanding the squadron had had the same thought. Instead of targeting multiple Kulrean and Allied warships, every remaining Karacknid ship fired their final shots at a single Kulrean vessel. Tanaka-lan retracted his claws and slammed them into the padded sections of his command chair. This time it was in triumph. Multiple beams struck one Kulrean ship. Even as the remaining ships in his squadron were destroyed, large sections of armor, hull and internal bulkheads were being blasted out of the Kulrean ship. As Tanaka-lan watched, several sections of the ship went dark and whilst it didn’t lose all acceleration, it fell out of formation with its brethren.

“They can die,” Tanaka-lan said to his bridge crew. “They can die and we will make sure many more will follow the one we have just dispatched.” He spoke out loud intentionally. He wanted his words to spread throughout the fleet. They had lost a tenth of their strength to kill one of the giant enemy ships. Yet now everyone knew they could be vanquished. Yes, his fleet had destroyed one weeks ago. But then it had been on its own. Together the alien ships were a far more formidable force. But not an invincible one, Tanaka-lan reassured himself. Now he knew how to defeat them. They had no hidden offensive energy weapons. Their ships were just as vulnerable to particle beam cannons as any other vessel. And their impressive point defenses could be overwhelmed. It will take numbers, Tanaka-lan knew. Many more ships than we have ever committed to a war before. But they can be defeated. And if it is not me, he thought as he stared at the Allied Fleet, someone will return to wipe away the stain of this day.

*

IS Viper

“Get repair teams from Python and Venus to Aristotle immediately,” Becket ordered as soon as the damage report came through from the medium cruiser. More than half of Aristotle’s own repair crew was missing or dead. “Make sure they bring over as much equipment as they can stuff into their shuttles,” she added. It would be next to impossible to locate all of Aristotle’s extra components she was sure. The cruiser had been struck by a single Karacknid particle beam. Yet that had been more than enough to tear a huge scar down the cruiser’s starboard side. In places the scar was more than eight meters wide and had penetrated through four decks.

“Admiral, we’ve got a visual on Buffalo,” Lieutenant Salaman called out over the din of Viper’s bridge. “Blucher has had to relay it to us.”

When the images appeared on Viper’s holo display, Becket swore. The noise around her quickly disappeared as more and more people looked up. Buffalo was a flaming spinning mess. Two particle beams had hit her. One had cut right through her port engines. Her starboard ones were still firing, putting the heavy cruiser into a corkscrew. Some kind of flammable liquid was pouring out of the second gash, already on fire. Though the flames were disappearing within seconds of hitting the cold vacuum of space, they were still engulfing much of the heavy cruiser’s hull. If there was any other damage to the warship, it was impossible to see with the flames and smoke and debris peeling off from the warship. “Get as many shuttles over to her as we can,” Becket said, though she feared it was already too late. “See if we can get that corkscrew calmed down and put those flames out. Evacuate as many of her crew as possible. Get them off immediately.” For several more seconds Becket stared at the stricken ship, then she turned to Salaman. “We don’t need to see any more,” she told him. Mentally, she was already adding Buffalo to the two other ships she had lost to the Karacknids’ particle beams. Eight others had been hit and had suffered damage. So far, it seemed that all of them would be salvageable. But there was a lot of work ahead for their crews and the repair teams Becket was sending from other ships.

As her officers focused on doing as much for the damaged ships as they could, Becket allowed her mind to turn to the wider fleet. Twenty-two more ships had been destroyed amongst the Allied Fleet. Many more had been damaged. Given how few ships were left after the Karacknids’ conquest of New Shanghai and the second battle of Earth, every loss was serious. Yet for that price a full six hundred Karacknid warships had been destroyed in the battle. A victory in anyone’s book, Becket told herself as she glanced at a secondary holo display where it showed the retreating Karacknid squadrons. Becket knew they had gotten off lightly. Neither she nor Lightfoot had expected the Karacknids to charge into energy weapon range like that. It was the kind of desperate move she had seen Admiral Somerville and others do in the past, but the Karacknids never did. They’ve never been at such a disadvantage, she told herself. It should have been anticipated. If all ten of the Karacknid squadrons had attacked, they likely would have destroyed the entire Allied Fleet and possibly even all of the Kulrean worldships. It would have been a disaster, Becket told herself as her eyes settled on the large spherical ship that had fallen out of formation. Large sections of its outer hull were missing and a trail of debris and atmosphere was still streaming out behind it. It would have been very costly for them, but they could have done it. “Request a COM channel with Captain Nimring,” Becket said. “Make sure she knows it’s not urgent.” One of Nimring’s ten worldships was the one that had been hit. No doubt the Kulrean Captain was focused on getting aid to it.

“I have the Kulrean Captain,” Salaman informed her four minutes later.

Becket nodded as the COM channel was put through to her command chair. “Captain, is there anything my ships can do to help?” she asked.

Nimring gyrated her head in a Kulrean sign of no. “We have everything under control thank you Admiral. Peaceful has been hit hard. Hundreds of her crew are dead. But most of her vital systems are fully operational. Those that aren’t are already under repair. Our ships have many backup systems. Peaceful should be able to re-join our formation within the hour. By the end of the day she shall be ready to head back to Kulthar.”

Becket couldn’t hide her astonishment. The worldship looked like it had been nearly cut in two. At least six particle beams had struck it. “Are you sure she can make the journey so soon? She could head to a Human repair yard and we could work on her to make sure she is up to the longer voyage home.”

“I’m quite sure,” Nimring replied, “but thank you for your consideration of us. Peaceful does not hold my primary concern, however. The ship is in good hands. I grieve for my fallen brethren. Each of their names will be added to those who perished on Tranquility. It seems your New Shanghai system is not a happy place for my species.”

“Very well,” Becket said as she nodded. “I’m glad she is going to be okay. Though we will miss her in the coming weeks. I am deeply sorry for the loss of life she suffered. This war has already cost us all too many lives.”

“I fear more will be lost before this is over,” Nimring replied in a quiet voice. “But,” she continued as her tone lightened, “the Karacknid fleet lost ten percent of their strength today. Their threat has been diminished, even taking into account Peaceful’s return to Kulthar and the losses your fleet has suffered. There is one other advantage to sending her home. Everyone in our home system will be able to see with their own eyes the damage the Karacknids have done to her and the lives that have been lost. It may stir up my people to take the Karacknid threat even more seriously. At the very least, I hope two new worldships will be built to replace Tranquility and Peaceful. Perhaps many more will follow.”

Becket found herself nodding. Neither Hallock, nor Nimring nor any of the other Kulrean Captains had confirmed for sure, but she and Lightfoot had guessed from several comments that had been made that all the worldships the Kulreans had built more than a decade ago had been sent into Human space. As far as she was concerned, if they hadn’t already, it was high time the Kulreans started building more.

“Admiral,” Lieutenant Armitage said barely above a whisper. He continued when Becket’s eyes darted down to him. “Admiral Lightfoot is hailing us.”

“I have to speak to Admiral Lightfoot,” Becket said as her eyes returned to Nimring. “Please don’t hesitate to ask if there is anything we can do to help.”

“I will not hesitate,” Nimring replied.

Becket gave her a slight bow and then the Kulrean Captain cut the COM channel. Immediately the alien was replaced with Lightfoot’s face. “What is the status of your fleet?” Lightfoot asked.

“We’ve lost two destroyers,” Becket replied. “Buffalo and one other heavy cruiser may have to be evacuated and scuttled as well. Eight other ships have taken damage, but we are getting them under control. I don’t think any will be able to remain with us. They will all have to be sent back to Earth or the Void.”

Lightfoot nodded; his face showing none of his thoughts. “It could have been worse,” was all he said.

“It could,” Becket responded. “What do we do now?” she asked after a moment’s pause, there’d be time for recriminations later.

“That’s why I’m calling,” Lightfoot responded. “I want you to take your ships and escort General Johnston’s and the Gramrian’s troop ships to New Shanghai immediately. We’ve no idea what Karacknid ground troops are still on the planet’s surface, nor what they’re doing. We need to get our marines down there and set up as fast as possible. I’ll take the rest of the fleet and shadow the Karacknids. I want to make sure all of their ships leave the system.”

Becket nodded. “Understood Admiral. I’ll leave my damaged ships and a couple of others here to assist them. I’ll get moving with the rest at once.”

Lightfoot nodded. “We’ll keep you updated. If we need help, I’ll call for it.”

Becket gave Lightfoot a quick salute before he cut the COM channel. “You heard him,” she said as she turned to Commander Wilson and the rest of her staff officers. “Contact Johnston’s fleet and prepare our ships to rendezvous with them. Let’s get to New Shanghai and see just how bad it is.”

When her fleet reached New Shanghai and entered orbit, Becket could hardly believe what she was looking at. Viper was almost directly over Bozhou, New Shanghai’s capital. Smoke rose from a hundred different fires. Barely a single building in the city looked undamaged. The vast majority were marked and scarred with weapons fire or explosive damage. The city looked more like a war zone than the home of several million people. Just how many of them are left in the city? Becket wondered. How many are even alive? Hoping that it was different elsewhere, she ordered Viper’s optical sensors directed towards the other towns and villages within visual range. Her heart sank when they too looked the same. Rubble, ruins, and fires filled every image she looked at. They have ruined the colony; Becket couldn’t help but conclude.

Chapter 33

The Imperial Reconstruction Fund was instituted after the War of Doom to help rebuild the many worlds that were ravaged by the Karacknids. Sadly, since then it has been necessary to expand it time and time again. What was once hoped to be a temporary necessity has become a permanent requirement in the life of the Empire’s hundreds of colonies.

-Excerpt from Empire Rising, 3002 AD.

IS Grant

General Johnston was experiencing the same emotions as he stared down at New Shanghai. Except his were infused with guilt. All the destruction, all the lives that had no doubt been lost, they were all his fault. He had left New Shanghai’s colonists to their fate when he had pulled out with his marines. It was hard for him to believe that it had just been weeks ago. Given the size and scope of the devastation he was looking down at, it seemed more like the colony had been occupied for several years. Almost as worrying was the lack of radio signals or any other signs of modern communication. The Karacknids must have locked the population down tight, he realized. On other worlds they had conquered, Johnston knew that was exactly what they liked to do. Yet he never imagined they would be able to achieve such a feat so quickly. Which means no one probably knows we’re here yet. “Send a message to the planet, broadcast openly on all channels. Inform them that we have driven away the Karacknid battlefleet and are about to land ground troops. Make it known that we wish to speak to any resistance leaders willing to talk to us.”

“Yes General,” one of Johnston’s staff officers replied in a hard tone. She had been with Johnston since they had evacuated New Shanghai. Most of Johnston’s officers and marines had. They all felt just as he did.

“Prepare our forces for landing. We will land on the outskirts of Bozhou and focus on retaking the capital. Then we will turn our attention to the rest of the planet,” Johnston ordered as he highlighted several locations on the 3D map being projected from his command chair. His staff officers had put together a detailed invasion plan over the last couple of weeks. However, a number of the landing sites they had prepared for were no longer viable or no longer necessary. “Inform Admiral Becket her ships may begin bombarding the enemy positions we have identified.”

Almost immediately tungsten spears were hurled down through New Shanghai’s atmosphere. They only struck targets well outside the towns and cities that were within range. It seemed the Karacknids had set up barracks adjacent to most of the population centers. No doubt they were largely abandoned, yet destroying them was the first phase in landing his troops. Any surface to air weapons the bases were equipped with needed to be destroyed. And, with luck, taking them out would disrupt the Karacknids’ command and control network. At best the Karacknid ground forces would only have had a week’s notice that the allied fleet was coming. Johnston was hoping that meant they had not been preparing to oppose a counter invasion. The Karacknid troops probably thought they had conquered New Shanghai for good.

“General, we’re starting to get radio transmissions from the surface. They’re popping up all over the place,” Johnston’s COM officer reported.

On the holo display of Bozhou and the surrounding continent several small flashing red dots appeared. They quickly multiplied. It made Johnston smile. New Shanghai’s population hadn’t been beaten into submission. They had just been hiding. “I want to speak to the most senior leader in Bozhou. We need to coordinate our landings and assault with whatever resistance elements are still active there. Wu, make sure we have other officers speaking to the rest of those who are calling. Start assessing the intel they have and putting it all together.”

“Yes General,” Johnston’s Chief of Staff replied. He sounded far grimmer than he looked. Johnston understood. New Shanghai was his homeworld. As guilty as Johnston felt, Wu no doubt felt worse.

“I think I’ve got the woman you’re looking for,” the COM officer told Johnston moments later. “She says her name is Chang Shih.”

“Put her through,” Johnston said. “Wu, you may join me for this.”

“Who am I speaking to now?” a rough voice asked.

“This is General Johnston. I’m leading the forces that are about to land to retake New Shanghai.”

“How do we know this isn’t a trap? I’ve heard of you. You commanded the forces that fled after the Karacknids’ landed their army.”

“I am,” Johnston admitted. “We had to flee to defend Earth. But we are back now. With help from the Kulreans we have driven the Karacknid battlefleet from the system. I now need your help to land my marines.”

“You still haven’t given me any reason to trust you,” Chang pointed out. “The Karacknids have been trying for weeks to root out everyone who has taken up arms against them. This could be another one of their tricks.”

Johnson turned and nodded to Wu. “Perhaps you do not recognize General Johnston’s voice. Or fear it could be faked. But perhaps you remember me?” Wu said. “I commanded New Shanghai’s marines and defenses for more than two years. Before that, New Shanghai was my home. I also seem to recall a certain Chang Shih who was an effective businesswoman based in Bozhou. Though if memory serves me correctly, she had a far softer tone of voice.”

For several seconds there was no reply, then a very different woman began to speak. “You have convinced me Generals. At least, I have no choice but to trust you. What can my people and I do to help?”

“We need intelligence,” Johnston said at once. “And help taking on the Karacknids, if your people are up for one more fight.”

Despite having a softer voice than the gruff woman who had spoken to them at first, Chang’s tone hardened as she replied. “We will share with you what intelligence we have. As to fighting; of that you can be assured, we are ready. We have not stopped fighting since your forces pulled out. We’ve lost count of how many have died, but we have not stopped fighting. To do so would bring death.”

“Then let us avenge those who have already fallen,” Johnston said as he hardened his tone to match Chang’s. He then began to ask as many probing questions as he could before he shared what he needed from Chang’s fighters.

An hour later and things were ready to go. Despite his desire to go down with the first wave of landing shuttles, Johnston knew his place was in Grant’s CiC center. When Clare had found out that he had fought on the frontlines defending New Shanghai, she had been furious. So too had Emperor Somerville when he had learned of it. Both of them had ordered him to command his forces from afar. Johnson had interpreted that to mean he would go down with the third wave rather than the first. “Begin the landings,” he ordered when one of his staff officers reported that all the shuttle pilots in the first wave had reported ready to proceed.

More than three hundred shuttles took off from Grant, the other troop transports and converted freighters that were in formation around Johnston’s flagship. They quickly accelerated through New Shanghai’s atmosphere. Twelve atmospheric fighters, the last Johnson had been able to find anywhere within the Empire led the way. Just before they reached the colony‘s thick cloud layer, a fresh wave of tungsten spears erupted from Viper and several other warships. To an onlooker who wasn’t in the know, their targets would have horrified them. Instead of striking Karacknid bases away from population centers, the tungsten spears slammed into three of the small towns that surrounded Bozhou. They were the same towns the Karacknids had used to land their own invasion force before advancing on Bozhou. The spears sent shockwaves rushing through the towns and small mushroom clouds into the sky. The remaining buildings were leveled. An hour ago Johnston would have been horrified by what was happening. Yet Chang had assured him that there were no Humans left in the towns. The Karacknids had cleared them out completely. That meant all the heat signatures Grant had picked up were Karacknids. No doubt they were hiding in the towns thinking they were safe from orbital bombardment. Instead, Viper and her consorts had just cleared a large landing zone for his marines.

Just seconds after the last tungsten spear slammed into one of the towns, the shuttles arrived. Flying through the shockwaves and using the debris thrown into the atmosphere as cover, they touched down in any clearings they could find. A small splattering of SAMs raced up to meet them. Most were shot down. Only two shuttles were hit. Three atmospheric fighters swooped in and blasted the areas where the SAMs had been launched from. More missiles came from Bozhou itself which made Johnston grimace. Neither his fighters nor shuttles could return fire for fear of hitting civilians still in the city. When the first shuttles lifted off, they hovered several hundred meters in the air as they used their point defenses to defend the shuttles still disgorging marines. Then, barely ninety seconds after the first landing, every shuttle was back in the air. Together they fired their thrusters and rapidly ascended back through the atmosphere.

On the ground the familiar energy spikes from plasma rifles and grenade detonations were detected by Grant’s sensors. Starting at the five landing zones, they spread out in ever widening circles as the first wave of marines cleared the surviving Karacknids from the three towns. Five minutes later the fighting had died down. When the Lieutenant General commanding the first wave sent a report that the towns had been secured, Johnston gave the order for the second wave to move in. He waited just long enough to see that the shuttles encountered almost no resistance before he stood and nodded to his staff officers. “Rodriguez, Hamilton, you two are with me. The rest of you continue your duties. I will remain in constant contact.” As he walked off Grant’s bridge Johnston could feel most of the officers following him with their eyes. They probably thought he should remain on Grant where it was safe. He knew Clare and James wouldn’t be best pleased. Yet he had to be on the surface. He couldn’t just watch the Karacknids be driven out of Bozhou from space. He had fought to protect the city. Then he had pulled back, handing it over to the Karacknids. He intended to be there when it was liberated.

By the time he got to one of Grant’s hangers, the shuttles from the second wave had returned. The hangar was a hive of activity as hundreds of marines marched onto their shuttles whilst supplies and heavier weapons were loaded. The only part of the hangar that was not chaotic was where the six heavier landing shuttles sat. Loaded with two Centurion battle tanks each, they had been waiting to join the third landing wave. Almost as soon as Johnston sat and strapped himself in, the shuttle’s pilots spoke to him over the shuttle COM channel. “I just got word that every shuttle is reporting ready to take off. We are launching in thirty seconds General.”

“Very well,” Johnston replied. As the shuttle took off and raced towards New Shanghai’s atmosphere, Johnston stared out the viewport as the planet grew larger and larger. The thick layer of clouds that covered Bozhou and the surrounding continent didn’t give him much to look at but that didn’t bother him. The very fact that he was getting closer to being back on New Shanghai was enough.

As soon as his shuttle broke through the clouds, threat alarms went off. Johnston recognized them at once. His shuttle was being targeted by ground-based radar. “Missile launches!” the shuttle pilot bellowed. “Eight missiles incoming.”

Johnston’s heartbeat barely flickered more than a couple of beats faster. Eight missiles were not going to get through the combined point defenses of more than one hundred shuttles. His shuttle’s pilot didn’t have to throw the shuttle into an evasive maneuver. Just two minutes later Johnston felt the familiar bump as the shuttle touched down. He was already unbuckled and moving towards the rear access ramp as it began to power down. Three squads of marines moved out in front of him then he came out last with Rodrigues and Hamilton. One of Lieutenant General Davidson’s staff officers was waiting for them. “This way General,” she said as she gestured for Johnston to follow her. “Lieutenant General Davidson has set up his headquarters in the town square.”

As Johnston followed the marine sergeant, he got a first-hand look at the devastation that the town of Lipu had suffered. First the town had been fought over when the Karacknids had landed their ground troops after they had captured the orbitals. Johnston had placed several platoons of marines within the town to contest it. According to intelligence the resistance groups had shared, several battles had been fought in the time since then as its population had attacked the Karacknid occupiers. The town’s final demise had come from his own orders. He counted four massive craters caused by tungsten spears as he walked through the rubble. Johnston doubted Lipu would be inhabited again anytime soon.

Sudden movement to his right made Johnston turn his head. He relaxed when he saw that it was just a squad of four marines. Clambering over a pile of rubble, they jumped into the reasonably clear street he was being led along. As soon as they started to move again though, something seemed off about their body language. It made Johnston stop and turn fully towards them. “Marines,” he called out. “What is going on?” The marines all stopped and turned to him. One began to speak but then cut off as soon as they spotted Johnston’s rank insignia. “We’re in the middle of a contested landing marines. I don’t have time to mess around. What is it?” Johnston pressed.

“We found something General,” one of the marines answered. She gestured back over her shoulder with one of her hands. “We didn’t know what to do. We were going to find our Sergeant.”

“What did you find?” Johnston asked in a more conciliatory tone now that they were speaking to him.

“I’m not sure,” the marine answered.

“A family,” one of the other marines said. “But they are all dead.”

Johnston’s teeth clamped together. “Show me,” he ordered, forcing the words out. The marine who had spoken first nodded and turned. Silently, Johnston followed them. Just thirty seconds later he found himself standing in a small garden at the back of an apartment. Slumped over, lined along the back wall of the apartment were five bodies. A man, a woman and three children. All of them had burn marks in their chests.

“An execution,” Lieutenant Hamilton, Johnston’s operations officer said. “They’re civilians.”

Johnson swallowed the bile that threatened to rise up his throat. As his hands clenched into fists, he forced himself to look from face to face. Pain and agony were written on the children’s faces. Terror was the only word Johnston could come up with to describe the parents’ last emotions. Though he knew it wasn’t for what was about to happen to themselves. Both parents were slumped over towards the dead bodies of their children. Johnston had seen the Karacknid’s commit many atrocities; not least the murder of tens of millions of civilians when they had nuked Earth; what he stared at now sickened him to his core. Several of the resistance cells that had spoken to his officers had reported the Karacknids carrying out reprisals after attacks made against their soldiers. What he was looking at now seemed more than that. Hamilton had been right. “Now we know why there were no civilians left in Lipu,” he said as he turned to his two staff officers. He then raised his eyes and looked around at all the destroyed buildings around him. He was certain that similar scenes would be discovered throughout them. He could easily picture the military rationale that had caused the death of the family who had lived in the apartment in front of him. The Karacknids had set up a large base adjacent to Lipu. It probably housed a lot of the soldiers they had used to pacify Bozhou. They wouldn’t want resistance cells operating in Lipu. So they exterminated what was left of the town’s population. Johnston shook his head in disgust. Though he could understand the strategic thinking, the evil of doing such a thing was beyond him. Suddenly, he turned back to his guide. “Take me to Lieutenant General Davidson.”

“At once General,” the marine sergeant said, her voice barely above a whisper.

As soon as he burst into the command tent that had been set up, every marine officer stopped what they’re doing to look up at him. Johnston barely noticed. He was still angry. “General Johnston,” Davidson said as she moved over to Johnston’s side. She gestured towards a 3D Holo map of Bozhou and the surrounding countryside. “I have the third wave of marines formed up and moving to their jumping off positions. Platoons from the first wave have already moved through the open countryside. No resistance has been met yet. We are setting up observation points along the edge of the city. Several Karacknid soldiers have been spotted, but whatever force is still in the city is keeping its head down.”

“Very good,” Johnston responded as he fought to keep his anger out of his voice. “As soon as the fourth wave are in position, we will make our move. There is one additional order I want passed on to all our forces. It is unlikely, but if the Karacknid soldiers should surrender, we will be showing them no quarter.”

“General?” Davidson asked, surprise filling her voice.

“There is a garden one of the marines who came with us will take your staff officers to. They are to document what they find. Then you will understand,” Johnston explained. “Just make sure our forces get my order.”

“Of course Admiral,” Davidson said as she gave him a sharp nod, telling Johnston that though she didn’t understand, she trusted him.

Johnston nodded to her and moved closer to the 3D map and leaned over it. In silence he  studied the intelligence being constantly fed back from their forward platoons and squads of marines who were scouting the enemy positions. It looked like Karacknids had been spotted all along the outskirts of the city. They were clearly ready to oppose Johnston’s forces as soon as they made a move on Bozhou. Ordinarily in an urban battle a defender would want to slowly retreat further and further into the city as they bled their enemy. Trading space for time allowed the defender to keep their battle cohesion for longer. Yet the central parts of Bozhou were the heaviest populated. It was unlikely the Karacknids would want to fall back too far into the city for fear of having the people they had been terrorizing for the last seven weeks turn on them. That meant they would be concentrating much of their strength on the outskirts of the city. That was where the main fighting would be.

As Johnston studied the map, new images appeared in the air above Bozhou. Hundreds of shuttles were descending through the atmosphere again bringing the fourth wave of marines. As the shuttles landed and thousands of marines and battle tanks formed up and moved out from Lipu, Johnston began to engage with Hamilton, Rodriquez, Davidson and Davidson’s staff officers. Together they put the finishing touches on the plan he had outlined and simulated many times over the last two weeks. Then, when the fourth wave was in position, he gave the attack order.

In three columns the twelve thousand marines of his attack force moved through the gentle rolling valleys that led towards Bozhou. For twenty minutes their approach was slow and methodical. Then, when they were just four kilometers away, they stopped. Instead of charging, they turned ninety degrees and began to circle around the city. Instead of their slow approach though, they moved as fast as they could. From several squadrons of recon marines, reports came in of large numbers of Karacknid troops on the move. Johnston smiled. The Karacknids had started to concentrate their troops where his formations had been advancing towards. Now they were having to suddenly regroup. His smile widened when explosions and the discharge of energy weapons erupted from within Bozhou’s outskirts. Chang had been true to her word. Every resistance cell that could, had moved personnel adjacent to the main streets the Karacknid’s would be moving their troops through. Tens if not hundreds of ambushes were taking place. The Karacknids’ battle cohesion would be badly dented if not damaged beyond repair.

Just five minutes after changing direction, Johnston’s three columns stopped again. Turning back towards Bozhou they rapidly advanced towards the city. Shuttles swooped in from overhead to release chaff missiles that exploded in a constant wave just ahead of the advancing marines to cover their approach. The Centurion tanks also fired smoke grenades filling the open countryside with a thick smoke that impaired any visual or infrared sensors the Karacknids would be using. When the forward elements of each column were a hundred meters or so away from the first buildings of the city, the Karacknids opened fire. Hundreds of marines were cut down. Yet as so many laser beams and heavier missiles were missing their targets Johnston quickly figured the Karacknids were firing blind. In no time at all his marines reached the outskirts of the city. Quickly, the battle turned into a desperate building by building and street by street fight. On the 3D map in front of Johnston things became muddled as holographic representations of platoons and regiments meshed together.

For nearly twenty minutes, Johnston had few concrete reports to go on. All he knew was that his marines were desperately pushing their way into the city. Then, eventually the news he had been waiting for came. One platoon had pushed beyond the outskirts of the city and come into contact with a large group of resistance fighters. They had cut the Karacknids’ front line in half! At once Johnston began to give orders to the commanders of each of his three columns. The westernmost column would hold position and prevent the Karacknids in the western half of the city from trying to push past to re-connect with their eastern brethren. Together, the central and eastern columns would turn east and envelop the Karacknid forces in front of them. Attacking from outside the city and now from within, they would surround and destroy half of the Karacknid forces. In addition, he gave orders for the reserve formation of Gramrian troops to attack, they would cut their way through the surrounded Karacknids. Then, once they had accomplished their task, they would all turn west and repeat the same maneuver to finish the Karacknid forces. When he had finished giving the orders, Johnston turned back to the holo map. He was just in time to see another large group of shuttles descending. They would be bringing their sixth wave of reinforcements. Once they joined the fifth wave that had already landed, the two would ensure the entire city was swept clear of Karacknid resistance. With their landing, Johnston was certain of victory. By the end of the day Bozhou would be under his control. And then we will find out just how high the butcher’s bill has been over these last weeks, he couldn’t help but say to himself. His mind turned to the rest of the planet. Retaking Bozhou was only the beginning. It would take weeks to secure the rest of the towns and cities that dotted New Shanghai’s continents. Even longer to root out every Karacknid soldier. No doubt some would try to go to ground. It was not going to be a short nor easy task. But it was one Johnston was determined to see through to the finish. And when we’re done, not a single Karacknid will remain alive on New Shanghai, he promised himself. The faces of the three dead children were still firmly ingrained in his mind.

Chapter 34

It was not only the Empire’s colonies who suffered at the hands of the Karacknids during the War of Doom. That is why to this day, five hundred years later, there are no shortage of species willing to contribute to the careful watch kept on their home systems.

-Excerpt from Empire Rising, 3002 AD.

Stargazer, Frilamon system, 18th August 2484 AD (five days previous).

“We are in time,” Ya’sia said almost with a sigh as an image of Frilamon appeared on Stargazer’s holo display. The Crian’s body visibly relaxed as tension left all four of her legs. There were no Karacknid warships in orbit around the colony bombarding its surface.

“Just,” James said as he sat forward in his command chair. Stargazer’s sensors were still updating. The Kulrean worldship had jumped into the Frilamon system just moments ago. Already two huge fleets had just been detected. Massive energy discharges told James that a battle was ongoing.

“The Karacknid fleet has obviously left the Jamaral system,” Hallock commented. “There are defenses in orbit around Frilamon, why is your fleet not fighting there?”

When Ya’sia didn’t immediately answer, James spoke for her. He understood her silence. They were in time, but the Alliance fleet was in serious trouble. “If they retreated straight back to Frilamon they’d be able to join their strength with the colony’s orbital defenses yes. But then the colony would be under direct threat. The Karacknids could launch nuclear missiles at the colony. Or just as bad, a stray anti-matter missile or even debris from destroyed orbital battlestations and capital ships could strike the planet. The Alliance fleet doesn’t want to risk their civilians.”

“And they knew we were coming,” Ya’sia said as she found her voice again. “We must aid them at once.”

James almost suggested that they move Hallock’s worldships into the system in stealth. The worldships could travel at acceleration rates almost equivalent to a Human warship’s maximum and still remain hidden from Karacknid sensors. At the moment the Karacknid invasion fleet was just half a light hour inside the system’s mass shadow. As soon as Hallock’s worldships revealed themselves by going to maximum acceleration, the Karacknids could turn and flee. By staying hidden, the Karacknids could be lured deeper into the system. With luck, to a point where they could be trapped. And yet, as James watched the distant battle, he understood Ya’sia’s desire to intervene immediately. Alliance ships were being destroyed in their tens and twenties. Stargazer’s sensors had detected four and a half thousand Karacknid warships. The Alliance fleet numbered just over three thousand. They were putting up a good fight, and they were keeping the Karacknids from reaching Frilamon, but it was costing them dearly. “I concur,” James said instead. “It will be refreshing to be the one coming to the aid of a fleet in peril for a change.” Too long have the Alliance and the Kulreans been coming to our aid, James thought. Of course, he was on a Kulrean ship, but it still felt good to be able to swoop in and save the day for a change.

“Then we will move forward at once,” Hallock said as he turned from Ya’sia and James and waved a hand towards one of his officers.

James was startled by how quickly Stargazer accelerated. Though he felt nothing through his feet or with his inner ear, in the space of just seconds the massive worldship started to move rapidly, faster than any warship he had ever been on before.

“The Alliance fleet is responding to our presence,” one of the Kulrean sensor officers reported.

James didn’t need the officer to tell him what was going on. It was clear on the holo display. The strength and clarity of Stargazer’s sensors meant that he could see every individual Karacknid and Alliance ship easily. As soon as they had detected the worldships, the Alliance fleet had turned away from the Karacknids and gone to full acceleration. Just seconds later the Karacknid fleet increased their acceleration rates as well. They didn’t want the Alliance fleet to get out of missile range! As the estimated course of each fleet updated, James saw that Stargazer and the other worldships would rendezvous with the Alliance fleet in forty minutes. “They should be able to hold out that long without any bother,” James said to reassure Ya’sia. “Then we will be able to hammer them into oblivion.”

Ya’sia nodded. “This is one Crian colony the Karacknids will not be despoiling.”

“We will retake the others,” James added. Though he didn’t know Allied space as intimately as he did his own, James knew that for the Karacknid fleet to be here they had already advanced through five systems from Jamaral. That meant two Crian colonies and a further three systems had been conquered.

“I do not understand,” Hallock said as he looked down from the holo display to James and Ya’sia. “Why does the Karacknid fleet not turn and run? They could escape easily if they did so. Surely they must know they are in danger.”

“There’s no way for that fleet to know just how powerful your worldships are,” James replied. “It’s possible a report of the battle of New Shanghai has reached the Karacknids in front of us. But at best, all that they would know is that Tranquility showed an impressive amount of point defense weapons.”

“But surely the precautionary principle should still apply?” Hallock pressed. “Even more so if they don’t know what our worldships are. Given our size and number shouldn’t the Karacknid’s be more careful?”

“I think you are beginning to learn more about our enemy,” James said. “They’ve spent the last several millennia constantly expanding their empire. They have conquered thousands of species. Why should they be afraid of a small number of unknown ships? No doubt they think they can destroy your worldships along with the Alliance fleet.”

Hallock’s shoulders fell and he turned and looked at several of his officers. “If they will not retreat, then they will be destroyed,” he said slowly as he turned back to James. “We will take no pleasure in it. But I think you’re right, I am learning. They will not stop advancing until they discover that they cannot simply take what they desire. But that stops now. Not in this sector of the galaxy. Not anymore.”

Hallock’s tone made James smile. When the Superintendent’s face changed, James guessed he was being misunderstood. “I’m not pleased at the prospect of killing Karacknids,” he explained quickly. “But I am pleased at your words. I am glad you are so committed to protecting my species and the Alliance. We would be in serious trouble without you.”

“It is my hope that you will not need our protection for long,” Hallock replied. “As we are learning, so too will the Karacknids. Once they understand that they cannot so easily defeat my ships, they may come to the negotiating table, and we can put an end to this war.”

“Let us hope so,” James said as he half turned from Hallock and shared a glance with Ya’sia and Emilie. He could tell both of them thought that as likely as he did. “But for now, we must focus on this battle.”

“Of course,” Hallock agreed.

Despite the speed of the Kulrean vessels, everyone on Stargazer’s bridge had to watch five more Karacknid missile salvos slam into the Alliance fleet. More than a hundred ships were destroyed outright or so badly damaged that they fell out of formation and were easily finished off by the Karacknids.

“Now they will pay,” Ya’sia said passionately as the Alliance fleet suddenly reversed course. There was no longer any need to flee. The Kulrean worldships would be in range with their point defenses before the next Karacknid missile salvo reached them.

And now the Karacknid’s will learn their mistake, James thought. Seconds later the Kulrean ships opened fire. Tens of thousands of angular bolts of energy rushed out to meet the Karacknid missile salvo. In ten seconds half of the missiles in the salvo were destroyed. With less and less missiles to focus on, the worldships destroyed what was left even quicker. Only three thousand reached the point where the Alliance ships needed to open fire with their own missiles. None got close enough to detonate and splash anti-matter across an Alliance warship’s hull.

“One of the Alliance ships is hailing us, it is Momentum, Admiral Haroul wishes to speak with the fleet’s senior commander,” one of Stargazer’s officers reported.

Hallock turned to James and Ya’sia. “I’m sure it would be easier if he spoke to one of you two.”

James gestured for Ya’sia to step forward. “Admiral Haroul,” Ya’sia said before falling into a deep bow as the Varanni Admiral appeared in front of them all. “I’m glad to see your fleet is still intact.”

“And I’m glad to see you Admiral Ya’sia,” Haroul replied, “and our Human and Kulrean friends,” he added as he bowed just as deeply to James and then Hallock. “Your timing is impeccable. I’m afraid we have lost several systems to this fleet’s renewed offensive but they will not get Frilamon.”

“I am glad we were able to make it in time,” Ya’sia replied. “As for the other systems, that is something we shall have to put right,” Ya’sia added as her voice lost its formality and was filled with anger. “The Kulrean worldships will slot into formation to protect your fleet. Let us chase these Karacknids out of the system and back to their own space.”

“It will be my pleasure,” Haroul said as he bowed slightly again. “I received a briefing on the worldships’ capabilities several days ago from Varanni Prime. Even so, I am impressed. Let us show the Karacknids what it means to be afraid for a change.”

“We will follow your lead Admiral,” Ya’sia explained. “Direct your ships as you see best and we will keep them under our protection.”

“Very well, we’ll speak more once the battle has been brought to an end,” Haroul promised.

As soon as the COM channel ended, the main holo display on Stargazer’s bridge returned to showing the Karacknid fleet. James wasn’t in the least surprised to see that it was decelerating and trying to get away from the Kulrean worldships. The Karacknids were brave to the point that he often thought it foolish, yet they weren’t complete idiots. Far from it. Even as they were breaking, one of the missile salvos the Alliance fleet had already fired crashed into the Karacknids. Nineteen warships were destroyed. It was a tiny fraction of their fleet. A problem we are going to keep facing, James thought as he studied the Karacknid fleet. He knew Lightfoot and Becket would be having an even worse time of it. The Kulrean worldships protected Allied fleets, but with their superior numbers, the Karacknids’ point defenses were still hard to breach. The next two hours confirmed James’ concerns. He watched in almost complete silence as the Kulrean worldships engaged and completely destroyed twenty-one Karacknid missile salvos. In return, Haroul’s fleet took out three hundred and ninety-six Karacknid warships with their own salvos. It was a significant number of enemy ships, yet the vast majority of their fleet was still intact. Even though they were running, they would pose a serious threat. Especially if they managed to strike somewhere where the Kulrean ships were not.

“What do we do now?” Hallock asked as soon as the Karacknid invasion fleet disappeared from Stargazer’s sensors as they jumped into shift space.

“Now we speak with Haroul and assess the condition of his fleet,” James answered. “And then we begin our pursuit. We must give the Karacknids as little time to respond to your ships’ appearance as possible. We need them on the back foot, at least until we push them back to their border.”

*

Stargazer, Kirama system, 20th August 2484 AD.

Twenty-eight hours after the battle in the Frilamon system, Stargazer slipped out of shift space into the Kirama system. When the worldship’s sensors updated, the Karacknid fleet was just two hours ahead of them. Their direction made James frown. Instead of fleeing straight for the next shift passage out of the system, the Karacknid fleet was headed towards the colony of Kirama. They had conquered the system and the colony one week ago. There was no need for them to delay their retreat by heading to the colony. Unless … James’ frown turned to a scowl. Immediately he turned to Ya’sia. “The colony’s population needs to be warned.”

“You don’t think…” Ya’sia said as her voice rose.

“Their invasion has been turned back by the sudden arrival of a far more powerful species,” James reasoned. “A war they thought they were on the verge of winning has just become a war of attrition. One that the industries of Kirama could play a key role in.” As he finished speaking, James turned back to the colony. Kirama’s industries would play no further role in the war with the Karacknids. There was nothing Haroul’s nor Hallock’s ships could do about it. Please, James thought to himself. Let it not be another Earth. Memories and nightmares from the Karacknid nuclear missiles detonating on Earth’s surface still plagued him; if not every day then certainly still every week.

“I need a COM channel opened to Kirama immediately,” Ya’sia demanded in a commanding tone that suggested she had momentarily forgotten she was a guest on Stargazer. “Keep the channel unencrypted and broadcast on all frequencies.”

“I have one open for you Admiral,” a Kulrean officer said moments later.

“People of Kirama,” Ya’sia began, more desperation filling her voice. “This is Admiral Ya’sia. We have come to liberate the system from the Karacknids. Their fleet is in retreat, but I fear they plan to attack the colony’s surface. Everyone must get to what shelter they can. Get out of the cities, get underground. Protect yourselves. There’s no time to wait or hesitate. Go now please. We will do what we can to chase the Karacknids off.”

When Ya’sia stopped speaking, James turned to her. He could tell she wanted to say more. Yet what could she say? Any promise she made would be empty. “End the COM channel,” James said to the Kulrean officer, putting an end to Ya’sia’s dilemma. “You warned them,” he said as he rose from his command chair and moved closer to Ya’sia to place a hand on her shoulder. “You’ve warned them. There’s nothing more you can do.”

Ya’sia blinked as a tear ran down her cheek. Then she nodded as she turned to meet James’ eyes. “I’m sorry Admiral. All this time we’ve been defending your colonies and your homeworld I’ve been concerned for your people. But now that it is my species facing the Karacknids’ atrocities, it is almost too much.”

“I understand entirely,” James said as he squeezed Ya’sia’s shoulder again. “I’d give anything to stop what is about to happen. To stop you having to watch it. But there is nothing I can do. Nothing either of us to can do right now. But there will come a time when we can seek justice for our people. If you have to watch this, then don’t look away. Don’t forget it. Let your anger fuel what we must do in the days ahead.”

Ya’sia nodded slowly, blinked several more times and turned back to the holo display. In silence they watched the events of the next several hours play out. When the Karacknids engaged Kirama’s orbital installations, James felt a momentary glimmer of hope. Every missile the Karacknids fired was striking satellites, supply depots and civilian industries. None were passing through the maze of orbital stations towards the planet’s atmosphere. Yes, many of the larger stations would cause significant damage to the colony’s surface as they fell out of orbit and didn’t burn up on re-entry. If that was all the damage Kirama’s population had to face, it wouldn’t be as bad as James had feared. His hope vanished just seconds after the last orbital station was destroyed. Instead of turning their noses away from the colony, Stargazer’s sensors detected another wave of missiles. Immediately they were identified as missiles with nuclear rather than antimatter warheads. James didn’t know how Stargazer’s sensors could tell such a thing at this range, but he barely registered it. His body had tensed up. Once again he was watching nuclear warheads race towards a planet’s surface.

Around him, James heard several hisses and other noises from the Kulrean officers. Their silent efficiency had suddenly evaporated. “Surely they’re not going to…” Stargazer’s First Officer said. When James turned towards her, he saw that both she and Hallock were staring at him. Not trusting his own voice, James slowly nodded. Moments later the Kulreans’ question was answered by more than James’ gesture. One hundred missiles struck Kirama’s surface. Every single one sent a mushroom cloud shooting into the atmosphere. Stargazer’s holo display changed to show a zoomed in image of the planet. An estimated count of civilian casualties quickly rose into the hundreds of thousands.

“Most of the major population centers remain intact,” one of the Kulrean officers reported.

“It looks like factories and other industrial nodes were the primary targets,” another added.

James wanted to silence them as he glanced at Ya’sia. The number of casualties had already exceeded one million. Yet he remained silent. In part it was because against his better judgement, his hope was rising. If the Karacknids were just after Kirama’s industry then maybe they wouldn’t fire again. As the seconds passed, he held his breath. When the Karacknid fleet didn’t change direction, his hope faded. Then one of the leading ships altered its heading slightly. It was quickly followed by several more. Within seconds the entire Karacknid fleet was turning away from Kirama. James had to restrain himself from shouting. The estimated casualties were over one and a half million. Yet the Karacknids were not going to fire more missiles at Kirama’s cities! They’re not total monsters after all, James thought, as hard as the admission was. The destruction of Kirama’s surface industries was understandable given the strategic considerations of the war. He wasn’t in the least surprised that killing upwards of two million Crians was seen as acceptable collateral damage to the Karacknids. Nuking Earth had been a statement. One they don’t think they need to make today, James thought thankfully, though he didn’t fully understand it. His mind couldn’t help but go to New Shanghai. He had no idea what state the colony would be in after nearly two months of Karacknid occupation. Will they nuke New Shanghai? he asked himself. Will they make a statement there? He had no idea what the answers to his questions were.

As Stargazer came close enough to Kirama to see the devastation in far more detail, James forgot about New Shanghai. What was in front of him drove out all other concerns. Then, as Hallock and Haroul’s ships caught up to the Karacknids, thanks to the Karacknids need to close with Kirama, his horror and fear turned to anger. With clenched fists, James watched as missile salvo after salvo was hurled at the Karacknid fleet. Though the silent efficiency on Stargazer’s bridge was the same as James had experienced during the battle in the Frilamon system, from the rate of fire and the deadly accuracy of the point defense fire, James could tell that their anger matched his. By the time the Karacknid fleet reached the system’s mass shadow and jumped to safety, they had left two hundred and forty-six of their number behind. James had no idea if the loss of so many ships was worth the destruction of Kirama’s industries. One thing was certain however, the Alliance fleet hadn’t destroyed nearly enough to avenge the hundreds of thousands of civilians that had just been killed.

“We must return to Kirama at once,” Hallock said as soon as his worldships destroyed the final missile salvo the Karacknids had released just before jumping out. “Your people there need our aid. We will provide what we can.”

“Which we will gladly accept,” Ya’sia replied, her voice a mixture of gratitude and loss.

James swallowed hard, the scenes they were all about to see and have to deal with were not going to be pleasant. He knew from experience.

*

Stargazer, 22nd August 2484 AD (two days later).

“I’m reluctant to be the one to bring this to your attention,” James said as he addressed the holo conference he, Hallock and Ya’sia were having with Haroul and his senior commanders. They had just finished reviewing the strenuous efforts everyone had gone to over of the past two days to evacuate Crian civilians from the devastation caused by the Karacknids’ nuclear missiles. “But I believe it is necessary. The time has come for Superintendent Hallock’s ships to split up. There is still one Karacknid invasion fleet on the far side of Alliance space. The Alliance fleets opposing it need support. You have all done what you can for Kirama. With the aid we have sent to the surface, things are starting to be brought under control.”

“You would have us leave the people of Kirama when they are in such dire straits?” Hallock asked, his tone of voice rising.

“Not with pleasure,” James replied. “But we must keep the bigger picture in front of us. The Karacknid invasion fleet we have fought must be pursued to make sure they retreat from Alliance space. If we do not, they may double back and nuke other systems. The second Karacknid invasion fleet must also be stopped. Without your worldships it could continue its advance and threaten more colonies. We also have to get to Varanni Prime. Decisions need to be made regarding the future of our war.”

“I’m in agreement,” Haroul said, slightly surprising James. “Though Kirama was not a Varanni world, we feel the loss of its people just as dearly as if it was. My fleet will leave its doctors and engineers here to help. But as for the rest of us, we are eager to continue our pursuit. Even with just half of Hallock’s world ships, we will hound the Karacknids and get vengeance if we can.”

James had to fight back a smile despite the seriousness of the situation they found themselves in. Normally the Varanni were the most reserved species James had met. Only the Kulreans came close. Yet at the moment Haroul sounded more like Admiral Shraw than a Varanni commander.

“The second Karacknid invasion fleet has been weighing heavily on my mind as well,” Ya’sia added. “If you are willing Superintendent, I believe Emperor Somerville is right, the time to split your ships has come.”

Hallock looked from James to Ya’sia to Haroul. “If it is your collective wisdom, then I am in agreement. As much as it is against my very nature to abandon the people of Kirama in their time of need, I do not wish to see the things I have witnessed over these last two days repeated.”

“Then time is of the essence,” James said as he clapped his hands. “We should arrange to dispatch half of your fleet to rendezvous with the Alliance fleet opposing the second Karacknid invasion fleet at once. We should also leave for Varanni Prime immediately. Admiral Haroul can continue his pursuit when his fleet is ready to depart.”

“That is how I see things,” Haroul responded. He turned to face Ya’sia. “You would be most welcome to join us Admiral. Your skills and experience would be greatly appreciated.”

Ya’sia shook her head. “My place is with Emperor Somerville and Superintendent Hallock. As much as I long to join your strike against the Karacknid invasion fleet, planning the future of our war is how I must avenge the lives lost on Kirama.”

Haroul bowed his head slightly. “Then I’m sure Alliance High Command will appreciate your advice even more than I.”

“It is settled then,” James said as he looked at each of the commanders. “We each have our own work to do.” He turned slightly and caught Emilie’s eye. So far, she was the only one he had confided his full thoughts to. He knew he would have to share his idea with at least Anderson and Ivanov on the way to Varanni Prime. Hopefully they will be as easy to convince as Emilie, James thought as he remembered his niece’s excitement at the brief plan he had outlined. And hopefully convincing them will convince me a little more. Since leaving Earth he had come to a firmer idea of just how he might convince the Karacknid Imperator to accept an end to the war. To say it was crazy was an understatement. Yet after examining every other option, James could come up with nothing else. Emilie agreed. If Anderson and Ivanov did too, then he’d have no choice but to present it to Alliance High Command. He had no idea how they were going to respond. Though given how conservative the Varanni were, he was going to have his work cut out for him.

Chapter 35

‘in the multitude of counselors there is safety;’ this proverb is as true today as the day it was written.

-Excerpt from Empire Rising, 3002 AD.

Stargazer, Varanni Prime, 31st August 2484 AD (nine days later).

Even though it was his third time visiting the Varanni’s home system, James was just as amazed as he had been the first time. In fact, he was even more impressed. Nearly every orbital body within the solar system had some kind of Varanni presence. Thousands upon thousands of ships moved back-and-forth between all the different orbital and ground bases. James estimated the amount of traffic was at least forty percent higher than the first time he had visited. They are on a war footing now, he thought. By far the most traffic was headed towards Varanni Prime itself. In orbit James counted more than twenty different construction yards thanks to Stargazer’s advanced sensors and holo display. Every one of them had hundreds of shuttles and construction drones circling around them. Various heavy cruisers and battleships were nearing completion.

“An impressive system,” Hallock said from where he stood just a few meters away from James. “They have made a lot of additions since my previous visit.”

“We are all in a war for survival,” James reminded the Kulrean. “We’ve been doing whatever we can to prevent what has happened at Earth from happening again. Kirama will only make us redouble our efforts.”

“Quite understandable,” Hallock responded.

As James shared small talk with Hallock and Ya’sia, he kept a close eye on Varanni Prime as they approached. The Varanni worshipped their homeworld almost as if it was a deity in its own right. Ever since they had first stepped foot into space, they had devoted a lot of effort to preserving their own world. As a result, the vast majority of their species lived outside of their home system. Traveling back to Varanni Prime was essentially a pilgrimage. It wasn’t hard for James to understand why. Their world was beautiful. It was all but untouched by urban or industrial development. Large mountain ranges, forests and lakes filled most of its continents. There were small areas of Earth that could compete with Varanni Prime’s beauty, yet it was the fact that the entire world was still wild and untamed that kept his eyes roaming all over the different continents Stargazer’s sensors were observing.

“We’ve just received a communication from Varanni Prime,” one of Stargazer’s officers reported. “Superintendent, you, Admiral Ya’sia and Emperor Somerville have been invited to Alliance High Command headquarters as soon as we enter orbit. We’ve also received a communication packet from the tachyon pulse generator. There are some reports for Emperor Somerville included in them.”

“Thank the Varanni for their hospitality,” Hallock responded. “Inform them we will take a shuttle to the surface once we reach their homeworld. You may send Emperor Somerville’s reports to his datapad.”

Nodding to Hallock, James half turned away and pulled out his datapad. He skimmed through the reports that had been sent from Earth, passing most of them off to Emilie. Quickly he scanned the strategic reports. There was nothing of great interest though. No news had yet come back to Earth about how Admiral Lightfoot’s fleet was faring. His thumb did hesitate over a couple of letters Christine had sent to him. He didn’t open them though; they’d have to wait until later.

“It is time,” Hallock said just over an hour later. Though he had been watching Varanni Prime come closer and closer, James was caught by surprise. He was still getting used to the speeds the Kulrean worldships were capable of reaching.

“Let us go then,” Ya’sia said as she moved closer to Hallock to follow him to the hangar bay. James nodded at both of them and followed suit. Pulling out his datapad he sent a message to Emilie for her to join him. The Alliance High Command’s invitation hadn’t said anything about aides, ideally he wanted to bring Anderson and Ivanov as well, but he knew the Varanni could be sensitive about such issues. They wouldn’t stop him from bringing one aide, but three might upset their protocols. And they may not want junior officers hearing the kinds of sensitive information we will be discussing, James guessed.

When the shuttle landed right beside the Alliance High Command buildings and James stepped foot on Varanni Prime, he couldn’t help but smile widely at the two Varanni who had come to greet them. Jourm was the Supreme Commander of the Varanni Alliance fleet and James had come to respect him greatly, both in the time they had worked together face-to-face and in their many communications passed back-and-forth from Earth and Varanni Prime. Standing beside the Admiral was the Varanni Senator Carma Mashar. She had been the first person to welcome James to Varanni Prime the first time he had visited. She had shown him around many of her homeworld’s natural and constructed wonders. Though he was smiling broadly at them, James wasn’t surprised when neither initially acknowledged him. Both Jourm and Carma Mashar slithered towards Hallock. They stopped just in front of him and bowed deeply. There was a long history between the two species and both shared a deep respect for one another that James had seen neither species show to any of their other friends or neighbors.

“You are most welcome to our humble homeworld,” Carma Mashar said to Hallock when she raised her head. “Our oldest friends will always be welcome here. Now more than ever. You have our eternal gratitude in helping to save Kirama and in sending your warships to aid us in our time of need. We have incurred a debt that my species will happily spend generations repaying.”

“Repayment is not necessary,” Hallock said formally. “I’ve now seen first-hand the horrors that the Karacknids desire to inflict upon your worlds. If we can prevent that, then my people will do what we must.”

Jourm and Carma Mashar bowed again to Hallock before they finally turned to James. “Emperor Somerville, you too are most welcome here. We were very worried for the fate of your homeworld and your species. We feared the war was close to being lost. It brings us pleasure to know your people are safe and that you are now here with us,” Carma Mashar said before she gave James a bow almost as deep as the one she had given Hallock.

James matched her gesture. “I am honored by your willingness to allow my visit and to have me join in the discussions we must have regarding the future of this war. The Kulreans’ intervention has brought us hope when we thought all was lost. Now we must use this hope to find a way to end the Karacknid threat once and for all.”

“Strong words,” Jourm said, speaking for the first time. “But I share their sentiment. The High Command council meeting is scheduled for two hours from now. Let us retire to the High Command buildings, we have some refreshments prepared for you to enjoy before the council meeting begins.” Turning from James, he bowed to Ya’sia. “It is good that you are here too Admiral, you have served us well fighting alongside the Humans. I’m glad you were able to return with Superintendent Hallock to prevent the Karacknid invasion fleet from reaching your homeworld. I am deeply sorry for the losses your species has suffered at Kirama though. We’ve already dispatched a small squadron of relief ships to bring as much aid as we have available.”

“I’m sure the people of Kirama will be deeply thankful when the aid arrives,” Ya’sia replied. “Let us go and eat,” she said as she gestured towards the High Command buildings. “Though I am not hungry, I am eager to begin this meeting. We must repay the Karacknids for what they have done at Kirama.”

*

When James stepped into the Alliance High Command chamber, he noticed a number of striking differences from the first time he had been there. The chamber was nearly twice the size. Yet it looked exactly the same. Somehow the Varanni had doubled the size of the chamber whilst replicating the original exactly. The reason for the increase in size was readily apparent. Whereas the Varanni High Command had originally consisted of Varanni Senators and naval commanders who together oversaw the Varanni fleet; now there were Senators and Admirals from every one of the Alliance species. Whilst the change was a good one, for it reflected the reality that every member species of the Varanni Alliance was playing a critical role in the war against the Karacknids, it concerned James. More Senators and Admirals meant more discussions and points of view. In his experience that led to a significant slowdown in the decision-making process. If it was in peace time when every decision could be carefully analyzed from every angle that would be one thing, but in wartime such delays could lead to defeat.

As Carma Mashar led Hallock and he to the front of the chamber, James kept his face impassive as he patiently endured the official welcoming ceremony. Technically both he and Hallock were heads of state of foreign powers. That meant they both deserved a full official greeting before they could begin any talks. For nearly ten minutes James endured the seemingly endless welcoming protocol that Carma Mashar and the Senators from each of the other five Alliance species went through. When they were finally over and James had bowed more times than he could count, he and Hallock were shown to their seats. James couldn’t help rolling his eyes when Emilie winked at him as he sat down beside her.

“I now declare this meeting of the Alliance High Command open,” Admiral Jourm said when James and Hallock were seated. “We have come to a critical point in our war with the Karacknids. The arrival of the Kulrean worldships has shifted the balance of power in our favor. At least temporarily. We must now determine how we will proceed. As Emperor Somerville has made clear in his communications with us, the outcome of the war and the future of our species may depend on what we decide in the next several days. To begin we must make sure we are all up to speed on events of the last several months. I have asked Emperor Somerville, Admiral Ya’sia and Admiral Dur’ack to update us on the Karacknid invasions of Alliance and Human space.” Turning to James, Jourm bowed slightly to indicate James could begin his briefing.

Standing, James took a deep breath before reviewing everything that had happened starting from the counterattack he and Ya’sia launched into Karacknid space; followed by the discovery of the Karacknid battlefleet and the subsequent retreat back to New Shanghai; the defeat there and then the retreat back to Earth. At times he asked Ya’sia to give her perspective on the events and he also got Emilie to outline Admiral Becket’s raid into the Karacknid empire from Conclave space. When he finished, he wasn’t surprised to find many questions coming from the Alliance Senators and Admirals. He, Ya’sia and Emilie spent nearly an hour answering them all. When it was finally over, James was keen to hear from Dur’ack about what had been happening in Alliance space over the last several months. He had read a number of reports, but Dur’ack would have a far better view of the whole scope of how the war was going.

As he listened, James realized that things had almost been as dire here as they had been at Earth. After news had reached the Alliance High command of the Karacknid battlefleet James had encountered, they had almost let their guard down. No one had expected the Karacknids to launch simultaneous attacks against Human and Alliance space. With so many ships concentrated on the conquest of Earth, it had been assumed the other Karacknid fleets would take a defensive stance. That assumption had been wrong. After a series of feints, two significant attacks had developed. Two Karacknid fleets of over two thousand ships had conquered two border worlds. From there they had rapidly advanced as they received a constant stream of reinforcements. More than twelve Alliance systems had been conquered before each fleet had been stopped. However, neither fleet had been defeated in battle, rather enough Alliance ships had been moved into their path to discourage them from advancing. Just weeks ago, the Karacknids had resumed the offensive, having received more reinforcements themselves. We arrived just in time, James realized as Dur’ack recounted the battles at Frilamon and Kirama. Without Hallock’s worldships, Haroul’s fleet would have been forced to fight at Frilamon to protect the colony. If they had been defeated, more than half of Crian space would have been open to the Karacknid invasion fleet.

“With the timely arrival of the Kulrean worldships we have prevented the first Karacknid invasion fleet from making any more advances,” Dur’ack explained to the Council. “As we sit here, I am confident Admiral Haroul is continuing to push the Karacknid fleet back towards their own space. With regards to the second Karacknid invasion fleet, we have no further news yet. Thanks to the tachyon pulse generator we knew of the imminent arrival of Superintendent Hallock’s ships three weeks ago. As soon as we learnt of this, we devoted all our reinforcements to Admiral Karmin’s fleet. She should have enough ships to have prevented the second Karacknid invasion fleet from resuming its offensive. If not, she has orders to retreat until the worldships Superintendent Hallock has dispatched to her sector arrive. When they do, we expect them to have the same impact they did with Haroul’s fleet. In a matter of weeks, the second Karacknid invasion fleet should be in full retreat as well.”

“Thank you Admiral,” Jourm said when Dur’ack finished answering the questions that followed his presentation. “There is one final piece of information that we need to fully understand,” he continued as he turned to face the full council. “Though Superintendent Hallock and the Kulrean people have aided us in turning back each of the three Karacknid invasion fleets, their help comes with certain conditions. The Kulreans have a long history of pacifism. We cannot thank them enough that they have set some of these strongly held beliefs aside for our benefit. We are greatly honored by what their people have done for us. But we cannot expect them to abandon who they are, nor do we ask them to. So please Superintendent Hallock, could you kindly inform us of the extent to which your ships have permission to aid us in this war?”

When Hallock stood he took the time to bow in the direction of the gathered council members. “Let me begin by saying it is an honor for me to be able to address you all here. Over these past several weeks I have seen first-hand the bravery, skill and dedication that each of your species are showing as you fight to protect yourselves. I’ve also seen the cost this war is exacting on your peoples. Though my species has dedicated itself to the tenants of pacifism for millennia, we are not blind to the realities of the galaxy. It was actions by the Karacknids that first threatened my species twenty years ago. Since then, my people have been forced to re-evaluate their ways. The war your species now find yourselves in with the Karacknids has forced us to further re-evaluate. We see each of your species as our neighbors and our friends. We have no desire to see you conquered and enslaved by a people such as the Karacknids. We are not naïve, we know that if your species fall, the Karacknids will divert the full strength of the Empire against Kulthar. To protect our friends and ourselves, I am here with you now. My people have committed to protecting each of your species from the Karacknids. We will not let them conquer any more of your colonies, nor nuke any more of your civilians. If we can protect you from the evil designs of the Karacknid empire, we will.

“But there are limits on how far I am allowed or even willing to go. I have not used the word protect lightly. It has caused great upheaval within my society for many of us to abandon our pacifism. To take another sentient life is seen as the greatest crime one can commit. At least, that was how our ancestors saw things for generations. Now many of us have recognized another crime. To allow others to kill sentient beings without attempting to intervene when we could stop such atrocities, that too is an evil. It is to prevent this evil that our worldships have left our home system. We will help protect your colonies. We will help stop Karacknid fleets that wish to penetrate into your space. But we will not use offensive weapons against the Karacknids. We will not directly take the lives of the Karacknids ourselves. Nor will we assist you in invading their space. It is my hope that once the Karacknid invasion fleets have been turned back, we can bring an end to this war. Once the Karacknids realize they cannot take your systems for themselves, they may be willing to negotiate. I know the purpose of this council is to determine what path your war with the Karacknids should take. My counsel is that you should seek to open peace negotiations with them. I would be very happy to act as arbiter between your side and theirs. It is not my desire or position to enforce such a path upon you however, you must do this for yourselves, as must the Karacknids.”

Having heard everything Hallock had said before, James only half listened to his speech, instead he was watching the faces of the Senators and Admirals. Not being too familiar with several of the Alliance species, he found their reactions harder to gauge. It was clear that the Varanni and Crian Admirals didn’t hold much hope that the Karacknids would be willing to negotiate. The Senators on the other hand seemed far more open to the idea. No doubt they would love to be able to negotiate a peace. In truth, James would be very happy with such an outcome as well. He just thought it impossible.

Carma Mashar raised herself to her full height as soon as Hallock stopped speaking. “You speak great wisdom Superintendent. Truly peace is the desire of every one of our species. We did not ask for this war. I believe it would be wise to form a smaller committee to put together a list of acceptable demands that we might agree with the Karacknids if they would come to the negotiating table. We certainly accept your proposal to attempt to open negotiations with the Karacknids. Once their fleets have been pushed out of our space, we can attempt to send a delegation to offer peace terms to the Karacknids. If you are willing to accompany that delegation we would be greatly honored.”

“I would be happy to take such a delegation on board Stargazer to make contact with the Karacknids,” Hallock offered. “The sooner we can end this war the more lives we will save.”

“Thank you,” Carma Mashar responded as she gave Hallock another bow. “However, for the purposes of this council meeting, we must consider how best to continue to pursue the war. We cannot assume the Karacknids will come to the negotiating table. In fact I hold out little hope for such an outcome, though I believe it must be attempted. The question we must now all consider is this; how can we win this war and save our species?”

Chapter 36

‘Winning a battle is far easier than winning a war. In a war one must win over one’s own politicians as well as beat the enemies’ fleets,’ Emperor Justin I.

-Excerpt from Empire Rising, 3002 AD.

As soon as Carma Mashar stopped speaking, James felt Emilie shift beside him. He glanced at her and gave a slight shake of his head. Now wasn’t the time to present his idea to the council, they’d probably reject it out of hand. He needed to read the room before trying to steer the discussion in the direction he felt it needed to go. Plus, if there was a better idea out there, he wanted to hear it before making a fool of himself.

“I for one am very concerned by these recent developments,” a Teradamtal Admiral who James had not met before said, suddenly changing the mood in the room. “The fundamental problem in this war is one that has sadly not been changed by the Kulreans joining us. The Karacknids outstrip us greatly both in industrial capacity and ship numbers. Yes, we have managed to close the technological gap. With the Kulrean worldships we have evened the strength of our frontline fleets for the moment. But thanks to the detailed intelligence the Kalassai shared with the Humans and so with us, we know we are greatly outnumbered. If the Karacknids committed anything close to fifty percent of their total warships against us we would be overrun within weeks, Kulrean worldships or not. That is, unless the Kulreans are prepared to commit more warships to our cause? Superintendent, you did not indicate whether your species had more of your ships or not?”

“Thank you for the question,” Hallock said as he stood. “As things stand, there are no additional worldships in our home system. We could construct more, but that would take time. And, as of when I left Kulthar, there was not the political will to do so. In addition to my people’s revulsion to taking life, we are also reluctant to see our own sons and daughters risked in war. All those who serve in our ships are volunteers, even if we constructed more ships, we may not have enough new volunteers to crew them.”

James had to fight to keep his face straight. It was a shock to him that the crews of the Kulrean ships were volunteers. From his discussions with many of them, most seemed reluctant to be there. If they were volunteers, he didn’t fancy meeting Kulreans who were truly set against intervening in the conflict.

“And so we still face the very real difficulty that I have outlined,” the Teradamtal Admiral concluded. “The Kulrean worldships may buy us twelve or eighteen months. In that time we should be able to construct an additional two and a half to three thousand warships. No doubt the Humans and our new Conclave allies could increase those numbers further. Yet in that time how many ships could the Karacknids construct? How many ships that they already have in service could they divert to the frontlines?”

“You’re all doom and gloom as always Admiral,” Jourm commented. “We have known how dire our situation is for some time now. We are here looking for solutions, not additional problems. Do you have a suggestion you wish to lay before us?”

“I do have one Admiral,” the Teradamtal replied. “Right now estimates suggest that within the next six months we should actually match the Karacknid Empire’s shipbuilding capabilities. I know that is hard to believe, but it is based on the best analysis of the Kalassai data. As so many of the Karacknids’ worlds are planets they have enslaved, their industries are significantly less efficient than our own. Though that sounds like good news, I fear it will prove to be bad. At the moment the Karacknids estimation of our strength has no doubt played a large part in how many warships they have committed against us. Our string of victories in this war is likely the reason why this new battlefleet was sent against us. With the arrival of the Kulrean worldships and our constantly increasing ship construction capacity, I fear the Karacknids will increase how much of a threat they perceive us to be. With that increase will come additional warships being sent to our war. The battlefleet that invaded Human space may just be the first in several that will come our way over the next year or two. As you have all heard, it is unlikely additional Kulrean worldships will join our cause. That means that sooner or later the Karacknids will have the numbers necessary to overwhelm those already fighting alongside us. When that time comes, I fear the end of the war will rapidly follow.”

“You still have not made a suggestion,” Jourm prodded.

“I’m coming to it now,” the Teradamtal Admiral responded.

James was momentarily distracted when Ya’sia gently touched his arm with her elbow. When he glanced at her she gestured down to the table they were sat at. She had slid his datapad out from under his arm and tapped a short message. When he read it, James failed to fight back a grin despite the gravity of what was being discussed. ‘Teradamtal’s are infamous for being long winded.’ Ya’sia had written. That’s an understatement, James thought. He had only met a couple of the aliens before and only spoken to them briefly. It seemed he was learning more about his allies on this trip that he had expected.

“My suggestion is simply this,” the Teradamtal continued. “Instead of devoting our construction capacity to producing new warships that will only be overwhelmed as soon as the Karacknids devote the forces against us that they need, we greatly expand Operation New Hope.”

At once several hisses broke out around the council table. Several conversations started. “Silence,” Jourm called, ending the noise in the room. “I do not like Admiral Sarsnac’s suggestion any more than most of you. It feels too much like giving up. Yet we are here to discuss every option that is brought before us. If we cannot defeat the Karacknids, even with the Kulreans’ help, then operation New Hope may be the best place to funnel our resources. We have all already agreed that such a strategy must be pursued by our species. We almost dispatched the colony ships when Earth was besieged. If you do not like Sarsnac’s suggestion, present reasons why we should have more confidence in our ability to win this war.”

James swallowed hard as he felt the tension in the room rise. Operation New Hope was what he had thought Christine might have become a part of when he had been retreating from New Shanghai. Every species in the Varanni Alliance had constructed at least one colony ship. The intention was for them to retreat thousands of light years away from the Karacknid empire to find new worlds to start again. With two or three hundred years to prepare, it was likely the colonists would be able to build new space empires that could stand up to the Karacknids and even liberate their conquered brethren. Whilst on paper it was a good idea, one James knew that was worth pursuing, in practice it meant abandoning every Alliance and Human colony to the Karacknids’ frugal mercy. Billions would die.

“Perhaps we are overestimating the amount of ships the Karacknids could commit to fighting us,” Admiral Demerak, one of the Varanni Admirals James had met several times eventually responded. “Yes, they have tens of thousands of more warships than we do. Yet the vast majority of them are committed to other wars they’re involved in, or to protecting their borders. Admiral Becket and the Conclave species’ raid on the far end of their Empire will have taught the Karacknids to be wary about removing fleets already assigned to defending their borders. Even if the Karacknids now deem us to be more of a threat than they once did, are we not overestimating how many ships they could realistically commit against us?”

“Yes,” Ya’sia agreed. “The Karacknid Empire is massive, but its size is a weakness as much as a strength. Of course, there’s no way we could defeat all their ships if they concentrated them. So far in this war they’ve been feeding in just enough ships that they thought they could overwhelm us. That in itself tells us something. Partly it is no doubt because they have underestimated us, but I believe it is because their forces are stretched thin. You’ve all had time to analyze the fleet positions the Kalassai shared with us. The Karacknids have hundreds of different fleet elements from small squadrons of twenty or thirty ships to larger fleets of several hundred spread all around their empire. They are all in the positions they are in for a reason. Either to protect their borders or prevent uprisings. The battlefleet that was transferred from one of their other wars to invade Human space was most likely a one-off event. If the Karacknids are involved in other significant wars, what is the likelihood that they will end within the next few weeks or months? No doubt the Karacknids will send most of their new construction against us. We’ve already seen carriers and fighters that we know they didn’t have before the war. Yet I do not believe they have enough spare ships to overwhelm us, not in the short term at least. We have a window of opportunity now with the Kulrean worldships. A window that, if we use wisely, we can gain enough of an advantage to greatly improve our long-term prospects.”

“Just how do you see us using this window of opportunity?” Carma Mashar asked. “If the Kulreans will not aid us in attacking the Karacknids, what damage can we do to their fleet or their industrial base?”

“We have to act fast,” Ya’sia answered. “Right now the Karacknids are afraid of the Kulrean worldships. The Kulreans have helped us win a string of one-sided victories. At least for the next few months the Karacknids will be on the back foot. They will know they cannot defeat a fleet that is accompanied by Kulrean worldships. We can use that. If the Kulrean ships remain along our borders it will deter the Karacknids from attacking. That will allow us to pull many of our ships back from the frontline to form one large fleet. If we can amass four or five thousand warships we could strike at one Karacknid fleet and overwhelm it. If we could destroy three or four thousand Karacknid ships it would massively tip the balance of forces in our favor. It would buy us a year or more to build up our own fleet numbers. If we do defeat a Karacknid fleet, it would also open up a sizeable portion of the frontline. We could send a number of powerful raiding fleets into their rear to cause disruption. That too would buy us more time.”

“That sounds like a risky proposition,” Carma Mashar responded. “If the Karacknids noticed that we were pulling ships back from the frontline, they could launch an attack of their own. We know how aggressive they are. If some of Superintendent Hallock’s worldships were caught alone and outnumbered they might be destroyed. The whole frontline could collapse before we managed to strike out with this large fleet you’re proposing we assemble.”

Ya’sia tilted her head slightly towards Carma Mashar. “It could Senator. That is the risk we will face. But in war there are always risks. Given how powerful the Karacknids are, any strategy we employ to try and defeat them will inevitably risk defeat.”

“There is another option,” Dur’ack suggested. “We could lure the Karacknids into fighting us here in our space. We could follow Ya’sia’s plan and pull ships back from the frontline. But instead of planning to strike at the Karacknids, we could very visibly weaken one part of our defenses. Perhaps we could even leave some worldships isolated as a target for the Karacknids. No doubt they would want to destroy any of them that they could. Then, when the Karacknid fleet jumps in, we could ambush them. I’m sure Ya’sia agrees, I’d much rather fight a Karacknid fleet with the Kulrean worldships at my side. If we could win such a battle with out many losses, we could then pursue Ya’sia’s strategy. Leaving the Kulrean worldships behind, we could rapidly advance on another Karacknid fleet and attempt to destroy it as well. With two of their major fleets destroyed, the Karacknids would not have the strength to defend their borders. They’d be forced to retreat. We could advance into their space and liberate the Mindus colonies, we could even push further and free this whole sector from Karacknid control.”

As more Admirals entered the conversation, James felt the mood around him lift.  Both Ya’sia and Dur’ack’s plans were at least potentially viable. As more points of view were shared and tweaks made to the suggestions or entirely new strategies suggested, he found himself wanting to believe in them. A string of military victories with the assistance of the Kulreans would certainly ease the pressure on the allied powers. Yet he couldn’t make himself get on board. They were still only temporary solutions. Defeating two or even three Karacknid fleets would buy them another year or two of breathing space. But then the Karacknid’s would be back with more ships and an even greater thirst to conquer the Varanni Alliance and his own people. That was how they functioned. The greater the enemy, the greater the desire the Karacknids had for victory. To leave an enemy unconquered brought such shame that James knew the Karacknids wouldn’t rest until they had remedied the situation.

“There are two problems I see with this line of thinking,” Admiral Sarsnac said when there was a lull in the discussion. Her tone immediately dampened the mood around the conference table. James felt Ya’sia shift in her chair. It wasn’t hard to guess the Crian Admiral was unhappy. It seemed that Sarsnac wanted to thwart any attempt to take a proactive stance against the Karacknids. “The first is this. Let us say that we destroyed several Karacknid fleets and were able to retake the Mindus colonies and even thirty or forty more other systems. What then would we do with them all? Right now, our greatest advantage is that we have a small frontline. From one end of Alliance space to the far side of Human space there are just fourteen border systems that the Karacknids can attack and push into our territory from. If we pick up the offensive and captured these systems, that number would double. To defend them all, our fleets would have to be spread out twice as thin. On its own, if we had to do that, it would wipe out any advantage we might gain from destroying several Karacknid fleets.

“And then there is the second problem. If we liberate the Mindus colonies, what will we do with them? We know how the Karacknids operate. They reduce every colony to a preindustrial technological base except for the one area they wish to use the colony for. Then they make every colony dependent on the others around them for the rest of their basic needs. That means every colony we liberate will need a significant amount of help. Let’s say for example we managed to liberate this entire sector of space. We’re talking about more than two hundred worlds the Karacknids have conquered. Could we feed them all? Do we have enough freighters even to transport food from the colonies that have specialized in producing food to the others that cannot feed themselves? I would suggest that we do not. Not if we intended to keep our own economies functioning anything like they are now and keep our fleets in supply. That means that we have to leave the vast majority of worlds we would liberate to themselves. How many billions if not trillions of sentient beings would we then be condemning to starvation or death? If we were to defeat several Karacknid fleets and cause their empire to collapse in this sector of space or even the adjacent sectors, it would doom many of the planets they have conquered.”

There was silence when Sarsnac stopped speaking. James could feel the tension in the room rising even higher than before. Both of her points were valid. Strategically extending the frontline of the war would make it very difficult for the Allied Fleet to defend anything. For the past several years they’d been struggling to defend the few systems that they had. From a certain perspective, Sarsnac’s second problem could be rejected out of hand. The Varanni Alliance and Humans were in a war for their very survival. If they lost, their worlds would be conquered, their species enslaved and their cultures destroyed. In the face of such a prospect, how could one worry about what might happen to other worlds they drove the Karacknids from? Yet James knew he could never sign up to such thinking. He had come dangerously close to it when he had lied to the Rillelio and tricked them into providing fuel for his fleet. He knew neither the Varanni, nor the Crians and especially not the Kulreans would be willing to sacrifice so many other sentient beings just to save themselves.

As the silence continued, James looked around at the other Admirals. Most of them were looking at the ground. Not many were making eye contact with one another. The excitement from the arrival of the Kulreans seemed to have left the room.  Sarsnac was simply saying things that they had all known to be true months and even years ago. From the start, the war with the Karacknids had seemed like a foregone conclusion. How could a handful of races with barely four hundred colonized worlds between them face a single Empire that ruled over thousands? Of course, they had all been willing to fight to the death to protect their homeworlds and their loved ones. But just for a moment the prospect of victory had not been an impossibility. Sarsnac was making it clear that, in reality, the Kulreans changed nothing. That was something James had come to understand weeks ago. Unless the Kulreans were willing to take the offensive, the Karacknids’ industrial might could not be overcome. Now is the time, he said to himself. Most of those in the room were now seeing just how bad things really were.

“There is another factor we haven’t considered,” James said as he finally spoke. As he paused he realized he was about to sound a lot like Admiral Sarsnac. Yet he pressed on nevertheless, “All our assumptions about the Karacknids’ abilities are based on our current intel and what the Kalassai have shared with us. Yet that information is already out of date. According to the Kalassai the Karacknids haven’t met an opponent as technologically advanced as we are. We have destroyed more of their ships than they have lost in the last half century of expansion. No doubt Sarsnac is right, our most recent victories will cause the Karacknids to send more ships against us. But it may have another impact we have not foreseen; it may also force them to increase the efficiency of their economy and ship building industry. Think about the Karacknids’ mindset. Conquering new civilizations, adding new worlds and new technologies to their Empire, is what drives them. Every Karacknid is desirous to honor their Imperator, even if it comes at the cost of their death. Expanding his realm and glory is what their entire civilization exists for.

“To date, they have been able to afford to spread out and specialize their means of production to keep their conquered species from being able to revolt. But if they do not think they have that luxury anymore, if they feel they must change to not dishonor their Imperator, they may change their practices. The Karacknid Empire has a vastly superior potential when it comes to their economy. If their war with us forces them to make changes to their economic practices, they could overwhelm us even if we trapped and destroyed a significant proportion of their fleet and invaded and liberated a fifth of their Empire. With even just half the systems they control, they could streamline their economy and overwhelm us with ease. The reality is that the Karacknids are too powerful to defeat in a protracted war. Even if we get the upper hand for two or three years, we cannot take and hold half of their Empire in that time. We couldn’t even do it in five or maybe even ten years. Sooner or later, the Karacknids would expand their industries and fleets and we could end up in a worse situation than we are now. We’ve all seen how quickly they adapted to our fighters. It would be unwise to assume they will not continue to adapt in order to win this war.”

“Your words are far from comforting Emperor,” Jourm responded. “Are you saying that we cannot win this war? That we are doomed to defeat despite everything we have accomplished to date? Despite all the battles you have personally fought in and won?”

James shook his head slowly. “That is not what I am saying at all Admiral. I’m simply pointing out that we must face up to reality. A long, protracted war with the Karacknids will almost certainly end in our defeat. That is why we must try something else. We must bring this war to a conclusion, now, while we have the chance.”

Chapter 37

It is no risk to gamble what you cannot keep, to win what you could not earn.

-Excerpt from Empire Rising, 3002 AD.

“Just what are you proposing Emperor?” Jourm asked. “You speak as if you have some new miraculous technology to join with the Kulreans coming to our aid. How could we possibly end this war quickly?”

James paused for just a second as he looked around at the gathered Senators and Admirals. It was clear he had their full attention. Even Ya’sia was staring at him, confusion written across her face. “The key,” he began as he took a deep breath, “is the Karacknid Imperator… You all know we captured a high-ranking Karacknid general when we retook our Holstein colony from the Karacknids several years ago. The full details of the little information we’ve been able to get from his continued interrogation have been shared with this council. I personally met him once. Though our conversation was brief, it left a lasting impression on me. The Karacknids are devoted to their Imperator. He is like a god to them. Serving him, bringing glory to his empire, that is what drives the Karacknid fleet and all its warriors. I do not believe this war will end until the Karacknid Imperator is either killed or captured. Only then will the Karacknids stop fighting us.”

Sarsnac let out a stream of vocalizations that James could only interpret as laughter. “For a moment there, Emperor, I thought you were beginning to speak sense. Now you talk like this. The Karacknid Imperator is three thousand light years away, and you speak of capturing or killing him? How can we do that when, as you’ve just outlined, we stand next to no chance of winning this war given the power of the Karacknid empire?”

“Admiral Becket and my niece Captain Kansas have shown us the way,” James responded. Back on Earth he had realized that the Karacknids wouldn’t stop fighting until their Imperator ordered them to or was out of the picture. Exactly how such an outcome might be brought about he had had no idea. At least, he had had no more than an inkling. Thanks to Emilie, Anderson, and Ivanov he now had a more concrete plan. Though it was still a long shot. A very long shot. “The only way to get to the Imperator is to strike at the Karacknids’ home world,” James said. He spoke slowly to let each word sink in. “And that is the only way to end the war. Our analysis is correct. We cannot defeat the Karacknids in a long-term protracted war. The arrival of the Kulrean worldships gives us some momentary respite, but any strategy that involves using the worldships to defeat one or two Karacknid fleets only prolongs the war. It does not change what the eventual outcome will be. Yet we do have a window of opportunity. However, to use it properly we must take a far bolder step than we have yet discussed.

“This is what I am proposing. We use the Kulrean worldships to defend our borders while we put together as large an invasion fleet as we can. Then, instead of striking at the Karacknids here on the frontline where their fleets are concentrated, we take our fleet through the Gift. From Conclave space it is just fifteen hundred light years to the Karacknids’ home world. We could cover that distance in three and a half to four months. If we could strike all the way to the Karacknids’ homeworld we could capture the Imperator and force the Karacknids to end the war.”

Though he had much more to say, James paused to see how the council would react to his initial plans. The tension in the room, which had already been high, had risen sharply. Most of the Varanni including Jourm, Dur’ack and Carma Mashar were looking at one another. The rest of the council were dead silent as they considered James’ words. As James turned to Ya’sia, his friend was shaking her head. She was the first to speak. “Your plan is beyond bold. It is downright audacious. Though I know you well enough to know you wouldn’t bring such a suggestion without having carefully thought it through. I don’t understand why you kept it from me before today, but surely such a thing is not possible? The Karacknids know about the Conclave species’ efforts to resist them. They’ll be fortifying their border, perhaps even sending a fleet to conquer the Conclave species. How could we launch a raid into the Karacknid empire from that direction? Never mind actually pushing through their outer defenses and moving on their capital. According to the Kalassai intelligence they have a number of defensive fleets stationed within their inner systems as well as along their borders, they would all concentrate against us.”

“I did not intentionally keep it from you,” James replied. “It is only very recently that I decided to present such a plan to this council. I was not ready to discuss it until now. I only do so because I truly believe this is our only hope of victory. As to your questions. You are correct, no doubt once the Karacknids realize our true goal, they will try to concentrate their fleets against us. But we will still have the element of surprise. From everything you know about the Karacknids, do you think they will believe we would stand a chance of conquering their homeworld? Do you think they could even imagine us trying to do so?”

“No, I can’t say that they would” Ya’sia replied. “I can hardly imagine it myself.”

“Exactly,” James said as he smiled. “If we did launch another attack from Conclave space, they would simply think it another raid. By the time they figure out what is truly happening, we would be well on the way to their homeworld. The entire plan rests on us capturing their Imperator and forcing him to surrender before their fleets surround us. But I believe it can be done. It will take almost every ship we have, but this is where we are at. We must gamble everything now to win or we will lose everything in the long term.” As he finished speaking, James turned to Jourm. He was very eager to hear how the head of the Alliance High Command would respond to his suggestion.

“I do not yet know what to make of your strategy,” Jourm said as he held James’ eyes. “This meeting has taken a turn I did not expect. Though I do not disagree with what has been said. The Kulreans joining us was meant to be a moment of hope in this dark war. Yet now we are speaking of certain defeat and a strategy that would risk everything. Surely you must admit that if an attempt to conquer the Karacknids’ homeworld fails our fleet would be lost. If that would happen, every one of our systems would be left defenseless.”

James nodded. “That would be the risk we would be taking. It is an all or nothing strategy. My people would call it a Hail Mary play.”

“I’m not familiar with the term,” Jourm replied.

“It’s an all-in strategy,” James explained. “Either we win the war with this strategy, or we fail.”

“That I understand,” Jourm said as he gave James a slight bow. “And so I believe you have accurately summarized what you are proposing.”

Before anyone else could speak, James turned to Superintendent Hallock. “I’m eager to hear what you think of such an idea Superintendent,” he asked.

“Me?” Hallock responded as he turned to James, showing surprise for the first time since James had met him.

“Yes you,” James said as he bowed to Hallock. “We are only in this position, able to discuss such things, because of your help.”

“I do not know that such decisions should depend on my inexperience,” Hallock replied. “As I have stated, my ships could not accompany you on such a mission. I must confess, I do not even understand why my people coming to your aid would lead you to adopt such a strategy in the first place?”

“It is simple really,” James explained. “We’ve been on the back foot for years. Even when we tried to go on the offensive, we encountered the Karacknid battlefleet that almost conquered Earth and had to retreat. Now the arrival of your worldships has put the Karacknids on the defensive. It has bought us time. Time we can use to repair and upgrade our fleets and produce new warships. In six to eight months, we could put together a fleet of four or five thousand warships that we could strike at the Karacknids’ homeworld with. But we can only do so if we leave your worldships to defend our borders. Your people would be taking as much of a risk as ours if we attempted this. If your ships are not willing to accompany us in such a mission, then leaving them in defense is the only choice we have.”

“Now I understand why you desire my opinion,” Hallock said as he brought his hands together. “If the Karacknids on the frontline sense what is happening they could attack. My worldships could be outnumbered and destroyed. You want to know if I would order them to withdraw?”

“Yes, in part,” James replied slowly. “Or if you would reconsider and allow your worldships to accompany us on this mission. Our attack would not be aimed at raiding enemy systems or even to conquer them. We would simply be seeking to advance on the Karacknid homeworld and speak with their Imperator. Only if negotiations failed would we then attempt to capture him and use him as a bargaining chip in negotiating peace.”

Hallock gyrated his head to communicate a strong negative. “That would not be possible.”

“Then perhaps you could help us in another way,” James said much more quickly as he came to the real reason he had drawn Hallock into the discussion for. It had actually been something Emilie had suggested on the journey from Kirama. As he asked his question, James’ right foot began to tap on the floor. He could feel his whole body tensing up as he made his argument. “I understand and respect the moral position your species has taken. Not wanting to directly take the life of another sentient species is an admirable position. I wish it was one my people could embrace as well. Yet you know that certain destruction would follow if we did. The Karacknids must be opposed. If you will not help us on our frontline by fighting the Karacknids, nor on this potential mission to capture their Imperator. Perhaps you could help us in another way. One that would not require you to break the moral code you have shared with us all. But one that would give my plan a much higher chance of success.”

“I would certainly be willing to entertain such a suggestion, though I do not see how it is possible,” Hallock replied.

“If we were to attempt to launch this invasion, we would have to do so soon. In the next six months or so before the Karacknids have the time to mass enough ships along the frontline to overwhelm your worldships” James continued to explain. “Over the next six months we could put together a sizable fleet of our own. Yet it may not be strong enough to accomplish what I have in mind. My fleet has been devastated by the battles at New Shanghai and Earth. The Alliance fleet has suffered significant losses as well fighting the two Karacknid invasion fleets. Though our industries are working at maximum capacity to produce more ships, our numbers would still be lacking in six months’ time. But if your people were to help us. If the construction yards your people used to build your worldships were able to build ships for us, then we might have the strength we need to bring this war to a quick conclusion.

“If you’re willing to do this,” James went on quickly when Hallock didn’t immediately dismiss his idea out of hand, “then countless lives would be saved by ending the war prematurely. It would also keep your people from having to become directly involved in fighting the Karacknids. At the moment your worldships defend our warships while they actively fight the Karacknids. Surely it would be no different if your assistance came in the form of your people building the warships we would then use to fight the Karacknids. In either case, you are aiding us to do the killing whilst not actively pulling the trigger yourself.”

James held his breath as he saw Hallock was thinking his way through what he had just said. To him, the Kulreans’ moral position seemed untenable. If they were worried enough about their future that they were willing to build worldships and send them to help defend Allied fleets whilst the Allied fleets fired missiles that would kill Karacknids, why couldn’t the Kulreans just build their own ships that fired missiles? Yet if this was the stance the Kulreans had taken, then surely what he was suggesting was no different. What did it matter if the Kulreans built the ships that fired the missiles or simply protected the same ships that had been built elsewhere? When James glanced at Jourm and then Ya’sia he could tell they were both excited. No one knew just what kind of shipbuilding capabilities the Kulreans had, but if they were able to build ships as large as their worldships, they had to be impressive.

“Your suggestion is an intriguing one,” Hallock eventually responded. “There are a number of moral considerations that would need to be thought through. I alone could not make such a deliberation in any case. My fellow Superintendents would have to be involved in the discussion.”

“But it is not something you would rule out completely?” James asked excitedly.

“In principle no, at least not for the goals you have stated,” Hallock said. “If you were to ask us to build you fleets that you intended to use to conquer hundreds of Karacknid worlds, that might be very different. But if you were to give us your word that the ships would be used either for this one purpose or to only protect your borders, then I believe your request is worthy of further thought.”

James couldn’t help but smile as he turned to Jourm and the other Varanni Admirals around him. “I think we have already agreed that we must use this window of opportunity. Yet so far no one has come up with a viable plan to do so. Surely this is the best option we have? And there are two other factors that would also play to our benefit.”

“Go on,” Jourm requested as he leaned forward.

James nodded. “One, if we launch our invasion into Karacknid space via the Gift, the Conclave species could add their fleets to ours. In six months’ time, they could have a thousand additional modern warships to swell our numbers. And two, there’s another enemy of the Karacknids who are even more powerful. The Kalassai. They have spent centuries fleeing the Karacknids. They have done so out of fear. What if we could convince them to join us as well? With their ships and knowledge of the Karacknid Empire, our chances of success would rise even higher.”

Jourm screwed up his face in a way the Varanni did when they were thinking hard upon something. “I’m still highly skeptical,” he said eventually. “But you have made several very interesting arguments. Especially with regard to how the Kulreans could further help us. I presume you have a more detailed plan already worked out?”

James found himself smiling again, he couldn’t help but turn to Emilie knowing that she would be smiling as well. “Of course I do,” he said as he turned back to Jourm. “Let my Chief of Staff and I walk you through what we have put together. It could begin with a large feint against the Karacknid battlefleet stationed here on the frontline…” As James outlined how he foresaw his grand strategy playing out, he was delighted as more and more Admirals interrupted him to ask questions and make suggestions. They are buying into it, he thought. They are actually looking beyond how crazy it initially sounds and starting to reason things out. With his confidence growing, he tried to describe as vividly as he could how he saw things working out. Only when he came to the end did he falter. Beyond capturing and forcing the Karacknid Imperator to negotiate peace terms, he didn’t know what might come next.

Unsurprisingly, it was Admiral Sarsnac who picked up on this. “What if the Imperator refuses to negotiate with you? Or what if capturing him enrages the Karacknids all the more. Your entire plan could set them on a war frenzy rather than bring them to the negotiating table.”

“Then we would be forced to retreat,” James admitted. “We might even be forced to fight our way out of Karacknid space,” as he spoke he shot a guilty glance Hallock’s way. If it came to that, whatever ships the Kulreans might build for them could end up being used to raid Karacknid systems as they retreated. “But think about what such an endeavor would accomplish. If we got a fleet to the Karacknid’s homeworld, even if we didn’t intend to nuke it and destroy it, don’t you think they would fear we might do that? Given what they have done to us, we would be justified in doing so, would we not? Every Karacknid squadron and fleet in their Empire would rush back to their homeworld. Even if we failed to force them into talks to discuss peace terms, launching such an invasion into their space would buy us far more time and breathing space than any of the other strategies we have discussed. Heck, we could lose our entire invasion fleet and still be better off than if we were to try and attack one or two Karacknid fleets on the frontline here.”

“Whilst you may be right Emperor,” Jourm said before Sarsnac could bring up any more counterpoints. “Sarsnac has a point. Your plan is largely based on the Imperator being willing to discuss peace terms, or, if not the Imperator, then the Karacknids themselves in order to get their Imperator back. We do not know what would happen if we successfully got an invasion fleet to the Karacknids homeworld. However, I do not think that means we should rule out your proposal. It needs a lot of further discussion and battle simulations run. As I have already said, this is not where I expected this council meeting to go. Yet it is the only viable option we have come up with. It therefore deserves our full attention… In the meantime,” Jourm continued as he looked at the gathered council members, “I believe it is time to take a break. This council meeting has been scheduled for the next four days. None of us expected to come to a decision in our first session. Let us adjourn and seek refreshments and contemplate everything we have discussed. We will meet again later this evening.”

As multiple conversations broke out around the room and several aliens stood and shuffled out, James turned to Emilie. They both beamed at one another. James knew his idea was crazy. He knew it was a long way from being accepted by the council. Even if it was accepted, a great many things could go wrong before they had a chance to start to put it into practice. Yet, as crazy as his idea was, as crazy as he had sounded as he proposed and discussed it, they had passed the first hurdle. Now I just have to send a communication back to Earth explaining my idea, James thought as he was filled with dread. Christine would think he had lost his mind. As he turned to Ya’sia and found the Crian Admiral staring at him, his dread increased. Clearly Ya’sia wanted some more explanations. Tentatively he smiled at her. “Shall we look for some refreshments together? I imagine you have some more questions?”

“Indeed I do,” Ya’sia replied in a tone that told James she was still unhappy about being left out of his planning sessions with Emilie and his staff officers. “Jourm may not be familiar with a Hail Mary play, but it is one of your idioms I’ve come across. From the little I know, they rarely come off, do they not?”

James couldn’t help but chuckle. “You might have me there, old friend.” He clapped Ya’sia on the shoulder. “But my people have never tried a Hail Mary attempt where a genius Crian military tactician helped put the play together.”

Ya’sia shook her head as she couldn’t help but smile. “I’ve always thought you were crazy. You, Lightfoot, Becket and all your other Human commanders. But you’ve taken things to a completely new level with this idea.”

“Do we have any other choice?” James countered. “My people’s history is full of crazy strategies that have won wars that looked all but lost. Let me tell you about a guy called Gideon.” As they both stood, James threw himself into the story of how one tiny army destroyed a far larger one. When he was done, he pulled up other stories from Earth’s history. Each one sounded more audacious than the last. But that was the point. Sometimes the least expected strategy was what won the day.

Chapter 38

That fateful council held on Varanni Prime at the height of the War of Doom could have gone many ways. That it went the way it did has sent ripple effects down though the centuries that touch even us today.

-Excerpt from Empire Rising, 3002 AD.

Varanni Prime, 14th September 2484 AD (two weeks later).

“I wouldn’t have imagined I’d be saying this just two weeks ago,” James said as he stood with Ya’sia on the shuttle landing pads outside the High Command buildings. “But I’m not saddened at all to be leaving.”

“I know how you feel,” Ya’sia agreed. “Normally visiting Varanni Prime is a pleasure, despite the circumstances. The planet is simply breath-taking. I’m sure we’d feel different if we’d been able to see more of it.”

“Perhaps,” James replied, though he wasn’t so sure. The past two weeks had been as grueling as any he remembered. Every day the council had met to discuss and debate different strategies. Then he and many of the other Admirals had retired to spend hours in the battle simulators simming multiple strategies and fighting as many different battles as they could imagine the strategies might throw up. To everyone’s amazement, even James’, his strategy had won out in the end. At least, the long-term projections of the war confirmed that no matter how much damage they might do to the nearby Karacknid fleets, it wouldn’t be enough to really increase their chances of victory. That ruled out every other proposed strategy bar James’. Of course, the final decision was far from made. Yet the council had decided to begin operational planning for the mission. That was why James, Ya’sia and many other council members were on the shuttle landing pads now. They were dispersing to carry out their responsibilities and begin their preparations. “I hope things go well for you,” James said as he reached out and placed a hand on Ya’sia’s shoulder. “I don’t envy the task you have ahead of you. But your people could not be in better hands. Do not hesitate to let us know if there’s any help we can send from Earth.”

“Thank you my friend,” Ya’sia said as she pulled James into a hug. “I will miss you.”

“And I you,” James replied as they broke apart. “Take care of yourself.”

“As I hope you will too,” Ya’sia said with a smile. “I’m not the one heading off to confront a Karacknid High Admiral without a fleet at my back.” James wanted to laugh and assure Ya’sia they would be fine, but he wasn’t so sure. She was giving voice to the underlying fears he had been wrestling with. “Say hello to Empress Christine for me,” Ya’sia asked, saving him from the need to reply to her initial comment.

“Of course I will,” James said as he returned Ya’sia’s smile. “She’ll be disappointed you haven’t returned to resume command of your ships in our space.”

“They will be fine without me,” Ya’sia said with a wave of her hand. “I’m needed elsewhere for now, and I’m sure High Command will have a new fleet for me soon.”

James nodded. “I’m sure they will.” Ya’sia was going to Kirama to help oversee the damage control and reconstruction efforts. She’d probably only be needed for a month or two. By then High Command was bound to have put together a new fleet for her to command, or even freed up a position in one of their current fleets. A fleet commander of her caliber couldn’t be kept on the side-lines for long, even if one of her species’ planets had been nuked. “Good luck,” he said as he held out his hand to Ya’sia.

“And to you,” Ya’sia replied as they shook hands, then she turned and moved towards her shuttle.

James watched her go for several seconds then turned to look for the next person he needed to say goodbye to. When he spotted her, he moved towards his niece. “Are you ready to depart Captain?” he asked in a formal tone from just a couple of steps behind Emilie. He smiled when she jumped and quickly spun around. She half raised a hand as if she was going to slap him, but then remembered she was surrounded by foreign dignitaries and Admirals. It made James smile. Emilie was looking a lot better. Her hair was growing back and though there were still far more worry lines on her forehead helping him plan the invasion of Karacknid space had given her a new task to focus on. It hadn’t removed the loss she felt because of Intrepid’s destruction, but it had helped.

“That was mean uncle,” Emilie pouted. “Sneaking up on people isn’t supposed to be in the job description of Emperor.” She half turned towards one of the only two Kulrean shuttles on the shuttle pads. “As to when we are leaving, that’s a question for Captain Ninrold,” Emilie said as she gave Ninrold a slight bow.

“My ship is ready for the trip Emperor,” Ninrold said to James, my shuttle will be taking us up to Nebula as soon as I speak to Superintendent Hallock.

“Then if you don’t mind, I’ll take a few moments with my niece,” James replied.

“Of course,” Ninrold replied. James gave the worldship Captain a small bow as she turned and walked away. Nebula had arrived at Varanni Prime two days ago with news from the front. The worldships that had been dispatched to confront the second Karacknid invasion fleet had linked up with the Alliance fleet opposing them. Together they had won a significant victory and forced the Karacknids to retreat. Nine hundred Karacknid warships had been destroyed at the cost of just fifty-six Alliance ships. Others had been damaged but they could all be repaired. Perhaps the most significant loss, strategically at least, had been the damage Nebula had suffered. She would have to return to Kulthar for repairs. The council had decided to turn a problem into an opportunity, however. Given her intimate experience with the Kalassai, Emilie had been given the task of finding them once again and requesting their help in the Alliance’s attempt to conquer the Karacknid homeworld. The repairs Nebula needed were estimated to only take a couple of weeks. Even with the time it would take to reach Kulthar, carry out the repairs and then head to the Gift, Nebula was the fastest way Emilie could get to the wormhole. And with her advanced sensors and speed through shift space, Nebula would give Emilie the best chance of finding the Kalassai again. Not to mention, it was hoped the presence of Nebula would give the Kalassai courage.

“Now,” James said as he turned back to Emilie. “Give your uncle a hug. Who knows when we will see each other again?”

“I’m sure it won’t be that long,” Emilie said dismissively, though she held James tightly for several seconds, nonetheless.

“Just don’t get too used to all this fancy technology and super speeds,” James said as he let Emilie go. “I’m sure we’ll have a ship for you as soon as you’re back. Maybe even a squadron for you to command. You’ve been an acting Commodore before, I’ve a mind to make it permanent.”

“Let me just focus on finding the Kalassai first,” Emilie replied as she looked down. “That’s going to be hard enough. Who knows what will be going on with them when I do.”

James nodded. He knew there were some secrets Emilie had not shared with anyone about the Kalassai. Things they had sworn her to secrecy about. There were other things that she had only been able to tell him. What he did know suggested Emilie was going to be walking into a difficult situation if she did find the Kalassai again. Their species had been split between those who wanted to stand up to the Karacknids and those who wanted to keep running and hiding. There was no way to know if one side or the other had won out, or if the ideological battles were still ongoing. In part, that was why James had suggested Ninrold and Nebula be the ones to take Emilie to the Kalassai. James hoped that if they saw the Kulrean worldship it might encourage the Kalassai to stand up to their old foe. “Just don’t do anything too foolhardy and you’ll be fine,” James assured Emilie. “You found them once before and they trust you. They are not fools. Once you explain to them what we are going to attempt, they’ll know it’s the best chance they will ever have to stop the Karacknids from hunting them.”

“We shall see,” Emilie replied.

James nodded, he knew Emilie was far from confident that she could do what the council had asked, yet she was willing to try. That was enough for him “I’ll say hello to Alvarez when I see him,” James said as he changed the subject. “Is there a message you’d like me to pass on to him?” He grinned and held up his hands. “I only pass on handshakes though.”

Emilie rolled her eyes, though her cheeks stayed red. “I’ve sent him plenty of letters via the tachyon pulse generator. Just be nice to him if you see him.”

“I’m always nice,” James said, filling his voice with false hurt. “It’s not like I’d use my position as Emperor to intimidate him or anything. He hasn’t sworn allegiance to me and promised to obey my every command… Or wait, maybe he has,” James said as he flashed Emilie a grin.

Emilie rolled her eyes again. “Just give me another hug uncle and let me get going. I’m sure Hallock and the others are waiting for you as well.”

“Okay, okay, I relent,” James said as he gladly welcomed another hug.

“Don’t worry, I’ll stay safe,” Emilie promised. “And you can give Jonathan a cuddle from me.”

“Gladly,” James said with a grin. He waved to Emilie as he took a few steps back and watched her move over to Ninrold. After she waved back the two of them turned to ascend the ramp to their shuttle. James watched until Emilie was out of sight then turned to head towards the other Kulrean shuttle on the landing pad. With a sigh, he let his worries for Emilie go and moved towards a larger group of aliens who were standing speaking to one another. He wasn’t done with his farewells yet.

“Emperor Somerville,” Admiral Jourm said as James stepped up to the large group of Admirals and Senators. “Have you made your final preparations?”

“I have,” James replied. “I’m ready to depart if Hallock and Carma Mashar are.”

“I’m sure you’re eager to get home and to see your family again, even if this hasn’t been your longest deployment since the beginning of the war,” Jourm commented.

“I certainly am,” James agreed as he glanced at Hallock. “Leaving your homeworld is always a sad experience, but no planet, not one even as beautiful as Varanni Prime, can compete with one’s loved ones. Though I doubt we will have time to visit the Sol system until after we find the Karacknid High Admiral.”

“No, indeed not. That must be your priority,” Jourm responded. He lowered his voice. “The sooner the High Admiral rejects Hallock’s offer of negotiations, the sooner we can get on with our preparations.”

James nodded. The council had decided that he and Carma Mashar would accompany Hallock to attempt to open negotiations with the Karacknids. It had been deemed that the commander of the battlefleet who had invaded New Shanghai was the best commander to attempt to make contact with. Given that he commanded the largest Karacknid fleet, it made sense that he was the most senior enemy commander on the front lines. James was eager to get going for the sooner they left, the sooner he would get back to Earth and the sooner the plans the council had agreed on for the invasion of Karacknid space could begin. For if, or rather, as James also thought, when the negotiations failed, that would be the signal to put his plan into motion in earnest. “With luck, it will take no more than a few hours to show Hallock that the Karacknids are not open to considering a ceasefire. With Stargazer’s speed, we should be able to find them and return in weeks.”

Jourm made a hand gesture showing his agreement. “Just make sure you don’t let Hallock take any unnecessary risks in pursuit of peace,” he said, still speaking quietly. “The three of you are very important to our war effort. We cannot risk losing you. Especially not now.”

James gave Jourm a reassuring smile. “Don’t worry, with Stargazer’s speed, sensors and stealth abilities, I don’t think we’ll encounter too many problems. I have even less of a desire for us to take any unnecessary risks than you do. We’ll be careful.”

“I should hope so,” Admiral Dur’ack said as he moved close enough to hear what Jourm and James were speaking about. “You’re the one who has come up with this crazy idea. I want you there in the midst of it when it begins. You can’t set us all in this path and then leave us to walk it alone.”

James couldn’t help but chuckle. “I’ll do my best Admiral. But this is war, I can’t make any promises.”

“No, and nor should we,” Jourm responded as he nodded to Dur’ack. “Even with the Kulrean worldships, our defenses will be spread thin. We need to take care as well.”

“We all should,” James agreed as he nodded. Jourm and Dur’ack were also departing Varanni Prime. They were going to tour the frontlines and assess the condition of the Alliance fleet. Orders had been sent to the front to further split up the Kulrean worldships. There were simply too many systems the Karacknid invasion fleets threatened to cover them all. Even though the Karacknids had retreated, most of their fleets were still intact enough to pose a serious threat. As other Admirals moved closer, James sensed he and Jorum’s moment of intimacy was over. He bowed deeply to Jourm and then Dur’ack. “It has been a pleasure working with you both these last two weeks. Hopefully our two trips are over quickly and we can begin organizing all that we must if we are to attempt this herculean task.”

“Though I wouldn’t quite describe it as a pleasure,” Jourm said, a hint of Varanni amusement on his voice. “It has been interesting. Crazy scheme or no, you’re quite the commander. This war would have been lost already if not for your skills. Hopefully we can put together the fleet we will need to accomplish what you have in mind.”

“And if not, at least we can fall back to our backup options,” Dur’ack said. “Farewell for now Emperor.”

James gave each Admiral one final nod and turned to speak to the other Admirals and Senators who had gathered to see him, Carma Mashar and Hallock off. Each of them had their own tasks to do, though most wouldn’t have to leave Varanni Prime. Over the next six months preparations would be made all across Alliance and Human colonies for one of the eventualities. Either James’ idea of an attack into Karacknid space via the Gift wormhole would be attempted, or a series of smaller attacks along the frontline of Alliance space would be undertaken. In either case, it would require thousands of Human and Alliance ships to go on the offensive for a period of six months or longer. The logistical demands of such an operation would be greater than anything any of the allies had yet attempted. It was going to take the combined efforts of all their worlds to pull off. That meant everyone had a key role to play.

After several minutes of small talk James made his way to the rear access ramp of the Kulrean shuttle. Hallock and Carma Mashar were already there speaking to each other. “You have said your goodbyes?” James asked Carma Mashar as he stepped up beside her.

“Yes,” the Varanni Senator replied. “It has been quite a while since I last left Varanni Prime. I’ve never been outside Alliance space before. This will be quite the trip.”

“Then I am glad I can accompany you,” James said with a smile. “It will be my pleasure to show you around Earth once we have finished speaking with the Karacknid commander. Though I’m afraid it’s not quite as beautiful as your homeworld.”

“Even if not, it will have a beauty all of its own,” Carma Mashar assured him. “And it is your homeworld that has given us you and your species. Without you both, we would have already lost this war. That in and of itself will give me more than enough to appreciate.”

“Shall we proceed then?” James suggested as he turned to Hallock. “If everything is ready?”

“Indeed, we were just waiting for you Emperor,” Hallock replied.

“Then let us say our final farewell,” Carma Mashar said. Together James, Hallock and Carma Mashar bowed to the gathered High Council members and then they turned and headed up the shuttle’s access ramp. Their work on Varanni Prime was finished. Unless the Karacknids suddenly decided to surrender, James had got what he had come for. Though even he was still not sure if that was a good thing or not.

Chapter 39

Seeking peace is always a noble quest, even if it may be a foolhardy one.

-Excerpt from Empire Rising, 3002 AD.

Stargazer, Jaranna, 20th October 2484 AD (five weeks later).

As Stargazer silently slipped into the Jaranna system, a number of emotions washed over James. The system was the home system of the Mindus civilization. Even a cursory glance at their homeworld reminded James, as if he needed reminding, of the fate that awaited all Human and Alliance worlds if the Karacknids won. The system was where he had first fought the Karacknids. Alongside an Alliance fleet, he had come to help the Mindus when the Karacknids had been attempting to conquer their homeworld. Their failure that day had started the war with the Karacknids. More powerful than the guilt he felt for those failures, was his sense of sadness. Jaranna was where Georgia Gupta had died. She had sacrificed herself to allow her fleet to escape. Georgia had been his closest friend. Now there was nothing left of her, not even a small cloud of debris where her ship had been destroyed.

“We have found them,” one of Stargazer’s Lieutenants reported, pulling James out of his thoughts.

On the massive holo display that dominated Stargazer’s bridge, hundreds and then thousands of new contacts appeared. Most were in orbit around Jaranna. When the count finally stopped rising at six thousand seven hundred, James knew the Lieutenant had been right. They had found the Karacknid battlefleet. Seconds later one ship at the heart of the enemy formation began to flash. It was the Karacknid commander’s massive dreadnought. Nearly half as big again as any of the other dreadnoughts in the Karacknid fleet. He is here, James thought. And he has been reinforced again. Stargazer had met up with Vengeance on their way to Jaranna. He knew all about the short sharp battle Lightfoot had fought against the Karacknids to drive them out of New Shanghai. It seemed the Karacknids had already made good the losses they had suffered there.

“Thirty scouts detected so far, no sign that they have detected us,” another Lieutenant reported.

James pulled his eyes away from the massive Karacknid fleet to the end of the shift passage Stargazer had just jumped out of. There were indeed thirty Karacknid ships actively patrolling the shift passage. “There’ll be more hidden in stealth,” he warned.

“Keep us here until we locate them,” Hallock ordered.

Over the following twenty minutes, more than a hundred additional Karacknid warships were detected by Stargazer’s sophisticated sensors. “Do you think you have them all?” Carma Mashar asked from where she sat on Stargazer’s bridge.

“There’s no way to be sure,” Hallock replied. “But I suspect so. In any case, we will not take any risks.” He turned to Stargazer’s navigation officer. “Plot us a course to stay well out of their detection ranges. Take us in Lieutenant.”

Though James was well used to the worldship’s capabilities by now, his nerves grew as Stargazer moved forward. Despite his concerns, the Kulrean navigation officer deftly moved his ship through the Karacknid patrols. There wasn’t even a twitch from any of the Karacknid ships to indicate that their sensors had detected something suspicious. Just half an hour after setting out, Hallock felt confident enough to order the worldship to increase its velocity. Quickly they left the Karacknid ships far astern. In just an hour, Stargazer crossed the system to a point where she was almost close enough to communicate with the Karacknid battlefleet in real time. Then, as James had advised, six modified probes were launched from the worldship. They each moved into two-way communication range and then powered down all their non-essential systems. Essentially, they became black holes in space. Stargazer’s laser COM array flashed each of them to make sure they could detect the transmissions Hallock would be sending. When they confirmed receiving the signals, everything was in place.

“It seems we are ready to proceed,” Hallock said as he moved to stand beside James and Carma Mashar.

“Then it is over to you,” James commented. “Just make sure you are careful with what you say.” For the past several weeks he and Carma Mashar had had lengthy conversations with Hallock about how to approach negotiations with the Karacknids. One thing that James had tried to press upon Hallock was the need to protect sensitive pieces of information. If the negotiations failed, James wanted the Karacknids to know as little as possible about the Kulrean worldships or the strength of the Allied fleets.

“I will,” Hallock promised. “But we must give these negotiations a real chance. Too many lives are at stake not to.”

“We will be ready to join in if the Karacknid commander is willing to speak to us,” Carma Mashar assured Hallock. James nodded and held his breath as Hallock gestured to one of his Lieutenants. The next few moments were going to be interesting, to say the least.

“Begin with the pre-recorded transmission,” Hallock ordered.

*

Slayer, Jaranna system

High Admiral Tanaka-lan was deep in thought. He was in his personal quarters staring up at a large holo map of Alliance and Human space. Beside him were several datapads with the latest reports on his fleets and the expected reinforcement schedules. He had also pulled together information on every Karacknid squadron larger than a couple of ships within four hundred light years of the frontline. The sudden appearance of so many powerful alien ships had thrown off all his plans. He hadn’t even managed to complete the conquest of Human space, never mind strike at the Alliance’s weak flank. Just days ago, reports had come from the front line with Alliance space, both of his secondary invasion fleets had been turned back by the new alien ships. Just yesterday he had been forced to send word back to the Imperator. He couldn’t keep the recent developments a secret forever. Yet he had no intention of just sitting still and letting the new alien ships overwhelm him. He already sent orders for many of the systems along Alliance space to be abandoned. He’d pull back his fleets to shorten his frontline and condense his forces. He already knew how to beat the alien worldships, it was just a matter of numbers.

As long as they don’t attack in the next few months, we will have those numbers, Tanaka-lan thought. Less than twelve hours ago he had dispatched one hundred frigates from the system. They would quickly spread throughout the nearby colonies. Every warship on border patrol or escorting freighters within three hundred light years of Jaranna would soon be headed to join him. Still more will be needed, Tanaka-lan mused as he stared at the holo map. His scouts had confirmed that half of the Kulrean ships that had driven him away from Earth hadn’t been seen again in Human space. They had to be the ships that had appeared in Alliance space and driven back his fleet there. The speed at which they had covered the distance was alarming but it told him something very important. The new alien ships were limited in number. They couldn’t be everywhere at once. Which means we just have to strike where they are not, Tanaka-lan concluded. Once he had the numbers, he could launch multiple attacks. It would take time to pull the Kulrean ships here and there, but he was confident he could pull them out of position and then strike at a weakened Alliance fleet or world. The war had taken a dramatic shift, he couldn’t deny that. He now had no hope that he could end it quickly but a war of attrition was still one he could win. He had sent assurances of that fact to the Imperator.

The sudden blaring from his COM unit tore Tanaka-lan away from the strategy he was considering. “Report?” he demanded at once. The tone of the alarm told him it was urgent.

“We’ve just received a transmission from a Kulrean calling himself Superintendent Hallock. He wishes to speak with you directly High Admiral,” one of Slayer’s bridge officers reported quickly.

“Where is the communication coming from?” Tanaka-lan asked as he sat up straight.

“We haven’t located the exact point, but it’s less than half a light second away.”

“Impossible!” Tanaka-lan couldn’t help but splutter. “It is some kind of trick! Identify the real source of the communication. I’m coming to the bridge immediately.” Clicking off the COM channel, he rushed out of his quarters. His claws were fully extended as he entered the bridge. “Well?” he growled as he moved towards his command chair.

“We’ve narrowed the source of the COM message to this sector of space,” a Lieutenant reported as a small area of space well within weapons range of his fleet was highlighted. “We can’t detect what is giving off the transmission, but we triangulated the position with our other ships and scouts. There has to be something there.”

“Send the fleet to battle stations. Order a frigate to that location immediately,” Tanaka-lan ordered. “And show me this transmission.”

Moments later a holo image of an alien appeared in front of Tanaka-lan. Though he had only seen one of its species before, he recognized it immediately. A Kulrean. He growled. “Greetings Karacknid commander,” the alien said as its mouth moved strangely in Tanaka-lan’s eyes. “I have come to request an audience with you. I wish to discuss the recent developments in your invasion of Human and Alliance space. I do not intend to cause harm to you or your ships. I hope you will agree to do the same and then we can speak face to face. Please reply to this message with a broad-spectrum communication and I will receive it.”

As soon as it was done, the recording started to play again. Tanaka-lan growled again as he turned to his sensor officer. “Have you located the transmission yet?”

“Meteor is entering the area now High Admiral. I am awaiting a report from her.” The officer answered.

“Stop that thing,” Tanaka-lan ordered as he waved a clawed hand towards the holo image of the Kulrean. As he waited, his anger faded and he started to think. He knew the Kulrean ships were very hard to detect. They had all but snuck right up on him in the Sol system. Yet there was no way a ship the size of the ones he had seen was in the sector of space his Lieutenants had identified. A probe of some sort, he realized. It’s relaying the recording to us. That made sense. As impressive as the Kulrean ships were, it would be suicide to bring one so close to his fleet. Unless their entire fleet is here, he thought next. “Launch a shell of recon drones. I want every sector of this system searched immediately. Dispatch a third of our frigates and destroyers to carry out enhanced patrols as well.” Tanaka-lan knew such drastic actions would seem desperate to his subordinates, but he wasn’t willing to risk his fleet. Not after the things he had seen the Kulrean ships do. The question is has the signal just come from a drone the Kulreans have sent here, or is this Hallock actually hiding in the system somewhere? And is his offer genuine? The only other Kulrean he had seen had been in the New Shanghai system. There the Captain of the Kulrean ship had sought to open negotiations with him. Perhaps it is a trait of their species, Tanaka-lan thought. Since retreating from Earth, he had sought to access all the information his species had on the Kulreans. What little he had been able to gather had been centuries old. Strangely, no advance Karacknid scout ship had been able to penetrate deep into the Kulrean system. As such, little had been discovered about them except that they were an advanced race. Another nearby species had been seeded with advanced weapons technologies in the hope that they would try to conquer the Kulreans. Clearly that had failed. Even with the technologies they have, they’ve never sought to colonize another system. Maybe they do not believe in expansion. Which means they may have very different views of war and conquest. Though he didn’t want to see it again, Tanaka-lan replayed the alien’s message in his mind. Perhaps the alien really did want to speak to him.

“We’ve found it!” Slayer’s sensor officer announced excitedly. “Meteor has it on her sensors. It’s a small spherical probe. No more than a few meters in diameter. Meteor had to get within three thousand kilometers of it to pick it up.”

“Order her not to get any closer,” Tanaka-lan said quickly. He was too late though, moments later Slayer’s sensors picked up a tiny energy discharge. Tanaka-lan didn’t need to hear Meteor’s report to know that the probe had self-destructed.

“We’re picking up another transmission,” COM Lieutenant announced seconds later. “It’s the same message. It’s coming from another sector of space less than half a light second away.”

Another probe, Tanaka-lan was sure. “Send Meteor in to investigate. Tell her not to get within five thousand kilometers if she can. Inform her I expect her to find this probe from such a distance now that she knows what she’s looking for.”

“The message has just changed,” the same Lieutenant informed him.

“Let me see it,” Tanaka-lan requested reluctantly. He was starting to get tired of the alien’s schemes.

“Karacknid commander,” the alien said formally. “I am willing to reveal myself and speak to you directly if you will assure safe passage for my ship and its crew. I’m speaking to you via these probes so as not to start a physical conflict between your ships and mine. Their presence so close to your world was not meant to cause alarm or suspicion. Please respond to my request to open discussions.”

When the message had replayed once, it disappeared from the holo display. Tanaka-lan’s officers clearly sensed his mood. Bringing a hand up to scratch his jaw, Tanaka-lan was careful to make sure his claws stayed sheathed. It wouldn’t do to embarrass himself in front of his officers, despite how angry he was. If they were going to attack, they would have done so by now, he reasoned. There’s no need for these games, they’ve shown us their stealth tech is very competent. If they are not going to attack, perhaps something can be learned by speaking to them. Though he had come to a decision, Tanaka-lan hesitated for a second. Never before had a Karacknid commander opened negotiations with an enemy warship. At least none that involved anything other than a demand for immediate surrender. “I am retiring to my quarters, set up a laser COM link to the sector of space the new transmission is coming from. I want the COM channel locked for my personal use only. Don’t fire on any alien ships without my express command.”

“Yes High Admiral,” Slayer’s COM officer responded at once.

Tanaka-lan grunted as he stood. All his officers would know he was going to speak to the alien, he couldn’t hide that fact. But they would not know what was about to be said except for what he would share with them. Which means the Imperator will only ever find out what I want him to know, Tanaka-lan hoped. His life was already in danger because of his retreat from Earth. If the Imperator began to suspect, even for a second, that he spoke to the enemy as an equal, it would bring such shame on the Imperator that Tanaka-lan’s death would be ordered at once. Yet any discussions he had with this Superintendent Hallock would have to be as equals. It was the only way he would be able to gather any intelligence from the alien.

Choosing to stand when he entered his office, Tanaka-lan activated his COM unit. “Superintendent Hallock, my name is High Admiral Tanaka-lan. I command all forces engaged in the war with your species and your allies. Why are you here?”

It took just moments for the alien to reply. “Greetings High Admiral,” Hallock said as he bowed deeply towards Tanaka-lan. “Thank you for being willing to speak with me. Are you willing to grant my ship safe passage?”

“I’ll grant you nothing but this,” Tanaka-lan replied. “For as long as this conversation continues, my ships will not open fire on yours. After that, I make no promises.”

“Very well then,” Hallock said more slowly. “I will come straight to the point. My species had no desire to intervene in this war you have started with the Humans and the Varanni. We have no desire to be involved in any war. However, you destroyed one of our ships which we sent to try to negotiate with you. In response, my people decided to send more ships to help protect our neighbors. I am here now to attempt to open peace negotiations with your species. Surely we can agree a ceasefire? Many thousands of ships and hundreds of thousands of lives have been lost and yet your species has nothing to show for their attempted conquest. This conflict should now be settled at the negotiating table rather than with further bloodshed.”

Tanaka-lan almost trembled as he fought to keep his emotions in check. He wanted to laugh in derision at the alien in front of him. With the help of these Kulreans the Humans and Varanni Alliance had driven back three of his fleets. They should have come to him as the victor demanding his surrender, instead Hallock was all but groveling at his feet. That told Tanaka-lan plenty. There was no way the Kulreans would be acting in this way if they had the strength to follow up their recent successes with an attack into Karacknid territory. They have already accomplished all they can, Tanaka-lan decided. “You’re right in at least one thing,” he said carefully as he fought to hide his scorn. “Many lives have been lost. But those of my people who have died have died serving our Imperator. If millions more must die, they will all do so willingly. We do not shy away from the cost of glory. So why should we agree a ceasefire with you and your allies?”

“Because you do not have the strength to overcome my ships,” Hallock answered. “And when the Human and Varanni warships are added to mine, we do have the strength to destroy yours. This war has reached a conclusion. Why not agree a ceasefire and allow both sides to find a compromise that we will all be happy with?”

Again Tanaka-lan had to fight not to laugh. There would never be a peace where both sides would be happy. The Imperator would settle for nothing but total conquest. “What terms do you have in mind?” he asked to hide his real feelings.

This time, there were several seconds of delay before Hallock replied. “I have Emperor Somerville, leader of the Human species and Senator Carma Mashar of the Varanni Alliance here with me. They have both been authorized to negotiate with you on behalf of their peoples. Are you willing to speak to them about this matter?”

Tanaka-lan’s claws emerged several centimeters from their sheaths despite his attempts to keep them hidden. He had never heard of the Senator, but Emperor Somerville was one of the enemy’s best commanders. And he’s in this system, right under my guns, Tanaka-lan thought as he gnashed his teeth. “I will speak with them,” he said as neutrally as possible.

Moments later two more aliens appeared on the holo display. Neither the Human nor the Varanni made an effort to bow or show any other sign of respect. Instead, the Varanni started to speak. “High Admiral, I am Senator Carma Mashar. If you’re willing to enter negotiations in good faith, then the first thing we would propose is a one month ceasefire. We can send word back to our fleets of this decision as you could yours. Then we could try to come to terms that we can both agree upon.”

“I’m not willing to agree to anything until I hear what kind of terms you have in mind,” Tanaka-lan replied. “The Karacknid Empire has never negotiated with its enemies. If I am to do so now, I must have an idea of what I’m entering into.”

The Varanni turned ever so slightly towards the Human. When the Human nodded slowly, the Varanni turned back to him. “We are transmitting you a star map. This is what we would propose.”

When the image in front of Tanaka-lan changed to show the local sector of space, he went silent as he studied it. What he saw made several shivers run down his spine. The Varanni Alliance and Humans actually wanted him to pull his fleets back! They were proposing to keep all the systems they currently held. In addition, they wanted a demilitarized zone between their space and Karacknid territory. The demilitarized zone essentially covered what had once been the Mindus civilization’s space. They wish us to free all the Mindus we have conquered, Tanaka-lan growled to himself. What fools! “Why do you think I would agree to such a suggestion?” he asked. “Why would I give up worlds that now belong to my Imperator?”

“Those worlds are not yours,” Carma Mashar responded. “Your fleets are on the back foot. Our forces are poised to continue our advance and drive your fleets from these systems. We are giving you the chance to surrender them now without any more loss of life.”

This time Tanaka-lan couldn’t help but burst out into laughter. “If you had the ships to do what you threaten, you would be doing it right now instead of trying to end this war by talking. No, you will not threaten me. I have no fear of your fleets. Your presence here today has assured me of that. Let me give you my terms. Each of your species will surrender their homeworld to Karacknid occupation. Your fleets will surrender their ships to me and your ground armies will lay down their weapons. In return we will leave your other colonies to themselves. They may trade with one another and in time with the Karacknid Empire. Accept these terms now and you will save your colonies from conquest and destruction.”

“We could never accept those terms,” Carma Mashar replied as her voice rose. “They are impossible.”

Tanaka-lan hesitated as he considered if it was worth trying to string out the discussions any further. He felt he had already learnt enough. The sudden appearance of the Kulreans had shifted the balance of power yes, but it was only a momentary shift. Already the Humans and Varanni Alliance had lost their nerve. He had nothing to fear from them. As soon as he had the ships he needed, he would resume the offensive. “In that case, there’s nothing else for us to discuss. That is, unless the Kulreans wish to accept an alternative offer. Superintendent Hallock, if you pull your ships back to your home system then there will be no reprisals for what your ships have done over these last several months.”

“You have not entered these negotiations in good faith,” Hallock replied looking angry for the first time. “I see that now. You insult my friends by demanding they surrender their homeworlds to you. If I pulled my ships back from defending their territories, then you would conquer them. I have no doubt that you would then disregard what we might agree today and come for my homeworld.”

Tanaka-lan smiled, showing his enemies his razor-sharp teeth. “Perhaps you’re not as foolish as your attempt to come here and speak to me makes you appear. At least, perhaps you are able to learn from your mistakes. You’re right, there will be no peace,” Tanaka-lan bellowed, his voice growing louder and louder, “All of your systems will fall to the Karacknid empire. The Imperator will rule over you all!”

“Then my ships will continue to defend the borders of our neighbors!” Hallock retorted.

Hallock’s words made Tanaka-lan freeze. He had been about to cut the COM channel. Suddenly though, everything made sense. “Continue to defend the borders of your neighbors,” he repeated back to Hallock as he thought through this sentence. He fixed his eyes on Hallock. “Is that all your ships are prepared to do? You will only defend their borders, not invade mine? Is that why you are here? Your threat of an invasion is a bluff. You’re just trying to trick me into accepting defeat?” His smile widened and he made no effort to hide the drool that ran down his teeth and over his lips. He let out a deep belly laugh. “I was wrong. You are an even greater fool than I thought. And now, these discussions are over! Along with my promise to not fire upon your ship.” Tanaka-lan reached over and ended the COM channel. Then he moved as fast as he could to Slayer’s bridge. “The battlefleet will break orbit, there is a Kulrean worldship somewhere nearby. They’ve been communicating with those probes in real time. I want every ship searching for them.” He ordered. Carma Mashar, Hallock and Somerville, you will soon be my prisoners. And then your worlds will follow, Tanaka-lan thought gleefully. Now that he knew he had no need to fear the Kulrean ships invading his space, he was even more certain of victory.

*

James couldn’t help but turn to Carma Mashar as High Admiral Tanaka-lan mocked them. Hallock had said too much in his anger. He hadn’t really given away anything. Nevertheless, Tanaka-lan had heard enough to jump to a conclusion. One that happened to be exactly right. His look told Carma Mashar something he had said to the Senator several times during their trip to Jaranna. In the battles James had fought against the Commander of the Karacknid battlefleet, he had come to realize that the Karacknid was the most capable strategist the Karacknids had sent against them. Now James had a name to put to the reputation Tanaka-lan. And he now knows about the Kulreans’ unwillingness to go on the offensive. Before James could warn Hallock not to say anything more, or even reply to Tanaka-lan’s insults, the COM channel ended. Carma Mashar and James shared another look. “We have to get out of here! At once!” James shouted.

Before anyone could respond, alarms went off from several consoles around Stargazer’s bridge. “Every Karacknid warship is powering up its engines,” a Lieutenant called.

“They are breaking orbit,” another reported.

“He thinks he can catch us,” James said as he turned to face Superintendent Hallock. “He wants to capture or kill us.”

Hallock’s face looked as tense as James had ever seen it. “There truly is no negotiating with someone like that,” he said quietly.

“No there is not,” James agreed as he pointed up at the holo display. “That is how this Tanaka-lan wishes to negotiate. With anti-ship missiles and energy beams. We need to get moving Superintendent.” Though James would never have pictured himself doing such a thing, he reached out and placed a hand on Hallock’s shoulder and turned him to face the holo display. “They intend to surround us if they can.”

For a couple of seconds Hallock stared at the holo display. Then he stood up straighter. “You’re right. You were always right about them. Well, they will not catch us today.” He turned to Stargazer’s navigation officer. “Get us out of here. There’s no need for stealth now.”

“Yes Captain,” the navigation officer replied. James caught a hint of excitement in the Kulrean’s voice. As soon as the navigation officer’s fingers danced over his command terminal, Stargazer came alive. Within seconds she accelerated at rates no Karacknid warship could hope to match. Her acceleration gave away her position to every ship in the system that had a gravimetric sensor. Yet it made almost no difference. As expected, every Karacknid ship altered course as it sought to close with Stargazer. None from the battlefleet in orbit around Jaranna were able to get close enough to fire any missiles, however. Several of the ships that were further out along the edges of the system managed to get close enough as Stargazer zipped past them. However, as each fired one or two salvos, they were easily swatted away by Stargazer’s point defenses. Then, long before any Karacknid warship could jump into shift space, Stargazer disappeared from the Karacknid warships’ sensors.

As soon as they were safe, James shared another glance with Carma Mashar. They nodded to one another. The negotiations had failed as they had expected. It was far from ideal that Tanaka-lan had guessed the Kulrean worldships wouldn’t be used to launch any attacks into Karacknid territory. Yet he would have figured that out sooner rather than later anyway. More pressing on both their minds was the reality that they were now committed to James’ plan. Tanaka-lan’s threats made the gravity of the situation all the more real. All of their homeworlds would be conquered if they couldn’t bring a swift end to the war.

Epilogue

Imperial Palace, Earth, 11th November 2484 AD (three weeks later).

For the first time since James stepped foot off the Kulrean shuttle, he found himself alone in the Palace’s ornate reception room. Christine had thrown an extravagant welcoming party for Carma Mashar and Hallock. After the initial welcoming ceremony, they had all sat down to a meal. Over a hundred guests had been invited. For the last hour and a half James had been assaulted by well-wishers in the reception room they had retired to after the meal. Caught off guard by the sudden silence, he glanced around the large reception room. There were no Senators, Commoners or Servants moving to speak to him. He’d answered endless questions from members of each of the three houses since the reception began. They wanted to know how his discussions with the Varanni High Command had gone or how the attempted peace negotiations with the Karacknids had fared. Off to one side of the room James spotted several Admirals and Captains standing together talking. When one looked his way, he froze. Yet the Captain turned back and continued her conversation. None of them looked like they were going to come his way either. Guiltily, he looked around the reception again more carefully. He spotted the first person he was looking for deep in conversation with Senator Nichols. Fairfax, Christine’s Chief of Staff, had already ushered him from one conversation to another to make sure he spoke to the people Christine and Fairfax thought he needed to. Right now though, he was clearly distracted. When his eyes next fell on Christine, he smiled. She was standing between Carma Mashar and Hallock. Ever the politician, it looked like she was telling some fanciful story, her arms were waving about as she overemphasized one point or another. She will be entertaining them for a while yet, James told himself. Turning his back on the reception room, he spied the nearest exit. Quickly he moved towards it. He expected Fairfax or someone else’s voice to call to him and stop him in his tracks. No voices came. Seconds later he was at the door. With a quick turn of its wooden handle, he stepped into one of the adjoining corridors. Several aides froze, startled by his presence. They were either carrying empty wine glasses or freshly filled ones for the guests. “Don’t worry,” James said as he smiled and raised his hands. “I just need a little air. Carry on.”

“Of course Emperor,” the bravest of the aides said as he gave James a quick bow.

James nodded to him and moved past the aides, forgetting about them. He was tempted by the idea of heading out one of the palace’s exits and taking in some fresh air. The view of the Swiss Alps was always breath-taking. Yet there was something even more beautiful he wanted to see. Heading through the main part of the Palace he crossed over into Christine and his personal quarters. When he reached Jonathan’s room, he smiled at the special forces marine standing guard. Then, ever so gently, he opened the wooden door into his son’s bedroom. Stepping inside, he closed the door behind him. Quietly, he moved to the side of Jonathan’s crib. Though his son was asleep and the lights were out, the small nightlight illuminated enough for James to see Jonathan was sleeping blissfully. Leaning on the crib, James lowered his lips and gave Jonathan a quick kiss on the forehead. Then he straightened up and watched Jonathan sleep. He lost track of time as he allowed his thoughts to wander. He had many fears for the future. Fears for what might happen to Earth and its citizens. Fears for the rest of Humanity’s colonies. Fears for his friends and Christine. All of these were tied up with his fears about what he had convinced Varanni High Command to attempt. Yet none of them came anywhere close to the fears he had for Jonathan. More than anything else, he wanted to give his son a future. One that would be safe from the Karacknids and any other threat. Yet as James tried to picture what Jonathan’s childhood would be like; and then what it might be like to grow up as a teenager in the Imperial Palace, his imagination struggled to settle on anything concrete. The shadow Tanaka-lan and his threats cast was simply too dark. It hung over everything. There will be no future for him unless we stop them, James said to himself. Everything was riding on his plan. Somehow, he had to force the Karacknid Imperator to accept peace. He was more sure of that than ever. Tanaka-lan had convinced him there would be no peace otherwise.

“There you are,” a voice whispered in James’ ear. He jumped and spun, though his brain recognized the voice even as he began to move. Christine smiled at him and pulled him into a hug. “Fairfax was looking for you,” she said just as quietly.

“I just needed a few moments alone,” James whispered back. He kissed Christine, before releasing her and turning back to look at Jonathan. Christine kept her arms around him as they stood together facing their sleeping son.

“You really do mean to try and attack the Karacknid homeworld?” Christine asked.

James nodded. “It’s the only choice we’ve got.”

“Even after everything we’ve already been through?” Christine pressed. “New Shanghai has been liberated. Earth is safe. We’ve lost many friends and ships to get to where we are now.”

“It will all count for nothing if we cannot force the Karacknids to make peace,” James answered.

“This is going to be the hardest thing you’ve ever done. The hardest thing any of us has ever attempted,” Christine replied.

James pulled her more tightly to himself. “It will be. I don’t even know if it’s possible yet. Hallock has agreed to return to Kulthar and make the case to the other Superintendents for them to build ships for us. They won’t equip them with weapons, only defenses. But we can finish outfitting them ourselves. Even with that, we may not have the ships we need in time. Sooner or later the Karacknids are going to resume the offensive once again.”

“That is out of our hands,” Christine said as she reached up and kissed James on the cheek. “We can only do our best. I know you will not let us down. We have too much to lose if we fail.”

James nodded and fell into silence. Both he and Christine were content to hold each other as they watched Jonathan sleep. They knew that as soon as they left his room, they’d be thrust back into the demands of being Emperor and Empress. For a few short minutes though, they could be a family.

*

Wreck of IS Misfit, 16th March 2484 AD (nine months previous, twelve hours after the battle of Mar’am).

Commodore Scott awoke with a throbbing headache. Despite the intense pain, she could tell her body was lying at a weird angle. Zero G, a faint voice in the back of her mind told her. The inertial compensators have failed. Panic shot through her. Yet you’re alive. That meant only one thing, Misfit’s engines were down. She was traveling on her momentum alone. Even the slightest acceleration would have squished her body into a pancake. And still could. Or what if an enemy weapon hits us? The voice asked her. The thought of enemy fire caused a jumble of emotions to cascade through her mind. She remembered where she was. In the Karacknid Headquarters system. She remembered the Karacknid battlefleet. She had just sent a COM transmission to Emperor Somerville warning him about the danger. As she had been talking Karacknid scout ships had jumped out of shift space and tore into Misfit. Everything was blank after that. Suddenly the zero G made sense. Misfit had been hit badly. For a second Scott wondered if she was even still alive.

Attempting to open her eyes intensified the pain in her head. A groan escaped her lips. You’re still alive, she told herself. And so is your ship. Which means you have work to do! Gritting her teeth, she made another attempt to open her eyes. This time she fought through the pain to keep them open. At first her vision was blurry. Slowly things came into focus. When they did Scott groaned again. Misfit’s bridge was almost completely dark. Most of the terminals looked to be offline. Even the emergency lightening was out in some sections. Worse, she couldn’t see anyone else who looked to be alert. The bodies all around her were slumped over in their command chairs. She couldn’t tell if they were dead or just unconscious.

Reaching for the buckle of her restraints, Scott groaned again. Her whole body was sore and stiff. As she brought her arm up her eyes were drawn to the old-fashioned watch she always wore on her left wrist. She frowned as she stared at it. It didn’t seem right. Yet as she examined the watch, it didn’t look damaged. Seven hours? she asked herself, almost not believing it. I’ve been unconscious for seven hours? A bunch of new thoughts occurred to her. If Misfit had been damaged seven hours ago, then why hadn’t the Karacknids come and finished her off? And what about Admiral Somerville’s fleet? Had they fled and escaped or were they still fighting? Scott shook her head. She wouldn’t get any answers to her questions unless she helped her crew.

Tentatively, with her restraints removed, she slid from her command chair. She floated towards Misfit’s First Lieutenant. Grabbing onto his body, she arrested her momentum. What she felt almost made her recoil. Peterson was stone cold. Dead, she thought as anguish filled her. Slowly and carefully, she made her way from one officer to the next. Two more were dead before she felt warmth under her fingers. “Lieutenant McKenzie,” Scott said as she carefully shook her navigation officer. “Lieutenant McKenzie,” she repeated. “Wake up.” At first he didn’t respond but then she thought she heard a small groan. She looked him over. There were no visible signs of injury. Shaking him harder, she elicited a louder groan. “Wake up Lieutenant. I need you,” Scott pleaded. When his eyes finally opened she smiled at him despite the death all around her. She wasn’t alone! “Come on,” she said as she saw McKenzie look around the bridge. “We have to check the others, there may still be more alive.” And then we need to check the ship, Scott thought. She knew Misfit had been hit by at least one anti-matter missile. If seven hours had passed then Admiral Somerville’s fleet had either fled or been destroyed. She was behind enemy lines. Somehow she needed to get Misfit somewhere safe and out of sight before the Karacknids came back to look for her. And then we need to get home, Scott determined as she clamped her teeth together. She knew one thing for damn sure, as long as she was alive, she wasn’t abandoning her friends to fight alone.

The End.

The story of the War of Doom and James and Christine will continue in Empire Rising book 13.

If you enjoyed the book please take a few seconds to leave a review with some stars. Every review helps keep the series going (it really does!).

Sign up here to the mailing list for updates on future books

https://www.facebook.com/Author.D.J.Holmes

d.j.holmess@hotmail.com

Comments welcome!